Dokumen - Tips Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manualv21

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge
Enterprise Customer Training Manual
Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department
2013
2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual
CONTENTS
1 Huawei Training&Certification Service ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products and solutions........................ 1
1.3 Learning Path ............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 Training Instructors ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 Training Methods........................................................................................................................................ 1
2 Enterprise IP Training Path ......................................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ...................................................................................... 1
2.2 WLAN Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................... 1
2.3 Huawei Routing and Switching Product Features Training (Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training)
Path 1
2.4 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path .................................................................................. 1
2.5 NE Routers Training Path........................................................................................................................... 1
2.6 AR G3 Routers Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 1
2.7 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ................................................................................................ 1
2.8 AR G3 Voice System Training Path ............................................................................................................ 1
2.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path ......................................................................................... 1
2.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ........................................................................................... 1
2.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path ........................................................................ 1
2.12 WLAN (AC/AP) Training Path..................................................................................................................... 1
2.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path....................................................................................................................... 1
2.14 PTN Product Training Path......................................................................................................................... 1
2.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ................................................................. 1
2.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path................................................................................................... 1
3 Enterprise IP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 1
3.1 Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 1
3.1.1 HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training ............................................................. 1
3.1.2 HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training............ 1
3.1.3 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training ................................... 1
3.1.4 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training ................................. 1
3.1.5 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ................................. 1
3.1.6 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training ................................................ 1
3.1.7 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training (Fast-Track 3 days)................. 1
3.1.8 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ..................................................................... 1
3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs .......................................................................... 1
3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 1
3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training ............................................................................................................ 1
3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training................................................................................................. 1
3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ........................................................................................ 1
3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) ......................................................................................... 1
-1-
3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................................. 1

3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training.................................................................................... 1
3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .................................................................................... 1
3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ....................................................................................... 1
3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training .................................................................................................... 1
3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ............................................................................................. 1
3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ........................................................................ 1
3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 1
3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ....................... 1
3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ......................................................... 1
3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................... 1
3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................. 1
3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 1
3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ................. 1
3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ................................................... 1
3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)..................................... 1
3.5 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs ........................................................................................ 1
3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................... 1
3.6 AR G3 Voice System Training Programs.................................................................................................... 1
3.6.1 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 1
3.6.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ..................................................... 1
3.6.3 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .............................................. 1
3.6.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1
3.6.5 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................... 1
3.7 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs ....................................................................................... 1
3.7.1 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ...................................... 1
3.7.2 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................. 1
3.7.3 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training) 1
3.7.4 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ....................... 1
3.7.5 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ..................................... 1
3.7.6 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 1
3.7.7 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training) 1
3.7.8 Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ............................... 1
3.8 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs ............................................................................... 1
3.8.1 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training ...................... 1
3.8.2 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training.................. 1
3.8.3 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
-2-
Basic O/M Training) .............................................................................................................................................. 1

3.8.4 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ....... 1
3.9 WLAN(AC/AP) Training Programs ............................................................................................................. 1
3.9.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training .................................................................................................... 1
3.9.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................ 1
3.9.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 1
3.9.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ............................... 1
3.9.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 1
3.9.6 AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 1
3.9.7 WLAN Planning and Design Training ................................................................................................. 1
3.10 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 1
3.10.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................................................................. 1
3.10.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 1
3.10.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ................................................................................ 1
3.10.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.10.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training .......................................................................... 1
3.11 PTN Products Training Programs ............................................................................................................... 1
3.11.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................... 1
3.11.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................................................................... 1
3.11.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 1
3.11.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 1
3.11.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training ...................................................................................... 1
3.12 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs ......................................................... 1
3.12.1 eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 1
3.12.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) ....... 1
3.12.3 eSight WLAN Management Training .................................................................................................. 1
3.12.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.12.5 eSight SLA Management Training...................................................................................................... 1
3.12.6 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training .......................................................................................... 1
3.12.7 eSight Smart Report Management Training ....................................................................................... 1
3.12.8 eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training ............................................................ 1
3.12.9 eSight Access Management Training ................................................................................................. 1
3.12.10 eSight Data Center Management Training ......................................................................................... 1
3.13 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs .......................................................................................... 1
3.13.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training .................................................................................... 1
3.13.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training .................................................................................... 1
3.13.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training.............................................................................................. 1
3.13.4 Data Center Network Design Training................................................................................................ 1
4 Enterprise Security Training Path................................................................................................................................ 1
4.1 Security Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................ 1
4.2 Firewall Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 1
4.3 Security Management Software Training Path ........................................................................................... 1
-3-
4.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ...................................................................................... 1

4.5 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path ..................................................................... 1
5 Enterprise Security Training Courses.......................................................................................................................... 1
5.1 Security Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................... 1
5.1.1 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ............................................... 1
5.1.2 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network Training ................................ 1
5.1.3 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training ............................................ 1
5.1.4 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training ............................................ 1
5.2 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs ............................................................................. 1
5.2.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training ...................................................................................... 1
5.2.2 VPN Technology Fundamentals Training ........................................................................................... 1
5.2.3 Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training ........................................................................ 1
5.2.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology Fundamentals Training ............................................ 1
5.3 Security Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................... 1
5.3.1 Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training ...................................................................... 1
5.3.2 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.3.3 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.3.4 Firewall Advanced Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
5.3.5 Firewall IPV6 Technology Training ..................................................................................................... 1
5.3.6 Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training ...................................................................................... 1
5.4 Firewall Training Programs......................................................................................................................... 1
5.4.1 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................... 1
5.4.2 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall
Installation and Commissioning Training) ............................................................................................................. 1
5.4.3 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................................... 1
5.4.4 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include High-end Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training) ...................................................................................................................................... 1
5.4.5 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ........................................ 1
5.4.6 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.4.7 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.4.8 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.4.9 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.5 Security Management Software Training Programs ................................................................................... 1
5.5.1 TSM Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................................................... 1
5.5.2 TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM Installation and Commissioning Training) .. 1
5.5.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................................ 1
5.5.4 TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ............................................................ 1
5.6 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs .............................................................................. 1
5.6.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training ..................................................................................... 1
5.6.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and Commissioning Training) ..... 1
5.7 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs ............................................................. 1
5.7.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training......................................................................... 1
-4-
5.7.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 1

5.7.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................... 1
5.8 Security Planning and Design Training Programs ...................................................................................... 1
5.8.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training ............................................................................................... 1
5.8.2 Terminal security Planning and Design Training ................................................................................ 1
6 Enterprise IT Training Path ......................................................................................................................................... 1
6.1 Storage Certification Training Path ............................................................................................................. 1
6.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Path.............................................................................................. 1
6.3 Unified Storage Training Path .................................................................................................................... 1
6.4 NAS and Data Protection Training Path ..................................................................................................... 1
6.5 Cloud Storage Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 1
6.6 Server Products Training Path ................................................................................................................... 1
6.7 Cloud Computing Training Path ................................................................................................................. 1
6.8 Data Center Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 1
7 Enterprise IT Training Courses ................................................................................................................................... 1
7.1 Storage Certification Training Programs..................................................................................................... 1
7.1.1 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training........................................ 1
7.1.2 HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced Management Training.............................................. 1
7.1.3 HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training ............................................. 1
7.1.4 HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training............................................... 1
7.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs ..................................................................................... 1
7.2.1 HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training ..................................................... 1
7.2.2 HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Training ..................................................... 1
7.3 IT Technology Foundation Training Programs ............................................................................................ 1
7.3.1 Storage Technology Foundation Training ........................................................................................... 1
7.3.2 Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training ................................................................................ 1
7.3.3 Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training ............................................................................ 1
7.4 IT Advanced Technology Training Programs .............................................................................................. 1
7.4.1 Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training ............................................................. 1
7.4.2 Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training ...................................................... 1
7.4.3 Backup Advanced Technology Training ............................................................................................. 1
7.4.4 Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training ..................................................................................... 1
7.5 Unified Storage Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 1
7.5.1 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training ....... 1
7.5.2 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and Management Training
(Fast-Track) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
7.5.3 T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management Training .. 1
7.5.4 HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management Training ........................... 1
7.5.5 SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment and Management Training........................ 1
7.5.6 Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....................... 1
7.5.7 VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and Management Training ............. 1
7.6 NAS and Data Protection Training Programs ............................................................................................. 1
-5-
7.6.1 N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1

7.6.2 N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training ........................................ 1
7.6.3 VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training ................................. 1
7.6.4 HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training................................................. 1
7.7 Cloud Storage Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 1
7.7.1 CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training .................................. 1
7.7.2 CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training(Fast-Track) ............... 1
7.7.3 UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training .............................................................. 1
7.8 Server Products Training Programs ........................................................................................................... 1
7.8.1 RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1
7.8.2 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.8.3 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................................................. 1
7.8.4 E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................................................. 1
7.9 Cloud Computing Training Programs ......................................................................................................... 1
7.9.1 Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training ............................................................................... 1
7.9.2 Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1
7.9.3 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.9.4 FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................ 1
7.10 Data Center Training Programs.................................................................................................................. 1
7.10.1 Micro DC Deployment and Management Training ............................................................................. 1
7.10.2 ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................................................... 1
7.11 IT Design Training Programs ...................................................................................................................... 1
7.11.1 Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training ................................................................... 1
7.11.2 Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training ........................................................... 1
7.11.3 Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training .................................................................. 1
7.11.4 Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training .............................................................................. 1
7.11.5 Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training .............................................................................. 1
7.11.6 Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training .......................................... 1
8 Enterprise UC&C Training Path .................................................................................................................................. 1
8.1 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path ....................................................................... 1
8.2 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path (Fast-Track) ................................................... 1
8.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path ..................................................................... 1
8.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Path ............................................................................................... 1
8.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Path .................................... 1
8.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path ................................................................... 1
8.7 Contact Center Certification Training Path ................................................................................................. 1
8.8 Contact Center Certification Training Fast-Track Path ............................................................................... 1
8.9 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path .................................................. 1
8.10 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Training Path .......... 1
8.11 Video Conference Certification Training Path ............................................................................................. 1
8.12 Video Conference Certification Fast-Track Training Path ........................................................................... 1
8.13 VC Product Training Path (ViewPoint/TelePresence) ................................................................................. 1
-6-
8.14 Huawei eSpace IVS system Training Path ................................................................................................. 1

9 Enterprise UC&C Training Courses ............................................................................................................................ 1
9.1 Certification Training Programs .................................................................................................................. 1
9.1.1 HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration ................................. 1
9.1.2 HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions ........................................................ 1
9.1.3 HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice Solutions and QoS ....................................... 1
9.1.4 HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions (Fast-Track) ............................. 1
9.1.5 HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration ........................................... 1
9.1.6 HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center(Fast-Track) ....................................... 1
9.1.7 HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access Platform ............................. 1
9.1.8 HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution .................................................... 1
9.1.9 HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced Application ......................................................... 1
9.1.10 HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference ................................................... 1
9.1.11 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference ............................................... 1
9.1.12 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference (Fast-Track) .......................... 1
9.2 Fundamental of VoIP Technology Training Programs ................................................................................. 1
9.2.1 Fundamental of VoIP Technology ...................................................................................................... 1
9.2.2 Fundamental of VoIP Technology (Fast-Track) .................................................................................. 1
9.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs ............................................................. 1
9.3.1 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and Commissioning ................................ 1
9.3.2 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ........................... 1
9.3.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .................... 1
9.3.4 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting ........................................................ 1
9.3.5 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) .............................. 1
9.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs ....................................................................................... 1
9.4.1 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 1
9.4.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation ..................................................... 1
9.4.3 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation .............................................. 1
9.4.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1
9.4.5 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................... 1
9.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs ............................ 1
9.5.1 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning ....................................................... 1
9.5.2 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation .................................................. 1
9.5.3 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Advanced Configuration and Operation ........................................... 1
9.5.4 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 1
9.5.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................ 1
9.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs ........................................................... 1
9.6.1 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Installation and Commissioning ....................................................... 1
9.6.2 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Basic Configuration and Operation .................................................. 1
9.6.3 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Advanced Configuration and Operation ........................................... 1
9.6.4 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 1
9.6.5 Huawei U29XX All in One Solution .................................................................................................... 1
-7-
9.6.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) ........................................ 1
9.7 UC Planning and Design Training .............................................................................................................. 1
9.7.1 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design ....................................................................... 1
9.7.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design................................................................................................. 1
9.7.3 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Design.............................................................................................. 1
9.7.4 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design (Small and Medium-sized Enterprise: U29XX All in One
Solution) 1
9.7.5 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design.............................................................................................. 1
9.7.6 Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design (Fast-Track) .................... 1
9.8 CC Advanced Technology Training Programs ............................................................................................ 1
9.8.1 Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy ......................................................................... 1
9.8.2 Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing Development .................................. 1
9.8.3 Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology .............................................................................. 1
9.8.4 Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology ............................................................................ 1
9.9 CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 1
9.9.1 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Management and Monitoring .................. 1
9.9.2 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.9.3 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation ................................................................................................................................. 1
9.9.4 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
1
9.9.5 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Installation and Commissioning.............. 1
9.9.6 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting ...................................... 1
9.9.7 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation ..................................... 1
9.9.8 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution Deployment(Fast-Track)
1
9.10 CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance
Training 1
9.10.1 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Management
and Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.10.2 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation ............................................................................................................ 1
9.10.3 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Outbound Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation ............................................................................................... 1
9.10.4 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation) ................................................................................................................................ 1
9.10.5 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Installation and
Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.10.6 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Trouble
shooting 1
-8-
9.10.7 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation
1
9.10.8 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution
Deployment(Fast-Track) ....................................................................................................................................... 1
9.11 CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs .................................................................................... 1
9.11.1 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Design .................................................... 1
9.11.2 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Center Design ........... 1
9.11.3 VTM Solution Design ......................................................................................................................... 1
9.11.4 Cloud Contact Center Solution Design .............................................................................................. 1
9.12 VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs ................................................................................... 1
9.12.1 9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance ...................................................................... 1
9.12.2 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation and Maintenance ... 1
9.12.3 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation and Maintenance ... 1
9.12.4 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation and
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.12.5 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................... 1
9.12.6 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.13 VC Planning and Design Training Programs .............................................................................................. 1
9.13.1 ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design............................................................... 1
9.14 Huawei eSpace IVS system ....................................................................................................................... 1
9.14.1 Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning Training................................................ 1
9.14.2 Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and maintenance training ................................ 1
9.14.3 Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training ................................ 1
10 Network Energy Training Path .................................................................................................................................... 1
10.1 Power Supply Training Path ....................................................................................................................... 1
10.2 Data Center Facility Training Path .............................................................................................................. 1
10.3 UPS Training Path ...................................................................................................................................... 1
11 Network Energy Training Courses .............................................................................................................................. 1
11.1 Power Supply Training Programs ............................................................................................................... 1
11.1.1 Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 1
11.1.2 Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 1
11.1.3 PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 1
11.1.4 PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training ........................................................... 1
11.2 Data Center Facility Training Programs...................................................................................................... 1
11.2.1 IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 1
11.2.2 IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 1
11.2.3 IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................. 1
11.2.4 IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 1
11.2.5 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)...................................... 1
11.2.6 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 1
11.2.7 NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training.................................................. 1
-9-
11.3 UPS Training Programs.............................................................................................................................. 1

11.3.1 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training......................................................................................... 1
11.3.2 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) ..................................................................... 1
12 GSM Training Path...................................................................................................................................................... 1
12.1 GSM RNP&RNO Training Path .................................................................................................................. 1
12.2 GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Path ..................................................................................................... 1
12.3 GSM BSS Product Training Path ............................................................................................................... 1
12.4 GSMR BSS Product Training Path ............................................................................................................. 1
13 GSM Training Courses................................................................................................................................................ 1
13.1 GSM RNP&RNO Training .......................................................................................................................... 1
13.1.1 GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training........................................................................... 1
13.1.2 BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ....................................................................... 1
13.1.3 BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training ....................................................................... 1
13.1.4 GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training .............................................................. 1
13.1.5 GSM Indoor Coverage Training ......................................................................................................... 1
13.1.6 GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training ............................................................................................... 1
13.1.7 GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training................................................................. 1
13.1.8 GSM Radio Network Analysis Training .............................................................................................. 1
13.2 GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training ............................................................................................................. 1
13.2.1 BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................... 1
13.2.2 BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................... 1
13.2.3 GPRS EDGE Signaling Training ........................................................................................................ 1
13.2.4 Evolved EDGE Training ..................................................................................................................... 1
13.2.5 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training ................................................................................. 1
13.3 GSM BSS Product Training ........................................................................................................................ 1
13.3.1 GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.2 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.3 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training ......................................................................................... 1
13.3.4 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training ..................................................................................... 1
13.3.5 GSM BSS9.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.6 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 1
13.3.7 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Configuration Training ......................................................................................... 1
13.3.8 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training ..................................................................................... 1
13.3.9 GSM BSS12.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
13.3.10 GSM BSS12.0 BSS Configuration Training ....................................................................................... 1
13.3.11 GSM BSS12.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................... 1
13.3.12 GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training ............................................................................................... 1
13.3.13 GSM BSS8.1 - BSS12.0 Delta Training ............................................................................................. 1
13.3.14 PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 1
13.3.15 GSM BSS12.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
13.3.17 GSM BSS13.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 1
- 10 -

13.3.20 GSM BSS12.0 - BSS13.0 Delta Training ........................................................................................... 1
13.3.21 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ...................................................................................... 1
13.3.22 GSM BSS12.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training .................................................................................... 1
13.3.25 GSM BSS14.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training................................................................. 1
13.3.29 GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training .............................................................................. 1
13.3.30 GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training ............................................................................. 1
13.3.31 GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training ....................................................................................................... 1
13.3.32 GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training ............................................................... 1
13.3.33 GSM IPRAN Application Training ....................................................................................................... 1
13.3.34 GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training ................................................................................................ 1
13.4 GSMR BSS Product Training ..................................................................................................................... 1
13.4.1 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15) ................................... 1
13.4.2 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15) ................................... 1
13.4.3 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) ........................................................... 1
13.4.4 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) ....................................................... 1
13.4.5 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008) .......................................... 1
13.4.6 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008) .......................................... 1
13.4.7 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008) ................................................................ 1
13.4.8 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008) ............................................................ 1
14 WCDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................................ 1
14.1 Principle Training Path ............................................................................................................................... 1
14.2 RNP&RNO Training Path ........................................................................................................................... 1
14.3 Product Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 1
15 WCDMA Training Courses .......................................................................................................................................... 1
15.1 Principle Training ........................................................................................................................................ 1
15.1.1 WCDMA RAN System Overview ........................................................................................................ 1
15.1.2 WCDMA RAN Overview Training ....................................................................................................... 1
15.1.3 WCDMA RAN Principle Training ........................................................................................................ 1
15.1.4 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training .................................................................................................. 1
15.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training ................................................................................................. 1
15.2 RNP&RNO Training ................................................................................................................................... 1
15.2.1 WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training ..................................................................... 1
15.2.2 WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training .................................................................... 1
15.2.3 UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training ........................................................................................... 1
15.2.4 WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training .................................................................................................... 1
- 11 -
15.2.5 WCDMA RF Optimization Training ..................................................................................................... 1

15.2.6 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training ................................................... 1
15.2.10 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training ..................................................... 1
15.2.14 WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Training ............................................... 1
15.2.15 WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN12 Radio Network Optimization Training............................................... 1
15.2.18 WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training ............................................................................ 1
15.2.21 WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training .............................................................................. 1
15.2.22 WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training .................................................... 1
15.3 Product Training ......................................................................................................................................... 1
15.3.1 WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training ....................................................................................................... 1
15.3.2 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training .......................................................................................... 1
15.3.3 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training .................................................................................... 1
15.3.4 WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.5 WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training .................................................................................................... 1
15.3.6 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training ....................................................................................... 1
15.3.7 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training ................................................................................. 1
15.3.8 WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................... 1
15.3.9 WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training.............................................................................. 1
15.3.11 WCDMA RAN12 RNC Operation Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.13 WCDMA RAN12 Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................ 1
15.3.14 WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.15 WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training .......................................................................... 1
15.3.16 WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training ................................................................................... 1
15.3.18 WCDMA RAN13 RNC Operation Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.20 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.21 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training ................................................................................ 1
15.3.22 WCDMA RAN12.0-RAN13.0 Product Delta Training.......................................................................... 1
15.3.23 WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training ................................................................................... 1
- 12 -
15.3.24 WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training .................................................................................................... 1

15.3.25 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training ...................................................................................... 1
15.3.26 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training ................................................................................. 1
15.3.27 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training ............................................................................. 1
15.3.28 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training ............................................................................. 1
15.3.29 WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Product Delta Training.......................................................................... 1
15.3.30 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training ......................................................................................... 1
15.3.31 WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training ....................................................................... 1
15.3.32 WCDMA IPRAN Application Training ................................................................................................. 1
16 CDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................................... 1
16.1 CDMA Training Path ................................................................................................................................... 1
17 CDMA Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................. 1
17.1 CDMA Training ........................................................................................................................................... 1
17.1.1 CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training ..................................................................... 1
17.1.2 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................... 1
17.1.3 CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training ....................................................................................... 1
17.1.6 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training ................................................................................ 1
17.1.7 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training ............................................................. 1
17.1.8 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training .......................................................................... 1
17.1.9 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training ........................................ 1
17.1.10 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training ..................................................... 1
17.1.11 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training ............................................................... 1
17.1.12 CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning.................................................................................... 1
18 LTE Training Path ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
19 LTE Training Courses ................................................................................................................................................. 1
19.1 Principle Training ........................................................................................................................................ 1
19.1.1 LTE System Overview Training .......................................................................................................... 1
19.1.2 LTE Air Interface Training ................................................................................................................... 1
19.1.3 LTE Protocols and Procedures Training............................................................................................. 1
19.1.4 TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training .................................................................................................. 1
19.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training ................................................................................................. 1
19.1.6 LTE Interoperability Training .............................................................................................................. 1
19.1.7 LTE Essentials Training ..................................................................................................................... 1
19.2 Product Training ......................................................................................................................................... 1
19.2.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training ......................................................................................... 1
19.2.2 LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training ........................................................................................ 1
19.2.4 LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training ........................................................................................ 1
19.2.6 LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training ......................................................................... 1
- 13 -
19.2.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training ............................................................................................. 1

19.2.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training ............................................................................................. 1
19.2.9 LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training ......................................................... 1
19.3 RNP&RNO Training ................................................................................................................................... 1
19.3.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training................................................................................ 1
19.3.2 LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training................................................................................ 1
19.3.3 LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training .............................................................................................................. 1
19.3.4 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training ...................................................................... 1
19.3.5 LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training ....................................................................... 1
19.3.6 LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training .......................................................... 1
19.3.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms Training ......................................... 1
19.3.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training ...................................................................... 1
19.3.9 LTE Tuning Training ........................................................................................................................... 1
19.3.10 LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training ............................................................................... 1
19.3.11 LTE Performance Management Training ........................................................................................... 1
19.3.12 LTE Radio Network Optimize Training ............................................................................................... 1
20 SingleRAN Training Path ............................................................................................................................................ 2
20.1 SingleRAN Training Path............................................................................................................................ 2
21 SingleRAN Training Courses ...................................................................................................................................... 2
21.1 SingleRAN Training .................................................................................................................................... 2
21.1.1 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 2
21.1.2 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 2
21.1.3 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training .................................................................. 2
21.1.4 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.9 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.13 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ............................................................... 2
21.1.15 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training .............................................................. 2
21.1.19 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training ............................................................... 2
21.1.21 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 – SingleRAN7.0 Delta Training ............................................................. 2
21.1.22 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training .................................................................................. 2
- 14 -
21.1.23 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance TrainingTraining Path ................................... 2

22 Wireless OSS Training Path ....................................................................................................................................... 2
23 Wireless OSS Training Courses ................................................................................................................................. 3
23.1 M2000 Training .......................................................................................................................................... 3
23.1.1 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training（Sun）................................................ 3
23.1.2 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster) ..................................... 3
23.1.3 iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
23.1.4 iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training .......................................................................... 3
23.1.5 iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration Training（Sun） ................................................ 3
23.1.6 iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster) ...................................... 3
23.1.7 iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
23.1.8 iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training .......................................................................... 3
23.2 PRS Training .............................................................................................................................................. 3
23.2.1 iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application ..................................................................................... 3
23.3 Nastar Training ........................................................................................................................................... 3
23.3.1 iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System Application................................... 3
23.3.2 iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis System Application ............................. 3
23.3.3 iManager Nastar V600R009 GSM Performance Analysis System Application ................................... 3
23.3.5 iManager Nastar V600R010 GSM Performance Analysis System Application ................................... 3
23.4 PRS/Nastar Administrator Training ............................................................................................................. 3
23.4.1 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP) ............................................................... 3
23.4.2 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE) ........................................................... 3
23.5 Probe Training ............................................................................................................................................ 3
23.5.1 GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation ........................................................................................ 3
23.5.2 GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation .................................................................................. 3
23.5.3 GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation .......................................................................................... 3
23.5.4 GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation ........................................................................................ 3
23.5.5 GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation .................................................................................. 3
23.5.6 GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation .......................................................................................... 3
24 Access Network Training Path .................................................................................................................................... 3
24.2 FTTx PON Products Training Path ............................................................................................................. 3
24.3 DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path ..................................................................................................... 3
24.4 DSLAM MA5100 Training Path .................................................................................................................. 3
24.7 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path ............................................................................................. 3
24.8 MSAN UA5000 Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3
- 15 -
24.9 HONET Series Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3

24.10 BITS Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 3
24.11 OSS U2000 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
24.12 OSS N2000 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
24.13 OSS N2510 Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
25 Access Network Training Courses .............................................................................................................................. 3
25.1 Principle Training Programs Description .................................................................................................... 3
25.1.1 Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental Training ......................................................... 3
25.1.2 Access Network Related Transmission Technology Fundamental Training ....................................... 3
25.1.3 VDSL2 Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................ 3
25.1.4 GPON Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................. 3
25.2 Evolution and Trends Training Programs Description ................................................................................ 3
25.2.1 FTTx Network Overview Training ....................................................................................................... 3
25.2.2 ODN Overview Training ..................................................................................................................... 3
25.2.3 NGPON Overview Training ................................................................................................................ 3
25.2.4 xDSL Access Network Overview Training .......................................................................................... 3
25.2.5 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training ..................................................................................................... 3
25.3 Planning Training Programs Description .................................................................................................... 3
25.3.1 GPON Planning Training.................................................................................................................... 3
25.3.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training ....................................................................... 3
25.3.3 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning Training .............................................................. 3
25.3.4 MSAN UA5000 Planning Training ...................................................................................................... 3
25.4 FTTx PON Products Training Programs Description .................................................................................. 3
25.4.1 GPON Hardware Installation Training ................................................................................................ 3
25.4.2 GPON Commissioning Training ......................................................................................................... 3
25.4.3 GPON Field Maintenance Training .................................................................................................... 3
25.4.4 GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 3
25.4.5 GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
25.4.6 GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
25.4.7 GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3
25.4.8 iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 3
25.4.9 iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 3
25.4.10 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................................... 3
25.5 DSLAM Products Training Programs Description ....................................................................................... 3
25.5.1 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation Training ................................................... 3
25.5.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training ............................................................ 3
25.5.3 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
25.5.4 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................... 3
25.5.5 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ........................ 3
25.5.6 iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training ............................. 3
25.5.7 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training ............................................................... 3
- 16 -

25.5.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................... 3
25.5.13 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 3
25.6 MSAN Products Training Programs Description ......................................................................................... 3
25.6.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 3
25.6.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training .................................................... 3
25.6.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 3
25.6.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training .................................................................................. 3
25.6.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training ........................................................................................... 3
25.6.6 MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training ....................................................................................... 3
25.6.7 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 3
25.6.8 MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 3
25.6.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................... 3
25.6.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
25.7 BITS Training Programs Description .......................................................................................................... 3
25.7.1 SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 3
25.7.2 SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 3
25.7.3 SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 3
25.8 OSS Training Programs Description .......................................................................................................... 3
25.8.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network) .................................................................... 3
25.8.2 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .................................................................................. 3
25.8.3 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
25.8.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) ........................................................................... 3
25.8.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM).......................................................................... 3
25.8.6 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN) ........................................................................... 3
25.8.7 iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training ........................................................................... 3
25.8.8 iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training .......................................................................... 3
25.8.9 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training .......................................................................................... 3
25.8.10 iManager N2510 Administration Training ........................................................................................... 3
26 Transmission Network Training Path .......................................................................................................................... 3
26.1 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path ..................................................................................... 3
26.3 Evolution and Trends Training Path ........................................................................................................... 3
26.4 MSTP Training Path(TDM) ......................................................................................................................... 3
26.5 MSTP Training Path(Packet) ...................................................................................................................... 3
26.6 MSTP Training Path(Packet+TDM) ............................................................................................................ 3
26.7 MSTP Training Path(OSN 500/550) ........................................................................................................... 3
26.8 MSTP Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000) ............................................................................... 3
26.9 WDM Training Path(OSN380068008800) .................................................................................................. 3
26.10 WDM Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet)) ................................................................................... 3
- 17 -
26.11 WDM Training Path(OSN3800A6800A) ..................................................................................................... 3

26.12 WDM Training Path(BWS 1600G) .............................................................................................................. 3
26.13 RTN Training Path(RTN 900) ..................................................................................................................... 3
26.14 RTN Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002) ............................................................................... 3
26.15 RTN Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600)..................................................................................................... 3
26.16 Transmission Network OSS Training Path ................................................................................................. 3
26.17 Planning and Design Training Path ............................................................................................................ 3
26.18 Assessment and Optimization Training Path .............................................................................................. 3
27 Transmission Network Training Courses..................................................................................................................... 3
27.1 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs ............................................................................. 3
27.1.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device Training...................... 3
27.1.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission Network Training ....... 3
27.1.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission Network Training .......... 3
27.2 Principle Training Programs ....................................................................................................................... 3
27.2.1 SDH Fundamental Training ................................................................................................................ 3
27.2.2 WDM Fundamental Training .............................................................................................................. 3
27.2.3 Ethernet Fundamental Training .......................................................................................................... 3
27.2.4 ASON Fundamental Training ............................................................................................................. 3
27.2.5 Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training .................................................................................................. 3
27.3 Evolution and Trends Training Programs ................................................................................................... 3
27.3.1 IP-oriented Transport Solution Training.............................................................................................. 3
27.4 MSTP Training Programs ........................................................................................................................... 3
27.4.1 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product Overview Training....................................... 3
27.4.2 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation Training .................................................. 3
27.4.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training................................................... 3
27.4.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ..................... 3
27.4.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training .................................................. 3
27.4.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 3
27.4.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 3
27.4.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training ........................................................... 3
27.4.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 3
27.4.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training ........................................................... 3
27.4.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 3
27.4.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training .................................................. 3
27.4.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 3
27.4.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training ................................................. 3
27.4.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 3
27.4.16 OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
27.4.17 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 3
27.4.18 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 3
27.4.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 3
27.4.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 3
- 18 -
27.4.21 OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3

27.4.22 OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................... 3
27.4.23 OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.4.24 OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................... 3
27.4.25 OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 3
27.5 WDM Training Programs ............................................................................................................................ 3
27.5.1 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training ......................................................... 3
27.5.2 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training ...................................................................................... 3
27.5.3 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training ............................................................. 3
27.5.4 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 3
27.5.5 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training ............................................................. 3
27.5.6 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 3
27.5.7 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 3
27.5.8 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 3
27.5.9 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................... 3
27.5.10 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training ............................................................... 3
27.5.11 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3
27.5.12 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training ............................................................................ 3
27.5.13 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 3
27.5.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 3
27.5.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training............... 3
27.5.16 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance Training .......... 3
27.5.17 OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training ...................................................................................... 3
27.5.18 OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
27.5.19 OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training ..................................................................................... 3
27.5.20 OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 3
27.5.21 OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
27.6 RTN Training Programs .............................................................................................................................. 3
27.6.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid) ..................................................... 3
27.6.2 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Packet) .................................................... 3
27.6.3 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid+Packet) ........................................ 3
27.6.4 OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 3
27.6.5 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid) .......................................................... 3
27.6.6 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet).......................................................... 3
27.6.7 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet) ............................................. 3
27.6.8 OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 3
27.6.9 OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................................. 3
27.6.11 OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 3
27.6.12 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................................. 3
27.6.13 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
27.6.14 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 3
- 19 -
27.6.15 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 3
27.6.16 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 3
27.6.17 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M Training) 3
27.6.18 OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training ...................................................................... 3
27.6.20 OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M Training) .................. 3
27.7 Transmission Network OSS Training Programs ......................................................................................... 3
27.7.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only) ................................................... 3
27.7.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.7.3 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training...................................................................... 3
27.7.4 OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.7.5 OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training .................................................................................. 3
27.7.6 OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training ............................................................................... 3
27.7.7 OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.8 Planning and Design Training Programs .................................................................................................... 3
27.8.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.8.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training ............................................................................................... 3
27.8.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training .................................................................................... 3
27.8.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training ............................................. 3
27.8.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training ...................................................................... 3
27.8.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training ................................................................................................ 3
27.8.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.8.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training ........................................... 3
27.8.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training ..................................................................................... 3
27.8.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)........................................................................... 3
27.8.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid) ........................................................................... 3
27.8.12 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid) .............................................................. 3
27.8.13 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training ....................................................................... 3
27.8.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training .................................................................... 3
27.8.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training ...................................................... 3
27.9 Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................................................................................... 3
27.9.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training ......................................................................................... 3
27.9.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training ......................................................................................... 3
27.9.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training ............................................................ 3
27.9.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training ........................................................................................ 3
27.9.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training ....................................................................................... 3
27.9.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training .......................................................................................... 3
27.9.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training ................................................................................... 3
28 PS Training Path ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
28.1 PS Training Path ........................................................................................................................................ 3
28.2 MBB Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 3
29 PS Training Courses ................................................................................................................................................... 3
- 20 -
29.1 PS Training Courses .................................................................................................................................. 3

29.1.1 GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training ............................................................................................ 3
29.1.2 PS Interface Signaling Analysis ......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.3 SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA) .................................................... 3
29.1.4 SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA)................................................................................ 3
29.1.5 SGSN APN and international roaming Training ................................................................................. 3
29.1.6 The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training ............................................................................. 3
29.1.7 GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training（V9） ..................................................... 3
29.1.8 GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training （V9） ............................................................................... 3
29.1.9 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training（Windows） ............................................................. 3
29.1.10 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training（UNIX） ................................................................... 3
29.1.11 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA) ...................................................................... 3
29.1.12 GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training .................................................................................................. 3
29.1.13 SGSN Gb Reconstruction（From TDM to IP）Training ..................................................................... 3
29.1.14 PS QOS Training ............................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.15 GGSN Service Awareness Training ................................................................................................... 3
29.1.16 IP Convergence for Packet Core Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.17 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training ...................................................................................... 3
29.1.18 PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training ........................................................ 3
29.1.19 PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training ....................................................................................... 3
29.1.20 PS Emergency Recovery Training ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.21 PS Performance Monitoring Training ................................................................................................. 3
29.1.22 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management ............................................................................................. 3
29.1.23 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training ..................................................................................... 3
29.1.24 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training .................................................................. 3
29.1.25 EPC Principle Fundamental Training ................................................................................................. 3
29.1.26 From GPRS to EPC Delta Training .................................................................................................... 3
29.1.27 EPC Protocol and Procedure Training ............................................................................................... 3
29.1.28 EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training ........................................................................................... 3
29.1.29 EPC Equipment Commissioning Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.30 USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................. 3
29.1.31 USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G) ........................................................................... 3
29.1.32 USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) .................................................... 3
29.1.33 USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) ................................................................... 3
29.1.34 USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training ................................................................................. 3
29.1.35 UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G) ...................................................... 3
29.1.36 UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G) ........................................................................ 3
29.1.37 UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G) ................................................. 3
29.1.38 UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) .......................................................................... 3
29.1.39 MME POOL Training .......................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.40 EPC VOLTE Solution Training ........................................................................................................... 3
29.1.41 eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training ............................................................................. 3
- 21 -
29.1.42 EPC Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................................... 3

29.1.43 SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.44 EPC Network Planning and Design Training ...................................................................................... 3
29.1.45 UPCC ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (UPCC HSS) ........................................ 3
29.1.46 UPCC Data Configuration Training .................................................................................................... 3
29.1.47 UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training ................................................................ 3
29.1.48 UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training ...................................................................... 3
29.1.49 UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training ............................................... 3
29.1.50 EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.51 iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 3
29.1.52 DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.53 uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.54 WASN Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 3
29.1.55 MAG9811 Engineer Training .............................................................................................................. 3
29.1.56 CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 3
29.1.57 CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................... 3
29.1.58 CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 3
29.1.59 CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training ........................................................... 3
29.1.60 PS Netview Training........................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.61 PS Nastar Training ............................................................................................................................. 3
29.1.62 PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 3
29.1.63 PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR) .......................................................................................... 3
29.1.64 GPRS Fundamental (WBT) ............................................................................................................... 3
29.1.65 GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT) ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.66 GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT) ............................................................................................................ 3
29.1.67 EPC Principle (WBT) ......................................................................................................................... 3
29.1.68 EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT) .......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.69 EPC Health Check (WBT).................................................................................................................. 3
29.1.70 EPC Data Management (WBT) .......................................................................................................... 3
29.1.71 EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT) ..................................................................................................... 3
29.1.72 EPC Product Survey (WBT) ............................................................................................................... 3
29.1.73 IPv6 Feature Training......................................................................................................................... 3
29.2 MBB Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 3
29.2.1 Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet .............................................................................. 3
29.2.2 Smart MBB Network Solution ............................................................................................................ 3
29.2.3 QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and Services .............................................................. 3
29.2.4 MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart Terminal ................................................................................ 3
29.2.5 MBB QoE Improvement Solution ....................................................................................................... 3
30 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3
31 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Courses ............................................................................................................... 7
31.1 CSOFTX3000 Training ............................................................................................................................... 7
31.1.1 CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 7
- 22 -
31.1.2 CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 7

31.1.3 CSOFTX3000 Delta Training ............................................................................................................. 7
31.1.4 CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
31.1.5 CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 7
31.1.6 CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training............................................................................................. 7
31.1.7 CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training .............................................................................. 7
31.2 UMG8900 Training ..................................................................................................................................... 7
31.2.1 CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................... 7
31.2.2 CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................... 7
31.3 CDMA MSC61 Training .............................................................................................................................. 7
31.3.1 CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 7
32 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 7
32.1 WCDMA-CS Training Path ......................................................................................................................... 7
32.2 GSM-R Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 7
32.3 UGC Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 7
32.4 SmartCare Training Path ............................................................................................................................ 7
33 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses ............................................................................................................... 7
33.1 WCDMA-CS Training Courses ................................................................................................................... 7
33.1.1 Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training ........................................................................................... 7
33.1.2 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training ............................................................................. 7
33.1.3 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training ........................................................................... 7
33.1.4 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
33.1.5 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training ............................................................................ 7
33.1.6 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training ........................................................................... 7
33.1.7 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training............................................................. 7
33.1.8 MSS Service Provision Training ......................................................................................................... 7
33.1.9 GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training ......................................................................................... 7
33.1.10 GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................... 7
33.1.11 UMG8900 Data Configuration Training ........................................................................................... 7
33.1.12 GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training...................................................................................... 7
33.1.13 MSS Signaling Analysis Training........................................................................................................ 7
33.1.14 Number Translation Training .............................................................................................................. 7
33.1.15 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training ..................................................................... 7
33.1.16 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and Optimization Training .................................... 7
33.1.17 MSC POOL Training .......................................................................................................................... 7
33.1.18 MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training ..................................................................................... 7
33.1.19 MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI) ......................................................................................... 7
33.1.20 2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training .............................................................................................. 7
33.1.21 MSS IP Technology Training .............................................................................................................. 7
33.1.22 SmartCare Netview CoreTraining ...................................................................................................... 7
33.1.23 MSS Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................................... 7
33.1.24 AoIP Training ..................................................................................................................................... 7
- 23 -
33.1.25 MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Practice ................................................ 7

33.1.26 MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT) ........................................................................................................... 7
33.1.27 GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT) ............................................................... 7
33.1.28 MSC POOL Principle(WBT) ............................................................................................................... 7
33.1.29 UMG8900 System Overview(WBT) ................................................................................................... 7
33.1.30 MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT) ........................................................................... 7
33.1.31 GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT) .................................................................................. 7
33.2 GSM-R Training Courses ........................................................................................................................... 7
33.2.1 GTSOFTX3000 Product Training ....................................................................................................... 7
33.2.2 GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training................................................................................................... 7
33.2.3 GSM-R Feature Training .................................................................................................................... 7
33.3 UGC Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 7
33.3.1 UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 7
33.4 SmartCare Training Courses ...................................................................................................................... 7
33.4.1 SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and Maintenance Training ........................... 7
34 NGN&STP Training Path ............................................................................................................................................ 7
34.1 NGN Training Path ..................................................................................................................................... 7
34.2 STP Training Path ...................................................................................................................................... 7
35 NGN&STP Training Courses....................................................................................................................................... 7
35.1 NGN Training Courses ............................................................................................................................... 7
35.1.1 NGN System Overview Training ........................................................................................................ 7
35.1.2 SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................... 7
35.1.3 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 7
35.1.4 iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
35.1.5 MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................ 7
35.1.6 SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training........................................................................ 7
35.1.7 SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................................. 7
35.1.8 SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................................... 7
35.1.9 UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................................ 7
35.1.10 IAD Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................................................................... 7
35.1.11 U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................................... 7
35.1.12 SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.13 UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.14 iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 7
35.1.15 MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 7
35.1.16 SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 7
35.1.17 SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 7
35.1.18 SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................................... 7
35.1.19 UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 7
35.2 STP Training Courses ................................................................................................................................ 7
35.2.1 STP Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................................................... 7
35.2.2 DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 7
- 24 -
35.2.3 iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT) ............................................................................................ 7

36 C&C08 Training Path .................................................................................................................................................. 7
36.1 C&C08 Training Path ................................................................................................................................. 7
37 C&C08 Training Courses ............................................................................................................................................ 7
37.1 C&C08 Training Courses............................................................................................................................ 7
37.1.1 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 7
37.1.2 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ................... 7
37.1.3 C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................................ 7
38 Core Network OSS Training Path ............................................................................................................................... 7
38.1 iManager M2000 Training Path .................................................................................................................. 7
39 Core Network OSS Training Courses ......................................................................................................................... 7
39.1 iManager M2000 Training Courses ............................................................................................................ 7
39.1.1 iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training......................................................................... 7
39.1.2 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN) ................................................................................. 7
39.1.3 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP) .................................................................................... 7
39.1.4 iManager M2000 Service Feature Training ........................................................................................ 7
39.1.5 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer) ............................ 7
39.1.6 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer) ............................... 7
39.1.7 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN HA) ............................................ 7
39.1.8 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP HA) .............................................. 7
39.1.9 iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................. 7
39.1.10 iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only ..................................................................... 7
39.1.11 iManager M2000 Delta Training ......................................................................................................... 7
39.1.12 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)Training Path ............... 7
- 25 -
1 Huawei Training&Certification Service
1.1 ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution
With the constant development of the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, IP, IT, and CT
applications gradually converge. New technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT) and mobile broadband will bring
an infinite number of opportunities to the ICT industry. The growing convergence of ICT technologies will trigger
tremendous industry transformations, challenging the knowledge system and skills of those working in the industry,
"Knowledge convergence, cross-field skills, and standards evolution" have become new criteria for assessing
qualified ICT talents.
Huawei launches its training solution covering all ICT technical fields. Huawei developed this training solution by
leveraging its years of experience in developing ICT talent and its deep insight into industry trends. This solution fully
encompasses Huawei's Cloud-Pipe-Device convergence technology and covers IP, IT, CT, and ICT convergence
technologies. It is the only training program of its kind in the industry that covers all ICT technical fields. Additionally,
this training solution is a sophisticated training program that covers new technologies, new ideas, and new industry
trends, leading the way in ICT technical certification to help enterprises enhance the all-round development.
1.2 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei

products and solutions
Training services as an important part of Huawei solutions, relying on the platform of Huawei overall, focus on
human capacity development needs, to help customer improve their employees' professional skills, team capacity
and organizational performance, to be the most reliable partner for customer.
Huawei relying on a deep understanding of the ICT industry, based on the service lifecycle PDIOI (Plan, Design,
Implement, Operate and Improve) model, through a series of modular product training, technical topics, solution
training to meet government, power, financial, energy, transportation, health care, education and enterprise ICT
employee cultivation requirement, and help customers successfully deploy, operation and optimization of Huawei's
products and solutions.
Huawei training services provide customers with professional, practical, effectiveness learning and development
solutions; learning brings capacity development, the capacity development bring enterprise growth
1
 Through a full range of product training to help customer quickly understand the product characteristics,
become competent in using;
 Through the matching technical topic and product character, grasp the products and solutions deployment, and
operation and maintenance capability;
 Through simulating real solutions scenarios training, fast, accurate, practical way to enhance customer.
The figure below shows that based on the service lifecycle PDIOI model, Huawei provide matching product and
knowledge training solution, including installation and commissioning, operation and maintenance, advanced
technical topic and planning and design training. Each stage in the full life cycle of PDIOI,Huawei has different kinds
of innovative patented tools and standard processes during each stage of full lifecycle, which can ensure we deliver
the service to you with high quality and efficiency and save your cost.
1.3 Learning Path
For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;

After you master general technology, you can select the corresponding product operation and maintenance training
base on specific product;
After you master the basic technical and familiar with the product characteristics, you can choose the advanced
technical training and planning&design training for further enhance.
2
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
XXX Design Training XXX Product Installation and XXX Advanced Technology
Commissioning Training Training
Xd Xd Xd
XXX Product Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training XXX Product Features
Xd Training
Xd
XXX Product Operation and

Maintenance Training (Including
the Basic O/M Training)
Xd
Fast-Track
XXX Product Operation and
Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Xd
Technology Technical Fundamental

Fundamentals Training
Training Xd
1.4 Training Instructors
Huawei instructor: More than 500 full time instructors, 70% of them are 10 years working experience on developing,
project management and excellent teaching skills.
Huawei Authorized Learning Partner (HALP) instructor: HALP refers to a professional training organization that is
authorized by Huawei to implement Huawei's product Training Courses under Huawei's supervision and
management after passing its assessment. The HCSI refers to an instructor who is certificated by Huawei and
employed by an HALP, Authorized Learning Partner information Query click
http://enterprise.huawei.com/en/training/join/search_training_agency/index.htm
1.5 Training Methods
For the convenience of customer, Huawei and HALP may offer on-site training, localize training, centralize training
and E-Learning;
 On-site training: on-site face-to-face training focused on hardware installation, routine maintenance, practical
and targeted content.
 Localize training: Localized face-to-face training in the partner lab, training courses should be partner demand
design, has a strong relevance and timeliness.
 Centralized training: Face-to-face training in authorized training partner or in Huawei training center can be
more comprehensive, in-depth grasp of Huawei's products and technical knowledge and skills.
 E-Learning Training: can get a quick, convenient learning service by the electronic platform
3
4
2 Enterprise IP Training Path
2.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path
HCIE-RS Huawei Certified Internetwork

Expert - Routing and Switching
Expert
15d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP

Implementing Enterprise Implementing Enterprise Improving Enterprise
Professional Routing Network Switching Network Network Performance
6d 4d 5d
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Associate Huawei Networking
Technology and Device
8d
Elective Guide
 Follow the paths to learn.
5
2.2 WLAN Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to
Associate Medium-sized Business WLAN
5d
Elective Guide
 HCNA(HCDA) or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.
 The Fast-Track training and certification is design for the audiences who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the
industry.
6
2.3 Huawei Routing and Switching Product Features Training (Routing and
Switching Field Engineer Training) Path
HCNA (HCDA)
Huawei Certified Network Associate
8d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)
Huawei Certified Network Professional
- Routing and Switching
15d
Huawei Routing and

Switching Field Engineer Huawei Certified Routing and
Training Switching Field Engineer
5d
Advanced Technology
Training Routing and Switching Expert
25d
HCIE-RS
Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert
- Routing and Switching
15d
Elective Guide
 HCNA(HCDA) is required and HCNP-RS(HCDP) is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer
Training.
 The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
7
2.4 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Network Technology
Fundamental Training
1d
Huawei VRP System

Training
1d
IP Technology Fundamentals
Training (Fast-Track)
5d
Enterprise LAN Enterprise WAN
Technology Training Technology Training
5d 2d
Enterprise Network Engineer
Enterprise IP Routing
Technology Training Training Path
5d Target Audience
Advanced Technology Training
Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN Enterprise MPLS VPN

Technologies Training Technologies Training Technologies Training
5d 5d 5d
Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN

Technical Expert Enterprise MPLS TE
Technical Expert
Technologies Training
Enterprise QoS Enterprise HA
3d
Technologies Training Technologies Training
1d 1d
Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert
Enterprise QoS Enterprise HA
Technical Expert Technical Expert
Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert
Elective Guide
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training programs.
8
2.5 NE Routers Training Path
Enterprise Network Design NE Routers Installation and Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Commissioning Training Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network NE Routers Basic Operation

Design Training and Maintenance Training
1d 2d
Data Center Network Design NE Routers Operation and

Training Maintenance Training (Including
2d 10d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Fast-Track

Training
NE Routers Operation and
1d Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track)
5d
Fast-Track
Technology IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
Fundamentals (Fast-Track)
Training 14d 5d
Elective Guide
 The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
 The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
9
2.6 AR G3 Routers Training Path
Enterprise Network Design AR G3 Routers Installation and Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Commissioning Training Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network AR G3 Routers Basic Operation

Design Training and Maintenance Training
1d 2d
Data Center Network Design AR G3 Routers Operation and

2d 10d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Fast-Track
AR G3 Routers Operation and
Training Maintenance Training
1d (Fast-Track)
5d
Campus Routers(NE/AR)
5d
Fast-Track
Training 14d 5d
Elective Guide
10
2.7 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path
Enterprise Network Design AR Series Industrial Routers Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Operation and Maintenance Training
Training
1d 5d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training
1d
Data Center Network Design

Training
2d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training
1d
Fast-Track

Training 14d 5d
Elective Guide
11
2.8 AR G3 Voice System Training Path
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Huawei AR G3 Voice System Audio Record Technology

Design Installation and Commissioning
1d 2d
2d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Session Border Controller

Fast-Track Technology
Configuration and Operation
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR 3d
3d
G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System
Design (Fast-Track)
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Fast-Track
3d
Configuration and Operation (including Audio Record and Session
Basic Configuration and Operation) Border Controller Technology
5d (Fast-Track)
3d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1d
Fast-Track
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation

and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
4d
Fast-Track
Fundamental of VoIP Technology

Fundamental of VoIP Technology
(Fast-Track)
5d 3d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using AR G3 voice system.
 Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System
Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.
 Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track).
 For more voice courses, please refer to the UC training catalog.
12
2.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path
Enterprise Network Design Chassis Switches Advanced Technology

Outlines Training (S97/S93/S77) Installation and
Training
Commissioning Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)

Design Training Basic Operation and
1d 2d
Data Center Network Design Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)

Training Training (Including the Basic O/M
2d Training) 10d

Training
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)
1d Operation and Maintenance
5d
Campus Switches (S series)

5d
Fast-Track
Training 14d 5d
Elective Guide
13
2.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path
Enterprise Network Design Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)

Design Training Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
1d 2d
Data Center Network Design Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)

Training Training (Including the Basic
2d O/M Training) 5d

Training Campus Switches (S series)
1d
5d
Fast-Track
Training
14d 5d
Elective Guide
14
2.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path
Enterprise Network Design Data Center Switches

Advanced Technology
(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation
Outlines Training Training
and Commissioning Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network Data Center Switches (CE128/

Design Training CE68/CE58) Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
1d 2d
Data Center Network Design Data Center Switches (CE128/

CE68/CE58) Operation and
2d the Basic O/M Training) 10d

Training
Data Center Switches (CE128/
1d CE68/CE58) Operation and
(Fast-Track) 5d
Fast-Track
Training 14d 5d
Elective Guide
15
2.12 WLAN (AC/AP) Training Path
WLAN Planning and Design WLAN Installation and

Training Commissioning Training
5d 1d
WLAN Basic Operation and

2d
WLAN Operation and

Maintenance Training(Including
5d
Technology WLAN Technology Basics

Training
2d
Elective Guide
16
2.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path
ME60 Products 1st Line

2d
ME60 Products 1st Line
Maintenance Engineer
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance ME60 Products IPTV Service

Training Features Training
10d 4d
ME60 Products 2nd Line ME60 Products 2nd

Maintenance Engineer Line IPTV Service
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Maintenance Engineer
Training
5d
ME60 Products 3rd

Line Maintenance
Engineer
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide
 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
17
2.14 PTN Product Training Path
PTN Network Planning and PTN Products Installation and PTN Products 3rd Line
Design Training Commissioning Training Maintenance Training
3d 2d 5d
PTN Products 1st Line

2d
PTN Products 2nd Line

10d
Fast-Track
Training
14d 5d
18
2.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training
eSight Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training eSight Operator
1d
Training Path
Target Audience
eSight Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including eSight Operation and
the Basic O/M Training) Maintenance Engineer
2d
eSight Advanced Feature Training
eSight WLAN eSight MPLS VPN eSight SLA Management

Management Training Management Training Training
0.5d 0.5d 0.5d
WLAN Administrator MPLS VPN Administrator SLA Administrator
eSight IPSec VPN eSight Smart Report eSight NTA (Network Traffic
Management Training Management Training Analyzer) Management
0.5d 0.5d Training 0.5d
IPSec VPN Administrator Report Administrator Network Monitor /

Traffic Analyzer
eSight Access eSight Data Center

Management Training Management Training
0.5d 0.5d
End User Administrator Data Center Administrator
eSight Product Expert
Elective Guide
 eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.
 eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.
 Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.
19
2.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path
Enterprise Network
Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training
Design Engineer
1d
Enterprise Campus Enterprise MPLS VPN Data Center Network WLAN Planning and
Network Design Training Design Training Design Training Design Training
1d 1d 2d 5d
Enterprise Network Enterprise MPLS Data Center Network Enterprise WLAN

Design Expert VPN Design Expert Design Expert Design Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide
 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.
20
3 Enterprise IP Training Courses
Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Training Programs Level (working
Location Size
days)
Certification Training Programs
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional -

Ⅲ 15 6 ~ 12
Routing and Switching Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing

Ⅲ 6 6 ~ 12
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching

Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Performance Training
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Huawei VRP System Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise LAN Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise WAN Technology Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Advanced Technology Training Programs
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Enterprise QoS Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
21
Enterprise HA Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including

Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
(Fast-Track)
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
(Including the Basic O/M Training)
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
(Fast-Track)
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
AR Series Industrial Router Training
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
AR G3 Voice System Training
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Operation
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and

Operation (including the Basic Configuration and Operation) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and

Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Troubleshooting
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
(Fast-Track)
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
22
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and
Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and

Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and

Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and

Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
WLAN(AC/ACU/AR/AP) Training Programs
WLAN Technology Basics Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
23
WLAN Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products Training Programs
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training Ⅲ 5 4 ~ 12
PTN Network Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 3 4 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs
eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Training
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
eSight WLAN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight SLA Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight Smart Report Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight Access Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight Data Center Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
24
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
Data Center Network Design Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
Level Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ: Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
25
3.1 Certification Training Programs
3.1.1 HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
Training Path  Describe the knowledge of IP address , Mask

and Subnet address planning
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Huawei Networking Technology and Device  Describe the principles, functions and relevant
knowledge of common network protocols
OARS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 8d
 Describe how routers, switches and firewalls
Target Audience work
 Configure VLAN,STP,VRRP, Static Route, RIP
Those who hope to become a network associate
Routing Protocol, OSPF Routing Protocol, PPP
Those who hope to obtain HCNA(HCDA)
and FR
certificate
 Perform the common methods of network
Prerequisites
maintenance and troubleshooting
 A general familiarity with PC operation system Duration
Objectives
8 working days
On completion of this program, the participants will Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 List Huawei networking devices
 Describe the technology of Ethernet
26
3.1.2 HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and
Switching Training
Training Path Objectives
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN On completion of this program, the participants will

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network be able to:
OPRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d  Configure OSPF
 Configure BGP
 Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
 Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
RSTP and MSTP
OPRS2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d
 Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and
QinQ
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP  Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Improving Enterprise Network Performance  Describe the basic principle of network security
OPRS3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  List the features of USG
 Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
Target Audience  List High Availability technology
Those who hope to become a network Duration
professional 15 working days

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-RS(HCDP) Class Size
certificate
Prerequisites Min 6, Max 12
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or the similar

knowledge
27
3.1.3 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN On completion of this program, the participants will

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network be able to:
OPRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d  Configure OSPF
Target Audience  Configure BGP
 Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Those who hope to become a network
Duration
professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-RS(HCDP) 6working days
certificate Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
28
3.1.4 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN On completion of this program, the participants will

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network be able to:
OPRS2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
Target Audience RSTP and MSTP

 Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and
Those who hope to become a network QinQ
professional
 Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-RS(HCDP)
Duration
certificate
Prerequisites 4 working days
Class Size
knowledge Min 6, Max 12
29
3.1.5 HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP On completion of this program, the participants will

Improving Enterprise Network Performance be able to:
OPRS3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  Describe the basic principle of network security
 List the features of USG
Target Audience  Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
Those who hope to become a network  List High Availability technology
professional Duration
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-RS(HCDP) 5 working days

certificate
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
30
3.1.6 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
Training Path  Describe the basic concepts of 802.11

 Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized  List Huawei WDS network mode
Business WLAN
 Describe mesh network mode
OAWL1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
Target Audience
 List the advantages of 802.11n
Those who hope to become a network associate of  Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical
WLAN layer
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate  Describe spread spectrum technology of
Prerequisites 802.11
 Describe DSSS technology
 A general familiarity with PC operation system
 Describe OFDM technology
 A basic understanding of computer technology
 Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar
 Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
knowledge
 Outline the general network mode of WLAN
Objectives
 Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
On completion of this program, the participants will  Differentiate different applications of VLAN in
be able to: WLAN service
 Describe what WLAN is
 Describe WLAN business configuration
 Describe the development process of WLAN processes of Huawei AC6605
technology  Configure the basic attributes of AC
 List typical application scenarios of WLAN  Describe the basic features of Huawei product
technology
 List the key features of Huawei product
 Describe the functions and roles of WLAN
 Describe the basic concepts of roaming
standards organizations
 Outline the basic principles of roaming
 Describe the related basic knowledge of RF
 List the application scenarios of roaming
 List working principle and specific property of
 Describe security threat of WLAN
RF
 Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
 Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
WIPS
and the basic concepts of channel
 Describe the related concepts of AAA
 Describe the rules of the working frequency
 Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
band and channel in each country
techniques
 List other technologies related to WLAN
 Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
 Describe the latest Huawei product information
 Describe the frame format of 802.11
 List the application scenarios of Huawei
 Differentiate three frame types and functions of
product
802.11
 Describe the power supply mode of Huawei
 Describe 802.11 media access control
product
mechanism
 Configure Huawei VRP basic command
 Analyze media access process of WLAN
 Configure AC basic attributes
 Describe the concepts of QoS
 Upgrade the software of AC and AP
 Configure WMM-profile
31
 Configure Traffic-profile  Configure the basic information of AC
 Describe the definition and functions of  Configure AP online
antenna  Configure AP-profile
 Describe the main performance indicates of  Configure radio-profile
antenna  Configure service-set
 List some common passive device  Configure AP region
 List the basic process of the WLAN network  Configure AP binding profile
planning  Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of
 List basic interference factors of WLAN WLAN service
 Describe the basic load-balancing ways of  Describe WLAN commonly used fault
WLAN troubleshooting
 List the typical application scenarios of WLAN  Describe WLAN common diagnostic
 Describe the network planning processes of commands and tools
WLAN  Describe the cause of some common failures
 Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN of WLAN
network planning ways  Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot
 Describe the functional features of Huawei some common failures
WLAN planning tool Duration
 Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN
5 working days
network
Class Size
 List some functions of eSight
 Configure WLAN service Min 6, Max 12
32
3.1.7 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
(Fast-Track 3 days)
Training Path  Differentiate different applications of VLAN in
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW WLAN service

Implementing Small to Medium-sized  Describe WLAN business configuration
Business WLAN Fast-Track 3 days
processes of Huawei AC6605
OAWLA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Configure the basic attributes of AC
Target Audience
 Describe the basic features of Huawei product
Those who hope to become a network associate of  List the key features of Huawei product
WLAN  Describe the basic concepts of roaming
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate  Outline the basic principles of roaming
Those who have obtained the same level technical  List the application scenarios of roaming
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain  Describe security threat of WLAN
Huawei certificate  Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
Prerequisites WIPS
 Describe the related concepts of AAA
 Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
techniques
 Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
knowledge
 List the basic process of the WLAN network
 Obtained the same level technical certificate in
planning
the industry
 List basic interference factors of WLAN
Objectives
 Describe the basic load-balancing ways of
On completion of this program, the participants will WLAN
be able to:  List the typical application scenarios of WLAN
 Describe what WLAN is  Describe the network planning processes of
 Describe the development process of WLAN WLAN
technology  Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN
 List typical application scenarios of WLAN network planning ways
technology  Describe the functional features of Huawei
 Describe the latest Huawei product information WLAN planning tool
 List the application scenarios of Huawei  Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN
product network
 Describe the power supply mode of Huawei  List some functions of eSight
product  Configure WLAN service
 Configure Huawei VRP basic command  Configure the basic information of AC
 Configure AC basic attributes  Configure AP online
 Upgrade the software of AC and AP  Configure AP-profile
 Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology  Configure radio-profile
 Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol  Configure service-set
 Outline the general network mode of WLAN  Configure AP region
 Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
33
Duration
 Configure AP binding profile
 Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of 3 working days
WLAN service Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
34
3.1.8 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
Training Path  Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei

Chassis Switches Routers
Huawei Routing and Switching Field
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei
Engineer Training
OSRS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of
Target Audience
Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis
Prerequisites Switches Routers
 Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar
Switches Routers
knowledge
 Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei
Objectives
Box Switches Routers
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box
be able to: Switches Routers
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers  Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of
 Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Huawei Box Switches Routers
NE Routers  Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE Switches Routers
Routers  Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
 Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Box Switches Routers
Huawei NE Routers  Describe Functions of Huawei eSight
 Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE Enterprise Network Management System
Routers  Describe the Networking Architecture of
 Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Huawei eSight
NE Routers  Describe the Technical Architecture of Huawei
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3 eSight
Routers  Describe Specifications of Huawei eSight
 Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei  Describe Basic Issues of Environment
AR G3 Routers Maintenance
 Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR  Describe Methods of Cleaning the Equipment
G3 Routers  Describe Indicators of Huawei Devices
 Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of  Describe Precautions of Parts Replacement
Huawei AR G3 Routers  Describe Steps of Parts Replacement
 Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3  List Common Maintenance Commands
Routers  Backup and Restore Configuration Files
 Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei  View Alarms and Logs of Huawei Devices
AR G3 Routers
 Describe the Concepts of Emergency
 Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis Maintenance
Switches Routers
 Describe Common Flows for Emergency
35
Maintenance  Describe Principles of ARP Attack Defense
 Describe Flow for Handling Hardware Faults  Describe Principles of MFF
 Describe Flow for Handling Service Faults  Describe the Differences Between Firewalls
 Describe Common Steps of Software Upgrade and Routers / Switches
 Describe Precautions of Software Upgrade  Describe Firewall Features of Huawei AR G3
 Describe Steps of Installing Patches Routers
 Describe Basic Operations on the Bootrom  Describe Firewall Features of Huawei S7700
 Describe Principles of ISSU SPU
 Describe Application Scenarios of ISSU  Describe Domain-based User Management on

Huawei Devices
 Describe Operational Processes of ISSU
 Configure Telnet Server on Huawei Devices
 Describe Principles of BFD
 Configure FTP Server / Client on Huawei
 Describe Application Scenarios of BFD
Devices
 Configure BFD on Huawei Devices
 Configure TFTP Client on Huawei Devices
 Describe Principles of Smart-Link /
 Configure SSH Server on Huawei Devices
Monitor-Link
 Describe Principles of SNMP
 Describe Application Scenarios of Smart-Link /
Monitor-Link  Configure SNMP on Huawei Devices
 Configure Smart-Link / Monitor-Link on Huawei  Describe Steps of Installing Huawei eSight
Devices  Describe Basic Operations of Huawei eSight
 Describe Principles of SEP  Describe Principles of Stacking and CSS
 Describe Application Scenarios of SEP  Describe Application Scenarios of Stacking and
 Configure SEP on Huawei Devices CSS
 Describe Principles of DLDP  Configure Stacking and CSS on Huawei

Devices
 Describe Application Scenarios of DLDP
 Describe Principles of LLDP
 Configure DLDP on Huawei Devices
 Describe Application Scenarios of LLDP
 List the Security Features of Huawei Routers
and Switches  Configure LLDP on Huawei Devices
 List the differences of Security Features Duration
Between Huawei Routers and Switches

5 working days
 Describe Application Scenarios of Huawei
Class Size
Routers and Switches
 Describe Security Threats on the Network Min 6, Max 12
Access Layer
36
3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Programs
3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe basic structure of IP network
 Describe TCP/IP basis
IP Network Technology Fundamental
 Describe IP addressing and routing
ORS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe network layer protocols
Target Audience  Describe transit layer protocols

 Describe application layer protocols
Operators and Maintainers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives Min 6, Max 12
On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
37
3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the VRP architecture
Huawei VRP System
 Use basic operation commands
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the function of VRP information center
Target Audience  Perform VRP operate files

 Operate VRP upgrade software
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
38
3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training
Training Path  Describe the background of VLAN technology

 Describe the principle of VLAN
Ethernet Basic Principle  Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

ORS31
 Configure the inter-VLAN communication
 Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
VLAN Principle and Configuration  Configure the MUX-VLAN

 Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
ORS32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Configure the Super-VLAN
 Describe the GARP principle
 Describe the GVRP principle
GVRP Principle and Configuration
 Configure GVRP
ORS33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
 Describe the LACP basic principle
 List the methods of link aggregation
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle  Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
and Configuration
 Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
ORS34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
STP Principle and Configuration  Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

 Describe calculation process of spanning tree
 Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Target Audience  Describe the flood process of topology change
information
 Configure the STP function
Prerequisites
 Describe RSTP basic calculation process
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe RSTP port status transition
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Describe the function of RST BPDU
 A basic understanding of IP technology  Describe the flooding process of topology
Objectives change notification
 Configure the RSTP function
be able to:  Describe the basic concept of MSTP
 Describe the development of Ethernet  Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of
technology MST
 List the standards of Ethernet  Describe the MSTP advanced configuration
 Describe the working principle of HUB  Configure the MSTP function
 Describe the working principle of L2 switch Duration
 Describe the working principle of L3 switch 5 working days

 List the Ethernet port features Class Size
 Configure the Ethernet interface Min 6, Max 12
39
3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Training Path  Describe PPP principles

 Describe LCP principles
WAN Interfaces Introduction and
PPP/MP Principle and Configuration  Describe NCP principles
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe MP principles

ORS41
 Configure PPP and MP
 Configure PPP authentication
FR/POS/HDLC Principles and  Describe FR principles

Configuration  Configure FR
 Describe POS principles
Target Audience  Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing
Operators and Maintainers methods

 Identify common optical interfaces
Prerequisites
 Configure POS interface
 Describe HDLC principles
 Configure HDLC
 A basic understanding of IP technology
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 List common WAN protocols Min 6, Max 12
 List common WAN interfaces
40
3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Training Path route backup

 Configure static route
IP Routing Basis  Configure static default route
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the principles of distance-vector

ORS51
routing protocols
 Describe the routing loop issues and apply loop
avoidance solutions
RIP Protocol Feature and
Configuration  Describe the principles of RIP protocols
ORS52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Identify the similarities and differences between
RIPv1 and RIPv2
 Configure RIP in the network
OSPF Feature and Configuration  Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the route calculation process of link
state algorithm
 Describe basic concepts of OSPF
IS-IS Feature and Configuration  Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
 Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
relationship
 Describe the route calculation process of
OSPF
BGP Feature and Configuration
 Configure OSPF routing protocol
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol

 Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol
 Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols
Route Selection and Control  Configure IS-IS protocol
Feature
 Describe BGP basic concepts
 Describe BGP working principles
Target Audience
 Describe the route selection process of BGP
Operators and Maintainers  Configure BGP protocol
Prerequisites  Describe route selection tools
 Describe routing policy
 Describe policy-based route selection
 Compare routing policy and policy-based route
 Configure routing policy
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the IP routing process
 Describe fields in the routing table Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the concepts of load balance and
41
3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe network layer protocols

 Describe transit layer protocols
IP Network Technology Fundamental  Describe application layer protocols
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the VRP architecture

ORS11
 Describe the function of VRP info- center
Huawei VRP System  Perform VRP operate files
 Describe the background of VLAN technology
 Configure the basic functions of VLAN
VLAN Principle and Configuration  Describe the inter-VLAN communication
principle
 Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and  Configure the MUX-VLAN
Configuration
 Configure the Super-VLAN
 Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
IP Routing Basics
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
 Describe the IP routing process
 Describe fields in the routing table
OSPF Feature and Configuration
 Describe the concepts of load balance and
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d route backup
Target Audience  Configure static route

 Configure static default route
 Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Planners and Designers
 Describe the route calculation process of link
Administrators
state algorithm
Prerequisites  Describe basic concepts of OSPF
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Describe OSPF neighbor relationship
Objectives  Describe route calculation process of OSPF

 Configure OSPF routing protocol
Duration
be able to:
 Describe basic structure of IP network 5 working days
 Describe TCP/IP basis Class Size
 Describe IP addressing and routing
Min 6, Max 12
42
3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs
3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
Training Path  Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions

 Configure the IGMP protocol
IP Multicast Technologies Basis  Differentiate the classification of multicast
routing protocol
ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 List the features of common multicast routing
protocols
 Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
 Describe the join procedure of RPT and
ORSA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d multicast source registration
 Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
to SPT
Inter-domain Multicast Technologies  Configure PIM-SM
 List the key technologies of PIM SSM
 Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Target Audience
 Configure PIM SSM
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Administrators  Configure PIM-DM
Planners and Designers  Describe the basic principles of MSDP.
Prerequisites  Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.
 Describe the application of MSDP
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Configure the MSDP
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar  Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.

knowledge  Describe the extensions of the MBGP.
Objectives  Describe the process that the MBGP transmit
the IPv4 multicast routing table.
 Configure the MBGP
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the IP multicast concept
 Describe the IP multicast address architecture 5 working days
 Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP Class Size
multicast
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the SPT and RPT concept
 Describe the IGMP protocol principle
43
3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Training Path
 Describe IKE principles
 Describe IPSec principles
IP VPN Technology Fundamentals
 Describe IPSec application scenarios
ORSB1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Configure IPSec VPN

 Describe SSL principles
 Describe SSL application scenarios
IP VPN Applications  Configure SSL VPN
 Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN
ORSB2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution
 Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3
routers
Designing IP VPN
 List Problems When Deploy VPNs
ORSB3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment
and the solution
 Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment
Maintaining IP VPN and the solution
 Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment
ORSB4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
and the solution
Target Audience
 Describe GRE over IPSec applications
Operators and Maintainers  Describe IPSec over GRE applications
Planners and Designers  Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over
Administrators GRE
Prerequisites  Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
routers
 Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3
routers
 Describe security risks of VPDN
knowledge
 Describe common VPDN solutions
Objectives
 Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over
On completion of this program, the participants will IPSec
be able to:  Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3
 Describe concepts of IP VPN routers
 List common VPN technologies  Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
 Describe GRE principles routers
 Describe GRE application scenarios  Describe requirements when deploy VPN on
 Configure GRE VPN Hub-Spoke network
 Describe concepts of LAC and LNS  Describe Huawei DSVPN solution
 Describe L2TP principles  Describe DSVPN principles
 Describe L2TP application scenarios  Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers
 Configure L2TP VPN  List Huawei IP VPN products
 Describe IPSec technical architecture  Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei
44
routers  Choose appropriate devices and technology for
 Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei enterprise VPN
switches  Describe eSight VPN management features
 Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei  Use eSight basic functions
firewalls  Use eSight VPN management functions
 Describe Huawei eSight VPN management  Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
features  List common reasons of IP VPN failure
 Describe Huawei VPN client features  List common commands when troubleshooting
 Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of IP VPN
different products  Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases
 Describe applications of different products in IP Duration
VPN
5 working days
 Describe methodology of network designing
Class Size
 Analyze enterprise VPN requirements
 Describe typical VPN application Min 6, Max 12
45
3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
Training Path  Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism

 Describe the process of LDP session
MPLS Technology and Configuration establishment
 Describe LDP label space
ORSC1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 1d
 Describe LDP label distribution mode
 Describe LDP label control mode
 Describe LDP label retention mode
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
 Describe the PHP
ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 1d
 List the methods of MPLS loop detection
 Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
 Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration
count
ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Configure MPLS

 Configure LDP
 Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application  Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
MPLS VPN
ORSD3 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 1d
 Describe the mechanisms of the route and
Target Audience label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the process of data forwarding of
Planners and Designers BGP MPLS VPN
Administrators  Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN

configuration
Prerequisites
 Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
 A general familiarity with PC operation system MPLS BGP VPN
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Describe the troubleshooting on control plane
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar of MPLS BGP VPN
knowledge  Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
Objectives MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe VPN Characteristics
 Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN
be able to:
and L3 VPN
 Analyze the process of IP forwarding
 Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
 Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
encapsulation
 Describe the basic principle of MPLS
 Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
forwarding
 List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
 List the applications of MPLS
scenario
 Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
 Describe CCC VLL Topology
two planes
 Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
 Describe MPLS label structure
 Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
 Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
mode
46
 Configure CCC in a simple network topology MPLS VPN backbone
 Describe Martini VLL Topology  Describe how to access the Internet via
 Describe how public tunnel and VC connection different interfaces between CE and PE
are established in Martini VLL  Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
 Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini VPN
VLL  Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF
 Describe the difference between Martini VLL routing information
and SVC VLL  Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN
 Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple  Analyze the application and configuration of
networking topology Sham-link
 Describe the features of VPLS  Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN
 Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and Inter-AS solutions
VC Label  Compare the three solutions’ processing in
 Describe how does VPLS forward data and control plane and data plane
avoid loop Duration
 Configure VPLS in a simple networking
5 working days
topology
Class Size
 Configure VPLS
 Describe how to access the Internet via the ISP Min 6, Max 12
 Describe how to access the Internet via the
47
3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
Training Path  Describe the basic and extension principle of

RSVP protocol
MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration  Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE
 Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
ORSE Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
using static routes
Target 1Audience
 Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
Operators and Maintainers using automatic route
Planners and Designers  Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using
Administrators policy routing
Prerequisites  Describe the mode of traffic protection

 Describe the principle of path protection
 Describe the principle of fast reroute
 Describe DS-TE functions
 Describe DS-TE applicable environment
knowledge
 Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption
 A general familiarity with MPLS
 Describe the rationale of Tunnel
Objectives
Re-optimization
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the rationale of Load Sharing
be able to:  Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth
 Describe detailed TE concepts and models Adjustment
 Describe MPLS TE background and functional  Describe the combining of MPLS TE with
modules MPLS VPN
 Describe the content of MPLS TE information  Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
distribution  List MPLS TE application
 Describe the way of MPLS TE information  Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
flooding Duration
 Describe the process of MPLS TE information
3 working days
distribution
Class Size
 Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm
 Describe the other constrained conditions Min 6, Max 12
which influence the process of path calculation
 Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE
48
3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training

IP QoS Technology
be able to:
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Target Audience  Describe Diff-Serv model
 Describe the principle of IP QoS
 Describe the classed-based QoS
Prerequisites
 Configure QoS
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar 1 working day
knowledge Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
49
3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training
Training Path be able to:

 Describe the basic concept of HA
HA Technology  List common HA technologies in network
 Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Target Audience
 Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Operators and Maintainers  Describe application scenarios of BFD
Prerequisites  Configure BFD on VRP platform
Duration
 A basic understanding of computer technology 1 working day
Class Size
knowledge
50
3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Training Path  Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of

OSPFv3 with OSPFv2
IPv6 Technology  Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation
 Configure OSPFv3
ORSH1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Target Audience
 Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology
Operators and Maintainers  Configure IS-ISv6
Monitoring Staffs  Describe MP-BGP attributes
Administrators  Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6
Prerequisites inter-domain routing
 Configure BGP+
 Describe the function and basic principle of MLD
 Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2
 Describe the function of SSM Mapping
knowledge
 Configure MLD
Objectives
 Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the address structure and working
be able to: principle of Embedded-RP
 Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6  Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
 Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6  Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast
packet format  Configure PIMv6
 Describe the packet types of ICMPv6  List classification of the ACL6
 Describe the packet types of ICMPv6  Describe the application scenarios of ACL6
 Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process  Configure ACL6
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 address  List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6
auto configuration
 Describe application situations of the transitional
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU technologies of IPv6
 Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS
 Describe basic principles of the common
 Configure IPv6 address transitional technologies of IPv6
 Configure IPv6 NDP  Configure common transitional technologies of
 Configure IPv6 PMTU IPv6
 Configure IPv6 application  Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
 Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6  Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
unicast packets  Configure 6PE over MPLS
 Describe the principle of RIPng Duration
 Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2
5 working days
 Describe the format and processing of RIPng
packets Class Size
 Configure RIPng Min 6, Max 12

 Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2
51
3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training

NE Series Routers Hardware Installation
be able to:
ORT22 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d  Describe NE series routers installation process
 List precautions when install NE series routers
 Install NE series routers
Huawei VRP System  Describe the VRP architecture
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Use basic operation commands

ORS21
 Describe the function of VRP information center
Target Audience
 Perform VRP operate files
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Operate VRP upgrade software
Operators and Maintainers Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 A general familiarity with PC operation system Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
52
3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe NE series routers hardware structure

 Describe NE series routers board types and
NE Series Routers Introduction functions
 Identify NE series routers board
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d
 Judge NE series routers board indicators and
functions
 Describe NE series routers positioning and
Huawei VRP System
application scenarios
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe NE series routers features Overview
NE20E-S Series Routers Routine  Describe the function of VRP information center
Maintenance
ORT23 Lecture 0.5d  Perform VRP operate files
Target Audience
 List precautions for NE series routers routine
Installers and Commissioning Staffs maintenance
Operators and Maintainers  Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Prerequisites Duration
 A general familiarity with PC operation system 2 working days

 A basic understanding of computer technology Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
53
3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)

NE Series Routers Introduction
be able to:
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d  Describe NE series routers hardware structure
functions
Huawei VRP System  Identify NE series routers board
functions
IP Routing Technologies
 Describe NE series routers features Overview
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the VRP architecture
MPLS VPN Technologies  Perform VRP operate files
ORSDA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Operate VRP upgrade software

 Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
HA Technology state algorithm

 Describe the basic concept of OSPF
 Describe OSPF protocol packets
 Describe route calculation process of OSPF
 Configure OSPF protocol
IP QoS Technology
 Describe the principle of BGP protocol
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
 Describe BGP protocol route selection process
 Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance IGP protocol
 Configure BGP protocol
ORT23 Lecture 0.5d
 Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Target Audience
 Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Describe policy-based route selection
Operators and Maintainers  Configure routing policy
Prerequisites  Analyze the process of IP forwarding
 Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
 Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
 List the applications of MPLS
 Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
54
two planes  Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
 Describe MPLS label structure  Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
 Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding mode
 Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism  Configure CCC in a simple network topology
 Describe the process of LDP session  Describe Martini VLL Topology
establishment  Describe how public tunnel and VC connection
 Describe LDP label space are established in Martini VLL
 Describe LDP label distribution mode  Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
 Describe LDP label control mode VLL
 Describe LDP label retention mode  Describe the difference between Martini VLL and
 Describe the PHP SVC VLL
 List the methods of MPLS loop detection  Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple
networking topology
 Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
 Describe the features of VPLS
 Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
count  Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and
VC Label
 Configure MPLS
 Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid
 Configure LDP
loop
 Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
 Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology
 Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
 Configure VPLS
MPLS VPN
 Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
distribution in BGP MPLS VPN  List common HA technologies in network
 Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP  Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
MPLS VPN  Configure VRRP on VRP platform
 Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN  Describe BFD basic concept and principles
configuration  Describe application scenarios of BFD
 Describe the extended BGP attributes used by  Configure BFD on VRP platform
MPLS BGP VPN  Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
 Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of  Describe Diff-Serv model
MPLS BGP VPN  Describe the principle of IP QoS
 Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of  Describe the classed-based QoS
MPLS BGP VPN  Configure QoS
 Describe VPN Characteristics  List precautions for NE series routers routine
 Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN maintenance
and L3 VPN  Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
 Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data Duration
encapsulation
10 working days
 Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
Class Size
 List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
scenario Min 6, Max 12
 Describe CCC VLL Topology
55
3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe NE series routers positioning and

NE Series Routers Introduction  Describe NE series routers features Overview
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d
Huawei VRP System
state algorithm
IP Routing Technologies  Describe the basic concept of OSPF
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe OSPF protocol packets

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance  Describe the principle of BGP protocol
 Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
ORT23 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs IGP protocol
Operators and Maintainers  Configure BGP protocol
Prerequisites  Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Objectives
 List precautions for NE series routers routine
On completion of this program, the participants will maintenance
be able to:  Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
 Describe NE series routers hardware structure Duration
5 working days
functions
Class Size
 Identify NE series routers board
 Judge NE series routers board indicators and Min 6, Max 12
functions
56
3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe VRP8 platform new features

 Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction  List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the IP routing process

ORT41
 Describe fields in the routing table
 Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
 Configure static route
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d
 Configure static default route
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
state algorithm
ORT43 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Target Audience  Describe OSPF protocol packets

Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Prerequisites
 A genera familiarity with PC operation system  Describe BGP protocol route selection process
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
Objectives IGP protocol

 Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
be able to:
 Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware
structure
 Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
 List precautions for NE20E-S series routers
and functions
routine maintenance
 Identify NE20E-S series routers board
 Perform NE20E-S series routers routine
 Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
maintenance
and functions
Duration
 Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning and
application scenarios 5 working days
 Describe NE20E-S series routers features Class Size
Overview
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the VRP development and history
 Describe VRP platform features
57
3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training

AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation
be able to:
ORT12 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d  Describe AR G3 router installation process
 List precautions when install AR G3 routers
 Install AR G3 routers
Huawei VRP System  Describe the VRP architecture
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Use basic operation commands

ORS21
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Operate VRP upgrade software
Prerequisites
1 working day
Min 6, Max 12
58
3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

 Describe AR G3 product positioning
AR G3 Product Introduction  Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Lecture 0.5d  Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

ORT11
 List AR G3 cards and modules
 List AR G3 software features
Huawei VRP System  Describe AR G3 application scenarios

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
Target Audience router routine maintenance

 List precautions for AR G3 router routine
Monitoring Staffs
maintenance
 Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
 A basic understanding of IP technology Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
59
3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 Lecture 0.5d Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System  A general familiarity with PC operation system

Objectives
LAN Technologies On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
ORS3B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP
 Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
Principle and Configuration
 List AR G3 software features
 Describe AR G3 application scenarios
IP Routing Technologies  Describe the VRP architecture

ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
HA Technology
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the principle of VLAN
 Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe calculation process of spanning tree
 Describe the flood process of topology change
AR G3 Security Features information
ORT14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Configure the STP function

 List common WAN protocols
 List common WAN interfaces
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance  Describe PPP principles
 Describe LCP principles
ORT13 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe NCP principles
60
 Describe MP principles  Describe application scenarios of BFD
 Configure PPP and MP  Configure BFD on VRP platform
 Configure PPP authentication  Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
 Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol  Describe Diff-Serv model
 Describe the route calculation process of link  Describe the principle of IP QoS
state algorithm  Describe the classed-based QoS
 Describe the basic concept of OSPF  Configure QoS
 Describe OSPF protocol packets  Describe NAT principles
 Describe route calculation process of OSPF  List NAT features on AR G3 routers
 Configure OSPF protocol  Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
 Describe the principle of BGP protocol  Describe NAT applications
 Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol  Describe concepts of firewall
 Describe BGP protocol route selection process  List common firewalls
 Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and  List firewall features on AR G3 routers
IGP protocol  Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
 Configure BGP protocol  Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
 Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route router routine maintenance
 Describe route selection tools and routing policy  List precautions for AR G3 router routine
 Describe policy-based route selection maintenance
 Configure routing policy  Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
 Describe the basic concept of HA Duration
 List common HA technologies in network
10 working days
Class Size
 Describe BFD basic concept and principles Min 6, Max 12
61
3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

AR G3 Product Introduction  List AR G3 software features
ORT11 Lecture 0.5d  Describe AR G3 application scenarios

Huawei VRP System  Describe the function of VRP information center
IP Routing Technologies  Describe the route calculation process of link

state algorithm
HA Technology
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the principle of BGP protocol
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d IGP protocol
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance  List common HA technologies in network
Lecture 0.5d  Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

ORT13
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs  Describe application scenarios of BFD
Operators and Maintainers  Configure BFD on VRP platform
Administrators  Describe NAT principles
Prerequisites  List NAT features on AR G3 routers
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Describe NAT applications
 A basic understanding of IP technology  Describe concepts of firewall

 List common firewalls
Objectives
 List firewall features on AR G3 routers
 Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
be able to:
 Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
router routine maintenance
62
Class Size
maintenance
 Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance Min 6, Max 12
Duration
5 working days
63
3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe NE series routers board types and

functions
NE Series Routers Introduction  Identify NE series routers board
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d
functions
AR G3 Product Introduction
 Describe NE series routers features Overview
ORT11 Lecture 0.5d  Describe AR G3 product positioning
 Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
Huawei VRP System  List AR G3 cards and modules
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  List AR G3 software features

 Describe AR G3 application scenarios
IP Routing Technologies  Use basic operation commands
ORS5B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
HA Technology  Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d state algorithm
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23 Lecture 0.25d  Configure OSPF protocol
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance  Describe BGP protocol route selection process
ORT23 Lecture 0.25d
IGP protocol
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the basic concept of HA
Prerequisites  List common HA technologies in network
Objectives
 Describe application scenarios of BFD
On completion of this program, the participants will  Configure BFD on VRP platform
be able to:  List precautions for NE series routers routine
 Describe NE series routers hardware structure
64
maintenance  Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
 Perform NE series routers routine maintenance Duration
 Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
5 working days
router routine maintenance
Class Size
maintenance Min 6, Max 12
65
3.5 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Programs
3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Positioning

 Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Architecture
ORT31  List AR Series Industrial Router Modules and

Lecture 1d
Cards
 Outline AR Series Industrial Router Application
Huawei VRP System Scenarios

 Describe AR DCP Product Positioning
 Describe AR DCP Product Functions
 Outline AR DCP Product Application Scenarios
AR Industrial Router Routing & Switching
Features
ORT32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the function of VRP information center
HA Technology
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the principle of VLAN
AR Series Industrial Routers Routine  Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Maintenance
ORT33 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers  Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Prerequisites  Describe the IP routing process
 A genera familiarity with PC operation system  Describe fields in the routing table
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Describe the concepts of load balance and route
 A basic understanding of IP network backup
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge  Configure static route
Objectives  Configure static default route

be able to:
state algorithm
 Describe the Trend of IOT
 Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Scenarios
 Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router
Solution Highlights
 Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product
66
 List common HA technologies in network routine maintenance
 Describe VRRP basic concept and principles  Perform AR Series Industrial router routine
 Configure VRRP on VRP platform maintenance
 Describe BFD basic concept and principles Duration
5 working days
 Configure BFD on VRP platform
Class Size
 Describe the procedure and method for AR
Series Industrial router routine maintenance Min 6, Max 12
 List precautions for Series Industrial router
67
3.6 AR G3 Voice System Training Programs
3.6.1 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning
Training Path  Describe the classification of AR G3 voice

system
AR G3 Voice System Introduction and
Network Design  Perform the AR G3 voice system installation and
commissioning
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the EGW system function
 Describe the classification of EGW system
 Perform the interconnection commissioning
AR G3 Voice System Installation and
Commissioning between AR G3 voice system and EGW
 Describe the IAD function
OUC45 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Describe the classification of IAD
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs between AR G3 voice system and IAD
Prerequisites  Describe the IP phone function

 Describe the classification of IP phone
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Perform the interconnection commissioning
 A general familiarity with network knowledge between AR G3 voice system and IP phone
 A general familiarity with communication theory
Duration
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
Objectives 2 working days
Class Size
be able to: Min 6, max 16
 Describe the AR G3 voice system composition

 Describe the AR G3 voice system function
68
3.6.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation
Training Path system

 Perform the AR G3 voice system configuration
Network Design  Describe the EGW system function
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe EGW system hardware architecture
 Perform service configuration in the
interconnection configuration between AR G3
AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration
and Operation voice system and EGW
Target Audience  Describe IAD hardware architecture
Prerequisites
voice system and IAD
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe IP phone classification and function
 A general familiarity with network knowledge  Perform service configuration in the
 A general familiarity with communication theory interconnection configuration between AR G3
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge voice system and IP phone
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the participants will 3 working days

be able to: Class Size
Min 6, max 16
 Describe the classification of AR G3 voice
69
3.6.3 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation
Training Path system

 Perform AR G3 voice system configuration
 Perform AR G3 voice system feature
Network Design
configuration
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
 Perform AR G3 voice system advanced service
configuration
AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration  Perform AR G3 voice system maintenance

and Operation  Describe the EGW system function
OUC42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Describe the classification of EGW system
AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration interconnection configuration between AR G3

voice system and EGW
OUC43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the IAD function
 Describe IAD hardware architecture
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers interconnection configuration between AR G3
Prerequisites voice system and IAD
 Describe IP phone classification and function
 A general familiarity with network knowledge
voice system and IP phone
 Perform AR G3 voice system SBC configuration
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the AR G3 voice system function Min 6, max 16
70
3.6.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and On completion of this program, the participants will
Troubleshooting
be able to:
OUC44 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the AR G3 voice system composition
system
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers  Perform AR G3 voice system maintenance
Prerequisites  List the fault handling process of AR G3 voice
system
 List the common fault of AR G3 voice system
Duration
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge 1 working day
 A general familiarity with AR G3 voice system Class Size
 A general familiarity with AR G3 voice system
Min 6, max 16
configuration
71
3.6.5 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
AR G3 Voice System Introduction On completion of this program, the participants will

and Network Design
be able to:
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the AR G3 voice system composition
AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration system
and Operation
configuration
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting between AR G3 system and other voice
devices
OUC44 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Perform AR G3 voice system maintenance
Target Audience  List the fault handling process of AR G3 voice
system
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge Min 6, max 16
72
3.7 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
3.7.1 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) On completion of this program, the participants will

Hardware Installation
be able to:
OSW12 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
 Describe Huawei chassis switch installation
process
 List precautions when install chassis switch
Huawei VRP System  Install Huawei chassis switch
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the VRP architecture

Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Perform VRP operate files
Operators and Maintainers  Operate VRP upgrade software
 A general familiarity with PC operation system 1 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
73
3.7.2 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path and modules

 Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) forwarding flows
Product Introduction
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product
OSW11 Lecture 0.5d
characteristic function
software features
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d application scenarios
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)
Routine Maintenance
Lecture 0.5d  Perform VRP operate files
OSW13
Target Audience
 Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
Monitoring Staffs chassis switch routine maintenance
Operators and Maintainers  List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
Administrators routine maintenance
Prerequisites  Perform Huawei chassis switch routine
maintenance
chassis switch parts replacement
 List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
Objectives
component replacement
On completion of this program, the participants will  Perform Huawei chassis switch component
be able to: replacement
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product Duration
positioning
2 working days
Class Size
hardware architecture
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards Min 6, Max 12
74
3.7.3 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Monitoring Staffs

OSW11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP System
Objectives
LAN Technologies
ORS3C Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d
be able to:
positioning
ORS5A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d hardware architecture
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards
and modules
HA Technology  Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
forwarding flows
IP QoS Technology  Describe Huawei chassis switch product

software features
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU
Features  Use basic operation commands
OSW14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the function of VRP information center
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) CSS  Describe the background of VLAN technology
Features
OSW15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine  Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Maintenance  Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
OSW13 Lecture 0.5d
 Configure the MUX-VLAN
75
 Describe the principle of Super-VLAN  Configure BFD on VRP platform
 Configure the Super-VLAN  Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
 Describe calculation process of spanning tree  Describe Diff-Serv model
 Describe the function of configuration BPDU  Describe the principle of IP QoS
 Describe the flood process of topology change  Describe the classed-based QoS
information  Configure QoS
 Configure the STP function  Describe ISSU principles
 Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle  List ISSU features on Huawei chassis switch
 Describe the LACP basic principle  List ISSU features use restriction on Huawei
 List the methods of link aggregation chassis switch
 Configure the Ethernet link aggregation  Use ISSU features upgrade chassis switch
 Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol  Describe CSS principles
 Describe the route calculation process of link  List CSS features on Huawei chassis switch
state algorithm  Differentiate mainborad CSS and linecard-direct
 Describe the basic concept of OSPF CSS
 Describe OSPF protocol packets  Configure Huawei chassis switch CSS features
 Describe route calculation process of OSPF  Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
 Configure OSPF protocol chassis switch routine maintenance
 Describe the principle of BGP protocol  List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
 Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol routine maintenance
 Describe BGP protocol route selection process  Perform Huawei chassis switch routine
 Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and maintenance
IGP protocol  Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
 Configure BGP protocol chassis switch parts replacement
 Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route  List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
component replacement
 Perform Huawei chassis switch component
replacement
Duration
 List common HA technologies in network 10 working days
 Describe VRRP basic concept and principles Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
76
3.7.4 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards

and modules
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)  Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
forwarding flows
Huawei VRP System
software features
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe Huawei chassis switch product
LAN Technologies  Use basic operation commands
ORS5B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine
Maintenance  Describe calculation process of spanning tree
OSW13 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Target Audience
information
Monitoring Staffs  Configure the STP function
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Administrators  Describe the route calculation process of link
Planners and Designers state algorithm
Prerequisites  Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe BGP protocol route selection process
be able to:
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product IGP protocol
positioning  Configure BGP protocol
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product  Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
77
chassis switch routine maintenance component replacement
 List precautions for Huawei chassis switch  Perform Huawei chassis switch component
routine maintenance replacement
 Perform Huawei chassis switch routine Duration
maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
chassis switch parts replacement
 List precautions for Huawei chassis switch Min 6, Max 12
78
3.7.5 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware On completion of this program, the participants will
Installation be able to:
OSW22 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d  Describe Huawei box switch installation process
 List precautions when install Huawei box switch
 Install Huawei box switch
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Use basic operation commands
Target Audience  Describe the function of VRP information center

Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
79
3.7.6 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules
 Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27)
Product Introduction flows
OSW21 Lecture 0.5d  List Huawei box switch characteristic function

 List Huawei box switch software features
 Describe Huawei box switch application
Huawei VRP System scenarios
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine
Maintenance  Operate VRP upgrade software
OSW23 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the contents and methods of routine
Target Audience maintenance to Huawei box switches

 List the notices of routine maintenance to box
Monitoring Staffs
switches
 Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box
Administrators switches
Prerequisites  Describe the methods and procedures of
replacing Huawei box switches components
 Lists the matters needing attention of replacing
Huawei box switches components
 Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches
Objectives
components
On completion of this program, the participants will Duration
be able to:
2 working days
 Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Class Size
 Describe Huawei box switch hardware
architecture Min 6, Max 12
80
3.7.7 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product  Describe Huawei box switch hardware
Introduction
architecture
OSW21 Lecture 0.5d
flows
Huawei VRP System
 List Huawei box switch characteristic function
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  List Huawei box switch software features
scenarios
LAN Technologies  Describe the VRP architecture
ORS3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Use basic operation commands

VRRP Feature and Configuration  Operate VRP upgrade software

ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security
Feature  Configure the inter-VLAN communication
OSW24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
 Configure the MUX-VLAN
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine  Configure the Super-VLAN
Maintenance
Lecture 0.5d  Describe calculation process of spanning tree
OSW23
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs information
Operators and Maintainers  Configure the STP function
Administrators  Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
Planners and Designers  Configure VRRP protocol
Prerequisites  List the security risks of network access layer
 List ACL types
 List the application of ACL
 Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
 Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Objectives
 Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
On completion of this program, the participants will switches
81
 Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches  Describe the methods and procedures of
 List the defense of ARP attack replacing Huawei box switches components
 List the security features of Huawei switches  Lists the matters needing attention of replacing
 Configure the prevention of ARP attack Huawei box switches components
 Configure MFF feature  Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches
 Describe the contents and methods of routine components
maintenance to Huawei box switches Duration
 List the notices of routine maintenance to box

5 working days
switches
Class Size
 Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box
switches Min 6, Max 12
82
3.7.8 Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path Prerequisites
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77)  A general familiarity with PC operation system

Product Introduction  A basic understanding of computer technology
OSW11 Lecture 0.5d Objectives

be able to:
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product
Introduction  Describe Huawei chassis switch product
OSW21 Lecture 0.5d positioning
Huawei VRP System
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards
and modules
 Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
forwarding flows
LAN Technologies
ORS3B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Describe Huawei chassis switch product
software features
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security application scenarios
Feature
OSW24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Describe Huawei box switch hardware
architecture
VRRP Feature and Configuration
ORSGA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d flows
 List Huawei box switch characteristic function
 List Huawei box switch software features
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine
Maintenance
Lecture scenarios
OSW13 0.25d
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine  Describe the function of VRP information center
Maintenance
OSW23 Lecture 0.25d
Target Audience  Describe the background of VLAN technology
83
 Describe calculation process of spanning tree  Perform Huawei chassis switch routine
 Describe the function of configuration BPDU maintenance
 Describe the flood process of topology change  Describe the procedure and method for Huawei
information chassis switch parts replacement
 Configure the STP function  List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
 List the security risks of network access layer  Describe the contents and methods of routine
 List ACL types maintenance to Huawei box switches
 List the application of ACL  List the notices of routine maintenance to box
 Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense switches
 Describe DHCP-Snooping principle  Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box

switches
 Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches  Describe the methods and procedures of
replacing Huawei box switches components
 Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
 Lists the matters needing attention of replacing
 List the defense of ARP attack
Huawei box switches components
 List the security features of Huawei switches
 Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches
 Configure the prevention of ARP attack
components
 Configure MFF feature
Duration
 Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
 Configure VRRP protocol 5 working days
 Describe the procedure and method for Huawei Class Size
chassis switch routine maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
 List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
routine maintenance
84
3.8 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
3.8.1 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning

Training
Training Path switch

 List the precaution of hardware installation of CE
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58)
Hardware Installation series switch
 Install CE series switch
OSW34 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
 Describe VRP8 platform new features
VRP8 Platform Introduction
 List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Target Audience  Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
 Mange the configuration file on CE switch
 Use the FTP function on CE switch
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the installation procedure of CE series
85
3.8.2 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path  Describe VRP platform features

Product Introduction  Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
OSW31 Lecture 0.5d
 Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
VRP8 Platform Introduction  Mange the configuration file on CE switch
 Use the FTP function on CE switch
 Describe the contents of maintenance of CE
series switch
 Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE
Maintenance series switch
OSW3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
 Describe the parts replacement of CE12800
Target Audience
series switch
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Describe the procedure of system software
Operators and Maintainers upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Prerequisites  Describe the procedure of system software

upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
 Describe the procedure of system software
 A basic understanding of computer technology upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
Objectives  Describe the procedure of system software
upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
be able to:  Describe the ISSU software upgrade on
CE12800 switch
 Describe the hardware architecture of CE series
data center switch Duration
 Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE 2 working days

series data center switch
Class Size
 List the features of CE series data center switch
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the application of CE series data center
switch
86
3.8.3 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58)  A general familiarity with PC operation system

OSW31 Lecture 0.5d  HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar
knowledge
Objectives
OSW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d be able to:
 Describe the hardware architecture of CE series
data center switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution  Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE
series data center switch
OSW33 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the application of CE series data center
switch
Data Center Network Key technologies
OSW36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d  Describe VRP platform features
LAN Technologies  List the VRP8 platform basic commands
ORS3D Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
 Mange the configuration file on CE switch
IP Multicast Routing Technologies  Use the FTP function on CE switch

 Describe the architecture of data center
 Describe the data center development
 Describe Huawei data center network solution
 Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
IP QoS Technology
 Describe FCOE network basic architecture
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the FCOE implementation of related
technologies
 Describe DCB function technical principle
 Describe the application in data center network
Maintenance
of FCOE
OSW3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the background of TRILL
Target Audience  Describe the basic concept of TRILL
 Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
87
 Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network  Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
 Describe the application of TRILL in modern  Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast
network source registration
 Configure TRILL protocol  Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
 Describe the principle of stack technology to SPT
 Describe the stack technology realization on CE  Configure PIM-SM
switch  List the key technologies of PIM SSM
 Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and  Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
CE12800 switch  Configure PIM SSM
 List the procedure of configuration of stack on  Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
TOR switch  Configure PIM-DM
 List the procedure of configuration of stack on  Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
CE12800 switch  Describe Diff-Serv model
 Describe background of VS technology  Describe the principle of IP QoS
 Describe the realization of VS technology  Describe the classed-based QoS
 Describe the principle of VS technology  Configure QoS
 Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE  Describe the contents of maintenance of CE
switch series switch
 Describe the background of VM virtual migration  Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE
 Describe the technologies for VM virtual series switch
migration  Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
 Describe the procedure of realization of VM  Describe the parts replacement of CE12800
virtual migration series switch
 Describe the solution of Huawei data Center  Describe the procedure of system software
network implementation upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
 Describe STP functions  Describe the procedure of system software
 Describe STP implementation upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
 Describe RSTP improvement compared with  Describe the procedure of system software
STP upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
 Describe MSTP calculation  Describe the procedure of system software
 Configure STP, RSTP, MSTP upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
 Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle  Describe the ISSU software upgrade on
 Describe the LACP basic principle CE12800 switch
 List the methods of link aggregation Duration
 Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
10 working days
 Differentiate the classification of multicast routing
Class Size
protocol
 List the features of common multicast routing Min 6, Max 12
protocols
88
3.8.4 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training Path series data center switch

Product Introduction  Describe the application of CE series data center
switch
OSW31 Lecture 0.5d
 Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
Huawei Data Center Network Solution  Mange the configuration file on CE switch
OSW33 Lecture 0.5d  Use the FTP function on CE switch

 Describe the architecture of data center
 Describe the data center development
Data Center Network Key technologies  Describe Huawei data center network solution
 Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
 Describe FCOE network basic architecture
 Describe the FCOE implementation of related
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) technologies

Maintenance  Describe DCB function technical principle
OSW3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the application in data center network
of FCOE
Target Audience
 Describe the background of TRILL
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Describe the basic concept of TRILL
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Prerequisites  Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe the application of TRILL in modern
network
 Configure TRILL protocol
knowledge  Describe the principle of stack technology
 Describe the stack technology realization on CE
Objectives
switch
On completion of this program, the participants will  Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and
be able to: CE12800 switch
 Describe the hardware architecture of CE series  List the procedure of configuration of stack on
data center switch TOR switch
 Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE  List the procedure of configuration of stack on
89
CE12800 switch  Describe the parts replacement of CE12800
 Describe background of VS technology series switch
 Describe the realization of VS technology  Describe the procedure of system software
 Describe the principle of VS technology upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
 Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE  Describe the procedure of system software

switch upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
 Describe the background of VM virtual migration  Describe the procedure of system software
 Describe the technologies for VM virtual upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
migration  Describe the procedure of system software
 Describe the procedure of realization of VM upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
virtual migration  Describe the ISSU software upgrade on
 Describe the solution of Huawei data center CE12800 switch
network implementation Duration
 Describe the contents of maintenance of CE

5 working days
series switch
Class Size
 Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE
series switch Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
90
3.9 WLAN(AC/AP) Training Programs
3.9.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training
Training Path  Know the mechanism and configuration of

communication between VLANs
WLAN Technology Basics  Describe what WLAN is
 Describe the development process of WLAN
OWL0A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
technology
Target Audience
 List typical application scenarios of WLAN
Operators and Maintainers technology
Prerequisites  Describe the working frequency band of WLAN
and the basic concepts of channel
 Describe the rules of the working frequency
band and channel in each country
Objectives
 List other technologies related to WLAN
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
be able to:  Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
 Describe IP route process  List Huawei WDS network mode
 Describe the means of routing table  Describe mesh network mode
 Differentiate the route load balance and route  Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
backup  List the advantages of 802.11n
 Configure static route Duration
 Configure default route
2 working days
 Know what VLAN is
Class Size
 Know concepts about VLAN
 Configure VLAN basic function Min 6, Max 12
91
3.9.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path  Describe Huawei AC hardware features

 Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
WLAN Installation and Basic  Install AC6605
 Describe the models and usage scenarios of
OWL1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Huawei APs
Target Audience
 Describe the basic installation of different types
Operators and Maintainers APs
Prerequisites  List the note during installation
 Complete different types APs installation
 Describe the WLAN basic component
 Use Huawei VRP basic command
knowledge  Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Objectives  Upgrade AC and AP

Duration
be able to: 1 working day
 Describe Huawei WLAN solution Class Size
 Describe Huawei AC basic performance

Min 6, Max 12
 List Huawei wireless AP
92
3.9.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

 Outline the typical Application of WLAN
WLAN Basic Operation and  Describe the theory of operations when AC as
a L2 switch or gateway
OWL1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Describe the methods of AP management
Target Audience
 Describe the AP boot sequence
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Prerequisites  Use Huawei VRP basic command
 Configure Basic Attributes of AC
 Upgrade AC and AP
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar  List the PoE components
knowledge  Describe PoE budget
Objectives  Configure the equipment interface of POE

 Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the
AC
be able to:
 Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
 Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Huawei WLAN network
 Configure the basic attribute of AC
 List the encryption suites of WLAN
 Describe Huawei AC hardware features
 List the authentication methods of WLAN
 Configure security-profile
 Install AC6605
 Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
 Configure WLAN business by wizard
Huawei APs
 Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Duration
Aps
 List the note during installation 3 working days
 Complete different types APs installation Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and
Fit AP
93
3.9.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path  Upgrade AC and AP

 List the PoE components
WLAN Operation and Maintenance  Describe PoE budget
Training
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Configure the equipment interface of POE
OWL11 5d
Target Audience
AC
Operators and Maintainers  Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Prerequisites Huawei WLAN network
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will  Configure WLAN business by wizard
be able to:
 Describe the basic function of AC6605 LSW side
 Configure the AC LSW's common functions
 Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
 Describe Huawei AC hardware features
 List the method of WLAN reliability
 Configure WLAN dual-link backup
 Install AC6605
 Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
 Describe the models and usage scenarios of  Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Huawei APs
 Configure WLAN roaming
 Describe the contents of user authority
Aps
management
 List the note during installation
 Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and
White list
 Configure user group authorization
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit
 Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment
AP
scenarios
 Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
 Describe the Fresnel Zone
 Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as a  Describe Huawei outdoor AP
L2 switch or gateway
 List antennas characteristic
 Describe how to select antennas
 Describe WDS basic concept
 Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
 List WDS application scenarios
 Describe WDS setup
 Configure Basic Attributes of AC
 Configure WDS
94
 Configure 802.11n basic  Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN
 Describe the principle of WLAN user load planner
balance  Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
 Configure Huawei WLAN load balance  List the common fault of WLAN
 Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the  Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
AC6605 Duration
 Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
5 working days
 Describe eSight WLAN management advance
Class Size
features
 Use eSight batch operate AP Min 6, Max 12
 Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
95
3.9.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Configure Basic Attributes of AC

 Upgrade AC and AP
ACU Operation and Maintenance  List the PoE components
Training
 Describe PoE budget
OWL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Configure the equipment interface of POE
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers AC
Prerequisites  Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
 A genera familiarity with PC operation system
knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will  Configure WLAN business by wizard
be able to:
 Describe the basic function of ACU LSW side
 Configure the AC LSW's common functions
 Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
 Describe the ACU Concept and Function
 List the method of WLAN reliability
 Describe the ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700  Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Relationship
 Describe the ACU Hardware Structure
 Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
 Installing/Replacing ACU
 Configure WLAN roaming
 Describe the contents of user authority
Huawei APs
management
 Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist
Aps
and White list
 List the note during installation
 Configure user group authorization
 Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
deployment scenarios
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and  Describe the Fresnel Zone
Fit AP
 Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
 Describe Huawei outdoor AP
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as
a L2 switch or gateway
 Describe WDS basic concept
 List WDS application scenarios
 Describe WDS setup
 Configure WDS
96
 Configure 802.11n basic  Describe the basic Characteristics of the
 Describe the principle of WLAN user load WLAN planner
balance  Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
 Configure Huawei WLAN load balance  List the common fault of WLAN
 Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the  Describe common fault troubleshooting of
ACU WLAN
 Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile Duration
 Describe eSight WLAN management advance
5 working days
features
Class Size
 Use eSight batch operate AP
 Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis Min 6, Max 12
97
3.9.6 AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the

AC
AR G3 Routers WLAN AC Features Operation
 Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
OWL31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Configure the basic attribute of AR G3 WLAN
Target Audience  List the encryption suites of WLAN

Prerequisites
 A genera familiarity with PC operation system  Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Configure WLAN roaming
 HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar  Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
knowledge deployment scenarios
Objectives  Describe the Fresnel Zone
 Describe Huawei outdoor AP
be able to:
 Describe MESH basic concept
 List MESH application scenarios
 Describe MESH setup
 Differentiate the different between Fat AP and
Fit AP  Configure WLAN MESH
 Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel  Configure 802.11n basic
 Outline the typical Application of WLAN  Describe the basic Characteristics of the
WLAN planner
 Describe the theory of operations when AC as
a L2 switch or gateway  Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
 Describe the methods of AP management  List the common fault of WLAN
 Describe the AP boot sequence  Describe common fault troubleshooting of

WLAN
Duration
 Configure Basic Attributes of AR G3 WLAN 3 working days
 Upgrade AR G3 WLAN and AP Class Size
 List the PoE components
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe PoE budget
 Configure the equipment interface of POE
98
3.9.7 WLAN Planning and Design Training
Training Path  Describe the development process of

encryption techniques
WLAN Planning and Design  Describe the development of authentication
Lecture, Hands-on exercise, techniques
OWL0E Case-study 5d
 Use protocol analyzer software
Target Audience
 Describe authentication architecture of WPA
Planners and Designers  Describe AAA basic principle
Administrators  Configure WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)
Prerequisites  Configure Radius filter attribute and
management authority between users
 List extended security technology that Huawei
WLAN supports
 HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge
 Configure various security authentication
Objectives
techniques in AC
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe scenarios of Huawei outdoor WLAN
be able to: deployment
 Describe the basic principles of WLAN  List Huawei outdoor AP models and their
designing features
 Describe the basic process of WLAN designing  Describe dBi and antenna pattern
 List Huawei WLAN devices  Choose the right outdoor antenna
 Differentiate the application features of different  Describe the basic concepts of WDS
network modes  List the common applications of WDS
 Use WLAN planner to design WLAN  Use WDS configuration command
 Describe the application features of small and  List the basic protocols for wireless network
medium-sized enterprise WLAN management
 List the common used WLAN deployment  Use NTP protocol and syslog protocol to
modes of small and medium-sized enterprise configure time of AC
 Plan the VLAN\route\channel of small and  Describe the principle of SNMP protocol
medium-sized enterprise WLAN  Configure the SNMP parameters of AC
 Describe the application features of large-scale  Use eSight to discover devices
enterprise WLAN  Use eSight wizard to configure WLAN
 List the common used WLAN deployment  Use eSight to detect WLAN devices
modes of large-scale enterprise  Use eSight to manage AP
 Design WLAN HA feature  Configure WLAN wireless service-set
 Design WLAN voice  Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
 Design WLAN expandability feature Duration
 Design WLAN advanced security feature
5 working days
 Design outdoor WLAN
Class Size
 Estimate the advantages and disadvantages of
WLAN Network Design approach Min 6, Max 12
 List security threat types of WLAN
99
3.10 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
3.10.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

VRP System Operation
be able to:
ODA02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe ME60 product hardware structure
 Describe ME60-X series products hardware
structure
ME60 Product Introduction  Describe ME60 product feature
 Describe the VRP system structure
ODB01 Lecture, LVC 0.5d
 Describe the basic configuration and
commands
 Upgrade VRP system
ME60 Product Routine Maintenance
 Configure the VRP user logging authentication
ODB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Configure FTP service

1d
 Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP
system
Target Audience
 Describe basic BRAS technologies
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer  Describe ME60 product routine maintenance
 A basic understanding of data communication 2 working days

 A general understanding of telecom network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
100
3.10.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
A general understanding of routing basics
Objectives
ME60 Product Introduction
ODB01 Lecture, LVC 0.5d be able to:
 Describe ME60 product hardware structure
 Describe ME60-X series products hardware
ME60 Routing Features Operation and structure
Troubleshooting
 Describe ME60 product feature
ODB05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features
 Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
 Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol
ME60 BRAS Features Operation and
features
Troubleshooting
ODB06 4d  Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe RADIUS protocol principle
 Describe DHCP protocol principle
ME60 L2TP Features Operation and  Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle
Troubleshooting  Describe ME60 PPP service features and
ODB07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
realization
 Describe ME60 IP service features and
realization
ME60 Multicast Features Operation and  Describe ME60 leased line service feature and
Troubleshooting
realization
 Describe ME60 BRAS service features
troubleshooting
 Configure ME60 PPP service features
ME60 QoS Features Operation and
Troubleshooting  Configure ME60 IP service features
ODB09 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Configure ME60 leased line service feature
 Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization
 Configure ME60 L2TP feature
ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features  Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization
Operation and Troubleshooting
 Configure ME60 QoS feature
 Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization
 Configure ME60 RUI feature
Target Audience
Duration
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance engineer
10 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
At least one year of experiences in the operation or
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance of data communication equipment
A general understanding of TCP/IP
101
3.10.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and
ME60 IPTV Service Features realization
 Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
and realization
 Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization
Target Audience
 Describe ME60 IPTV solution features
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance engineer  Describe IPTV bear network multicast
Prerequisites deployment solutions
 Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature
Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance
 Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
Training”
Duration
A good understanding of datacom network
protocols 4 working days
Objectives Class Size
On completion of this program, the participants will Min 6, Max 12
102
3.10.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

ME60 Products Troubleshooting
be able to:
ODB20 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
 Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting
Target Audience  Perform ME60 leased line features

troubleshooting
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer or
 Perform ME60 multicast features
expert from technical supporting team
troubleshooting
Prerequisites
 Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting
Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Duration
Training”
5 working days
A good understanding of datacom network
Class Size
protocols
Min 6, Max 12
103
3.10.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives

iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration
be able to:
ODM06 Lecture, Demonstration 1d  Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
 Describe the directory structure of U2000
U2000 System Introduction  List the main functions of U2000
 Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
ONU01 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d performance management of U2000
 Perform the browse and setting operation for
alarm
U2000 Alarm and Performance  Perform the basic response operation for
Management
common alarm events
ONU02 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d
performance events
Target Audience
 Manage ME60 by using U2000
U2000 operator and maintainer  Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000
IP network routine monitor and maintainer Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Having the basic Knowledge of Huawei ME60 Class Size
product
Min 6, Max 12
104
3.11 PTN Products Training Programs
3.11.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training

PTN Products Hardware Description
be able to:
ODP03 Lecture, Demonstration 1d  Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

 Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure
 Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the
precautions
PTN Products Installation and
Commissioning  Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the
ODP05 Lecture, Demonstration 1d precautions
Duration
Target Audience
2 working days
PTN series installation and commissioning engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
 Having an overview of PTN products
applications
 Having an overview of telecommunications
105
3.11.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

be able to:
ODP03 Lecture, Demo 1d  Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

 Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site
PTN Products Field Maintenance maintenance

 Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance
ODP06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting
 Describe 950&910 troubleshooting
 Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in  Describe the tools and method of routine
NOC
maintenance in NOC
ODP07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Duration
Target Audience
2 working days
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance engineer Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
applications
 Having an overview of telecommunications
106
3.11.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

applications
ODP03 Lecture, Demo 1d  Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives

PTN Products Features Description be able to:
Lecture  Describe TCP&IP basic concepts

ODP04 1d
 Describe Ethernet basic principle
 Describe basic IP routing protocol works
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in  Describe MPLS basic concepts

NOC  Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure
ODP07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature
 Describe PTN 950&910 software feature
PTN Products Public Principle
 Describe PTN products PWE3 technology
ODP08 Lecture 2d  Describe PTN products control plane

 Describe PTN products QoS technology
 Describe PTN products protection technology
PTN Products Public Features  Describe PTN products packet clock technology
 Configure PTN products basic parameters
ODP09 Lecture, Demo 2d
 Configure PTN products interfaces
 Configure PTN products control plane
 Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel
PTN Products Basic Configuration
 Configure PTN products CES service
ODP10 Hands-on exercise, Demo 1d  Configure PTN products ATM service
 Configure PTN products E-Line service
 Configure PTN products E-LAN service
PTN Products Service Configuration  Configure PTN products E-AGGR service
 Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
ODP11 Hands-on exercise, Demo 2d
 Describe the tools and method of routine
maintenance in NOC
 Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
process
ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Duration
10 working days
Target Audience
Class Size
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer
Min 6, Max 12
107
3.11.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training

PTN Products Advanced Configuration
be able to:
ODP12 Hands-on exercise, Demo 2d  Configure PTN products QoS features

 Configure PTN products protection
 Deploy PTN products integrated services
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting  Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting

process
ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe PTN products alarm and performance
analysis
 Describe PTN products common
PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting troubleshooting sase
 Locate and eliminate PTN products faults
ODP14 Lecture, Case-study 2.5d
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 4, Max 12
 Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
108
3.11.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path  Plan the PTN network management and DCN

 Plan the equipment types according to the
PTN Network Planning and Design network requirement
 Plan the PTN equipment boards
ODP15 Lecture, Case-study 3d
 Plan the PTN network protections
Target Audience  Plan the PTN network synchronization

 Plan the PTN network QoS
PTN series network planning and design engineer
 Design the PTN network layers
Prerequisites
 Design the PTN network slots allocation
 Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance  Design the PTN equipment parameters
training  Design the MPLS tunnel parameters
Objectives  Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services
parameters
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the PTN network planning process 3 working days
 Collect the network requirements information Class Size
 Plan the PTN network layers
Min 4, Max 12
 Plan the PTN network services
109
3.12 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training
Programs
3.12.1 eSight Enterprise Junior Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the steps of accessing a resource

 Describe about physical resource management
eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and
functions
Maintenance
 Use link resource management functions
ONM1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Use electronic label management features
Target Audience
 Use about NE Explorer Describe
Operators and Maintainers  Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Monitoring Staffs  Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Administrators  Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Prerequisites  Describes the remote alarm notification
procedure
 Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
 A basic understanding of IP network
 Describe common operations for managing NE
Objectives
configuration files
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
be able to: files
 Describe the basic concepts of network  Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
management parameters
 Describe the network management functions Duration
 Describe the network management component
1 working day
 Describe the enterprise network overview
Class Size
 Describe the basic functions of eSight
 Describe the networking mode of eSight system Min 6, Max 12
 Describe eSight related indicators Describe

topology management
110
3.12.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training)
Training Path  Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

 Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and
Maintenance  Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describes the remote alarm notification

ONM11
procedure
Target Audience
 Describes the basic concepts of performance
Operators and Maintainers management
Monitoring Staffs  Describes the performance monitoring process
Administrators  Describes the ways to browsing performance
Prerequisites monitoring data
 Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
files
 Describe common operations for managing NE
configuration files
Objectives
 Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
On completion of this program, the participants will files
be able to:  Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up
 Describe the basic concepts of network parameters
management  Describe an overview of the functions provided
 Describe the network management functions by the smart configuration tool
 Describe the network management component  Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
 Describe the enterprise network overview template
 Describe the basic functions of eSight  Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
plan sheet
 Describe the networking mode of eSight system
 Describe the functions of Deployment record
 Describe eSight related indicators
management
 Describe the installation profile
 Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
 Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps
 Describe querying logs
 Master eSight license function and application
 Describe Lower-Layer NMS
 Describe the user authority control and managed
 Describe licenses management
domain management of eSight
 Describe backing up and restoring the database
 Describe topology management
 Describe NE packages management
 Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Duration
 Describe about physical resource management
functions 2 working days
 Use link resource management functions Class Size
 Use electronic label management features
Min 6, Max 12
 Use about NE Explorer
111
3.12.3 eSight WLAN Management Training

eSight WLAN Management
be able to:
ONM1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN
Target Audience  Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN
management
 Describe maintenance routine task of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
WLAN
Administrators
 Use eSight WLAN serve management to
Prerequisites manage WLAN equipment

0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
112
3.12.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training

eSight MPLS VPN Management
be able to:
ONM1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN
Target Audience  Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN
Automatic Discovery of eSight
 Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring
Monitoring Staffs
Services of eSight
Administrators
 Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
113
3.12.5 eSight SLA Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight SLA Management On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
ONM1D Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the functions and basic concepts of
Target Audience SLA of eSight
 Use the service management of SLA of eSight
 Use the task management of SLA of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
 Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight
Administrators
 Use the report of SLA of eSight
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
114
3.12.6 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight IPSec VPN Management On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
ONM1E Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN
Target Audience  Describe eSight IPSec VPN management
features
 Use eSight IPSec VPN management features
Monitoring Staffs
Duration
Administrators
Prerequisites 0.5 working days
Class Size
 A basic understanding of computer technology Min 6, Max 12
115
3.12.7 eSight Smart Report Management Training
Training Path
Objectives
eSight Smart Report Management
ONM1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d be able to:
Target Audience  Describe the basic functions of eSight Report
 Use eSight Report features
Duration
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators 0.5 working days
Prerequisites Class Size
 A general familiarity with PC operation system Min 6, Max 12

116
3.12.8 eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) On completion of this program, the participants will
Management Training
be able to:
ONM1G Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the basic concepts of NTA
Target Audience management
 Use eSight NTA management features
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA
Monitoring Staffs
management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size
 A basic understanding of IP network Min 6, Max 12
117
3.12.9 eSight Access Management Training

eSight Access Management
be able to:
ONM1H Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe eSight access service management
Target Audience features
 Use eSight access service management features
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight
Monitoring Staffs
access service management
Administrators
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
Class Size
 A basic understanding of IP network Min 6, Max 12
118
3.12.10 eSight Data Center Management Training

eSight Data Center Management
be able to:
ONM1I Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the needs of data center service
Target Audience management
 Use eSight data center service management
features
Monitoring Staffs
 Describe the application scenarios of eSight data
Administrators
center service management
Prerequisites
Duration

0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
119
3.13 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
3.13.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training

 Describe enterprise network design principles
Enterprise Network Design Outlines  Describe enterprise network design basic
process
ORS91 Lecture, Case-study 1d
 Analyze general enterprise requirements for
Target Audience
network design
Planners and Designers  Describe best practices of enterprise network
Administrators design
Operators and Maintainers  Describe Huawei enterprise network products
Prerequisites  Design general enterprise network
Duration
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar 1 working day
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
120
3.13.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training

Designing Enterprise Campus Network
be able to:
ORS92 Lecture, Case-study 1d  Describe concepts of campus network
Target Audience  Describe Huawei OneNet campus network
solution
 List common technologies in campus network
Administrators
 Describe Huawei OneNet campus business
solution
Prerequisites
 Choose appropriate products for campus
 A basic understanding of computer technology network
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar Duration

knowledge
1 working day
 A general experience in network design
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
121
3.13.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training

 Analyze of the general needs of enterprise
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise network construction
 Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN
ORS93 Lecture, Case-study 1d
 Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS
Target Audience
L3VPN architecture
Planners and Designers  Select the appropriate technology and solutions
Administrators for enterprise networking
Operators and Maintainers  Choose the appropriate product for enterprise
Prerequisites networking
Duration
 HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar 1 working day
 A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
122
3.13.4 Data Center Network Design Training
Training Path  List Principles of Data Center Network Design

 Design Data Center Network Architecture
Designing Data Center Network  Design Data Center Network Areas
Lecture 2d  Design Data Center Network Panels

ORS94
 Design Data Center Network Services
Target Audience
 Design Data Center Network Interconnection
Planners and Designers  Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Administrators  Describe Data Center WAN Optimization
Operators and Maintainers Solution
Prerequisites  Describe Data Center NetStream Solution
 List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center
Network
 Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center
knowledge
Network Solution
 A basic understanding of data center applications
 List Huawei CloudEngine Products
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Outline Data Center Network Overview
 Outline Trend of Data Center Network Min 6, Max 12
 Outline Data Center Network Solution
123
4 Enterprise Security Training Path
4.1 Security Certification Training Path
HCIE-Security(to be)
Expert
5d
HCNP-Security-CISN HCNP-Security-CTSS HCNP-Security-CSSN

Constructing Infrastructure Constructing Terminal Constructing Service
Professiona of Security Network Security System Security Network
l 5d 5d 5d
ssional
HCNA-Security-CBSN
Associate Constructing Basic
Security Network
5d
Elective Guide:
 Follow the paths to learn
124
4.2 Firewall Training Path
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
Low-and-middle Firewall Firewall Dual-system hot

Firewall Planning and Design
Installation and Commissioning backup Technology Training
Training 1d 2d
1d
Low-and-middle Firewall
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
Training
Training (include
Low-and-middle Firewall 3d
Installation and
Commissioning Training) 5d Firewall UTM Technical Topic
Training
High-end Firewall Installation 3d
and Commissioning Training
1d Firewall Advanced Technology
High-end Firewall Operation Training
and Maintenance Training 2d
(include High-end Firewall
Installation and
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training) Firewall IPV6 Technology
Commissioning Training 5d Training
1d
SVN Installation and
ASG Operation and Maintenance Commissioning Training
Training(include ASG Installation 1d
and Commissioning Training)3d
SVN Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
SVN Installation and
Commissioning Training)
3d
Fast-Track
Firewall Operation and
(Fast-Track) 3d
Technology
Firewall Technology VPN Technology
Fundamentals Fundamentals Training Fundamentals Training
Training 2d 3d
Elective Guide:
125
4.3 Security Management Software Training Path
Terminal security Planning TSM Installation and Optimal Terminal Security

and Design Training Commissioning Training Practice Training
1d 1d 2d
TSM Operation and Maintenance
Training (include TSM Installation
DSM Operation and Maintenance

Training
2d
Fast-Track
TSM/DSM Operation and
(Fast-Track) 2d
Technology Firewall Technology VPN Technology Terminal security Technology

Fundamentals Fundamentals Training Fundamentals Training Fundamentals Training
Training 2d 3d 1d
Elective Guide:
 TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals
126
4.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path
NIP Installation and

1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance

Training (include NIP Installation
Technology Intrusion Detection and

Fundamentals Prevention Technology
Training Fundamentals Training 1d
Elective Guide:
127
4.5 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path
Planning and Design Operation and Advanced

Training Maintenance Training Technology Training
DDoS Solution Operation and
3d
iSOC Solution Operation and

3d
UMA Solution Operation and

2d
Technology Firewall Technology

Fundamentals Fundamentals Training
Training 2d
Elective Guide:
128
5 Enterprise Security Training Courses
Enterprise Security Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Security Certification Training Programs
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Network Training
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
System Training
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Network
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
VPN Technology Fundamentals Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology

Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Security Advanced Technology Training Programs
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Firewall IPV6 Technology Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Firewall Training Programs
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning

Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Training
Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and
129
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance

Training(include High-end Firewall Installation and Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Installation and Commissioning Training)
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Security Management Software Training Programs
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
Firewall Planning and Design Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Terminal security Planning and Design Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
130
5.1 Security Certification Training Programs
5.1.1 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
Training Path  Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

 Understand key VPN technologies.
HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic
Security Network Training  Understand the classification and application of
VPN.
HC11031 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
Target Audience
 Understand the principles of L2TP.
Operators and Maintainers  Understand the application scenarios of
Administrators client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
Prerequisites  Grasp the configuration of L2TP.
 Grasp the principles and implementation of
 Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
GRE VPN.
 Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
 Grasp the security mechanism of GRE VPN.
knowledge
 Grasp the typical application and configuration
Objectives
of GRE VPN.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Understand the principles of the IPSec
be able to: technology.
 Understand OSI model  Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
 Understand TCP/IP principles  Understand the service process of IKE.
 Understand TCP/IP security issues  Grasp the application scenarios and
 Understand Common attack means configuration of IPSec VPN.
 Understand the definition and classification of  Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
firewalls. technology.
 Understand firewall Main features and  Understand the Basic functions and features of
technologies. the SVN product.
 Understand the Data forwarding process and  Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN.
basic configuration of firewalls.  Grasp firewall UTM basic technology
 Understand the functions and classification of  Understand what terminal security is.
ACLs.  Grasp the components and deployment of the
 Grasp firewall Security Policy and configuration TSM system.
 Grasp the principles of the NAT technology.  Understand the organizational management
 Grasp the application of NAT. and access control functions of the TSM
 Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls. system.
 Grasp firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic  Grasp the security policy configuration of the
technology TSM system.
 Grasp firewall User Management Duration
 Grasp firewall VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G
5 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 2
technology
working days
131
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
132
5.1.2 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
Training
Training Path  Understand advanced features and

configuration of IPSec VPN.
HCNP-Security CISN Constructing
Infrastructure of Security Network  Understand advanced features and
configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
 Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN
Target Audience
applications.
Operators and Maintainers  Understand Basic network attack.
Prerequisites  Understand Basic attack defense technologies
on firewalls.
 Be familiar with data communications network
 Understand Application and configuration of
elementary knowledge
basic attack defense technologies.
 Be familiar with network security elementary
 Understand the damages and mechanisms of
knowledge
major DDoS attacks.
 Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
 Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS
 Has network security equipment operation and
solution.
maintenance experience
 Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS
Objectives
solution.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Learn about the installation and configuration
be able to: of the anti-DDoS solution.
 Understand the implementation and  Troubleshooting of security policy.

configuration of firewall packet fragmentation.  Troubleshooting of NAT technology.
 Understand the implementation and  Troubleshooting of attack defense.
configuration of firewall IP CAR.  Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
 Understand the implementation and  Troubleshooting of HA technology.
configuration of firewall DHCP Snooping.  Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
 Understand Dual-system hot backup principle  Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
and configuration.  Troubleshooting of GRE VPN.
 Understand IP-link principle and configuration.  Troubleshooting of SSL VPN.
 Understand Eth-Trunk principle and Duration
configuration
 Understand Link-group principle and
working days
configuration.
Class Size
 Learn about the technology principles of virtual
firewall. Min 6, Max 12
 Master virtual firewall configuration methods.
 Know virtual firewall technology applications.
133
5.1.3 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training
Training Path  Understand the authorization modes of several

types of service resources.
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing
Terminal Security System  Learn about the terminal security solution
design.
 Learn about the functions of and collaboration
Target Audience
between the management layer, service layer,
Operators and Maintainers control layer, and user layer.
Prerequisites  Learn about how to complete the availability

design of a solution.
 Understand that terminal security is
service-oriented.
 Learn about the importance of organization in
knowledge
the terminal security system.
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
 Learn about the relationship between terminal
 Be familiar with OS. security management and technology.
 Be familiar with 802.1X access control  Understand the principles of maintaining the
tecnology. terminal security system.
Objectives  Learn about how to maintain the terminal
On completion of this program, the participants will security system.
be able to:  Describe the common fault in TSM system.
 Understand the current situation of terminal  Perform success troubleshooting for Hardware
security. TSM system implementations.
 Understand the background of terminal  Utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting

security. security implementations.
 Understand the multidimensional defense  Perform success troubleshooting for Hardware

system as a terminal security solution. SACG implementations.
 Understand the relationship among the five Duration

elements.
 Understand the concepts and components of working days
identity authentication.
Class Size
 Understand the implementation mechanism of
security policies during authentication Min 6, Max 12
 Understand the implementation principles of

multiple access control devices.
134
5.1.4 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training
Training Path tools for detecting viruses

 Understand major antivirus technologies for
HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing
Service Security Network gateways
 Understand the application of antivirus
technologies for gateways
Target Audience
 Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering
Operators and Maintainers technology.
Prerequisites  Describe common WEB risk.
 Understand the key technology of Web filtering.
 Understand the Web filtering application
scenario.
 Understand the basic concept of spam
knowledge
 Understand the generation and harm of spam
 Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
 Has network security equipment operation and
 Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei.
maintenance experience
 Describe background of deep packet inspect.
Objectives
 Understand the main DPI technology.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Understand the DPI application scenario.
be able to:  Troubleshooting of IPS
 Understand the basic knowledge of information  Troubleshooting of AV
security.
 Troubleshooting of URL filtering
 Understand the background of content security
 Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
products.
 Troubleshooting of deep packet inspect.
 Understand the main technologies used for
Duration
content security.
 Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion 5 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 2
prevention technology. working days
 Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion Class Size
prevention application scenario.
Min 6, Max 12
 Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.
 Learn about virus signatures and the common
135
5.2 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
5.2.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
Training  Understand the functions and classification of

Path ACLs.
 Grasp Interface-based packet filtering scenario
Firewall Elementary Knowledge
and configuration
FW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Grasp Interzone packet filtering scenario and
configuration
 Grasp the principles of the NAT technology.
Basic Firewall Technology  Grasp the application of NAT.
 Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls.
FW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Grasp the basic VLAN technology.
Target Audience  Grasp SA and E1 WAN interfacing
technologies.
 Grasp the basic ADSL technology.
Administrators
 Grasp WLAN and 3G technologies.
Duration
Prerequisites
working days
Class Size
knowledge

be able to:
136
5.2.2 VPN Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path  Understand the application scenarios of

client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
Basic VPN Technology  Grasp the configuration of L2TP.
 Grasp the principles and implementation of GRE
FW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
VPN.
Target Audience
 Grasp the security mechanism of GRE VPN.
Operators and Maintainers  Grasp the typical application and configuration of
Administrators GRE VPN.
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Understand the principles of the IPSec
Prerequisites technology.
 Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
 Understand the service process of IKE.
 Grasp the application scenarios and configuration
knowledge
of IPSec VPN.
Objectives
 Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
On completion of this program, the participants will technology.
be able to:  Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN.
 Understand the concept and functions of VPN. Duration
 Understand key VPN technologies.
 Understand the classification and application of
working days
VPN.
Class Size
 Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
 Understand the principles of L2TP. Min 6, Max 12
137
5.2.3 Terminal security Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path  Be familiar with OS.

Objectives
Basic Terminal Security Technology
SS01 Lecture, 1d be able to:
Target Audience  Understand the background of terminal security.
 Understand TSM System Architecture
 Understand TSM System Functions
 Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of TSM
Administrators
System Application
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
knowledge Min 6, Max 12
138
5.2.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology Fundamentals Training
Basic Intrusion Detection and Prevention On completion of this program, the participants will
Technology be able to:
NI01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Understand the concept of Intrusion detection
Target Audience and Intrusion prevention
 Understand Intrusion detection technology
 Understand Intrusion prevention technology
 Understand the application of Intrusion detection
Administrators
technology
Prerequisites
 Understand the application of Intrusion
 Be familiar with PC operation system prevention technology
 Be familiar with data communications network Duration

1 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.3
working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
139
5.3 Security Advanced Technology Training Programs
5.3.1 Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Training

 Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology
principle
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup

FW0A 2d
Basic Networking and Configuration
Target Audience
 Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Operators and Maintainers Backup Typical Networking.
Prerequisites  Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Duration
 Be familiar with data communications network 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1
elementary knowledge working days
140
5.3.2 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
Training Path  Understand Advanced features and

configuration of IPSec VPN.
Firewall VPN Technical Topic  Understand Advanced features and
configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
FW0B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN
Target Audience applications.
Operators and Maintainers  Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
Prerequisites  Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.

 Troubleshooting of GRE VPN.
Duration
elementary knowledge 3 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1.5
 Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge working days
be able to:
141
5.3.3 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
Training Path  Understand major antivirus technologies for

gateways
Firewall UTM Technical Topic  Understand the key technology of Web filtering.
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Understand the mechanism of anti-spam

FW0C 3d
 Understand the main DPI technology.
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting of IPS
Operators and Maintainers  Troubleshooting of AV
Prerequisites  Troubleshooting of URL filtering
 Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
 Troubleshooting of Internet behavior
management.
Duration
Objectives
working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the basic knowledge of UTM
 Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion Min 6, Max 12
prevention technology.
142
5.3.4 Firewall Advanced Technology Training
Training Path  Describe Advanced Firewall Security Features

 Understand Firewall Reliability Technology
Advanced Firewall Security Features  Understand Virtual Firewall Technology
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Understand Basic Attack Defense

FW0D
Technologies on Firewall
Target Audience
 Troubleshooting of attack defense.
Operators and Maintainers  Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1
 Be familiar with data communications network working days
elementary knowledge Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
143
5.3.5 Firewall IPV6 Technology Training

 Grasp IPV6 basic Technology
Firewall IPV6 Technology  Understand Firewall IPv6 over IPv4/ 6RD
Lecture, Hands-on exercise tunnel

FW0E 2d
 Understand Firewall ACL6 accelerate
Target Audience
/DHCPv6/IPv6 DNS features
Operators and Maintainers  Understand Firewall PPPoE Client
Prerequisites /NAT64/ND-RA/Policy6 features
Duration
 Be familiar with data communications network 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.5
elementary knowledge working days
144
5.3.6 Optimal Terminal Security Practice Training
Training Path  Understand the importance of organization in

the terminal security system.
Optimal Terminal Security Practice  Understand the relationship between terminal
security management and technology.
SS03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Understand the principles of maintaining the
Target Audience
terminal security system.
Operators and Maintainers  Understand how to maintain the terminal
Prerequisites security system.
 Describe the common fault in TSM system.
 Perform success troubleshooting for Hardware
TSM system implementations.
 Utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting
knowledge
security implementations.
 Perform success troubleshooting for Hardware
 Be familiar with Terminal security elementary
SACG implementations.
knowledge
Duration
 Be familiar with OS.
 Be familiar with 802.1X elementary knowledge 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1
Objectives working days

Class Size
be able to: Min 6, Max 12
 Understand that terminal security is

service-oriented.
145
5.4 Firewall Training Programs
5.4.1 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product On completion of this program, the participants will
Overview be able to:
FW11 Lecture, 0.5d  Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000
firewall
 Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic
USG2000/5000 firewall
Installation and Configuration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the application scenario of
FW12
Target Audience
 Describe the hardware Installation and
Installers and Commissioning Staffs maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the basic configuration of
Prerequisites USG2000/5000 firewall
 Describe the basic WEB management of
 Be familiar with PC operation system
Duration
 Be familiar with network security elementary 1 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.2
knowledge working days
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
146
5.4.2 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path  Grasp the principles of the NAT technology.

 Grasp the application of NAT
Basic Firewall Technology
 Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Grasp the basic VLAN technology

FW02
 Grasp SA and E1 WAN interfacing
technologies
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product  Grasp the basic ADSL technology
Overview
 Grasp WLAN and 3G technologies
FW11 Lecture, 0.5d
 Describe the basic knowledge of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic  Describe the function and features of

Installation and Configuration USG2000/5000 firewall
FW12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the application scenario of
 Describe the hardware Installation and
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Operation
and Maintenance maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
FW13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the basic configuration of

Target Audience
 Describe the basic WEB management of
Operators and Maintainers USG2000/5000 firewall
Prerequisites  Describe the upgrade method of
 Understand the routine maintenance of
 Describe the typical network configuration of
knowledge
 Describe the networking and configuration of
USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
Objectives
 Describe the troubleshooting method of
On completion of this program, the participants will USG2000/5000 firewall
be able to: Duration
 Understand the functions and classification of
ACLs.
working days
Class Size
and configuration
 Grasp Interzone packet filtering scenario and Min 6, Max 12
configuration
147
5.4.3 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Product On completion of this program, the participants will
FW14 Lecture, 0.5d  Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's
high-end series firewall
 Describe the software function of Huawei's
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Basic
Installation and Configuration high-end series firewall
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the performance parameter of

FW15
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Target Audience
 Master USG9300/9500 Hardware Installation
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Master USG9300/9500 Basic Configuration
Prerequisites
 Be familiar with PC operation system working days
 Be familiar with data communications network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
148
5.4.4 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include High-end
Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path ACLs.

Basic Firewall Technology
and configuration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Grasp Interzone packet filtering scenario and

FW02
configuration
 Grasp the principles of the NAT technology
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Product  Grasp the application of NAT
Overview
 Grasp the NAT configuration of firewalls
FW14 Lecture, 0.5d
 Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Basic  Describe the software function of Huawei's

Installation and Configuration high-end series firewall
FW15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the performance parameter of
 Master USG9300/9500 Hardware Installation
USG9300/9500 Series Firewall Operation
and Maintenance  Master USG9300/9500 Basic Configuration
FW16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Master USG9300/9500 Basic Function

Features and Configurations
Target Audience
 Master USG9300/9500 Routine Maintenance
Operators and Maintainers  Master Basic Principles of USG9300/9500
Prerequisites Maintenance
 Master USG9300/9500 Information Collection
 Master USG9300/9500 Troubleshooting Ability
elementary knowledge Duration
 Be familiar with network security elementary 5 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 2
knowledge working days
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the functions and classification of
149
5.4.5 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's

Firewall Series Product Overview  Describe the software function of Huawei's
FW17 Lecture, 1d
 Describe the performance parameter of
Firewall Series Product Operation and  Describe the upgrade method of Firewall Series
Maintenance Product
FW18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the typical network configuration of
Target Audience USG2000/5000 firewall
 Describe the networking and configuration of
USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
Prerequisites
 Master USG9300/9500 Basic Function Features
 Be familiar with PC operation system and Configurations
 Be familiar with data communications network  Master Basic Principles of Firewall Series
elementary knowledge Product Maintenance
 Be familiar with network security elementary  Master Firewall Series Product Information
knowledge Collection
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge  Master Firewall Series Product Troubleshooting
Objectives Ability
Duration
be able to: 3 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1
 Describe the basic knowledge of working days
USG2000/5000 firewall Class Size
 Describe the function and features of
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the application scenario of
150
5.4.6 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path  Understand the hardware architecture and

Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Product Overview
 Understand the main hardware component of
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
FW31 Lecture, 0.5d
 Understand the software architecture of
SVN Product Basic Installation and  Understand the application environment of
Configuration
FW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Understand the application scenario of
Target Audience SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the hardware installation of
 Understand the physical environment
Administrators
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Prerequisites
 Describe the basics configuration of
 Be familiar with PC operation system SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

working days
knowledge
Class Size

be able to:
151
5.4.7 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and
Training Path Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

 Understand the main hardware component of
SSL VPN Technology SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Understand the software architecture of

FW05 1d
 Understand the application environment of
SVN Product Overview SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Understand the application scenario of
FW31 Lecture, 0.5d SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the hardware installation of
SVN Product Basic Installation and
Configuration  Understand the physical environment
FW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the basics configuration of
SVN Product Operation and Maintenance
 Understand the Solution deployment
Lecture, Hands-on exercise SVN2000/SVN500 Device

FW33 1d
 Describe the high-level function configuration
Target Audience
of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Operators and Maintainers  Understand the System Status of
Prerequisites SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login
Manage page
 Understand the Common faults and positioning
method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
 Understand the troubleshooting method of
knowledge
Duration
Objectives
working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
technology Min 6, Max 12
 Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN
 Understand the hardware architecture and
152
5.4.8 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training

 Describe Network Orientation of ASG
ASG Product Overview
 Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
Lecture, 0.5d  Understand Function Feature of ASG

FW41
 Know the Typical Application of ASG
 Describe ASG login method
ASG Product Basic Installation and  Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Configuration
 Describe ASG Installation Procedure
FW42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG
Target Audience
Manager
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Understand Overview of Updating the
Operators and Maintainers signature database on ASG
Administrators  Understand ASG Online Updating for the

signature database
Prerequisites
 Understand ASG Local Updating for the
 Be familiar with PC operation system signature database
working days
knowledge
153
5.4.9 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and
Training Path  Understand Overview of Updating the

signature database on ASG
ASG Product Overview  Understand ASG Online Updating for the
signature database
FW41 Lecture, 0.5d
 Understand ASG Local Updating for the
signature database
ASG Product Basic Installation and  Describe the ASG product feature Introduction
Configuration and Implementation of ASG
FW42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the management module function of
ASG
 Understand ASG Manager Function
ASG Product Operation and Maintenance
Configuration
FW43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the Alarm Management function of
Target Audience ASG Manager

 Describe the configuration of Alarm
Operators and Maintainers Management function in ASG Manager
Prerequisites  Describe ASG Maintenance tool
 Be familiar with PC operation system  Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance
 Be familiar with data communications network  Describe ASG Software Maintenance

elementary knowledge  Describe ASG Software Upgrade
 Be familiar with network security elementary  Understand ASG Manager Routine
knowledge Maintenance and Main method
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge  Understand ASG Manager Software Upgrade
Objectives  Understand ASG Manager fault

finding in routine maintenance
 Understand the basic troubleshooting
be able to:
knowledge
 Describe Network Orientation of ASG
 Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting
 Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
method
 Understand Function Feature of ASG
Duration
 Know the Typical Application of ASG
 Describe ASG login method 3 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.7
working days
 Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Class Size
 Describe ASG Installation Procedure
 Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG Min 6, Max 12
Manager
154
5.5 Security Management Software Training Programs
5.5.1 TSM Installation and Commissioning Training

TSM Product Overview
be able to:
SS11 Lecture, 0.5d  Describe the background of TSM system
 Describe TSM system function and system
structure.
TSM Product Basic Installation and
Configuration  Describe the function of each component.
SS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Understand Typical Scenarios of TSM System
Application
Target Audience
 Describe TSM System Performance index
Operators and Maintainers  Understand TSM Installation Planning and
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Preparations
Administrators  Be familiar with TSM Installation Process
Prerequisites  Be familiar with TSM system Basic Operation
Duration
elementary knowledge 1 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.2
 Be familiar with network security elementary working days
Min 6, Max 12
 Be familiar with Terminal security elementary
knowledge
155
5.5.2 TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM Installation and

Basic Terminal Security Technology
be able to:
SS01 Lecture, 1d  Understand the background of terminal security.
 Understand TSM System Architecture
 Understand TSM System Functions
TSM Product Overview
 Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of TSM
SS11 Lecture, 0.5d System Application

 Describe the background of TSM system
 Describe TSM system function and system
TSM Product Basic Installation and structure.
Configuration
 Describe the function of each component.
SS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Understand Typical Scenarios of TSM System
Application
 Describe TSM System Performance index
TSM Product Operation and Maintenance
 Understand TSM Installation Planning and
Preparations
 Be familiar with TSM Installation Process
Target Audience
 Be familiar with TSM system Basic Operation
Operators and Maintainers  Understand Functional modules of TSM
Prerequisites  Understand TSM System Technology and
Application
 Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of
TSM
Duration
knowledge
 Be familiar with OS. 3 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.7
 Be familiar with Terminal security elementary working days
Min 6, Max 12
156
5.5.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training

DSM Product Overview
be able to:
SS21 Lecture, 0.5d  Describe the background of DSM system
 Describe DSM system function and system
structure.
DSM Product Basic Installation and
Configuration  Describe Typical Scenarios of DSM System
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Application
SS22
 Describe DSM System Performance index
 Understand DSM Installation Planning and
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance Preparations
 Be familiar with DSM Installation Process
 Be familiar with DSM system Basic Operation
Target Audience  Understand Functional modules of DSM

 Understand DSM System Technology and
Application
Administrators DSM
 Be familiar with OS. 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.7

Min 6, Max 12
 Be familiar with document security elementary
knowledge
157
5.5.4 TSM/DSM Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path knowledge

Objectives
TSM Product Operation and Maintenance
SS13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
 Understand Functional modules of TSM
 Understand TSM System Technology and
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance
Application
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of

SS23
TSM
Target Audience
 Understand Functional modules of DSM
Operators and Maintainers  Understand DSM System Technology and
Prerequisites Application
DSM
Duration
knowledge 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 0.7
Min 6, Max 12
 Be familiar with 802.1X access control
 Be familiar with document security elementary
158
5.6 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
5.6.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path  Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS

Device
NIP Product Overview  Understand the hardware architecture of NIP
Device
NI11 Lecture, 0.5d
 Understand the hardware specifications of NIP
Device
NIP Product Basic Installation and  Understand the hardware main component of
Configuration NIP Device
NI12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Understand the software architecture of NIP
Target Audience  Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Device
 Understand the hardware installation of NIP
Device
Administrators
 Understand the physical environment of NIP
Prerequisites
Device
 Be familiar with PC operation system  Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
 Be familiar with network security elementary Duration
knowledge
working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
 Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
159
5.6.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and
Training Path  Understand the hardware architecture of NIP

Device
NIP Product Overview
 Understand the hardware specifications of NIP
Device
NI11 Lecture, 0.5d
 Understand the hardware main component of
NIP Device
NIP Product Basic Installation and  Understand the software architecture of NIP
Configuration  Understand the software application scenario of
NI12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d NIP Device
 Understand the hardware installation of NIP
Device
NIP Product Operation and Maintenance
 Understand the physical environment of NIP
NI13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d Device
 Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
Target Audience  Grasp Application control of IPS Device
Operators and Maintainers  Grasp Application control of IDS Device
Prerequisites  Grasp Threat Prevention of IPS Device

 Grasp Threat Prevention of IDS Device
 Grasp Typical Application scene of IPS Device
 Grasp Typical Application scene of IDS Device
knowledge
 Grasp the maintenance operations of NIP Device
 Grasp the software patches of NIP Device
Objectives
 Grasp the Troubleshooting of NIP Device
be able to:
 Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
working days
 Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Class Size
 Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS
Device Min 6, Max 12
160
5.7 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
5.7.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe Principle of DDoS attack and DDoS

defense technology
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance  Understand network Design of management
Training
Center
SU11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Understand network Design of Detecting Center
Target Audience  Understand network Design of Cleaning Center
 Understand mirroring traffic, monitor network
traffic and redirection traffic in DDoS Solution
Prerequisites
 Master basic configuration and system
 Be familiar with PC operation system management
 Be familiar with data communications network  Master DDoS Product Management and
elementary knowledge Customer Management
 Be familiar with network security elementary  Master DDoS Solution Report management and
knowledge System maintenance
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Duration
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will working days
 Describe Huawei DDos Product Component
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe DDos Network Orientation and Typical
Application
161
5.7.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Master iSOC System architecture and system

component
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance  Master iSOC main function feature
Training
 Know the iSOC Application Network
 Know the iSOC installation process
Target Audience  Master iSOC initial deployment
 Master iSOC basic Function configuration
 Know the Routine Maintenance task
Prerequisites
 Master quick solve issue in iSoc system fault
 Be familiar with PC operation system  Know the information collection in basic fault
 Be familiar with data communications network  Master Troubleshooting Process
elementary knowledge  Know Common fault in iSoc
 Be familiar with network security elementary Duration
knowledge
working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe iSOC Orientation and product value
162
5.7.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

 Describe UMA orientation and product value
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance  Master UMA system architecture and system
Training
component
 Master UMA main function feature
Target Audience  Know the UMA application network
 Master UMA initial configuration
 Master UMA basic function configuration
Prerequisites
 Know Common fault finding in UMA
Duration
elementary knowledge 2 working days, Including Hands-on exercise 1
working days
 Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Min 6, Max 12

Objectives
163
5.8 Security Planning and Design Training Programs
5.8.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training

Firewall Planning and Design
be able to:
FW04 Lecture, 1d  Understand Huawei Security Concept
Target Audience  Understand Huawei Security Competence
Center
 Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
 Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security
Prerequisites
Products Application and Solution
 Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge Duration
1 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
164
5.8.2 Terminal security Planning and Design Training
Training Path  Understand the concepts and components of

identity authentication.
Terminal security Planning and Design  Understand the implementation mechanism of
security policies during authentication
SS02 Lecture, 1d
 Understand the implementation principles of
Target Audience
multiple access control devices.
Planners and Designers  Understand the authorization modes of several
Operators and Maintainers types of service resources.
Prerequisites  Learn about the terminal security solution

design.
 Learn about the functions of and collaboration
between the management layer, service layer,
 Be familiar with network security elementary control layer, and user layer.
knowledge
 Learn about how to complete the availability
 Be familiar with Terminal security elementary design of a solution.
knowledge
Duration
 Be familiar with OS. 1 working days
 Be familiar with 802.1X elementary knowledge Class Size

be able to:
165
6 Enterprise IT Training Path
6.1 Storage Certification Training Path
HCIE-Storage(to be)
Expert
5d
HCNP-Storage-SSAM HCNP-Storage-CUSN HCNP-Storage-CDPS

Professional SAN Storage Advanced Constructing Unified Constructing Data
Management 5d Storage Network 5d Protection System 5d
HCNA-Storage-BSSN
Associate Building the Structure of
Storage Network 5d
Elective Guide
 Follow the path to learn.
166
6.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Path
HCIE-Cloud(to be)
Expert
5d
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS
Professional Building Cloud Computing
Solution Training 5d
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP
Associate Building Cloud
Computing Platform 5d
Elective Guide
 Follow the path to learn
167
6.3 Unified Storage Training Path

Enterprise Storage Area

Training
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/ Storage Area Network(SAN)
Network(SAN) Design Training 68T)Storage Array Deployment and Advanced Technology Training
1d Management Training 1d
4d
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
2d
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T)
High-end Storage System
Deployment and Management
Training 4d
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage

System Deployment and
Management Training 4d
SNS Series (2120/5120) FC Switch

Product Deployment and
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage

VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage

Gateway System Deployment and
Technology Foundation Storage Technology Foundation

Training Training
1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include T series storage array HVS, SNS, Dorado, VIS6000T products and
technologies trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: centralized storage, backup, storage virtualization, disaster
recovery, cloud computing storage infrastructure and data center storage infrastructure.
 Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.
168
6.4 NAS and Data Protection Training Path

Enterprise Network Attached

Training Network Attached Storage (NAS)
N9000 Storage System
Network (NAS) Design Deployment and Management Advanced Technology Training
Training 1d Training 3d 1d
N8500V2 Clustered NAS

Enterprise Backup system VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library Backup Advanced Technology
and Network Design Training System Deployment and Training
1d Management Training 3d 1d
HDP3500E Backup System

Training 3d
Technology Foundation Storage Technology

Foundation Training
Training
1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include N9000, N8500, VTL6900 and HDP3500E products and technologies
trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: file sharing, file-level data centralized storage and management,
unstructured data backup and management, file-level DST, file system backup and disaster recovery.
169
6.5 Cloud Storage Training Path

Training
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud
Storage Deployment and
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud
Storage Deployment and
Management Training(Fast-Track)
2d
UDS Mass Storage

Training 4d
Technology Foundation Cloud Storage Technology

Training Foundation Training
1天
1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include cloud storage CSS, CSE, UDS products and technologies trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: mass data storage and backup solution, storage virtualization
solutions, data center cloud storage solutions.
 The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background and no need of experiment.
170
6.6 Server Products Training Path
Training
RH Series Rack Server
Training 1d
X6000 Series Server

Training 1d
E6000 Series Blade Server

Training 1d
E9000 Series Blade Server

Training 1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include RH series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.
171
6.7 Cloud Computing Training Path
Training
Mini VDI Deployment and
Management Training
2d
Desktop Cloud Solution

Training 5d
FusionCube Solution
Training 3d
FusionShpere Solution
Training 3d
Technology Foundation Cloud Computing Technologies

Training Training
1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include Mini VDI, Desktop Cloud Solution, FusionCube and FusionShpere Solution
trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: small and medium-sized enterprises Mini (M1) desktop cloud,
large-scale integrated desktop cloud solution.
 Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.
172
6.8 Data Center Training Path
Training
Enterprise Data Center Network Micro DC Deployment and Enterprise Data Center
Design Training Management Training Architecture Training
2d 1d 1d
Enterprise Data Center Security ManageOne Solution

Design Training Deployment and Management
1d Training 2d
Enterprise Data Center Disaster

Recovery and Backup Design
Training 2d
Technology
IP Technology Foundation Firewall Technology Foundation Storage Technology
FoundationTraining (Fast-Track) Training (In13 Security Foundation Training
Training 13 IP Programs)
(In 3d Programs) 2d 1d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include Data Center Solution products trainings.
 The training programs cover the following scenarios: Micro DC solution and large-scale data center solutions.
173
7 Enterprise IT Training Courses
Enterprise IT Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Storage Certification Training Programs
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Ⅱ 5 6~12

Network Training
HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced Ⅲ 5 6~12

Management Training
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Ⅲ 5 6~12

Network Training
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Ⅲ 5 6~12

Training
Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Ⅱ 5 6~12

Training
HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Ⅲ 5 6~12

Training
IT Technology Foundation Training Programs
Storage Technology Foundation Training Ⅱ 1 6~12
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training Ⅱ 1 6~12
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training Ⅱ 1 6~12
IT Advanced Technology Training Programs
Storage Area Network(SAN)Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6~12
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology 6~12

Ⅲ 1
Training
Backup Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6~12
Cloud Computing Security Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6~12
Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training Ⅲ 1 6~12
Unified Storage Training Programs
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Ⅱ 4 6~12
174
Deployment and Management Training
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array 6~12

Ⅱ 2
Deployment and Management Training (Fast-Track)
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System 6~12

Ⅱ 4
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and 6~12

Ⅱ 4
Management Training
SNS Series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment 6~12

Ⅱ 1
and Management Training
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment 6~12

Ⅱ 2
and Management Training
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System 6~12

Ⅱ 3
NAS and Data Protection Training Programs
N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅱ 3
Training
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and 6~12

Ⅱ 3
Management Training
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and 6~12

Ⅱ 3
Management Training
HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅱ 3
Training
Cloud Storage Training Programs
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and 6~12

Ⅲ 4
Management Training
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and 6~12

Ⅲ 2
Management Training(Fast-Track)
UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training Ⅲ 4 6~12
Server Training Programs
RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅱ 1
Training
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅱ 1
Training
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Ⅱ 1 6~12
175
Training
E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅱ 1
Training
Cloud Computing Training Programs
Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training Ⅲ 2 6~12
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅲ 5
Training
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅲ 3
Training
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅲ 3
Training
Data Center Training Programs
Micro DC Deployment and Management Training Ⅲ 1 6~12
ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

Ⅲ 2
Training
IT Design Training Programs
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training Ⅳ 1 6~12
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design 6~12

Ⅳ 1
Training
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training Ⅳ 1 6~12
Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training Ⅳ 2 6~12
Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training Ⅳ 1 6~12
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup 6~12

Ⅳ 2
Design Training
176
7.1 Storage Certification Training Programs
7.1.1 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training
Training Path way, common RAID principle, feature and

different RAID application scenario
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-
 Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge
Building the Structure of Storage Network)
and key technology
OHC11091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
 Know NAS system basal structure and concept
Target Audience  Master multipath technology and host
connection basal technology and application
Those who want to be storage engineer
 Understand Huawei all series storage product
Those who want to achieve HCNA-Storage
feature and main application
certification
 Master SAN storage array product function,
hardware, interface, network and typical
Managers
application
 Master storage array and mapping configuration
Prerequisites on ISM
 Master SAN storage product routine
 Know basal network knowledge
maintenance and troubleshooting
 Know computer basal knowledge
 Be able to build FC-SAN or IP-SAN storage
 Know OS basal knowledge
network; be able to manage and maintain SAN
Objectives
storage system and network
be able to:
5 working days
 Know storage system and network basal
Class Size
concept, structure and component
 Know RAID basal concept, data construction Min 6, Max 12
177
7.1.2 HCNP-Storage-SSAM SAN Storage Advanced Management Training
Training Path application

 Know storage data reliability and operation
HCNP-SSAM Huawei Certified Network Professional-
continuity technology
SAN Storage Advanced Management
 Understand storage performance factor and
OHC12091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
optimization
Target Audience  Know storage system management feature and
configuration
Enterprise ICT technology management
 Know storage and main OS platform connection
personal and IT technology personal
and application
Those who hope to systemically learn and
 Master storage network redundancy technology
master storage technology and application,
and application
build information storage and data protection
 Master Virtual snapshot, LUN Copy, Replication
solution ability Maintainers
principle, plan, deployment and maintenance
Managers
 Master SAN storage system and network typical
scenario fault diagnosis and disposal method
Prerequisites
 Master storage system and network (SAN)
 Know server basal knowledge and application common technology and application; master
information storage system and SAN storage
 Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
solution plan, deployment, management and
 Understand storage system basal operation and
maintenance ability
technology
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to: Class Size
 Master SAN storage structure, component Min 6, Max 12

 Know storage data process and communication
protocol (SCSI, FC, iSCSI), principle and
178
7.1.3 HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training
Training Path  Know NAS and cluster structure, components,

key technology and principle.
HCNP-CUSN Huawei Certified Network Professional-
 Know CIFS, NFS network share protocol
Constructing Unified Storage Network
principle.
OHC12092Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
 Master cluster NAS system structure, network
Target Audience plan, deployment and file system resource
configuration.
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
 Master network storage virtualization system
and IT technology personal
structure, principle and deployment.
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
 Master N8000 tiered storage, file replication,
storage technology and application, build
file backup principle and configuration.
information storage and data protection solution
 Master cluster NAS system fault diagnosis and
ability Maintainers
disposal.
Managers
 Master VIS system principle, planning,
deployment and heterogeneous resources
Prerequisites
management.
 Know server basal knowledge and application  Master VIS fault diagnosis and disposal.
 Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology  Master cluster NAS, storage virtualization
 Understand main OS and DB operation and technology and application, be able to do
technology cluster NAS and storage virtualization solution

scheme plan, deploy, maintain and manage.
Objectives
Duration
be able to: 5 working days
 Know storage virtualization technology Class Size
classification and unified storage

Min 6, Max 12
characteristics and value
179
7.1.4 HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training
Training Path  Know backup and recovery system structure,

backup components, backup media, backup
HCNP-CDPS Huawei Certified Network
mode and strategy.
Professional- Constructing Data Protection System
 Know backup network, backup and recovery
OHC12093Lecture, Hands-on exercise, demo 5d
technology and application.
Target Audience  Master HDP, VTL backup system planning,
deployment and management.
Enterprise ICT technology management personal
 Know deduplication, CDP etc. technology
and IT technology personal
principle, configuration and application.
Those who hope to systemically learn and master
 Understand DR scheme, related technology and
storage technology and application, build information
scenarios.
storage and data protection solution ability
 Master backup system and network fault
Maintainers
diagnose and disposal method.
Managers
 Master backup and DR technology and
application; be able to plan, deploy and manage
Prerequisites
backup and recovery system and data protection
 Know server basal knowledge and application solution.
 Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology Duration
 Understand main OS and DB operation and

5 working days
technology
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
180
7.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Programs
7.2.1 HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training
Training Path  Describe AD technology
HCNA-BCCP Huawei Certified Network  Describe DNS technology

Associate-Building Cloud Computing Platform  Describe DHCP technology
Lecture, hands-on exercise 5d  Describe the features and concept of virtual

OHC1108
machine
1
Target Audience
 Describe the features and concept of virtual
Those who hope to become Cloud Computing network
engineers  Describe the features and concept of virtual
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-Cloud certificate storage
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the basic concept of storage
Administrators  Describe the RAID function of storage
Planners and designers  Describe the muti-path technology of storage
Prerequisites  Describe Huawei Cloud Computing solution

 Describe the hardware structure of Huawei Cloud
 Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
 Describe the software structure of Huawei Cloud
 Be familiar with server basic knowledge and
Computing solution
applications
 Describe the structure and configuration of
 Be familiar with network security basic
servers
knowledge and applications
 Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and
storage equipments
applications
Objectives
switches
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the configuration of TC
be able to:  Describe the structure and functions of
 Describe the evolution of Cloud Computing FusionCompute
 Describe the basic concept and features of Cloud  Describe the structure and functions of
Computing FusionManager
 Describe the values of Cloud Computing  Describe the structure and functions of
 Describe the advantages of Cloud Computing FusionAccess
technology  Master the creation of VM image
 Describe the deployment mode of Cloud  Master the creation and assignment of VM
Computing Duration
 Describe the business mode of Cloud Computing
5 working days
 Describe switching and routing technology
Class Size
 Describe VLAN technology
 Describe QoS technology Min 6, max 12
 Describe cluster technology
181
7.2.2 HCNP-Cloud-BCCS Building Cloud Computing Solution Training
Training Path technology
HCNP-BCCS Huawei Certified Network  Describe the features of application virtualization

Professional-Building Cloud Computing technology
Solution
 Describe the features of application automatic
OHC12081 Lecture, hands-on exercise 5d
deployment technology
Target Audience
 Describe the features of elastic application
Those who hope to become Cloud Computing technology
engineers  Describe the features of automatic thin
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud certificate provisioning technology
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the features of elastic load balance
Administrators technology
Planners and designers  Describe the features of elastic cloud technology

 Describe the features of virtualized private cloud
Prerequisites
technology
 Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and  Describe the features of cloud computing security
applications structure
 Be familiar with server basic knowledge and  Master the procedure of cloud computing project
applications design
 Be familiar with network security basic  Master the deployment of Huawei Cloud
knowledge and applications Computing solution
 Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and  Master the deployment and configuration of
applications servers
Objectives  Master the deployment and configuration of
storage equipments
be able to:  Master the deployment and configuration of
switches
 Describe Huawei Cloud Computing solution
 Master the installation and deployment of
 Describe the features of link clone technology
FusionComputer
 Describe the features of memory multiplexing
technology
FusionManager
 Describe the features of disaster recovery
technology
FusionAccess
 Describe the features of VM snapshot technology
 Describe the trouble-shooting procedure of
 Describe the features of VM migration technology
Huawei Cloud Computing solution
 Describe the features of resource online
Duration
scheduling technology
 Describe the features of resource dynamic 5 working days, including 2.5 days of hands-on
scheduling technology practice
 Describe the features of FusionStorage Class Size
distributed storage technology
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the features of GPU passing through
182
7.3 IT Technology Foundation Training Programs
7.3.1 Storage Technology Foundation Training
Training Path  Know RAID basal concept, data constructing,

common RAID principle, feature and different
Storage Technology Foundation
RAID application scenario
 Know FC-SAN and IP-SAN basal knowledge and
OST01 Lecture 1d
key technology
Target Audience  Know NAS system basal structure and concept
 Master multipath technology and host connection
basal technology and application
Prerequisites
 Understand Huawei all series storage product
 Know computer basal knowledge feature and main application
 Know OS basal knowledge Duration
Objectives
1 working day
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Know storage system and network basal concept,
structure and component
183
7.3.2 Cloud Storage Technology Foundation Training
Cloud Storage Technology Foundation On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OST02 Lecture 1d  Know Cloud storage technology principle
Target Audience  Know Cloud storage data organization

 Know Cloud storage architecture and principle
 Know Cloud storage application scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
 Know basal network knowledge
1 working day
 Know computer basal knowledge
Class Size
 Know OS basal knowledge
 Be familiar with storage technology Min 6, Max 12
184
7.3.3 Cloud Computing Technology Foundation Training
Training Path machine

 Describe the concept and technologies of virtual
Cloud Computing Technology Foundation
network
 Describe the concept and technologies of virtual
OCL01 Lecture 1d
storage
Target Audience
 Describe the basic concept of storage
Operators and Maintainers  Describe the protocols of storage
Administrators  Describe the RAID function of storage
Prerequisites  Describe the backup and redundancy technology
of storage
 Know basic knowledge of IT and data network
 Describe the hardware structure of
Objectives
SingleCLOUD
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the software structure of SingleCLOUD
 Describe the application scenario of cloud
1 working day
computing
Class Size
 Describe the key features of cloud computing
 Describe the concept and technologies of virtual Min 6, max 12
185
7.4 IT Advanced Technology Training Programs
7.4.1 Storage Area Network(SAN) Advanced Technology Training
Training Path  Know storage system development trend
Storage Area Network (SAN) Advanced  Know storage system common protocol and
Technology development trend
Lecture  Know SAN system reliability basal concept

OST0A 1d
 Know SAN reliability basal affecting factor
Target Audience
 Know SAN reliability improvement basal factor
Operators and Maintainers and method
Managers  Know storage system performance criterion and
Planners and Designers meaning
Prerequisites  Know storage system performance affecting

factor
 Know server basal knowledge and application
 Know storage system performance improvement
method
Duration
technology
Objectives 1 working day
Class Size
 Know storage system basal structure
186
7.4.2 Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced Technology Training
Network Attached Storage(NAS) Advanced On completion of this program, the participants will
Technology be able to:
OST0B Lecture 1d  Be familiar with NAS and Clustered architecture,
Target Audience component, technology and principle
 Be familiar with CIFS,NFS network file sharing
Operators and Maintainers protocol
Managers  Command network storage virtual system
Planners and Designers architecture ,principle and deployment
Prerequisites  Command N8000 DST, file replication, file
backup principle
Duration
 Understand main OS and DB operation and 1 working day
technology Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
187
7.4.3 Backup Advanced Technology Training

 Be familiar with backup and recovery system
Backup Advanced Technology
architecture, backup component, backup media,
Backup mode and strategy
OST0C Lecture 1d
 Be familiar with backup network, backup and
Target Audience recovery technology
Operators and Maintainers  Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP

technology principle
Managers
 Know DR solution, technology and application
scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
technology Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
188
7.4.4 Enterprise Data Center Architecture Training
Training Path  Describe DC solution overall architecture

 Describe DC network subsystem concepts and
Enterprise Data Center Architecture
related devices
 Describe DC Computing and Storage subsystem
ODC0A Lecture 1d
concepts and related devices
Target Audience  Describe DC Security subsystem concepts and
related devices
 Describe DC Disaster Recovery and Backup
Administrators
subsystem concepts and related devices
 Describe DC SSMC management system
Prerequisites
Duration
 Be familiar with DC
1 working day
 Familiar with IT and general network knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
189
7.5 Unified Storage Training Programs
7.5.1 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and

Management Training
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage On completion of this program, the participants will

Array Product Introduction
be able to:
OST11 Lecture 0.25d  Describe T series product position
 Describe T series product structure
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage  Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design and component
Lecture  Describe T series product software structure and

OST12 0.25d
component
 Describe T series product main features and
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage typical application scenario
Array Installation and Configuration
 Understand T series storage plan and design
OST13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d target
 Understand T series storage plan rule
 Understand T series storage plan method
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Routine Maintenance  Master storage system hardware installation
 Master storage system device cabling
OST14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d
 Master storage system power on sequence
 Master device configuration
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage  Master basal operation configuration
Array Troubleshooting
 Master T series product management
OST15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Master T series product license using
 Master T series product basal application
configuration
Array Advanced Function  Master T series product performance stat.
function using
OST16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Master T series product upgrade
Target Audience  Know T series product common fault disposal
 Master T series product fault disposal process
 Describe UltraPath product request and product
Managers
position
 Know UltraPath product main function feature
Prerequisites
 Know UltraPath product application scenario and
 Know PC OS deployment scheme
 Know basal computer knowledge  Know Snapshot definition, principle and
 Know basal storage technology configuration process
 Know LUN Copy definition, principle,
190
configuration process using
 Know Remote replication definition, principle,  Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature
configuration process application scenario
 Know Smart Cache definition, principle,  Describe Dynamic RAID Group Expansion
configuration process principle, configuration
 Describe Split Mirror definition, principle, Duration
configuration process
4 working days
 Describe Thin Provisioning configuration feature
Class Size
request
 Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature and Min 6, Max 12
191
7.5.2 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage On completion of this program, the participants will

Array Product Introduction
be able to:
OST11 Lecture 0.25d  Describe T series product position
 Describe T series product structure
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage  Describe T series product hardware configuration
Array Plan and Design and component
Lecture  Describe T series product software structure and

OST12 0.25d
component
 Describe T series product main features and
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage typical application scenario
Array Installation and Configuration
 Master storage system hardware installation
OST13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Master storage system device cabling
 Master storage system power on sequence
 Master device configuration
Array Routine Maintenance  Master basal operation configuration
 Master T series product management
 Master T series product license using
 Master T series product basal application
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage configuration
Array Troubleshooting
 Master T series product performance stat.
OST15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d function using

 Master T series product upgrade
Target Audience
 Know T series product common fault disposal
Managers
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
 Know PC OS
Min 6, Max 12
 Know basal computer knowledge
 Know basal storage technology
192
7.5.3 T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) High-end Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path  Describe T series V2 product position
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array  Describe T series V2 product structure

Product Introduction  Describe T seriesV2 product hardware
Lecture configuration and component

OST17 0.25 d
 Describe T series V2 product software structure
and component
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array Plan
and Design  Know T series V2 product hardware installation
plan
OST18 Lecture 0.25 d  Know T series V2 product deployment and
configuration plan
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array  Master T series V2 product hardware installation

Installation and Configuration  Master T series V2 product basal operation
configuration
OST19 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1 d
 Describe storage pool basal principle
 Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
Routine Maintenance
 Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
OST1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25 d  Reconstruction performance analysis

 Storage pool configuration
 Know T series V2 product maintenance tool
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array
Troubleshooting using
 Master T series V2 product routine maintenance
OST1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25 d method
 Know T series V2 product upgrade process and
S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array precaution

Advanced Function  Know T series V2 product common fault disposal
 Master T series V2 product fault disposal process
OST1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2 d
 Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Target Audience
deployment and configuration
Operators and Maintainers  Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
Managers plan, deployment and configuration
Planners and Designers  Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
Prerequisites plan, deployment and configuration

 Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
 Know PC OS configuration process
 Know basal computer knowledge  Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
 Know basal storage technology configuration process
Objectives  Know Remote replication definition, principle and
be able to:  Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
193
Duration
 Describe clone principle, technology and 4 working days
configuration process Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
194
7.5.4 HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path  Describe HVS(85T/88T) product position
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Product  Describe HVS(85T/88T) product structure

Introduction  Describe HVS(85T/88T) product hardware
Lecture configuration and component

OST1D 0.25 d
 Describe HVS(85T/88T) product software
structure and component
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Plan and
Design  Know HVS(85T/88T) product hardware
installation plan
OST1E Lecture 0.25 d  Know HVS(85T/88T) product deployment and
configuration plan
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Installation  Master HVS(85T/88T) product hardware

and Configuration installation
 Master HVS(85T/88T) product basal operation
OST1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1 d
configuration
 Know HVS(85T/88T) product maintenance tool
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Routine using
Maintenance
 Master HVS(85T/88T) product routine
Lecture 0.25 d maintenance method
OST1G
 Know HVS(85T/88T) product upgrade process
and precaution
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage
Troubleshooting  Know HVS(85T/88T) product common fault
disposal
OST1H Lecture 0.25 d  Master HVS(85T/88T) product fault disposal
process
 Describe storage pool basal principle
HVS(85T/88T) High-end Storage Advanced
Function  Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
OST1I Lecture 2 d
 Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
Target Audience  Reconstruction performance analysis
Operators and Maintainers  Storage pool configuration
Managers  Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,

deployment and configuration
 Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
plan, deployment and configuration
 Know PC OS  Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,
 Know basal computer knowledge plan, deployment and configuration
 Know basal storage technology  Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
Objectives configuration process
 Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
be able to:
195
Duration
 Know Remote replication definition, principle and
configuration process 4 working days
 Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and Class Size
 Describe clone principle, technology and Min 6, Max 12
196
7.5.5 SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path  Know basal computer knowledge

SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch Product  Know basal storage technology
Introduction
Objectives
OST1J Lecture 0.5d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Master SNS2120/5120 hardware structure
SNS series (2120/5120) FC Switch
Configuration  Master SNS2120/5120 software configuration
Duration
OST1K Lecture, Demo 0.5d
1 working day
Target Audience Class Size
Operators and Maintainers Min 6, Max 12

Prerequisites
 Know PC OS
197
7.5.6 Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Product On completion of this program, the participants will
Introduction
be able to:
OST1L Lecture 0.25d  Describe Dorado2100 G2/5000 product position
 Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Installation hardware/software structure component
and Configuration  KnowDorado2100 G2/5000 product main
function feature
OST1M Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Understand Dorado2100 G2/5000 product typical
application case
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage  Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product
hardware/software installation process
OST1N Lecture, Demo 0.25d  Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product basal
configuration method
Target Audience  Know Dorado2100 G2 product routine
maintenance operation process
 Know Dorado2100 G2 product upgrade process
Managers
 Know Dorado2100 G2 product fault disposal
Prerequisites
operation
 Know PC OS Duration
 Know basal computer knowledge
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
198
7.5.7 VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path  Describe VIS6000T product position
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Product  Know VIS6000T product software/hardware

Introduction structure component
Lecture  Know VIS6000Tproduct main function feature

OST1O 0.25d
 Understand VIS6000Tproduct typical application
case
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Plan and
Design  Know VIS6000T product hardware
installation/network plan
OST1P Lecture 0.5d  Master VIS6000T product hardware/software
installation and deployment
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Installation  Master VIS6000T product basal function
and Configuration configuration
 Know VIS6000Tproduct maintenance tool
OST1Q Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.75d
 Know VIS6000Tproduct routine maintenance
method
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Routine  Master VIS6000T product common fault disposal
Maintenance
process
OST1R Lecture 0.25d  Know VIS6000T product fault disposal basal

principle and method
 Know VIS6000T product replication function
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway
Troubleshooting principle, key technology, application plan,
network and connection
OST1S Lecture 0.25d  Master VIS6000T product replication function
application deployment and configuration,
troubleshooting
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Advanced
Function  Know VIS6000T product mirror function principle ,
key technology, application plan, network and
OST1T Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d connection
Target Audience  Master VIS6000T product mirror function
application deployment and configuration,
troubleshooting
Managers
 Know VIS6000T product snapshot function
principle, key technology, application plan,
Prerequisites
network and connection
 Know PC OS  Master VIS6000T product snapshot function
 Know basal computer knowledge application deployment and configuration,
 Know basal storage technology troubleshooting
Objectives Duration
be able to:
199
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
200
7.6 NAS and Data Protection Training Programs
7.6.1 N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Know Windows, Linux OS operation

 Know NAS system knowledge
N9000 product Introduction
 Know cluster system foundation
Lecture 0.25d Objectives

OST25

be able to:
N9000 System Technology
 Describe N9000 product, position, main function,
Lecture 0.5d application scenario

OST26
 Describe N9000 user management,
AD/LDAP/NIS,NFS,CIFS, Dynamic storage tier
N9000 System Installation and Configuration principle
Planning
 Be familiar with N9000 product hardware
OST27 Lecture 0.25d installation Planning
 Be familiar with N9000 product deployment and
configuration Planning process and tools
N9000 System Installation and Configuration
 Command N9000 product hardware installation
OST28 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Command N9000 typical networking

 Command N9000 product file sharing
configuration
N9000 System Advanced Function Principle
 Command N9000 wise link configuration and
and Deployment
application
OST29 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Command N9000 wise tier configuration and
application
N9000 System Routine Maintenance  Command N9000 wise qouta configuration and
application
OST2A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Be familiar with N9000 maintenance tool
 Command N9000 routine maintenance method
 Be familiar with N9000 upgrade process and
N9000 System Troubleshooting notice
 Be familiar with N9000 troubleshooting method
OST2B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d
 Command N9000 troubleshooting case
Target Audience Duration
Operators and Maintainers 3 working days
Managers Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
 Know storage foundation
201
7.6.2 N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Know NAS system knowledge

 Know cluster system foundation
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System
Introduction Objectives
OST2C Lecture 0.25d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe N8500V2R1Clustered NAS product
N8500V2 Clustered NAS Technology
type, position, main function, application scenario
Lecture 0.25d  Describe N8500V2R1 clustered NAS NFS,CIFS,

OST2D
DST, replication technology principle
 Be familiar with N8500 product hardware
N8500V2Clustered NAS System Installation installation planning
and Configuration Planning
 Be familiar with N8500 product deployment and
OST2E Lecture 0.25d configuration planning
 Be familiar with network and bond mode
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Installation  Command N8500V2R1 product hardware

and Configuration installation
OST2F Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Command N8500V2R1 typical networking

 Command N8500V2R1 deployment tool
 Command N8500V2R1 product file sharing basic
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Advanced
Function Principle and Deployment operation configuration
 Command N8500V2R1 Backup, DST
OST2G Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
configuration and application
 Command N8500V2R1 file system snapshot ,
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System Routine mirror image, replication principle, configuration
Maintenance
and application
OST2H Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Be familiar with N8500V2R1 maintenance tool
method
 Command N8500V2R1 routine maintenance
N8500V2 Clustered NAS System method
Troubleshooting
 Be familiar with N8500V2R1 upgrade method
OST2I Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Be familiar with N8500V2R1 product
troubleshooting method
Target Audience
 Command N8500V2R1 typical fault case
Managers
3 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
 Know Windows, Linux OS operation
202
7.6.3 VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Know virtual tape library knowledge
 Know cluster knowledge
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System
Introduction Objectives
OST35 Lecture 0.25d On completion of this program, the participants will

25.2
be able to:
50.2
5天  Describe VTL6900 positioning , architecture ,
Installation and Configuration Planning features, application scenarios
Lecture 0.25d  Be familiar with VTL6900 Approaches to

OST36
deploying and to planning VTL6900 deployment
and using configuration tools
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System  Be familiar approaches and procedure for
installing the VTL6900 hardware
OST37 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Be familiar with Approaches to installing and
deploying the VTL6900
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Routine  Be familiar with Approaches to using ISM
Maintenance ServiceTool to finish Daily maintenance tasks
OST38 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Be familiar with Approaches to upgrading the
VTL6900
 Be familiar with Approaches to locating and
handling the VTL6900 faults
Troubleshooting
 Command VTL6900 clustered mechanism
 Command VTL6900 data deduplication principle
and application
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Advance  Command VTL6900 Tape Out principle and
Function Principle and Application application
OST3A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Command VTL6900 replication principle and

application
Target Audience
Duration
3 working days
Managers
Class Size

 Know Windows, Linux OS operation
203
7.6.4 HDP3500E Backup System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Know Windows, Linux OS operation
 Know database knowledge and operation
HDP3500E Backup System Introduction
Objectives
OST3G Lecture 0.25d On completion of this program, the participants will

2 be able to:
5
.  Describe HDP3500E the product requirement,
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
2 and
Configuration Planning positioning ,software and hardware structure,
5
Lecture 0 0.25d main functional characteristics
OST3H
.  Be familiar with HDP3500E product hardware
2
5 installation planning
HDP3500E Backup System Installation
天and  Be familiar with HDP3500E product network,
Configuration
deployment and configuration planning
OST3I Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Command HDP3500E product hardware
installation
HDP3500E Backup System Routine  Command HDP3500E basic configuration

Maintenance  Command HDP3500E Typical cases
OST3J Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Be familiar with HDP3500E maintenance tool
method
 Command HDP3500E routine maintenance
HDP3500E Backup System Troubleshooting
method
 Be familiar with HDP3500E upgrade process and
OST3K Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d
notice
 Be familiar with HDP3500E product
troubleshooting method
HDP3500E Backup System Common
Application Backup and Recovery  Know HDP3500E product fault case
OST3L Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Know BMR backup and recovery

 Command Database backup and recovery
Target Audience  Command Database backup and recovery
 Know Database backup and recovery
Duration
Managers
Planners and Designers 3 working days
 Know storage foundation Min 6, Max 12
204
7.7 Cloud Storage Training Programs
7.7.1 CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Product Introduction
OST51 Lecture 0.25d Managers

Prerequisites
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Deployment
Planning
 Know Windows、Linux OS knowledge
OST52 Lecture 0. 5d  Know TCP/IP
 Know storage virtualization knowledge
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Installation Objectives

be able to:
 Describe CloudStor product type, position,
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Management hardware, software, application scenario

Characteristics Configuration  Be familiar with CSS/CSE product hardware
OST54 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d installation planning

 Be familiar with CSS/CSE product deployment
and configuration planning
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Service Characteristics
Configuration  Command CSS/CSE product hardware
installation
OST55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0. 5d
 Command CSS/CSE typical networking
 Command CSS/CSE system deployment
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Routine tool
Maintenance
 Command CSS/CSE basic operation
OST56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0. 25d configuration
 Command CSS/CSE management
characteristics
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Troubleshooting
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE operation and
Lecture, Hands-on exercise management

OST57 0.5d
 Know CSS/CSE service characteristics
 Command CSS/CSE service characteristics
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Advanced Technology
Application configuration method and steps
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance tool
 Command CSS/CSE routine maintenance
method
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Solution  Be familiar with CSS/CSE maintenance process
and notice
OST59 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Know fault class, principle of fault location
205
Duration
 Command fault location method, failure criteria
 Be familiar with troubleshooting process 4 working days
 Know CSS/CSE system principle Class Size
 Know CSS/CSE advanced technology
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe CloudStor main solution
 Be familiar with CloudStor solution
206
7.7.2 CloudStor(CSS/CSE) Cloud Storage Deployment and Management
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Product Introduction On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OST51 Lecture 0.25d  Describe CloudStor product type, position,
hardware and software components, application
scenario
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Installation
 Describe CloudStor product type, position,
Lecture, demo hardware, software, application scenario

OST53 0.5d
 Be familiar with CSS/CSE product hardware
installation planning
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Management  Command CSS/CSE product hardware
Characteristics Configuration
installation
OST54 Lecture, demo 0.5d  Know CSS/CSE typical networking
 Know CSS/CSE system deployment tool
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) Service Characteristics  Know CSS/CSE basic operation configuration
Configuration
 Know CSS/CSE management characteristics
OST55 Lecture, demo 0.5d  Know CSS/CSE operation and management
CloudStor (CSS/CSE) System Routine
Maintenance configuration method and steps
 Know CSS/CSE maintenance tool
OST56 Lecture, demo 0. 25d
 Know CSS/CSE routine maintenance method
Target Audience
 Know CSS/CSE maintenance process and
Operators and Maintainers notice
Managers Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 Know Windows、Linux OS knowledge Class Size
 Know TCP/IP
Min 6, Max 12
207
7.7.3 UDS Mass Storage Deployment and Management Training
UDS Mass Storage System Introduction Operators and Maintainers

Managers
OST5A Lecture 0.25d Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
UDS Mass Storage System Deployment  Know Windows、Linux OS knowledge

Planning
 Know TCP/IP
OST5B Lecture 0.5d
Objectives
UDS Mass Storage System Installation
Lecture, Hands-on exercise be able to:

OST5C 0.5d
 Be familiar with UDS product hardware
installation Planning
UDS Mass Storage Management  Be familiar with UDS product deployment and
Characteristics Configuration
configuration Planning
OST5D Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Command UDS hardware installation
 Command UDS typical networking
UDS Mass Storage Service Characteristics  Command UDS system deployment tool
Configuration  Command UDS basic operation configuration
OST5E Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Command UDS management characteristics
 Be familiar with UDS operation management
 Know UDS service characteristics
UDS Mass Storage System Routine
Maintenance  Command UDS service characteristics
Lecture, Hands-on exercise configuration method and steps

OST5F 0.5d
 Be familiar with UDS maintenance tool
 Command UDS routine maintenance method
UDS Mass Storage System Troubleshooting
 Be familiar with UDS maintenance process and
notice
OST5G Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Know UDS fault class, principle of fault location
 Command UDS fault location method, failure
UDS Mass Storage Advanced Technology criteria
Application
 Be familiar with UDS troubleshooting process
OST5H Lecture 0.5d  Know UDS system principle
 Know UDS advanced technology
 Describe UDS Mass Storage main solution
UDS Mass Storage Solution
 Be familiar with UDS Mass Storage solution
OST5I Lecture 0.25d Duration
4 working days
208
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
209
7.8 Server Products Training Programs
7.8.1 RH Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
RH Series Rack Server Introduction On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OSV11 Lecture 0.4 d  Describe the models, position, main functions
and application scenarios of RH series servers
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
RH Series Rack Server OS Installation
and hardware installation of RH series servers
Lecture, demo  Master BMC configuration of RH series servers

OSV12 0.3 d
 Master RAID plan and configuration of RH series
servers
RH Series Rack Server Routine Maintenance  Master OS installation method of RH series
and Troubleshooting
servers
OSV13 Lecture, hands-on exercise 0.3 d  Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts
Target Audience replacement of RH series servers
 Master the methods of log collection of RH series
servers
Administrators
 Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of
Prerequisites
RH series servers
 Be familiar with Windows and Linux Duration
 Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP
1 working day
 Know basic knowledge of server
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
210
7.8.2 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Describe the models, position, main functions

and application scenarios of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Introduction
servers
 Master the hardware structure, components,
OSV21 Lecture 0.4 d
views, modules, blade types and hardware
installation of X6000 series servers
X6000 Series Server OS Installation  Master BMC configuration of X6000 series

servers
OSV22 Lecture, demo 0.3 d  Master RAID plan and configuration of X6000
series servers
 Master OS installation method of X6000 series
X6000 Series Server Routine Maintenance
and Troubleshooting servers
 Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts
OSV23 Lecture, hands-on exercise 0.3 d
replacement of X6000 series servers
Target Audience
 Master the methods of log collection of X6000
Operators and Maintainers series servers
Administrators  Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of
Prerequisites X6000 series servers

Duration
 Be familiar with Windows and Linux
 Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP 1 working day
 Know basic knowledge of server Class Size
Objectives Min 6, max 12

be able to:
211
7.8.3 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Describe the models, position, main functions

and application scenarios of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Introduction servers
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
OSV31 Lecture 0.4 d
and hardware installation of E6000 series
servers
E6000 Blade Server OS Installation  Master iMana function, management and

maintenance of E6000 blade server
OSV32 Lecture, demo 0.3 d  Master RAID plan and configuration of E6000
series servers
 Master OS installation method of E6000 series
E6000 Blade Server Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting servers
 Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts
replacement of E6000 series servers
Target Audience
 Master the methods of log collection of E6000
Operators and Maintainers series servers
Administrators  Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of
Prerequisites E6000 series servers

Duration
 Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP 1 working day
 Know basic knowledge of server Class Size

be able to:
212
7.8.4 E9000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Introduction
OSV51 Lecture 0.4 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade

Server OS Installation
OSV52 Lecture, demo 0.3 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Target Audience

Administrators
Prerequisites

 Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

 Describe the models, position, main functions and application scenarios of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
 Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces and hardware installation of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
Blade Server
 Master BMC function, management and maintenance of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master RAID plan and configuration of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master OS installation method of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts replacement of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Master the methods of log collection of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
 Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
213
7.9 Cloud Computing Training Programs
7.9.1 Mini VDI Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Describe the deployment process and method of

Mini VDI
Mini VDI Deployment and Management
 Describe the image creation requirements
 Describe the image creation method
OCL11 Lecture, hands-on exercise 2d
 Describe the data protection mechanism of Mini
Target Audience
VDI
Operators and maintainers  Describe the basic troubleshooting methods of
Administrators Mini VDI
Prerequisites  Describe the structure and functions of

GalaX8800
 Be familiar with the basic knowledge of datacom
 Describe the structure and functions of
 Be familiar with the basic knowledge of server
VDesktop6000
and Unix
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe Mini VDI product Min 6, max 12
214
7.9.2 Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path of storage

 Describe the security solution of Cloud
Desktop Cloud Solution Deployment and
Computing
Management
OCL12 Lecture, hands-on exercise 5d
SingleCLOUD
Target Audience  Describe the software structure of SingleCLOUD
Operators and maintainers  Describe the structure and configuration of
Administrators E6000
Planners and designers  Describe the structure and configuration of

S3900
Prerequisites
 Describe the structure of Galax8800
 Be familiar with PC operating system  Describe the components and functions of
 Know basic knowledge of datacom Galax8800
 Know basic knowledge of server  Describe the installation of Galax8800
 Know basic knowledge of storage  Describe the routine operations and
Objectives maintenance of Galax8800
 Describe the structure of VDesktop6000
be able to:  Describe the components and functions of
VDesktop6000
 Describe the application scenario of Cloud
Computing  Describe the installation of VDesktop6000
 Describe the key features of Cloud Computing  Describe the routine operations and
maintenance of VDesktop6000
 Describe the concept and technology of virtual
machine  Describe the image creation procedure
 Describe the creation and assignment of VM
 Describe the concept and technology of virtual
network  Describe the configuration of TC
 Describe the concept and technology of virtual Duration
storage
5 working days
 Describe the basic concept of storage
Class Size
 Describe the protocol of storage
 Describe the RAID function of storage Min 6, max 12
 Describe the backup and redundancy technology
215
7.9.3 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path  Describe the feature of access control based on

roles
FusionCube Solution Deployment and
Management  Describe the feature of memory multiplexing
Lecture, hands-on exercise  Describe the feature of data backup and

OCL13 3d
recovery
Target Audience
 Describe the feature of integrated resource
Operators and maintainers management
Administrators  Describe the feature of VM snapshot
Planners and designers  Describe the feature of elastic application
Prerequisites  Describe the feature of application automatic

deployment
 Be familiar with PC operating system  Describe the feature of automatic thin
 Know basic knowledge of datacom provisioning
 Know basic knowledge of server  Command FusionManager installation and
 Know basic knowledge of storage configuration
Objectives  Command FusionStorage installation and
configuration
 Command FusionCube upgrade patch
be able to:
introduction
 Describe FusionCube solution
 Command FusionCube routine maintenance
 Command FusionCube troubleshooting
FusionCube
Duration
FusionStorage 5 working days
 Describe the security solution of FusionCube Class Size
 Describe the hardware structure of FusionCube
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the feature of dynamic resource adjust
 Describe the feature of distributed switches
216
7.9.4 FusionSphere Solution Deployment and Management Training
Training Path feature

 Describe FusionSphere virtualized storage
FusionSphere Solution Deployment and
Management feature
Lecture, hands-on exercise  Describe FusionSphere virtualized network

OCL14 3d
feature
Target Audience
 Describe elastic load balance feature
Operators and maintainers  Describe elastic computing feature
Administrators  Describe VPC feature
Planners and designers  Describe data backup and recovery feature
Prerequisites  Describe FusionCompute structure and
functions
 Be familiar with PC operating system
 Describe FusionCompute routine operations
 Know basic knowledge of datacom
and maintenance
 Describe FusionCompute upgrade procedure
 Know basic knowledge of storage
Duration
Objectives
3 working days, including 1.5 days of hands-on
On completion of this program, the participants will practice
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe FusionSphere solution
 Describe FusionSphere installation procedure Min 6, max 12
 Describe FusionSphere virtualized computing
217
7.10 Data Center Training Programs
7.10.1 Micro DC Deployment and Management Training
Micro DC Deployment and Management On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
ODC11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the software and hardware of the Micro
Target Audience DC
 Master the installation and configuration of the
Micro DC
Administrators
 Master the basic operations and functions of the
Planners and Designers Micro DC
 Know basic computer knowledge 1 working days

 Know basic IP technology and knowledge Class Size
 Know server knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
218
7.10.2 ManageOne Solution Deployment and Management Training

 Describe the overall architecture of the
ManageOne Solution Deployment and
Management ManageOne solution
 Describe the installation and deployment of the
ODC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
ManageOne solution
Target Audience
 Describe the basic features of the ManageOne
Operators and Maintainers solution
Administrators  Describe the operation and maintenance of
Planners and Designers ManageOne solution
Prerequisites  Describe the business features and functions of

ManageOne solution
 Know about DC solution
Duration
 Familiar with DC operation and maintenance
knowledge 2 working days
 Familiar with DC business knowledge Class Size
219
7.11 IT Design Training Programs
7.11.1 Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design Training
Enterprise Storage Area Network(SAN) Design On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OST61 Lecture 1d  Be familiar with SAN system
Target Audience  Be familiar with SAN system plan process

 Be familiar with SAN system plan methods
Duration
Manager
Prerequisites 1 working day
Class Size
 Know PC OS
 Know basal computer knowledge Min 6, Max 12
220
7.11.2 Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) Design Training
Enterprise Network Attached Network (NAS) On completion of this program, the participants will
Design
be able to:
OST62 Lecture 1d  Be familiar with NAS system
Target Audience  Be familiar with NAS system plan process

 Be familiar with NAS system plan methods
Duration
Manager
Class Size
 Know PC OS
221
7.11.3 Enterprise Backup system and Network Design Training
Enterprise Backup system and Network Design On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OST63 Lecture 1d  Be familiar with backup network and system
Target Audience  Be familiar with backup solution plan process

 Be familiar with backup solution plan methods
Duration
Manager
Class Size
 Know PC OS
222
7.11.4 Enterprise Data Center Network Design Training
Training Path  Describe DC Network Layered Design

 Describe DC Network Zoned Design
Enterprise Data Center Network Design
 Describe DC Network Plane Design
Lecture 2d  Describe the Intercommunication of Multiple DC

ODC21
Design
Target Audience
 Describe the DC Network Application
Planners and Designers Acceleration Design
Manager  Describe the Cloud Computing DC Network
Prerequisites solution
 Describe DC Network products requirement and
 Know IT and network basic knowledge
features, Cloud Engine Devices
 Know basic security knowledge
Duration
 Know network deployment experience
Class Size
 Describe DC Network Overall Architecture
223
7.11.5 Enterprise Data Center Security Design Training
Training Path  Describe DC Security Architecture Design

Principle
Enterprise Data Center Security Design
 Describe DC Security Design Solution
Lecture  Describe DC Security Threats and Protection

ODC22 1d
Solution
Target Audience
 Describe DC Infrastructure Security
Planners and Designers  Describe DC Network Layer Security
Manager  Describe DC Host and Application Security
Prerequisites  Describe DC User Security Policy and Security
Management
 Familiar with DC Network basic knowledge
 Describe DC Intrusion Detection Mechanism and
 Familiar with Security Fundamental
Access Control Policy
 Familiar with Security network deployment
Duration
experience
Class Size
224
7.11.6 Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training
Training Path basic concepts and related devices

 Description of DC disaster recovery requirement
Enterprise Data Center Disaster Recovery
and Backup Design analysis
Lecture  Description of DC disaster recovery solution

ODC23 2d
design principles, processes and methods
Target Audience
 Master DC disaster recovery design method,
Planners and Designers case and key technology
Manager  Master of disaster recovery production center
Prerequisites design
 Master of disaster recovery backup center design
 Familiar with the IT system architecture and the
 Master of disaster recovery system link design
basic knowledge
 Master of disaster recovery system service
 Familiar with storage and SAN system
connection
technology
 Master of principles, processes and methods of
 Familiar with backup and disaster recovery basic
Huawei DR solution
knowledge and experience
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Description of DC disaster recovery subsystem Min 6, Max 12
225
226
8 Enterprise UC&C Training Path
8.1 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-UC-Hvoice HCNP-UC-HIPT
Professional Implementing Huawei AR G3 Implementing Huawei IP
Voice Solutions and QoS Telephony Solutions
5d 5d
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Associate Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
 Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
 Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
227
8.2 Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Path (Fast-Track)
Expert
HCNP-UC Implementing
Huawei Unified Communication
Professional
Solutions (Fast-Track)
5d
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Associate Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
 Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
 Customers with related equivalent voice certificate can attend HCNP-UC(Fast-Track) training and certification directly
228
8.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Path
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice HCNP-UC-Hvoice

Voice System Design System Installation and Commissioning Implementing Huawei AR G3
4d Voice Solutions and QoS
3d 5d
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice

Fast-Track System Basic Configuration and HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Operation Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System 5d
Design (Fast-Track) Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice
System Advanced Configuration and
3d
Operation (including Basic Configuration Fast-Track
and Operation)
8d HCNP-UC Implementing
Huawei Unified Communication
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Solutions (Fast-Track)
System Maintenance and
5d
Troubleshooting
1d
Fast-Track
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice
System Operation and Maintenance
(Fast-Track)
3d
Technology HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei

Fundamentals Unified Communication Administration
Training 5d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U19XX/SoftCo voice system.
(Fast-Track).
229
8.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Path
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Huawei AR G3 Voice System HCNP-UC-Hvoice

Design Installation and Commissioning Implementing Huawei AR G3
2d 5d
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Fast-Track Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
5d
Design (Fast-Track)
Fast-Track
3d Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced
Configuration and Operation (including HCNP-UC Implementing
Basic Configuration and Operation) Huawei Unified Communication
Solutions (Fast-Track)
5d
5d
Huawei AR G3 Voice System

1d
Fast-Track
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation

and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
4d

Training 5d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using AR G3 voice system.
(Fast-Track).
230
8.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training
Path
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System HCNP-UC-Hvoice

Design Installation and Commissioning Implementing Huawei AR G3
5d 5d
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Fast-Track
Basic Configuration and Operation
5d
Design (Fast-Track) Fast-Track
3d Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System
Advanced Configuration and Operation HCNP-UC Implementing
(including Basic Configuration and Huawei Unified Communication
Operation) Solutions (Fast-Track)
7d 5d
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System

Troubleshooting
1d
Fast-Track
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System

(Fast-Track)
5d

Training
5d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC1.1 system.
(Fast-Track).
231
8.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Path
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system HCNP-UC-Hvoice

Design (Small and Medium-sized Installation and Commissioning Implementing Huawei AR G3
Enterprise: U29XX All in One Voice Solutions and QoS
5d 5d
Solution)
1d
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing
Configuration and Operation Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system 7d 5d
Design
(大型企业) 4d Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system
Advanced Configuration and Operation Fast-Track
(including Basic Configuration and
Fast-Track Operation) HCNP-UC Implementing
10d Huawei Unified Communication
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR Solutions (Fast-Track)
G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System 5d
Design (Fast-Track) Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system
3d Troubleshooting
1d
Huawei eSpace U29XX All in One

Solution
4d
Fast-Track
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system
(Fast-Track)
5d

Training
5d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC2.0 system.
(Fast-Track).
232
8.7 Contact Center Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop

Huawei Contact Center Huawei Contact Center CTI
Huawei IVR Advanced
Professional
Universal Access Platform Solution Application
3d 5d 3d
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing
Huawei Contact Center
Associate Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
 Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification
233
8.8 Contact Center Certification Training Fast-Track Path
Expert
HCNP-CC Implement
Large-scale Enterprise Contact
Professional
Center(Fast-Track)
5d
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing
Huawei Contact Center
Associate
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
 Programs in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
 Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification
234
8.9 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Training Path
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Enterprise Contact Center
Gateway) Contact Center Gateway) Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy
Design Management and Monitoring
2d 3d 2d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Enterprise Contact Center
VTM Solution Design Gateway) Voice Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent
Service Introduction, Routing Development
3d Configuration and Operation 3d
5d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Enterprise Contact Center
Cloud Contact Center Design Gateway) Outbound Contact Outbound Technology
Center Service Introduction,
3d 1d
5d
Enterprise Contact Center
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Multimedia Technology
Gateway) Multimedia Contact
Center Service Introduction, 2d
(Including Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation)
7d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX
Gateway) Contact Center
Installation and Commissioning
5d
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XXd
Gateway) Contact Center
Troubleshooting
2d
d
Gateway) Contact Center Agent
Operation
1d
Fast-Track d
Gateway) eSpace Contact
Center Solution Deployment
(Fast-Track) 3d
(Fast-Track)
Technology HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei

Fundamentals Contact Center Administration
Training 5d
Elective-Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.
 Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/Outbound Contact Center/Multimedia Contact Center.
 Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and Monitoring/Service introduction,
configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.
 Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification Training (Fast-Track).
235
8.10 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Contact Center Training Path

Small and Medium-sized Small and Medium-sized Enterprise Enterprise Contact Center
Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact Advanced Routing Policy
Gateway) Contact Center Design Center Management and Monitoring
3d 2d
2d
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise Enterprise Contact Center
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice IVR Process and Intelligent
VTM Solution Design Routing Development
Contact Center Service Introduction, 3d
3d Configuration and Operation
5d Enterprise Contact Center
Outbound Technology
Cloud Contact Center Design Small and Medium-sized Enterprise
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) 1d
3d Outbound Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Enterprise Contact Center
Operation 5d Multimedia Technology
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise 2d
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia
Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction,
7d
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact
Center Installation and Commissioning
5d
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Contact Center Troubleshooting
2d
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)
Contact Center Agent Operation
1d
Fast-Track
(UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace
Contact Center Solution Deployment
(Fast-Track) 3d
Technology HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei

Fundamentals Contact Center Administration
Training 5d
Elective-Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U29XX access gateway.
 Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/Outbound Contact Center/Multimedia Contact Center.
 Customers with related technology background are recommended to elect Contact Center Certification Training (Fast-Track).
236
8.11 Video Conference Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-VC-IHVCP HCNP-VC-IHVP HCNP-VC-IHTP

Introducing Huawei Video Implementing Huawei Implementing Huawei
Professional Conference H.323 and Advanced ViewPoint TelePrecese System
SIP Protocol 2d System 5d 3d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Associate Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration 5d
Elective Guide
 Follow the paths to learn.
237
8.12 Video Conference Certification Fast-Track Training Path
Expert
HCNP-VC
Professional (Fast-Track)
5d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Associate Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration 5d
Elective Guide
 The Fast-Track trainings and certifications are design for the audiences who have obtained the same level technical certificate in
the industry.
 Choose the different Fast-Track training programs according to the audiences’’ technical level.
238
8.13 VC Product Training Path (ViewPoint/TelePresence)
ViewPoint Video Conference 9000 Series HD Terminal HCNP-VC-IHVCP

Introducing Huawei Video
System Planning and Design Operation and Maintenance Conference H.323 and
2d 1d SIP Protocol 2d
Video Conference System(9000 HCNP-VC-IHVP

Series HD Terminal/MCU/ Implementing Huawei
SMC1.0) Operation and Advanced ViewPoint
Maintenance 5d System 5d
Video Conference System(9000 HCNP-VC-IHTP

Series HD Terminal/MCU/
SMC2.0) Operation and Implementing Huawei
Maintenance TelePrecese System
5d
3d
Video Conference System(9000 HCNP-VC

Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Advanced Features Operation (Fast-Track)
and Maintenance 5d 5d
TP/RP Series Product Operation

and Maintenance
2d
Fast-Track
Video Conference System(9000
Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)
(Fast-Track) 2d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Technology Introducing Huawei Video
Fundamentals Conference Administration
Training 5d
Elective Guide
239
8.14 Huawei eSpace IVS system Training Path
Huawei eSpace IVS system

installation and commissioning
2days

primary daily operation and
maintenance 3days

configuration and advanced
maintenance 3days
Fast -Track
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Elective-Guide:
 Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using Huawei eSpace IVS system.
240
9 Enterprise UC&C Training Courses
Enterprise UC&C Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Certification Training Programs
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication

Administration Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 16
Solutions
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 16
Solutions and QoS
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Ⅱ 5 6~16

Administration
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact Ⅲ 5 6~16
Center(Fast-Track)
HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Ⅲ 3 6~16
Universal Access Platform
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Ⅲ 5 6~16
Solution
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced Ⅲ 3 6~16
Application
HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Conference
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
Conference
HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Conference (Fast-Track)
Huawei Unified Communication Certification Training Programs (Fast-Track)
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions

(Fast-Track) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 16
Commissioning
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and

Operation Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and

Operation (including Basic Configuration and Operation) Ⅲ 8 6 ~ 16
241
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance

(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation

(including Basic Configuration and Operation) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Advanced Configuration and Operation

Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Troubleshooting Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Installation and Commissioning Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Basic Configuration and Operation Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Advanced Configuration and Operation

Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Troubleshooting Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace U29XX All in One Solution Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 16
UC Planning and Design Training Programs
Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 16
Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Design Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design

(Small and Medium-sized Enterprise: U29XX All in One Solution) Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 16
Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 16
242
Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design
(Fast-Track) Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 16
CC Advanced Technology Training Programs
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy Ⅲ 2 6~16
Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing

Ⅲ 3 6~16
Development
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology Ⅲ 1 6~16
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology Ⅲ 2 6~16
CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and Maintenance Training
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center

Ⅱ 3 6~16
Management and Monitoring
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center

Ⅱ 5 6~16
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact

Ⅱ 5 6~16
Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact

Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Ⅱ 7 6~16
(Including Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation)

Ⅱ 5 6~16

Ⅲ 2 6~16
Troubleshooting
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent

Ⅰ 1 6~16
Operation
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact

Ⅱ 3 6~16
Center Solution Deployment (Fast-Track)
CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100

Ⅱ 3 6~16
Gateway) Contact Center Management and Monitoring

Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Ⅱ 5 6~16

Ⅱ 5 6~16
Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service Introduction,
243

Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,
Ⅱ 7 6~16
Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center
Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)

Ⅱ 5 6~16
Gateway) Contact Center Installation and Configuration

Ⅲ 2 6~16
Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting

Ⅰ 1 6~16
Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation

Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution Ⅱ 3 6~16
Deployment(Fast-Track)
CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway)Contact Center Design Ⅲ 2 6~16

Ⅲ 2 6~16
Gateway) Contact Center Design
VTM Solution Design Ⅲ 3 6~16
Cloud Contact Center Solution Design Ⅲ 3 6~16
VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation and Maintenance
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Advanced Features Operation and Maintenance
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC)

Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
VC Planning and Design Training Programs
ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace IVS system operation and maintenance training Programs
244
Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning
Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
maintenance training
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced

Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ: Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
245
9.1 Certification Training Programs
9.1.1 HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration
Training Path and single products

 Operate Huawei eSpace UC basic application
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified
Communication Administration  Describe Huawei eSpace UC installation and
commissioning
OUCE1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Perform eSpace U19XX series gateway
Target Audience operation
Those who hope to become a UC engineer  Describe call flows in eSpace U19XX system
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-UC  Perform the primary configuration in EMS
Prerequisites system
 Perform the primary configuration in EGW
 Perform the primary configuration in IAD
 Perform the primary configuration in IP phone
 Perform the primary configuration in AR G3
Objectives voice system
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe call flows in AR G3 voice system
be able to:  Perform the primary maintenance in AR G3
 Describe UC concept and development history voice system
 Describe VoIP concept Duration
 Distinguish VoIP and PSTN 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2

 Describe VoIP key technology and protocol working day
 Describe UC basic application Class Size
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC solution
Min 6, max 16
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC Architecture
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC devices portfolio
246
9.1.2 HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP Telephony Solutions
Training Path eSpace U19XX system

 Perform the system data configuration in
HCNP-UC-HIPT Implementing Huawei IP
Telephony Solutions eSpace U19XX system
 Perform the user data configuration in eSpace
U19XX system
Target Audience  Perform the office data configuration in eSpace
U19XX system
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified
 Perform the application data configuration in
Communication engineer
eSpace U19XX system
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
 Design the call route in eSpace U19XX system
Prerequisites
 Describe user registration flow in eSpace
 A general familiarity with PC operation system U19XX system
 A general familiarity with network knowledge  Describe call flow in eSpace U19XX system
 A general familiarity with communication theory  Describe call restriction in eSpace U19XX
 HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge system
Objectives  Describe the Voicemail application in eSpace
U1910/U1930
 Perform the redundant application
be able to:
configuration in eSpace U1910/U1930
 Describe VoIP protocol used in eSpace U19XX
 Perform routine maintenance in eSpace
system
U19XX system
 Describe eSpace U19XX system features
 Perform troubleshooting in eSpace U19XX
 Describe eSpace U19XX system function
system
 Describe eSpace U19XX system parameters
 Perform the fault location in eSpace U19XX
 Distinguish the products in eSpace U19XX
system
system
Duration
 Describe the typical networks in eSpace
U19XX system 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
 Describe the network design in eSpace U19XX working day
system Class Size
 Describe the boards and modules in eSpace
Min 6, max 16
U19XX system
 Describe the boards and modules functions in
247
9.1.3 HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3 Voice Solutions and QoS
Training Path  Describe the typical networks in AR G3 voice

system
HCNP-UC-Hvoice Implementing Huawei AR G3
Voice Solutions and QoS  Describe the network design in AR G3 voice
system
 Describe the boards and modules in AR G3
Target Audience voice system
 Perform the system data configuration in AR
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified
G3 voice system
Communication engineer
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC  Perform the user data configuration in AR G3
voice system
Prerequisites
 Perform the office data configuration in AR G3
 A general familiarity with PC operation system voice system
 A general familiarity with network knowledge  Perform the application data configuration in
 A general familiarity with communication theory AR G3 voice system
 HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge  Describe the two voice mode(SIPAG and PBX
Objectives mode) in AR G3 voice system
 Design the call route in AR G3 voice system
 Describe user registration flow in AR G3 voice
be able to:
system
 Describe development history of phone
 Describe SBC application used in AR G3 voice
 Describe PSTN concept and network
system
 Describe the devices used in PSTN and
 Describe user registration flow in AR G3 voice
network
system
 Describe VoIP concept
 Describe call flow in AR G3 voice system
 Distinguish VoIP and PSTN
 Perform routine maintenance in AR G3 voice
 Describe VoIP key technology and protocol
system
 Describe the codec used in VoIP network
 Describe the QoS application used in AR G3
 Describe the DSP used in AR G3 voice system
voice system
 Describe AR G3 voice system features
Duration
 Describe AR G3 voice system function
 Describe AR G3 voice system parameters 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
working day
 Distinguish the products in AR G3 voice system
Class Size
 Identify the analog interface used in AR G3
voice system Min 6, max 16
 Identify the digital interface used in AR G3
voice system
248
9.1.4 HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions
(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe User Part of SS7 signaling, messaging

part of the message type code
HCNP-UC Implementing Huawei Unified
Communication Solutions (Fast-Track)  Describe ISUP and TUP basic call flow in SS7
signaling
 Describe eSpace UC typical network scenarios
Target Audience
 Mast eSpace UC network reliability
Those who hope to become an advanced Unified  Master eSpace UC external network access
Communication engineer  Master eSpace UC QoS planning
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC quickly  Configure Advanced business features of
Prerequisites eSpace U19XX system
 Make good use of the advanced features of
eSpace U19XX system
 Analyze typical networking scenarios of eSpace
U19XX system
 Obtain the same level voice NP certificate in the
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000
industry
solution architecture
Objectives
 Describe Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000
On completion of this program, the participants will installation and commissioning
be able to:  List the Huawei eSpace UC1000/UC3000
 Describe the SIP protocol and SIP messages, features
registration and call flow  Describe the troubleshooting processes in
 Describe the basic concepts of the PRI protocol eSpace UC system
 Describe the second-tier message and format in  Analyze the business operation of each module
PRI protocol in eSpace UC system
 Describe the communication between  Manipulate the common fault in eSpace UC
second-tier and third-tier in PRI protocol system
 Describe the third-tier messages and status in  Implement the security reinforcement operation
PRI protocol in eSpace UC system
 Describe the basic call flow in PRI protocol Duration
 Describe the basic concepts of the R2 signaling 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
 Describe the inter-register signaling of the R2 working day
signaling Class Size
 Describe the line signaling of the R2 signaling
Min 6, max 16
 Describe the basic call flow in R2 signaling
249
9.1.5 HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration
Training Path  Describe Huawei CTI principle

 Implement agent service commissioning
HCNA-CC-IHOCCA Introducing Huawei
 Describe Huawei IVR principle
Contact Center Administration
 Implement automatic service commissioning
OCCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Describe Huawei Multimedia Contact Center
Target Audience function and principle
Those who hope to become a Contact Center  Describe Huawei Outbound system principle
engineer  Describe Huawei Outbound platform policy
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-CC  Describe Huawei Contact Center report system
Prerequisites architecture
 Describe flow of original data to database
 Operate Huawei Contact Center report
Objectives
 Describe Huawei Conference Recording
On completion of this program, the participants will principle
be able to:  Describe Huawei Soft Phone Recording
 Describe enterprise communication concepts principle
rd
 Describe contact center concepts and  Describe Huawei 3 Party Recording
development history integration principle
 Describe Multimedia Contact Center services  Describe Huawei screen recording system
 Describe Huawei eSpace Contact Center principle
Solution  Use Huawei Screen Recording System
 Describe Huawei eSpace Contact Center  Use Huawei WEB QC console

architecture  Use Huawei WEB monitoring console
 Describe Huawei eSpace Contact Center  Describe Contact Center development trend
devices portfolio and single products and cloud Contact Center
 Operation Huawei eSpace Contact Center Duration
monitoring and QC
5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
 Analyze Contact Center network architecture
working day
 Implement UAP series gateway operation and
Class Size
configuration
 Analyze Contact Center fundamental routing Min 6, max 16
policy
250
9.1.6 HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center(Fast-Track)
Training Path recovery methods

 Describe Network Contact Center concepts,
HCNP-CC Implement Large-scale Enterprise
features
Contact Center (Fast-Track)
 Describe QC concepts, features
 Describe Network Contact Center function and
Target Audience networking
 Implement network Contact Center setting up
Those who hope to become a Contact Center
advanced engineer  Describe QC system main function
Those who have obtained the same level technical  Implement QC system configuration
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain  Describe QC system typical service flow
Huawei certificate  Describe IPCC system fault scenarios
Prerequisites  Implement IPCC system troubleshooting
 Describe IVR process development principle
 A general familiarity with PC Operation System
 Describe IVR process troubleshooting flow
 Computer and Communication basics
 Implement IVR debug and log capture
 Contact Center basics
 Analyze IVR common problems and handling
Objectives
 Describe IPCC Report System running
On completion of this program, the participants will Principle
be able to:  Implement basic report commissioning
 Describe eSpace U2990 product features and  Describe eSpace CC blade server products
functions and features
 Describe eSpace U2990 typical networking  Implement eSpace CC blade server installation
 Describe eSpace U2990 boards and board and commissioning
functions Duration
 Implement eSpace U2990 routine maintenance
operation
working day
 Describe eSpace U2990 troubleshooting
Class Size
procedure
 Implement eSpace U2990 troubleshooting Min 6, max 16
 eSpace U2990 emergent maintenance and
251
9.1.7 HCNP-CC-HUAP Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal Access
Platform
Training Path  Analyze U2990 boards Configuration cases

 Describe UAP Software System
HCNP-CC-HUAP
Implement Huawei Contact Center Universal  Use UAP operation and maintenance tool
Access Platform
OCCX3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Describe UAP access function
3d
 Describe UAP resource function
 Describe UAP agent function
Target Audience
 Analyze UAP networking
Those who hope to become a Contact Center  Implement UAP capacity design
advanced engineer  Conclude PBX Fundamental knowledge
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC  Analyze differences between U2990 and
Prerequisites UAP3300
 Describe UAP installation flow
 Describe UAP device data plan content
 HCNA Contact Center knowledge
 Implement U2990 device data configuration
Objectives
 Implement U2990 office data configuration
On completion of this program, the participants will  Implement U2990 service data Configuration
be able to:  Use UAP playing voice
 Describe Enterprise PBX Communication  Describe routine maintenance content of UAP
Principle
 Implement routine maintenance operation
 Describe the collaboration of UAP and
 Use UAP maintenance and monitoring tool
application layer
 Use capturing tool to do troubleshooting
 Describe UAP interfaces
 Use ICDDebug to do troubleshooting
 Describe signaling and protocols supported by
Duration
UAP
 Describe UAP stacking and cascading 3 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
 Describe UAP technology indicators working day
 DescribeUAP3300 frame and boards Class Size
 Analyze UAP3300 MCU multiple-network-port Min 6, max 16

 Describe U2990 frame and boards
252
9.1.8 HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact Center CTI Solution
Training Path  Analyze CTI fundamental routing policy

 Analyze CTI layered services policy
HCNP-CC-HCTI Implement Huawei Contact
Center CTI Solution  Analyze CTI network routing policy
 Analyze CTI outbound policy
 Implement CTI agent service commissioning
 Implement CTI automatic agent service
Target Audience
Commissioning
Those who hope to become a Contact Center  Implement CTI multimedia contact Center
advanced engineer service commissioning
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC  Describe CTI mail, SMS, Fax call flow
Prerequisites  Describe CTI network call flow

 Implement NIRC configuration
 Describe CTI outbound flow
 Implement outbound system configuration
Objectives
 Describe CTI QC flow
On completion of this program, the participants will  Implement platform control policy configuration
be able to:  Describe CTI platform service monitoring
 Describe the meaning of CTI technology function
 Analyze the position of CTI in different contact  Implement CTI platform Service monitoring
center solutions configuration
 Describe CTI function  Describe eSpace CC report solution
 Describe technology indicators Huawei CTI  Implement data station installation
 Describe CTI 4 layers logical structure configuration
 Describe CTI 4 layers and functions of each  Implement iWeb installation configuration
layer  Describe report secondary development
 Use CT Communication matrix Principle
 Describe CTI network elements Monitoring and  Describe Huawei cloud terminal solution
the method  Describe Huawei cloud platform solution
 Describe CTI common networking  Describe Huawei VTM solution
 Implement eSpace CC one click installation  Describe Huawei social media access solution
 Implement eSpace CC One or Two-Node  Process test
Cluster Configuration  Use IVR flow file
 Describe CTI platform safety maintenance Duration
content
 Describe CTI platform safety reinforcing
working day
solution
Class Size
 Describe CTI anti-virus solution
 Implement CTI system monitoring Min 6, max 16
253
9.1.9 HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR Advanced Application
Training Path  Describe intelligent concepts

 Describe Huawei process file development tool
HCNP-CC-DHIVR Develop Huawei IVR
Advanced Application  Use Huawei process file development tool
 Describe process file types and structures
 Describe process development procedure
Target Audience
 Analyze Contact Center Automatic flow and
Those who hope to become a Contact Center intelligent routing demands
advanced engineer  Design automatic voice flow and intelligent
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-CC routing flow file
Prerequisites  Process development

 Process test
 Use IVR flow file
Duration
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will working day
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe Huawei IVR Principle
 Describe Huawei IVR components and Min 6, max 16
modules
254
9.1.10 HCNA-VC Huawei Certified Network Associate-Video Conference
Training Path  Master SD terminal hardware installation

 Master SD terminal software basic function
HCNA-VC-IHVCA Introducing Huawei Video
Conference Administration  Master HD series terminal hardware interface
 Master HD series terminal hardware installation
OVCC1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Master HD series terminal software basic
Target Audience
operations
Those who hope to become a video conference  Know MCU structure, function and feature
associate  Master MCU installation
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC certificate  Master MCU basic data configuration
Prerequisites  Know vSwitch System basic function
 Master vSwitch System installation and
configuration
 Master vSwitch System basic concept
 Understand RM function
Objectives
 Understand RM structure
On completion of this program, the participants will  Understand RM important concepts
be able to:  Master TP conference room deployment
 Know video conference concept requirements
 Know video conference development history and  Master TP system hardware structure
tend  Master TP system conference control function
 Master video conference system structure Duration
 Master video conference pivotal information
5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 2
compression technology
working days
 Know video conference related framework
Class Size
protocol
 Master SD terminal hardware interface Min 6, Max 12
255
9.1.11 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference
Training Path  Describe SEC2.0 ARQ against packets lost

feature
HCNP-VC-IHVCP Introducing Huawei Video
Conference H.323 and SIP Protocol  Master multi-channel cascading, multi-group
continuous presence
 Know video IVR feature
 Master MCU backup mode
HCNP-VC-IHVP Implementing Huawei  Master MCU network cards ride mode
Advanced ViewPoint System
 Describe feature
 Know firewall command
 Know video conference service problems
HCNP-VC-IHTP Implementing Huawei under firewall
TelePrecese System  Master video conference firewall traversal
OVCC4 Lecture, Demonstration 3d solution
Target Audience  Describe firewall routine cases analysis

 Master video conference system
Those who hope to become a video conference
troubleshooting basic methods
professional
 Master video conference system
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-VC
troubleshooting routine tool
Prerequisites
 Master video conference system routine
 A general familiarity with PC operation system command
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Know Huawei TP basic feature
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Know Huawei TP development and tend
Objectives  Know Huawei TP series product

 Know Huawei TP product principle
 Know Huawei TP product structure
be able to:
 Describe Huawei TP application scenarios
 Describe H.323 protocol stack structure
 Master Huawei TP convene conference
 Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
operation
 Master video conference schedule signaling
 Master Huawei TP conference control
flow
operation
 Master routine signaling troubleshooting
 Master Huawei TP conference troubleshooting
methods
Maintenance
 Describe SIP protocol definition
 Know Huawei TP series product software
 Describe SIP message concept and structure
upgrade
 Master SIP protocol call flow
 Know TP product fault classification
 Master SIP protocol typical application
 Master TP product troubleshooting methods
scenarios
 Describe TP product troubleshooting cases
 Know optic basic knowledge
Duration
 Know acoustic basic knowledge
 Describe video conference decoration 10 working days, including Hands-on exercise 3
requirements working days
256
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
257
9.1.12 HCNP-VC Huawei Certified Network Professional-Video Conference
(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Master MCU installation configuration methods

 Master MCU routine troubleshooting disposal
HCNP-VC Implementing Huawei Video
Conference System Advanced (Fast-Track) methods
 Know vSwitch System basic component function
 Master vSwitch System advanced operation
Target Audience
 Master vSwitch System routine fault disposal
Those who hope to become a network professional  Master RM installation configuration
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC certificate  Master RM routine fault disposal
Those who have obtained the same level technical  Know MCU advanced feature
certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain Huawei  Master MCU advanced feature operation
certificate methods
Prerequisites  Master tri-screen TP system basic principle
 Master tri-screen TP system troubleshooting
 HCNA-VC certification or the similar knowledge
methods
 Obtained the same level technical certificate in
 Know video conference service firewall problem
the industry
 Describe video conference service NAT
Objectives
 Describe video conference firewall traversal
be able to:
 Master video conference schedule signaling flow 5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 2
working days
 Master HD series terminal advanced settings
Class Size
 Master HD series terminal software routine
function Min 6, Max 12
 Master HD series terminal routine Maintenance
 Know MCU composing and feature
258
9.2 Fundamental of VoIP Technology Training Programs
9.2.1 Fundamental of VoIP Technology

TDM and VoIP Network
be able to:
OUC01 Lecture 1d  Describe development history of telephone
network
 Describe traditional TDM network architecture
MGCP/H.248 Protocol  Describe the integration between TDM and VoIP
network
 Understand VoIP network architecture
 Understand VoIP network principle
 Describe MGCP/H.248 protocol
H.323 Protocol  Understand the MGCP/H.248 protocol
architecture, messages and application
 Describe H.323 protocol
 Understand the H.323 protocol architecture,
messages and application
SIP Protocol  Describe SIP protocol
 Understand the SIP protocol architecture,
messages and application
 Describe the reasons cause to voice quality in
the VoIP network
QoS Technology
 Understand QoS technology principle
OUC06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe QoS technology application scenarios

Duration
Target Audience

VoIP engineer
working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
259
9.2.2 Fundamental of VoIP Technology (Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe traditional TDM network architecture

 Describe the integration between TDM and VoIP
TDM and VoIP Network network
OUC01 Lecture 1d
 Understand VoIP network principle
 Describe MGCP/H.248 protocol
 Understand the MGCP/H.248 protocol
VoIP Protocol architecture and application
 Describe H.323 protocol
 Understand the H.323 protocol architecture and
application
 Describe SIP protocol
QoS Technology
 Understand the SIP protocol architecture and
OUC06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d application

 Describe the reasons cause to voice quality in
Target Audience
the VoIP network
VoIP engineer  Understand QoS technology principle
Prerequisites  Describe QoS technology application scenarios
Duration
 A general familiarity with network knowledge 3 working day, including hands-on exercise 1
 A general familiarity with communication theory working day
On completion of this program, the participants will Min 6, max 16

be able to:
 Describe development history of telephone
network
260
9.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Training Programs
9.3.1 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Installation and Commissioning
Training Path  A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge

Objectives
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d be able to:
 Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
 Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
U19XX/SoftCo System Installation and
Commissioning  Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
system
 Perform the installation and commissioning of
U19XX/SoftCo system
EGW Introduction  Describe the classification of EGW system
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d
EGW system
IAD Introduction and Installation
 Perform the installation of IAD system
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the IP phone function

OUC61
 Perform the installation and commissioning of IP
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and phone
Configuration  Describe the eSpace EMS system function
OUC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
system
eSpace EMS System Introduction eSpace EMS system
and Installation
Duration
Target Audience
working day
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, max 16
261
9.3.2 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Basic Configuration and
Operation

OUC11 Lecture 0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration  A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo voice

system
Objectives

EGW Introduction be able to:
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
 Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
EGW Configuration and Maintenance
system
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
OUC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform EGW system installation and
configuration
IAD Configuration and Maintenance
OUC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe IAD hardware architecture
 Perform IAD installation and configuration
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and  Describe IP phone classification and function
Configuration
 Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
OUC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Configuration
 Describe the eSpace EMS system function
eSpace EMS System Introduction  Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
and Installation
system
OUC91 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform eSpace EMS system installation
 Perform eSpace EMS system configuration and
eSpace EMS System Configuration maintenance
and Maintenance
Duration
OUC9 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d
exercise
2 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
Target Audience
working day
Operators and Maintainers Class Size
Min 6, max 16
262
9.3.3 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Advanced Configuration and
Operation
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration  A general familiarity with network knowledge
Objectives
U19XX/SoftCo System Advanced Configuration
be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Maintenance
OUC15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
system
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
EGW Introduction
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system feature
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d configuration
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
EGW Configuration and Maintenance service configuration
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system maintenance
IAD Introduction and Installation  Describe EGW system hardware architecture
OUC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform EGW system installation and
configuration
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the IAD function
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and  Describe IP phone classification and function
Configuration  Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
Configuration
QoS Technology  Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
Lecture, Hands-on exercise system

OUC06 1d
 Perform eSpace EMS system installation
eSpace EMS System Introduction  Perform eSpace EMS system configuration and
and Installation maintenance
OUC91 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Duration
eSpace EMS System Configuration 8 working day, including hands-on exercise 3.5
and Maintenance working day
263
Class Size Min 6, max 16
9.3.4 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Troubleshooting
Training Path  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition

U19XX/SoftCo System Troubleshooting system
 List the fault handling process of U19XX/SoftCo
system
Target Audience  Perform the fault location of U19XX/SoftCo

system
Operators and Maintainers  List the common fault of U19XX/SoftCo system
 A general familiarity with PC operation system 1 working day, including hands-on exercise 0.5
 A general familiarity with network knowledge working day
Class Size
 A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo system Min 6, max 16
configuration
Objectives

be able to:
264
9.3.5 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path  A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo system

configuration
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration Objectives
OUC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Maintenance  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
system
configuration
OUC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
service configuration
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the IAD function
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and
Configuration  Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
Configuration
Duration
Target Audience
3 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.5
working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
265
9.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Training Programs
9.4.1 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Installation and Commissioning
Training Path  Describe the classification of AR G3 voice

system
Network Design  Perform the AR G3 voice system installation and
commissioning
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
AR G3 Voice System Installation and
Commissioning between AR G3 voice system and EGW
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs between AR G3 voice system and IAD
Prerequisites  Describe the IP phone function

 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Perform the interconnection commissioning
 A general familiarity with network knowledge between AR G3 voice system and IP phone
 A general familiarity with communication theory Duration
Objectives 2 working day, including hands-on exercise 0.75
working day
be able to:
 Describe the AR G3 voice system composition Min 6, max 16
266
9.4.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration and Operation
Training Path  Perform the AR G3 voice system configuration

Network Design  Describe the classification of EGW system
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
voice system and EGW
and Operation  Describe the IAD function
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers interconnection configuration between AR G3

voice system and IAD
Prerequisites
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Perform service configuration in the
 A general familiarity with network knowledge interconnection configuration between AR G3
 A general familiarity with communication theory voice system and IP phone
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge Duration
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
system
267
9.4.3 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration and Operation
Training Path  Perform AR G3 voice system configuration

configuration
Network Design
 Perform AR G3 voice system advanced service
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
configuration
AR G3 Voice System Basic Configuration  Describe the EGW system function

and Operation  Describe the classification of EGW system
OUC42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Describe EGW system hardware architecture
AR G3 Voice System Advanced Configuration voice system and EGW
OUC43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the classification of IAD
Target Audience  Perform service configuration in the

Operators and Maintainers voice system and IAD
Prerequisites  Describe IP phone classification and function
voice system and IP phone
 Perform AR G3 voice system SBC configuration
Duration
Objectives
working day
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the AR G3 voice system function Min 6, max 16
system
268
9.4.4 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and Troubleshooting
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance and On completion of this program, the participants will
Troubleshooting
be able to:
OUC44 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the AR G3 voice system composition
system
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers  Perform AR G3 voice system maintenance
Prerequisites  List the fault handling process of AR G3 voice
system
Duration
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge 1 working day, including hands-on exercise 0.5
 A general familiarity with AR G3 voice system working day
 A general familiarity with AR G3 voice system Class Size
configuration
Min 6, max 16
269
9.4.5 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
AR G3 Voice System Introduction On completion of this program, the participants will

and Network Design
be able to:
system
and Operation
configuration
AR G3 Voice System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting between AR G3 system and other voice
devices
Target Audience  List the fault handling process of AR G3 voice
system
Prerequisites
Duration
working day
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge Class Size
Min 6, max 16
270
9.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1(U19XX&UC300/1000/3000/10000) System
Training Programs
9.5.1 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning

UC1.1 System Introduction
Prerequisites
OUC81 Lecture 0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction  A general familiarity with communication theory
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d Objectives

U19XX/SoftCo System Installation and be able to:
Commissioning
 Describe the UC1.1 system composition
OUC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the UC1.1 system function
 Describe the classification of UC1.1 system
 Perform the UC1.1 system installation and
UC1.1 System Installation and Commissioning commissioning
OUC82 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
system
eSpace UMS System Installation, Operation
and Maintenance U19XX/SoftCo system
 Describe the eSpace system function
OUCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
system
EGW Introduction eSpace UMS system
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the classification of EGW system
EGW system
IAD Introduction and Installation  Describe the IAD function
OUC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform the installation and commissioning of
IAD
 Describe the IP phone function
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the classification of IP phone
 Perform the installation and commissioning of IP
OUC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d phone
Duration
Configuration 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.75
OUC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d working day
271
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
9.5.2 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Basic Configuration and Operation

UC1.1 System Introduction
OUC81 Lecture 0.5d  A general familiarity with communication theory
 A general familiarity with U19XX/SoftCo system
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction configuration
 A general familiarity with UC1.1 system
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives

U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration
be able to:
OUC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the UC1.1 system composition
 Describe the UC1.1 system function
UC1.1 System Configuration and Maintenance
 Perform UC1.1 system configuration
OUC83 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system composition
system
and Maintenance
OUCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the eSpace UMS system function
 Perform eSpace UMS system installation and
eSpace UMS System Operation and configuration
Maintenance
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of EGW system
 Perform EGW system installation and
EGW Configuration and Maintenance
configuration
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the IAD function
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Perform IAD configuration
Configuration
Configuration Duration
OUC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
Target Audience working day
272
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
9.5.3 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Advanced Configuration and Operation
Training Path IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and

Configuration
UC1.1 System Introduction Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Lecture Target Audience

OUC81 0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction Prerequisites
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d  A general familiarity with PC operation system

U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration  A general familiarity with communication theory

Objectives
U19XX/SoftCo System Advanced Configuration
OUC14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Maintenance  Describe the classification and function of UC1.1
system
OUC15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform UC1.1 system configuration
 Describe the call and data flows of UC1.1 system
UC1.1 System Configuration and Maintenance
 Describe the classification and function of
OUC83 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d U19XX/SoftCo system
eSpace UMS System Installation, Operation  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system feature
and Maintenance configuration
OUCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
eSpace UMS System Operation and  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system maintenance
Maintenance  Describe the eSpace UMS system function
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform eSpace UMS system installation and
configuration
EGW Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the classification and function of EGW
system
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe EGW system hardware architecture
 Perform EGW system installation and
configuration
 Describe the classification and function of IAD
 Perform IAD configuration
OUC71 Configuration
273
Duration Class Size
Min 6, max 16
working day
9.5.4 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Troubleshooting
UC1.1 System Troubleshooting On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
OUC84 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform UC1.1 system configuration
Target Audience  Perform UC1.1 system maintenance
 List the fault handling process of UC1.1 system
 List the common fault of UC1.1 system
Prerequisites  List the fault handling process of U19XX/SoftCo
system
 List the common fault between UC1.1 and
U19XX/SoftCo system
 A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge Duration

working day
configuration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
274
9.5.5 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Prerequisites
UC1.1 System Introduction  A general familiarity with PC operation system

OUC81 Lecture 0.5d
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction Objectives
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
OUC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the classification of UC1.1 system
 Perform UC1.1 system configuration
 Describe the call and data flows of UC1.1
U19XX/SoftCo System Maintenance
system
OUC1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system
5 composition
UC1.1 System Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
system
eSpace UMS System Installation, Operation configuration
and Maintenance
 Describe the eSpace UMS system function
 Perform eSpace UMS system installation and
eSpace UMS System Operation and configuration
Maintenance  Describe the IAD function
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of IAD
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Perform IAD installation and configuration

OUC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe IP phone installation, upgrade and
Configuration
Duration
Configuration
working day
Target Audience Class Size
Operators and Maintainers Min 6, max 16
275
9.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0(U29XX/UC2.0) System Training Programs
9.6.1 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Installation and Commissioning

UC2.0 system Introduction
Prerequisites
OUCB1 Lecture 0.5d
U29XX System Introduction
OUC21 Lecture 0.5d  A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
Objectives
U29XX System Installation and Commissioning On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Installation and
Commissioning  Describe the classification of UC2.0 system
 Perform the UC2.0 system installation and
commissioning
 Describe the U29XX system function
UC2.0 system Installation  Describe the classification of U29XX system
 Perform the U29XX system installation and
OUCB2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
commissioning
eSpace EMS System Introduction and
Installation
system
U19XX/SoftCo system
and Maintenance
 Describe the classification of eSpace EMS
system
 Perform the eSpace EMS system installation
EGW Introduction and commissioning
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
system
IAD Introduction and Installation  Perform the installation and commissioning of
eSpace UMS system
Configuration  Perform the installation and commissioning of
EGW system
 Perform the installation of IAD system
276
 Describe the IP phone function Duration
 Describe the classification of IP phone 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.75
 Perform the installation and commissioning of working day
IP phone
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
277
9.6.2 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Basic Configuration and Operation
Training Path  A general familiarity with communication theory

UC2.0 system Introduction
Objectives
OUCB1 Lecture 0.5d
U29XX System Introduction be able to:
OUC21 0.5d  Describe the UC2.0 system composition

Lecture
U29XX System Configuration
 Perform the UC2.0 system configuration
 Describe the classification of U29XX system
 Perform the U29XX system configuration
OUC11 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
U19XX/SoftCo System Configuration system
OUC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system
configuration
U2.0 System Configuration  Describe the eSpace EMS system function
OUCB3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
system
eSpace EMS System Configuration and  Perform the eSpace EMS system configuration
Maintenance  Describe the eSpace system function
OUC92 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
system
eSpace UMS System Operation and
Maintenance  Perform the eSpace UMS system configuration
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the EGW system function
EGW Configuration and Maintenance  Perform the eSpace EGW system configuration
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the IAD function
IAD Configuration and Maintenance  Perform IAD configuration
 Describe the IP phone function
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and  Perform IP phone installation and configuration

Configuration Duration
Target Audience 7 working day, including hands-on exercise 2.25
working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, max 16
278
9.6.3 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Advanced Configuration and Operation
UC2.0 System Introduction Operators and Maintainers
OUCB2 Lecture 0.5d Prerequisites

U29XX System Introduction  A general familiarity with network knowledge
OUC21 Lecture 0.5d  A general familiarity with communication theory
U29XX System Configuration Objectives
OUC23 Lecture, Hands-on 1d On completion of this program, the participants will be

exercise
able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Introduction  Describe the UC2.0 system composition
OUC11 Lecture  Describe the UC2.0 system function
0.5d
 Describe the call and data flows of UC2.0
OUC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d system
U19XX/SoftCo System Advanced Configuration  Describe the classification of U29XX system
OUC14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Perform the U29XX system configuration
1.5d
 Describe the call flows of U29XX system
UC2.0 system Installation
OUCB1 Lecture 0.5d system
 Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system
UC2.0 system configuration configuration
OUCB3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the call flows of U19XX/SoftCo
system
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance
OUCB4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the eSpace EMS system function
eSpace EMS System Configuration and system
Maintenance
OUC92 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform the eSpace EMS system configuration
eSpace UMS System Operation and  Describe the classification of eSpace UMS
Maintenance system
OUCA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform the eSpace UMS system configuration
EGW Configuration and Maintenance  Describe the classification of EGW system
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform the eSpace EGW system
configuration
 Perform IP phone installation and configuration
Duration
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and 10 working day, including hands-on exercise 4

Configuration
working day
279
Class Size Min 6, max 16
9.6.4 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Troubleshooting

UC2.0 System Troubleshooting On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
OUCB5 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform the UC2.0 system configuration
Target Audience  Perform UC2.0 system maintenance

 List the fault handling process of UC2.0 system
Operators and Maintainers  List the common fault of UC2.0 system
Prerequisites  Perform the U29XX system configuration
 Perform U29XX system maintenance
 List the fault handling process of U29XX
system
 List the common fault of U29XX system
Duration
 A general familiarity with U29XX system
configuration 1 working day, including hands-on exercise 0.5
 A general familiarity with UC2.0 system working day
configuration
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
280
9.6.5 Huawei U29XX All in One Solution
eSpace UC All in One System Introduction and On completion of this program, the participants will
Network Design
be able to:
OUC31 Lecture 1d  Describe the UC2.0 system composition
eSpace UC All in One System Configuration
and Maintenance  Describe the call and data flows of UC2.0 system
Target Audience  Perform the U29XX system configuration
 Perform UC All in One system installation
Prerequisites
 Perform UC All in One system configuration
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Perform UC All in One system maintenance
 A general familiarity with network knowledge Duration
working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
281
9.6.6 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Operation and Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path  A general familiarity with network knowledge

UC2.0 System Introduction  A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
Objectives
OUCB1 Lecture 0.5d
be able to:
U29XX System Configuration  Describe the UC2.0 system composition
 Describe the call and data flows of UC2.0 system
 Perform the U29XX system configuration
UC2.0 system configuration  Describe the U19XX/SoftCo system function
OUCB3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d system
 Perform the U19XX/SoftCo system configuration
 Describe the call flows of U19XX/SoftCo system
UC2.0 system Operation and Maintenance  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system advanced
OUCB4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the IAD function
 Perform IAD configuration
IAD Configuration and Maintenance Duration
OUC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 2.25
working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
Prerequisites
282
9.7 UC Planning and Design Training
9.7.1 Huawei eSpace U19XX/SoftCo Voice System Design
Training Path  A general familiarity with the products in

U19xx/SoftCo system and its capacity
TDM and VoIP Network Objectives
OUC01 Lecture 1d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe development history of telephone
U19XX/SoftCo System Network Design network
OUC16 Lecture 1d
 Describe the integration between TDM and VoIP
network
EGW Introduction  List the common protocols in VoIP network
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d
system
IAD Network Design  Describe U19XX/SoftCo system capacity
Lecture  Perform U19XX/SoftCo system network design

OUC63 0.5d
 Describe EGW/IAD function
 Describe the classification of EGW/IAD
Audio Record System Introduction and  Describe EGW/IAD capacity
Network Design  Perform EGW/IAD network design
OUCC1 Lecture 0.5d  Describe Audio Record/SBC system function
 Describe the classification of Audio Record/SBC
system
SBC System Network Design  Describe Audio Record/SBC system capacity

 Perform Audio Record / SBC System Network
OUCD3 Lecture 0.5d Design
Target Audience Duration
Planners and Designers 4 working day
 A general familiarity with PC operation system Min 6, max 16

283
9.7.2 Huawei AR G3 Voice System Design
AR G3 Voice System Introduction and On completion of this program, the participants will
Network Design
be able to:
IAD Network Design system
 Describe AR G3 system capacity
OUC63 Lecture 0.5d
 Perform AR G3 system network design
Target Audience
Planners and Designers  Describe IAD capacity
Prerequisites  Perform IAD network design

Duration
 A general familiarity with network knowledge 1 working day
 A general familiarity with communication theory Class Size
Min 6, max 16
284
9.7.3 Huawei eSpace UC1.1 System Design

TDM and VoIP Network
be able to:
OUC01 Lecture 1d  Describe development history of telephone
network
UC1.1 System Planning and Design  Describe the integration between TDM and
VoIP network
OUC85 Lecture 0.5d  Understand VoIP network architecture
 List the common protocols in VoIP network
U19XX/SoftCo System Network Design  Describe the UC1.1 system function
OUC16 Lecture 1d
 Describe UC1.1 system capacity
 Perform UC1.1 system network design
IAD Network Design  Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo
system
OUC63 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe U19XX/SoftCo system capacity
Target Audience
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system network design
Planners and Designers  Describe the IAD function

Prerequisites
 Describe IAD capacity
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Perform IAD network design
 A general familiarity with network knowledge Duration
 A general familiarity with the products in 3 working day
U19xx/SoftCo system and its capacity Class Size

 A general familiarity with the products in UC1.1
Min 6, max 16
system and its capacity
285
9.7.4 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design (Small and Medium-sized Enterprise:
U29XX All in One Solution)
Training Path
be able to:
eSpace UC All in One System Introduction  Describe the UC All in One system composition
and Network Design  Describe the UC All in One system function
OUC31 Lecture 1d  Describe the UC All in One system capacity

 Describe the devices in the UC All in One
Target Audience system

 Describe the modules used in the UC All in
Planners and Designers One system
Prerequisites  Understand the function of each module used
in All in One system
 Perform the All in One system planning and
design
Duration
 A general familiarity with U2980 and its
capacity 1 working day
 A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its Class Size
capacity
286
9.7.5 Huawei eSpace UC2.0 System Design

UC2.0 System Network Design
OUCB6 Lecture 0.5d  A general familiarity with communication theory
 A general familiarity with U29XX system and its
capacity
U29XX System Network Design  A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its
capacity
OUC25 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives

be able to:
U19XX/SoftCo System Network Design
OUC16 Lecture 1d  Describe the UC2.0 system function
 Perform the UC2.0 System Network Design
SBC System Network Design  Describe the U29XX system function
OUCD3 Lecture 0.5d  Perform U29XX system network design
and Maintenance system
 Perform U19XX/SoftCo system network design
 Describe the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD function
 Describe the classification of
EGW Introduction
SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD
 Describe the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD capacity
OUC51 Lecture 0.5d
 Perform the SBC/UMS/EGW/IAD network
design
Duration
IAD Network Design
OUC63 Lecture 0.5d
working day
Target Audience
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
287
9.7.6 Huawei eSpace UC (U19XX/AR G3/UC1.1/UC2.0) Voice System Design
(Fast-Track)
Training Path
UC2.0 system Network Design U29XX System Network Design
OUCB6 Lecture 0.5d OUC25 Lecture 0.5d
UC1.1 System Planning and Design U19XX/SoftCo System Network Design
OUC85 Lecture 0.5d OUC16 Lecture 1d

Network Design
OUC41 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

 A general familiarity with the products in U19xx/SoftCo system and its parameter
 A general familiarity with U29XX system and its capacity
 A general familiarity with the products in UC1.1 system and its capacity
 A general familiarity with UC2.0 system and its capacity
288
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

 Perform the UC2.0 system network design
 Perform U29XX system network design
 Describe UC1.1 system capacity
 Perform UC1.1 system network design
 Describe the classification of U19XX/SoftCo system
 Describe the classification of AR G3 voice system
 Describe AR G3 system capacity
 Perform AR G3 system network design
Duration
3 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
289
9.8 CC Advanced Technology Training Programs
9.8.1 Enterprise Contact Center Advanced Routing Policy

 Describe Contact Center skill concepts
Enterprise Contact Center Advanced
Routing Policy  Describe Contact Center queue Concepts
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe agent surplus scenario

OCC37
 Describe Call surplus scenario
 Describe layered services concepts
Target Audience  Describe Contact Center advanced routing policy
Managers  Implement Contact Center advanced routing
Planners and Designers policy configuration
Installers and Commissioning Staffs 2 working day, including hands-on exercise 1

Prerequisites working day
Class Size
 Computer basics Min 6, max 16
Objectives
290
9.8.2 Enterprise Contact Center IVR Process and Intelligent Routing Development
Training Path  Describe Huawei IVR components and modules

 Describe intelligent routing concepts
IVR Process and Intelligent Routing
Development  Describe Huawei process file development tool
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Use Huawei process file development tool

OCC41
 Describe process file types and structure
 Describe process development procedure
Target Audience
 Analyze Contact Center automatic flow and
Planners and Designers intelligent routing demand
Operators and Maintainers  Design automatic voice process and intelligent
Installers and Commissioning Staffs routing process
Developer  Development IVR scripts
Prerequisites  Test IVR process file
 Use IVR process file
Duration
 Computer basics
 Contact Center basics 3 working day, including hands-on exercise 2
Objectives working day
Class Size
 Describe Huawei IVR principle
291
9.8.3 Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Technology

 Describe Huawei outbound solution
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound
System Overview  Describe OBS system
Lecture 0.5d  Describe OBS system outbound policy

OCC61
 Analyze predictive outgoing policy
 Describe Huawei HPS
Enterprise Contact Center Platform
 Describe HPS typical networking
Configuration
 Describe HPS typical application
OCC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe HPS development interface
 Describe HPS agent function
 Implement HPS system installation
Target Audience
 Create outbound policy
Planners and Designers  Create outbound campaign
Operators and Maintainers  Implement OBS configuration
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Implement outbound
Developer  Implement OBS monitoring
Agents Duration
Prerequisites
 A general familiarity with PC operation system working day
 Computer basics Class Size
 Contact Center basics Min 6, max 16

Objectives
292
9.8.4 Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia Technology
Training Path  Describe Huawei WECC application scenario

 Describe Huawei Email call scenario
Enterprise Contact Center Multimedia
Technology  Describe Huawei Fax call scenario
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe Huawei SMS call scenario

OCC51
 Implement text chat service configuration
 Implement click to dial service configuration
Target Audience  Implement call back request service
Installers and Commissioning Staffs configuration
Operators and Maintainers  Implement escorted browsing service

configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
 Computer basics
working day
 Contact Center basics
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
be able to:
293
9.9 CC Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Operation and
9.9.1 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Management and

Monitoring

IPCC System Overview
be able to:
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d  Describe enterprise communication concepts
 Describe IPCC concepts
 Describe IPCC system architecture
Enterprise Contact Center Agent
Operation  Describe IVR function
 Describe IPCC multimedia features
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Describe IPCC outbound function
 Describe IPCC report function
Enterprise Contact Center Report  Describe IPCC QC function
 Describe IPCC monitoring function
 Describe IPCC agent function
 Describe Huawei Contact Center agent concepts
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform  Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
Configuration and Operation  Describe CCCBar agent function and application
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe JCccBar agent function and application
 Describe agent server agent function and
application
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring
Platform Operation  Use CCCBar
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Use customized agent interface

OCC91 0.5d
 Describe Huawei report solution
 Describe the flow of original bill data to database
Target Audience  Describe report system structure
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Describe report typical configuration
Operators and Maintainers  Use iWeb report
Service Managers  Use BIR report
Managers  Implement Datastation installation configuration
Prerequisites  Implement iWeb installation configuration

 Describe report secondary development principle
 Describe Huawei contact center voice recording
 Computer basics
system principle
294
 Describe conference recording principle  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe soft phone recording principle Duration
 Describe VOIP voice recording principle
rd
 Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
working day
platform integration principle
Class Size
 Describe Huawei screen recording system
structure Min 6, max 16
295
9.9.2 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation
IPCC System Overview  A general familiarity with PC operation system

 Computer basics
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d Objectives
U29XX Series Gateway Overview be able to:

 Describe enterprise communication concepts
OCC21 Lecture 0.5d  Describe IPCC concepts
 Describe IVR function
U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration
OCC23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe IPCC outbound function

 Describe IPCC QC function
CTI Software System  Describe IPCC monitoring function
OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe U29XX series gateway system
structure and function
CTI Platform Service Commissioning  DescribeU29XX series gateway hardware

structure
OCC33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  DescribeU29XX series gateway software
structure
 Describe U29XX series gateway interfaces and
Enterprise Contact Center Report protocols
 Describe U29XX series gateway function and
specification
 Analyze U29XX series gateway networking
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform  Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
trunk circuit
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Implement U29XX series gateway basic
operation
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data
Platform Operation configuration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Implement U29XX series gateway office data
OCC91
configuration
Target Audience  Implement U29XX series gateway service data

configuration
 Describe CTI platform concepts
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical
296
rd
architecture  Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
 Describe CTI platform components’ function platform integration principle
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine  Describe Huawei screen recording system
switchover structure
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling platform features
 Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
enabling platform architecture
 Describe Huawei report solution  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Describe the flow of original bill data to database  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Describe report system structure components
 Describe report typical configuration  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Use iWeb report  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Use BIR report  Use management system client to monitor

service
 Implement Datastation installation configuration
Duration
 Implement iWeb installation configuration
 Describe report secondary development principle 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.75
 Describe Huawei contact center voice recording working day
system principle Class Size
 Describe conference recording principle
Min 6, max 16
 Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe VOIP voice recording principle
297
9.9.3 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Outbound Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path
Platform Operation
IPCC System Overview OCC91 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience

U29XX Series Gateway Overview
OCC21 Lecture 0.5d Prerequisites
U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration  Computer basics

Objectives
OCC23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
be able to:
CTI Software System  Describe enterprise communication concepts

System Overview  Describe IPCC outbound function
OCC61 Lecture 0.5d  Describe IPCC report function
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound Platform
Configuration  Describe IPCC agent function
OCC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe U29XX series gateway system
 DescribeU29XX series gateway hardware
Enterprise Contact Center Report structure
 DescribeU29XX series gateway software
structure
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform protocols

Configuration and Operation  Describe U29XX series gateway function and
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d specification
 Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
trunk circuit
298
 Implement U29XX series gateway basic  Use iWeb report
operation  Use BIR report
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data  Implement Datastation installation configuration
configuration  Implement iWeb installation configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway office data  Describe report secondary development principle
configuration  Describe Huawei contact center voice recording
 Implement U29XX series gateway service data system principle
configuration  Describe conference recording principle
 Describe CTI platform concepts  Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
architecture rd
 Describe Huawei outbound solution  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe OBS system  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe OBS system outbound policy platform features
 Analyze predictive outgoing policy  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe Huawei HPS platform architecture
 Describe HPS typical networking  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Describe HPS typical application  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Describe HPS development interface components
 Describe HPS agent function  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Implement HPS system installation  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Create outbound policy  Use management system client to monitor
 Create outbound campaign service
 Implement OBS configuration Duration
 Implement outbound
 Implement OBS monitoring
working day
Class Size
 Describe report system structure Min 6, max 16
 Describe report typical configuration
299
9.9.4 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Multimedia Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path
Platform Operation
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience

U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration  Computer basics

Objectives
be able to:

OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
CTI Platform Service Commissioning
OCC33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe IPCC report function
Technology  Describe IPCC agent function
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration structure
and Operation
OCC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d structure
protocols
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform
Configuration and Operation  Describe U29XX series gateway function and
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d specification
OCC81
300
trunk circuit  Describe report typical configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway basic  Use iWeb report
operation  Use BIR report
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data  Implement Datastation installation configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway office data  Describe report secondary development principle
 Implement U29XX series gateway service data system principle
configuration  Describe conference recording principle
 Describe CTI platform concepts  Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
architecture rd
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling platform features
enabling platform architecture
 Describe Huawei WECC application scenario  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Describe Huawei Email call scenario  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Describe Huawei Fax call scenario components
 Describe Huawei SMS call scenario  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Implement text chat service configuration  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Implement click to dial service configuration  Use management system client to monitor
 Implement call back request service service
configuration Duration
 Implement escorted browsing service
configuration
working day
Class Size
 Describe report system structure Min 6, max 16
301
9.9.5 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Installation and
Commissioning

be able to:
U29XX Series Gateway Installation and
Commissioning  Describe IVR function
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe IPCC multimedia features

OCC22
U29XX Series Gateway System Configuration  Describe IPCC QC function
 DescribeU29XX series gateway typical
networking
CTI Software System
 DescribeU29XX series gateway deployment
OCC31 Lecture 0.5d process flow
 Implement U29XX series gateway installation
 Commission U29XX Series Gateway Service
CTI Platform Installation  Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
trunk circuit
 Implement U29XX series gateway basic
operation
 Implement U29XX series gateway device data
configuration
OCC33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Implement U29XX series gateway office data
configuration
 Implement U29XX series gateway service data
CTI Platform Maintenance and configuration
Troubleshooting
architecture
Target Audience
 Describe CTI platform components’ function
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine
Operators and Maintainers switchover
Prerequisites  Implement eSpace CC box product one-click
installation
 Implement eSpace CC box product configuration
 Computer basics
 Describe eSpace CC safety solution
302
 Operate eSpace CC monitoring system  Implement CTI platform emergency maintenance
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow Duration
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling
working day
 Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
Class Size
enabling
 Implement CTI platform alarm handling Min 6, max 16
 Implement CTI platform troubleshooting
303
9.9.6 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Troubleshooting
U29XX Series Gateway Maintenance and On completion of this program, the participants will
Troubleshooting be able to:
OCC24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe U29XX series gateway routine
maintenance
 Describe U29XX series gateway common faults
CTI Platform Maintenance and  Analysis U29XX troubleshooting examples
Troubleshooting
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Use UAP series gateway troubleshooting tool
OCC34 1d
 Implement CTI platform alarm handling
 Implement CTI platform troubleshooting
Target Audience  Implement CTI platform emergency maintenance
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Duration
Operators and Maintainers 2 working day, including hands-on exercise 1

Prerequisites working day
 Computer basics Min 6, max 16
304
9.9.7 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Agent Operation

 Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
Enterprise Contact Center Agent Operation
 Describe CCCBar agent function and application
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe JCccBar agent function and application
application
Target Audience
 Use CCCBar
Operators and Maintainers  Use customized agent interface
Agents Duration
Prerequisites
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
305
9.9.8 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) eSpace Contact Center Solution
Deployment(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe IPCC outbound function

IPCC System Overview  Describe IPCC QC function
Lecture  Describe IPCC monitoring function

OCC01 0.5d
OCC21 Lecture 0.5d structure
structure
CTI Software System  Describe U29XX series gateway interfaces and
Lecture 0.5d protocols
OCC31
 Describe U29XX series gateway function and
specification
CTI Platform Service Commissioning  Analyze U29XX series gateway networking

architecture
CTI Network Design
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d switchover
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling
Operators and Maintainers  Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
Prerequisites enabling
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product series
 Computer basics  Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
Objectives  Describe NIRC principle

 Describe IPCC centralized networking and
On completion of this program, the participants will distributed networking
be able to:
Duration
 Describe IPCC concepts 3 working day, including hands-on exercise 0.5
working day
Class Size
 Describe IPCC multimedia features Min 6, max 16
306
9.10 CC Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100
Gateway)Operation and Maintenance Training
9.10.1 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Contact

Center Management and Monitoring
Training Path  Describe enterprise communication concepts

IPCC System Overview  Describe IPCC system architecture
Lecture 0.5d  Describe IVR function

OCC01
Enterprise Contact Center Agent Operation  Describe IPCC report function

OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Enterprise Contact Center Report  Describe Huawei Contact Center agent concepts
Configuration and Operation  Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
OCC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe CCCBar agent function and application
 Describe JCccBar agent function and application
Configuration and Operation application
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Use CCCBar

OCC81 0.5d
 Use customized agent interface
Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring  Describe the flow of original bill data to database
Platform Operation
 Describe report system structure
 Use iWeb report
Target Audience  Use BIR report

 Describe report secondary development principle
Service Managers
Managers
system principle
Prerequisites
 Describe conference recording principle
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe soft phone recording principle
 Computer basics  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
rd
Objectives  Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
platform integration principle
 Describe Huawei screen recording system
be able to:
structure
307
 Operate Huawei web QC system working day
Duration Class Size
3 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.25 Min 6, max 16
9.10.2 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Voice

Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path
Platform Operation
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience

UAP Series Gateway Overview
UAP Series Gateway System Configuration  Computer basics

Objectives
be able to:

OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
Enterprise Contact Center Report
 Describe UAP series gateway system structure
and function
 Describe UAP series gateway hardware structure
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform  Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
interfaces
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Analyze UAP series gateway networking
trunk circuit
 Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
 Implement UAP series gateway agent data
308
configuration system principle
 Implement terminal data configuration  Describe conference recording principle
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data  Describe soft phone recording principle
configuration  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
rd
 Implement UAP series gateway service data  Describe Huawei 3 party voice recording
configuration platform integration principle
 Describe CTI platform concepts  Describe Huawei screen recording system
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical structure
architecture  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe CTI platform components’ function  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine platform features
switchover  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow platform architecture
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service components
enabling  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Describe Huawei report solution  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Describe the flow of original bill data to database  Use management system client to monitor
 Describe report system structure service
 Describe report typical configuration Duration
 Use iWeb report
 Use BIR report
working day
Class Size
 Describe report secondary development principle Min 6, max 16
309
9.10.3 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Outbound
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training Path Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring

Platform Operation
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience


Objectives
be able to:

OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
Enterprise Contact Center Outbound System  Describe IPCC multimedia features

Overview  Describe IPCC outbound function
OCC61 Lecture 0.5d  Describe IPCC report function
Platform Configuration  Describe IPCC agent function
OCC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe UAP series gateway system structure
and function
Enterprise Contact Center Report  Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
interfaces
 Analyze UAP series gateway networking
Enterprise Contact Center QC Platform trunk circuit
Configuration and Operation  Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Implement UAP series gateway agent data
configuration
 Implement terminal data configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data
310
configuration  Implement Datastation installation configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway service data  Implement iWeb installation configuration
configuration  Describe report secondary development principle
 Describe CTI platform concepts  Describe Huawei contact center voice recording
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical system principle
architecture  Describe conference recording principle
 Describe CTI platform components’ function  Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
switchover rd
 Describe Huawei outbound solution platform integration principle
 Describe OBS system  Describe Huawei screen recording system
 Describe OBS system outbound policy structure
 Analyze predictive outgoing policy  Operate Huawei web QC system
 Describe Huawei HPS  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe HPS typical networking platform features
 Describe HPS typical application  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe HPS development interface platform architecture
 Describe HPS agent function  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Implement HPS system installation  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Create outbound policy components
 Create outbound campaign  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Implement OBS configuration  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
 Implement outbound  Use management system client to monitor

service
 Implement OBS monitoring
Duration
 Describe the flow of original bill data to database 5 working day, including hands-on exercise 1.75
 Describe report system structure working day
 Describe report typical configuration Class Size
 Use iWeb report
Min 6, max 16
 Use BIR report
311
9.10.4 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) Multimedia
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training Path Enterprise Contact Center Monitoring Platform

Operation
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience


Objectives
be able to:

OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
Technology  Describe IPCC agent function
and function
Enterprise Contact Center Report Configuration  Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
and Operation
interfaces
OCC71 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Analyze UAP series gateway networking
trunk circuit
Configuration and Operation  Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
OCC81 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Implement UAP series gateway agent data
configuration
312
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data  Implement Datastation installation configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway service data  Describe report secondary development principle
 Describe CTI platform concepts system principle
 Describe Huawei CTI platform logical  Describe conference recording principle
architecture  Describe soft phone recording principle
 Describe CTI platform components’ function  Describe VOIP voice recording principle
 Describe CTI platform two-cluster machine rd
switchover platform integration principle
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow  Describe Huawei screen recording system
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle structure
 Implement Huawei IPCC agent service enabling  Operate Huawei web QC system
enabling platform features
 Describe Huawei WECC application scenario  Describe Huawei Contact Center monitoring
 Describe Huawei Email call scenario platform architecture
 Describe Huawei Fax call scenario  Describe Huawei system monitoring
 Describe Huawei SMS call scenario  Use monitoring platform monitoring IPCC
 Implement text chat service configuration components
 Implement click to dial service configuration  Describe Huawei VDN monitoring
 Implement call back request service  Use VDN monitoring console to monitor service
configuration  Use management system client to monitor
 Implement escorted browsing service service
configuration Duration
working day
 Describe report system structure
Class Size
 Use iWeb report Min 6, max 16
 Use BIR report
313
Center Installation and Commissioning

be able to:
UAP Series Gateway Installation and
Commissioning  Describe IVR function
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe IPCC multimedia features

OCC12
UAP Series Gateway System Configuration  Describe IPCC QC function
 Describe UAP series gateway typical networking
 Describe UAP series gateway deployment
CTI Software System
process
OCC31 Lecture 0.5d  Implement UAP series gateway installation
 Commission UAP series gateway service
CTI Platform Installation trunk circuit
 Implement UAP series gateway basic operation
 Implement UAP series gateway agent data
configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway trunk data
OCC33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d configuration
 Implement UAP series gateway service data
configuration
CTI Platform Maintenance and
Troubleshooting  Describe CTI platform concepts
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe Huawei CTI platform logical

OCC34
architecture
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs switchover
Operators and Maintainers  Implement eSpace CC box product one-click
Prerequisites installation
 Implement eSpace CC box product configuration
 Describe eSpace CC safety solution
 Computer basics
 Operate eSpace CC monitoring system
314
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow  Implement CTI platform emergency maintenance
 Describe Huawei IPCC service flow principle Duration
 Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
working day
enabling
Class Size
 Implement CTI platform troubleshooting Min 6, max 16
315
Center Trouble shooting
UAP Series Gateway Maintenance and On completion of this program, the participants will
OCC14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe UAP series gateway emergency
maintenance
 Describe UAP series gateway common faults
CTI Platform Maintenance and
Troubleshooting  Implement UAP series gateway emergency
maintenance
 Use UAP series gateway troubleshooting tool
Target Audience  Implement CTI platform troubleshooting
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Implement CTI platform emergency maintenance
Prerequisites 2 working day, including hands-on exercise 1

working day
Class Size
 Computer basics
Min 6, max 16
316
Center Agent Operation

Enterprise Contact Center Agent  Describe Huawei Contact Center voice terminals
Operation  Describe CCCBar agent function and application
OCCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe JCccBar agent function and application
application
Target Audience
 Use CCCBar
Operators and Maintainers  Use customized agent interface
Agents Duration
Prerequisites
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
317
9.10.8 Small and Medium-sized Enterprise (UAP3300/UAP2100 Gateway) eSpace
Contact Center Solution Deployment(Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe IPCC multimedia features

IPCC System Overview  Describe IPCC report function
Lecture  Describe IPCC QC function

OCC01 0.5d
and function
OCC11 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe UAP series gateway protocols and
interfaces
CTI Software System  Analyze UAP series gateway networking
OCC31 Lecture 0.5d  Describe CTI platform concepts

architecture
CTI Platform Service Commissioning  Describe CTI platform components’ function
switchover
 Conclude Huawei IPCC service flow
CTI Network Design
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d  Implement Huawei IPCC automatic agent service
Target Audience enabling
 Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product series
 Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
 Describe NIRC principle
Prerequisites
 A general familiarity with PC operation system distributed networking
 Computer basics Duration
Objectives
Min 6, max 16
318
9.11 CC Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
9.11.1 Large-scale Enterprise (U29XX Gateway) Contact Center Design
Training Path  Describe IVR function

IPCC System Overview  Describe IPCC outbound function
Lecture 0.5d  Describe IPCC report function

OCC01
U29XX Series Gateway Overview  Describe IPCC agent function

OCC21 Lecture 0.5d
structure
Large-scale Enterprise Contact Center
Gateway Networking  DescribeU29XX series gateway software
OCC25 Lecture 0.5d structure

protocols
CTI Network Design  Describe U29XX series gateway function and

specification
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d
 DescribeU29XX series gateway function
Target Audience  DescribeU29XX series gateway networking
 Implement U29XX series gateway capacity
design
 Describe Huawei eSpace CC Box product
series
Prerequisites
 Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
 A general familiarity with PC operation system  Describe NIRC principle

 Computer basics  Describe IPCC centralized networking and
 Communication basics distributed networking
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the participants will 2 working day

Min 6, max 16
319
Center Design
Training Path  Describe IPCC system architecture

IPCC System Overview  Describe IPCC multimedia features
Lecture  Describe IPCC outbound function

OCC01 0.5d
UAP Series Gateway Overview  Describe IPCC monitoring function

OCC11 Lecture 0.5d
and function
 Describe UAP series gateway hardware
Small-and-medium-sized Enterprise Contact
Center Gateway Networking structure
OCC15 Lecture 0.5d  Describe UAP series gateway protocols and

interfaces
 Analyze UAP series gateway networking
CTI Network Design  Describe UAP series gateway function
 Describe UAP series gateway networking
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d
 Implement UAP series gateway capacity
Target Audience design

Installers and Commissioning Staffs series
Operators and Maintainers  Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
Planners and Designers  Describe NIRC principle
Prerequisites  Describe IPCC centralized networking and
 A general familiarity with PC operation system distributed networking
 Computer basics Duration
 Communication basics 2 working day


be able to:
320
9.11.3 VTM Solution Design

 Describe VTM system orientation
VTM System Overview  Describe VTM system architecture
Lecture 0.5d  Describe VTM system networking

OCCC1
 Describe VTM virtual counter system function
 Describe VTC subsystem function
CTI Software System  Describe VTA subsystem function

OCC31 Lecture 0.5d
architecture
CTI Network Design
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d switchover
series
VTM Platform Installation and Commissioning  Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
OCCC2 Lecture 0.5d
distributed networking
 Describe VTM platform installation
VTM Platform Operation and Maintenance
prerequisites
OCCC3 Lecture 1d  Describe VTM platform installation flow
 Implement VTM single parts installation
Target Audience
 Implement VTM solution commissioning
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Implement VTM administrator operation
Operators and Maintainers  Implement VTM QC inspector operation
Planners and Designers  Implement Quick Teller operation
 A general familiarity with PC operation system 3 working day

Objectives
Min 6, max 16
321
9.11.4 Cloud Contact Center Solution Design
Training Path  Describe CTI platform concepts

Cloud Contact Center Overview architecture
Lecture  Describe CTI platform components’ function

OCCB1 0.5d
switchover
CTI Software System
series
OCC31 Lecture 0.5d  Describe CTI two-cluster machine principle
CTI Network Design distributed networking
OCC35 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the content of Cloud desktop plan

 Implement Cloud Agent commissioning
 Implement Cloud Contact Center management
Cloud Contact Center Platform Installation and  Describe Cloud CC routine maintenance
Commissioning
 Implement Cloud CC management system
OCCB2 Lecture 0.5d
server maintenance
 Implement Cloud CC database maintenance
Cloud Contact Center Platform Operation and Duration

Maintenance
3 working day
OCCB3 Lecture 1d
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
Target Audience

Prerequisites

 Computer basics
Objectives

be able to:
 Describe Huawei cloud terminal concepts
 Describe Huawei cloud desktop solution
 Describe Huawei Citrix XenDesktop5 solution
 Describe cloud Contact Center solution
 Describe the differences between cloud
Contact center and traditional Contact Center
322
9.12 VC Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
9.12.1 9000 Series HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance
Training Path terminal related component

 Master 9000series HD video conference
9000 Series HD Terminal terminal hardware connection
Introduction
Lecture  Master 9000series HD video conference
OVC11 0.5d
terminal basic settings
terminal point-to-point conference operation
9000 Series HD Terminal Operation
and Maintenance  Master 9000series HD video conference
OVC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d terminal multi-sites conference operation
Target Audience  Master 9000series HD video conference
terminal conference control
Administrators
terminal advanced settings
Prerequisites
 A general familiarity with PC operation system terminal system troubleshooting methods
 A basic understanding of computer technology  Master 9000series HD video conference
 A basic understanding of computer technology terminal software upgrade
Objectives  Know 9000series HD video conference

terminal fault disposal typical cases
be able to:
 Describe 9000series HD video conference 1 working day, including Hands-on exercise 0.25
terminal function feature working days
 Master 9000series HD video conference Class Size
terminal principle Min 6, Max 12

 Know 9000series HD video conference
323
9.12.2 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC1.0) Operation
and Maintenance
Training Path
SMC1.0 Installation and Basic
Video Conference System Configuration
Overview OVC32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
OVC01 Lecture 0.5d
SMC1.0 Operation and Maintenance
H.323 Protocol OVC33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
OVC06 Lecture 0.5d Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
9000 Series HD Terminal Introduction
Administrators
OVC11 Lecture 0.5d Planners and Designers
Prerequisites

and Maintenance  A basic understanding of computer technology
OVC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
MCU Introduction On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
OVC21 Lecture 0.5d  Know video conference communication basic
knowledge
 Know video conference development process
MCU Conference Data Configuration and tend
OVC22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe Huawei Video Conference System
Overview
 Describe Huawei video conference technology
MCU Operation and Maintenance innovation
 Describe Huawei video conference solution
OVC23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe 9000series HD video conference
terminal function feature
 Describe H.323 protocol structure
SMC1.0 System Introduction
 Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
OVC31 Lecture 0.5d  Master video conference schedule signaling flow
 Master routine signaling fault localization
analysis methods
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal
324
principle  Master MCU outside GK scenario conference
 Know 9000series HD video conference terminal configuration
related component  Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal configuration
hardware connection  Know MCU Web advanced settings
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Master MCU software upgrade
basic settings  Master MCU fault disposal flow
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
point-to-point conference operation  Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Know SMC1.0basic concept
multi-sites conference operation  Describe SMC1.0system structure
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Master SMC1.0principle
conference control
 Master SMC1.0main function
 Master SMC1.0system software installation
advanced settings
 Master SMC1.0system initiation configuration
 Master SMC1.0 conference schedule
system troubleshooting methods
 Master SMC1.0 conference control
 Master SMC1.0 routine Maintenance
software upgrade
 Master SMC1.0 routine fault disposal
 Know 9000series HD video conference terminal
Duration
fault disposal typical cases
 Know MCU structure composing 5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 1.25
 Know MCU basic feature working days
 Know MCU boards and subboards Class Size
 Know MCU typical
Min 6, Max 12
 Master MCU Web basic configuration
325
9.12.3 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC2.0) Operation
and Maintenance

Video Conference System
Overview Monitoring Staffs
OVC01 Lecture 0.5d Administrators
Prerequisites
H.323 Protocol
OVC06 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives
9000 Series HD Terminal Introduction
OVC11 Lecture 0.5d
be able to:
 Know video conference communication basic
knowledge
and Maintenance  Know video conference development process
OVC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d and tend
 Describe Huawei Video Conference System
Overview
MCU Introduction  Describe Huawei video conference technology
innovation
OVC21 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe Huawei video conference solution
MCU Conference Data Configuration
 Describe H.323 protocol structure
OVC22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
 Master video conference schedule signaling flow
 Master routine signaling fault localization
MCU Operation and Maintenance
analysis methods
OVC23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe 9000series HD video conference

SMC2.0 system introduction principle
OVC34 Lecture 0.5d
related component
hardware connection
OVC35 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d basic settings
326
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal configuration
point-to-point conference operation  Know MCU Web advanced settings
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Master MCU software upgrade
multi-sites conference operation  Master MCU fault disposal flow
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
conference control  Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal  Know SMC2.0definition
advanced settings
 Describe SMC2.0 functions of Huawei video
 Master 9000series HD video conference terminal conference
system troubleshooting methods
 Master SMC2.0 system structure
 Master SMC2.0 system main function
software upgrade
 Master SMC2.0 routine operation
 Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance
fault disposal typical cases
 Master SMC2.0 routine fault and exclude
 Know MCU structure composing
methods
 Know MCU basic feature
Duration
 Know MCU boards and subboards
 Know MCU typical 5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 1.25
 Master MCU Web basic configuration working days
 Master MCU outside GK scenario conference Class Size
configuration Min 6, Max 12

 Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference
327
9.12.4 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced
Features Operation and Maintenance

 Describe SIP protocol definition
SIP Protocol
 Describe SIP message concept and structure
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Master SIP protocol call flow

OVC07
 Master SIP protocol typical application scenarios
Video Conference Room Integration  Know acoustic basic knowledge
 Describe video conference decoration
OVC04 Lecture 0.5d
requirements
 Describe SEC2.0ARQagainst packet lost feature
 Master multi-channel cascading, continuous
Video Conference Advanced Features
presence
OVC02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Know video IVR feature
 Master MCU backup mode
 Master MCU two network cards ride mode
Video Conference Firewall Traversal
 Describe Multicast feature
Solutions
Lecture  Know firewall basis
OVC03 1d
 Describe video conference service firewall
problem
Video Conference Troubleshooting  Master video conference firewall traversal
solution
OVC05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Master video conference system troubleshooting
basic methods
Target Audience
 Master video conference system troubleshooting
Monitoring Staffs routine tool
Operators and Maintainers  configuration video conference system routine
Administrators command
Planners and Designers Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days, including Hands-on exercise 1.75
 A general familiarity with PC operation system working days

Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
328
9.12.5 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance
TP/RP System Introduction  A general familiarity with PC operation system

OVC41 Lecture 0.25d  A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
TP/RP Operation and Upgrade On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OVC42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Know Huawei TP basic feature
 Know Huawei TP development and tend
 Know Huawei TP series product
TP/RP Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting  Know Huawei TP product principle
OVC43 Lecture 0.25d  Know Huawei TP product structure
 Describe Huawei TP application scenarios
 Master Huawei TP convene conference
MCU Introduction operation
 Master Huawei TP conference control operation
OVC21 Lecture 0.25d
 Master Huawei TP conference troubleshooting
 Know Huawei TP series product software
upgrade
OVC22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Master TP product troubleshooting methods
 Describe TP product troubleshooting cases
MCU Operation and Maintenance
 Master TP product troubleshooting methods
OVC23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.25d  Describe TP product troubleshooting cases

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Target Audience

Administrators
Note: HQ can only provide lecture training on TP&RP. If the customer require TP/RP practice training please
select On-Site training.
329
9.12.6 Video Conference System(9000 Series HD Terminal/MCU/SMC) Operation and
Maintenance (Fast-Track)
Training Path  Describe 9000series HD video conference

9000 Series HD Terminal Operation  Master 9000series HD video conference terminal
and Maintenance
principle
related component
hardware connection
OVC22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Know MCU structure composing
 Know MCU basic feature
 Know MCU boards and subboards
SMC1.0 System Introduction
 Know MCU typical
OVC31 Lecture 0.5d  Master MCU Web basic configuration

 Master MCU outside GK scenario conference
configuration
SMC1.0 Installation and Basic  Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference
Configuration configuration
 Know MCU Web advanced settings
Target Audience  Know SMC1.0 basic concept

 Describe SMC1.0 system structure
 Master SMC1.0 principle
Administrators
 Master SMC1.0 main function
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.75
working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
330
9.13 VC Planning and Design Training Programs
9.13.1 ViewPoint Video Conference System Planning and Design
Training Path  Know video conference communication basic

knowledge
Video Conference System  Know video conference development process
Overview
and tend
OVC01 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe Huawei Video Conference System
Overview
 Describe Huawei video conference technology
Video Conference Room Integration
innovation
OVC04 Lecture 0.5d  Describe Huawei video conference solution
 Know acoustic basic knowledge
Video Conference Typical Networks  Describe video conference decoration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise requirements

OVC53 1d
 Know video conference system routine
Target Audience
networking solution
Operators and Maintainers  Describe video conference system and SoftCo
Administrators merging networking solution
Planners and Designers  Describe video conference system and Microsoft
Prerequisites MSUC merging solution
Duration
 A basic understanding of computer technology 2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5
 A basic understanding of computer technology working days

be able to:
331
9.14 Huawei eSpace IVS system
9.14.1 Huawei eSpace IVS system installation and commissioning Training

Huawei small-sized eSpace IVS installation
be able to:
OVS10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day  Describe the function of iDeploy tools
 Perform operation of iDeploy tools
 Describe the function of PCG
Huawei medium and large-sized Space IVS  Describe the function of SCU
installation
 Describe the function of DCG
OVS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day
 Describe the function of MDU
 Describe the function of MRU
Huawei eSpace IVS deployment setup and  Describe the function of MTU
configuration  Describe the function of MAU
OVS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1day
 Describe the function of SMU
 Describe the function of OMU
Target Audience
 Perform installation of eSpace IVS system
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Perform installation eSpace IPC
Prerequisites
2 working days，including hands-on exercise 1
Min 6, Max 12
332
9.14.2 Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily operation and maintenance training
Training Path  Describe the function of eSpace IVS client

 Describe the components of eSpace IVS client
Huawei eSpace IVS system overview  Describe the system architecture of eSpace IVS
Lecture 0.5day  Outline the function of eSpace IVS CS client

OVS13
 Outline the function of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform login operation of eSpace IVS CS client
Huawei eSpace IVS system primary daily  Perform live operation of eSpace IVS CS client
operation and maintenance(C/S)  Perform map operation of eSpace IVS CS client
OVS14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1day
 Perform record operation of eSpace IVS CS
client
 Perform alarm operation of eSpace IVS CS client
Huawei eSpace IVS primary daily operation
and maintenance training (B/S)  Perform other operation of eSpace IVS CS client
OVS15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day  Perform login operation of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform live operation of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform map operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Huawei eSpace IPC primary daily operation
 Perform record operation of eSpace IVS BS
and maintenance
client
 Perform alarm operation of eSpace IVS BS client
 Perform other operation of eSpace IVS BS client
Huawei eSpace codec primary daily operation  Perform live operation of eSpace IPC
and maintenance
 Perform alarm operation of eSpace IPC
OVS30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day  Perform playback operation of eSpace IPC
 Perform live operation of eSpace codec
Target Audience
 Perform alarm operation of eSpace codec
Administrators  Perform playback operation of eSpace codec
Prerequisites
3 working days，including hands-on exercise 1.5
 A general familiarity with PC operation system working days
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
333
9.14.3 Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and advanced maintenance training

Huawei eSpace IVS system overview and
network design be able to:
OVS16 Lecture 0.5day  Describe the media flow of eSpace IVS system
 Describe the control flow of eSpace IVS system
 Describe the network solution of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and system
advanced maintenance
 Perform configuration of eSpace IVS system
OVS17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5days
 Perform business realization of eSpace IVS
system
 Describe advanced features of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace IPC configuration and
advanced maintenance system
OVS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5day  Perform configuration of eSpace IVS system
advanced features
 Perform business realization of eSpace IVS
Huawei eSpace codec configuration and system advanced features
advanced maintenance
 Perform hardware installation of eSpace IPC
 Perform docking platform of eSpace IPC
Target Audience
 Perform an upgrade of eSpace IPC
Installers and Commissioning Staffs  Perform hardware installation of eSpace codec
Operators and Maintainers  Perform docking platform of eSpace codec
Prerequisites  Perform an upgrade of eSpace codec
Duration
 A basic understanding of computer technology 3 working days，including hands-on exercise 1.5
 A basic understanding of Huawei eSpace IVS working days
system primary daily operation and maintenance Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
334
10 Network Energy Training Path
10.1 Power Supply Training Path
Training
Minishelter Operation and
1d
Power3000 Operation and

4d
PowerCube 500 Operation and

2d
PowerCube1000 Operation
4d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include Minishelter, Power3000, PowerCube500, PowerCube1000 products
trainings.
335
10.2 Data Center Facility Training Path
Plan and design training Operation and maintenance Advanced technical

training training
IDS1000 Cluster Container
Data Center Operation and
Maintenance Training 4d
IDS1000 All in one Container

Data Center Operation and
IDS2000 Medium and Large

Modular DC Operation and
IDS2000 Small Modular Data

Center Operation and
Precision Air Conditioner

Training(Fast-Track) 2d
Precision Air Conditioner

Training 3d
NetEco Management System

Training 3d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include IDS1000, IDS2000, air condition and NetEco products trainings.
336
10.3 UPS Training Path
Training
UPS Operation and
5d
UPS Operation and Maintenance

2d
Elective Guide
 The training programs in the path include UPS2000, UPS5000, UPS8000 products trainings.
337
11 Network Energy Training Courses
Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Power Supply Product Training Programs
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 6~12
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 6~12
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6~12
PowerCube1000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 6~12
Data Center Facility Product Training Programs
IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and

Ⅱ 4 6~12
IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and

Ⅱ 3 6~12
IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center

Ⅱ 5 6~12
Operation and Maintenance Training
IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and

Ⅱ 2 6~12
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 2 6~12
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 3 6~12
Training
NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 3 6~12
Training
UPS Product Training Programs
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6~12
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 2 6~12
338
11.1 Power Supply Training Programs
11.1.1 Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Master the principle, functional of Minishelter
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance  Master functions and parameters of the various
components about Minishelter
OPS11 Lecture 1d  Master the installation of Minishelter

 Master the routine operation of Minishelter
Target Audience
 Master the routine maintenance of Minishelter
Operators and maintainers  Describe common faults of Minishelter
Prerequisites  Dispose common faults of Minishelter
 Have a basic knowledge of Minishelter Duration
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Understand the basic structure of the Minishelter
339
11.1.2 Power3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
supply system
Power3000 Operation and Maintenance  Understand the load capacity of Power3000

power supply system
OPS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Master the installation of Power3000 power

supply system, could complete some replace
Target Audience
operation
Operators and maintainers  Master the routine operation of Power3000
Prerequisites power supply system
 Master the routine maintenance of Power3000
 Have a basic knowledge of power supply
power supply system
Objectives
 Describe common faults of Power3000 power
On completion of this program, the participants will supply system
be able to:  Dispose common faults of Power3000 power
 Describe the function of Power3000 power supply system
supply system Duration
 Describe the hardware structure of Power3000
4 working days
power supply system
Class Size
 Understand functions and parameters of the
various components about Power3000 power Min 6, Max 12
340
11.1.3 PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
system
PowerCube500 Operation and Maintenance  Understand the load capacity of PowerCube500

system
OPS13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Master the installation of PowerCube500 system,

could complete some replace operation
Target Audience
 Master the routine operation of PowerCube500
Operators and maintainers system
Prerequisites  Master the routine maintenance of
PowerCube500 system
 Describe common faults of PowerCube500
Objectives
system
On completion of this program, the participants will  Dispose common faults of PowerCube500
be able to: system
 Describe the function of PowerCube500 system Duration
2 working days
PowerCube500 system
Class Size
various components about PowerCube500 Min 6, Max 12
341
11.1.4 PowerCube1000 system operation and maintenance training
Training Path
system
PowerCube1000 Operation and Maintenance  Understand the load capacity of PowerCube1000

system
OPS14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Master the installation of PowerCube1000

system, could complete some replace operation
Target Audience
 Master the routine operation of PowerCube1000
Operators and maintainers system
Prerequisites  Master the routine maintenance of
PowerCube1000 system
 Describe common faults of PowerCube1000
Objectives
system
On completion of this program, the participants will  Dispose common faults of PowerCube1000
be able to: system
 Describe the function of PowerCube1000 system Duration
4 working days
PowerCube1000 system
Class Size
various components about PowerCube1000 Min 6, Max 12
342
11.2 Data Center Facility Training Programs
11.2.1 IDS1000 Cluster Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the installation tools of the container
IDS1000 Cluster Container Data DC

Center Operation and Maintenance  Describe the installation precautions of the
4d container DC
OIDS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Describe fastness and combination
Target Audience
 Describe the interconnect pipes of the container
Operators and maintainers DC
Prerequisites  Describe the interconnect cables of the container
DC
 None
 Describe the System commission with power
Objectives
supply
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the Inspections and checks of the
be able to: container DC
 Describe the basic architecture of the container  Describe the cooling system troubleshooting
DC solution methods
 Describe the basic concepts and features of the  Describe the power supply system
container DC troubleshooting methods
 Describe the typical configurations of the  Describe the fire protection system
container DC troubleshooting methods
 Describe the values for consumer of the  Describe the room management system alarm
container DC processing methods
 Describe the technical advantages of the Duration
container DC
4 working days
 Describe the application scenarios of the
Class Size
container DC
 Perform the engineering surveys of the container Min 6, Max 12
DC
343
11.2.2 IDS1000 All in one Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training path  Performing engineering surveys of the All in one

DC
IDS1000 All in one Container Data
Center Operation and Maintenance  Describe the installation tools of the All in one DC
 Describe the installation considerations of the All
OIDS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
in one DC
Target Audience
 Describe the lifting of the All in one DC
Operators and maintainers  Describe the interconnect cables of the All in one
Prerequisites DC
 Describe the system commissions of the All in
 None
one DC
Objectives
 Describe the routine inspections of the All in one
On completion of this program, the participants will DC
be able to:  Describe the troubleshooting methods of cooling
 Describe the basic architecture of the All in one system
DC  Describe the troubleshooting methods of power
 Describe the basic concepts and features of the system
All in one DC  Describe the troubleshooting methods of fire
 Describe the typical configurations of the All in protection system
one DC  Describe the troubleshooting methods of
 Describe the customer values of the All in one Management system
DC Duration
 Describe the technology advantages of the All in
3 working days
one DC
Class Size
 Describe the typical scenarios of the All in one
DC Min 6, Max12
344
11.2.3 IDS2000 Medium and Large Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training path technical specification

 Survey for modular data center
IDS2000 Medium and Large
Modular Data Center Operation and  Description modular data center installation tool
Maintenance
 Description modular data center installation
notes
Target Audience
 Description cabinet system installation
Operators and maintainers  Description power supply and distribution system
 Description cooling system installation
 None
 Description NetEco system installation
Objectives
 Description fire system installation
On completion of this course, the participants will be  Description cabling system
able to:  Description system power on debugging
 Description medium and large modular DC  Description data center inspection
solution basic components  Description cooling system fault handle method
 Description medium and large modular DC basic  Description power system fault handle method
concept
 Description fire system fault handle method
 Description medium and large modular DC
 Description data center management system
typical configuration
alarm handle method
 Description medium and large modular DC value
Duration
for consumer
 Description medium and large modular DC 5 working days
technical advantage Class size

Min 6, Max 12
application scene
345
11.2.4 IDS2000 Small Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training path  Description small modular DC installation tool

 Description small modular DC installation notes
IDS2000 Small Modular Data
Center Operation and Maintenance  Description small modular DC combined cabinet
 Description small modular DC fan installation
 Description small modular DC UPS and UPS
Target Audience
battery installation
Operators and maintainers  Description small modular DC cable connection
Prerequisites  Description small modular DC system power on
debugging
 None
 Description small modular DC inspection
Objectives
 Description small modular DC UPS fault handle
On completion of this course, the participants will be method
able to:  Description small modular DC fan fault handle
 Description small modular DC solution basic method
components  Description management system alarm handle
 Description small modular DC basic concept method
 Description small modular DC typical Duration
configuration
2 working days
 Description small modular DC value for
Class size
consumer
 Description small modular DC application scene Min 6, Max 12
346
11.2.5 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training path
technology
Precision Air Conditioner Operation  Description precision air conditioner cooling

and Maintenance principle
OIDS15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Description Huawei main precision air
conditioner products
Target Audience
 Description precision air conditioner main
Operators and maintainers technical parameters
Prerequisites  Description precision air conditioner installation
and debugging
 Have the basic technology of data center facility
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
On completion of this course, the participants will be
Class size
able to:
 Description precision air conditioner basic Min 6, Max 12
347
11.2.6 Precision Air Conditioner Operation and Maintenance Training
Training path
 Description precision air conditioner installation
Precision Air Conditioner Operation and debugging

and Maintenance Training  Precision air conditioner different type, cooling
type, feature, and application scene
 Precision air conditioner different air supply
Target Audience
method, feature, and application scene
Operators and maintainers  Description precision air conditioner type
Prerequisites selection and configuration method
 Precision air conditioner design and heat load
 Have the basic technology of data center facility
calculation
Objectives
 Description precision air conditioner installation
On completion of this course, the participants will be and debugging
able to:  Description precision air conditioner on-site fault
 Description precision air conditioner basic handle
technology  Description precision air conditioner routine
 Description precision air conditioner cooling maintenance
principle Duration
 Description Huawei main precision air
3 working days
conditioner products
Class size
 Description precision air conditioner main
technical parameters Min 6, Max 12
348
11.2.7 NetEco Management System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Description of the NetEco networking mode

 Description of the NetEco function
NetEco Management System
Operation and Maintenance  Description of the NetEco highlight
Training
 Description of the NetEco data base installation
 Description of the NetEco software package
Target Audience
installation
Operators and maintainers  Description of the NetEco configuration
 Have the basic technology of data center facility 3 working days


be able to:
349
11.3 UPS Training Programs
11.3.1 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Master the installation and debugging points, site
UPS Operation and Maintenance work content, attention matters of UPS product
and Storage battery
 Master the basic Fault determination method and
OUPS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Target Audience
 Master the trouble diagnosis and treatment
Operators and maintainers methods of UPS product
Prerequisites  Master the log analysis capabilities of UPS
 Master the commonly testing tools usage of UPS
 Have a basic knowledge of electrician
 Master the commonly faulty judgment and
Objectives
processing of storage battery
be able to:
5 working days
 Master the application scenarios and basic
Class Size
working principle of UPS product
 Master the Structure and components function of Min 6, Max 12
UPS product and Storage battery
350
11.3.2 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
UPS Operation and Maintenance(Fast-Track)
OUPS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
Target Audience
Operators and maintainers

Prerequisites
 Have a basic knowledge of electrician

Objectives

be able to:
 Master the application scenarios and basic
working principle of UPS product
 Master the Structure and components function of
UPS product and Storage battery
 Master the installation and debugging points, site
work content, attention matters of UPS product
and Storage battery
 Master the basic Fault determination method and
thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
351
12 GSM Training Path
12.1 GSM RNP&RNO Training Path
GSM Radio Network GSM Indoor Coverage

Design and Planning Training
Training GSM RNP Engineer
2D
4D
BSC6000 GSM Radio GSM to UMTS/LTE

Network Optimization Radio Network GSM Highway and
Training Interoperability High-speed Railway
Training Solution Training
10D
GSM Radio Network 1D 1D
Analysis Training GSM RNO Engineer
BSC6900 GSM Radio 2D
Network Optimization GSM Indoor Coverage GSM BSS14.0 Feature
Training Training Delta Training
10D 2D
1D
352
12.2 GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Path
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio

Network Planning and GPRS EDGE Signaling
Optimization Training Training
GPRS/EDGE Radio
5D Network Analysis 2D
Training
GRPS/EDGE RNP&RNO Engineer
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio 1D Evolved EDGE
Network Planning and Training
Optimization Training
5D 1D
353
12.3 GSM BSS Product Training Path
GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and

and Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
Training
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration

Training
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting

Training
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training GSM BSS8.1 - BSS12.0 Delta Training
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation

GSM BSS9.0 BTS Operation and GSM BSS9.0 BSS Operation and
Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
GSM BSS9.0 BSS GSM BSS9.0 BSS

Reconfiguration Training Configuration Training

Training
354
GSM BSS12.0 BSS GSM BSS12.0 BSS Configuration

Reconfiguration Training Training

Training
GSM BSS12.0 - BSS13.0 Delta

Training


GSM IPRAN Application GSM BSS13.0 BSS Troubleshooting

Training Training
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta

Training Training
355

GSM IPRAN Application GSM BSS14.0 BSS Troubleshooting

Training Training
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction

Training
GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade

Training
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and

Feeder Maintenance
Training
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency

356
12.4 GSMR BSS Product Training Path
GSMR BTS Operation and GSMR BSS Operation and

(BSC6000 V900R008C15) (BSC6000 V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Configuration Training

(BSC6000V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting

Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
GSMR BTS Operation and GSMR BSS Operation and

(BSC6000 V901R008) (BSC6000 V901R008)
GSMR BSS Configuration

Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting

Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
357
13 GSM Training Courses
GSM Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Training Courses Level (working
Location Size
days)
GSM RNP&RNO Training Courses
GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM Indoor Coverage Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM Radio Network Analysis Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training Courses
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
GPRS EDGE Signaling Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
Evolved EDGE Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS Product Training Courses
GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
358
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
GSM IPRAN Application Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Product Training Courses
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
V900R008C15)
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15) Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
V901R008)
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
V901R008)
GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008) Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008) Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
359
360
13.1 GSM RNP&RNO Training
13.1.1 GSM Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
 Implement selecting the suitable antenna type
 Outline the key specifications of antenna
GSM Antenna Basics  Implement GSM radio network coverage

planning
OMP00 Lecture 0.5d  Explain the link budget model and its
ecture application
 Explain the advance technology for improving
GSM Radio Network Planning
coverage
OMP01 Lecture 3.5d  Implement GSM radio network traffic capacity

planning on TCHF/TCHH/SDCCH
Target Audience
 Explain the capacity enhancement technology
GSM Radio Network Planning Engineers 
Prerequisites  Describe the paging ability of radio network
 Explain GSM frequency resource, C/I
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications
conception, frequency reuse definition, and
Objectives
frequency tighten reuse technology and its
On completion of this program, the participants will application
 Describe the theory of radio signal propagation
4 working days
 Describe the radio signal propagation model
Class Size
 Interpret the structure of the antenna
equipments Min 6, max 12
 Interpret the features of the antenna
equipments
361
13.1.2 BSC6000 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
 Explain the important message parameters
BSC6000 GSM Air Interface
 Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
OMA00 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 2.5d
signaling flow
exercise exercise
 List the MS behaviors in idle mode
 Describe the parameters associated with MS
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Functionality
behaviors in idle mode
OMO00 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.25d  List the types of frequency hopping
 Describe the functions of frequency hopping
algorithm
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network Features
 Describe the parameters of frequency hopping
OMO02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4.75d  Describe the general flow of GSM power
control algorithm
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
GSM BSS8.1 Radio Network
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III
Performance Management
 Describe the other features about power
OMO04 Lecture 0.5d
control
Target Audience  Describe the general flow of GSM handover

algorithm
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers
 Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
Prerequisites
 Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the half rate algorithm
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm
wireless network optimization  Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
Objectives algorithm II
 Describe the operations about performance
management based on M2000
be able to:
 Interpret the general analysis procedure of
 Describe the function of each kind of logical
traffic analysis
channel
 Interpret the functions of some typical counters
 Describe the general radio signal process on
Duration
Um interface
 State the techniques used on Um interface 10 working days
 Describe typical GSM communication flow Class Size
 Perform the operation for interface message
Min 6, max 12
trace
 Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
362
13.1.3 BSC6900 GSM Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 Analysis the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
 Explain the important message parameters
BSC6900 GSM Air Interface
 Identify the fault by the method of analyzing the
OMA01 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 2.5d
signaling flow
exercise exercise
 List the MS behaviors in idle mode
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio  Describe the parameters associated with MS

Network Functionality behaviors in idle mode
OMO01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.25d  List the types of frequency hopping
 Describe the functions of frequency hopping
algorithm
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
 Describe the parameters of frequency hopping
Network Features
OMO03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4.75d  Describe the general flow of GSM power
control algorithm
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm II
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 Radio
 Interpret Huawei power control algorithm III
Network Performance Management
 Describe the other features about power
OMO05 Lecture 0.5d
control
Target Audience  Describe the general flow of GSM handover

algorithm
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers  Interpret Huawei handover algorithm I/II
Prerequisites  Describe the enhanced full rate algorithm
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the half rate algorithm
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Describe the adaptive multiple rate algorithm
wireless network optimization  Describe the GSM radio channel allocation
Objectives algorithm II
On completion of this program, the participants will management based on M2000
be able to:
 Interpret the general analysis procedure of
 Describe the function of each kind of logical traffic analysis
channel
 Interpret the functions of some typical counters
 Describe the general radio signal process on
Duration
Um interface
 State the techniques used on Um interface 10 working days
 Describe typical GSM communication flow Class Size
 Perform the operation for interface message

Min 6, max 12
trace
 Identify the messages on A interface and Abis
interface
363
13.1.4 GSM to UMTS/LTE Radio Network Interoperability Training
Training Path
Objectives
GSM 2G/3G/4G Interoperability On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe the inter-RAT CS cell reselection
OMO10 Lecture 1d
conditions
ecture
Target Audience  Describe the inter-RAT PS cell reselection
conditions
 Describe the inter-RAT handover algorithm
Prerequisites
 Describe the signaling flow of inter-RAT
 Completion of the following program(s): handover
 GSM BSC6000 Radio Network Optimization Duration
Training,
1 working day
 OR GSM BSC6900 Radio Network
Optimization Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
364
13.1.5 GSM Indoor Coverage Training
Training Path
 List the types of common components for
indoor coverage
Common Components for Indoor  Describe the functions of common
Coverage and Repeater Introduction components for indoor coverage
OMP03 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the functions of repeaters
 Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage
GSM Indoor Coverage Planning and planning
Optimization  Describe the method of GSM indoor coverage

OMP04 Lecture 1.25d optimization
 Describe the method of indoor and outdoor
inter-operation
GSM Indoor Coverage Solution
 Describe the stadium coverage solution
OMO12 Lecture 0.25d  Describe the metro coverage solution

 Describe the airport coverage solution
Target Audience  Describe the resident location coverage
solution
GSM Radio Network Planning Engineers
 Describe the commercial building coverage
solution
Prerequisites
 Describe the campus coverage solution
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications Duration
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM
2 working days
wireless network optimization
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
365
13.1.6 GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives
GSM BSS14.0 Feature Delta On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
 Describe the enhanced part in handover
OMO15 Lecture 1d
algorithm I
ecture
Target Audience  Describe the enhanced part in handover
algorithm II
 Describe the feature of VAMOS
Prerequisites
 Describe the feature of PS power control
 Completion of the following program(s):  Describe the feature of HSCSD
 GSM BSC6000 Radio Network Optimization  Describe the feature of smart pipe
Training,
Duration
Optimization Training 1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
366
13.1.7 GSM Highway and High-speed Railway Solution Training
Training Path
 Describe highway and high-speed railway
solution
GSM Highway and High-speed Railway  Describe the networking strategy of highway
Solution and high-speed railway
OMO11 Lecture 1d  Describe the feature and equipment of highway
ecture and high-speed railway
Target Audience
 Describe the scenario solutions of highway and
GSM Radio Network Planning Engineers high-speed railway
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers  Describe the optimization method of highway
Prerequisites and high-speed railway
Duration
 Completion of the following program(s):
 GSM Radio Network Design and Planning 1 working day
Training Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
367
13.1.8 GSM Radio Network Analysis Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the key KPIs of TCH/SDCCH call
BSC6900 GSM Radio Network drop
Optimization
 Summarize the typical problems of call drop in
OMO14 Lecture, Case-study 2d realistic network
ecture  Analyze the main reasons of call drop
Target Audience
 Describe the key KPIs of handover
 Summarize the typical problems of handover
Prerequisites failure in realistic network
 Completion of the following program(s):  Analyze the main reasons of handover failure
 GSM BSC6000 Radio Network Optimization  Study the cases
Training, Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
368
13.2 GPRS/EDGE RNP&RNO Training
13.2.1 BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training
Training Path
channel
 Describe the typical application scenarios of
different logical channel
BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Air Interface
 Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
OMA02 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 2d
GPRS/EDGE MS
exeWCDMA Radio
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
Network Performance
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio  Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow
Management Training
Network Features  List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
(RAN10/RAN11/RAN12
OMO06 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 1.5d radio network optimization
)
rcise exercise  Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
GSM BSS8.1 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network
 Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm
Performance Management
OMO08 Lecture 1d  Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection
conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning management based on M2000
 Interpret the functions of typical counters
OMP00 Lecture 0.5d
 List the typical KPIs
 Interpret the definition and measurement points
Target Audience of typical KPIs
 Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and
network planning
Optimization Engineers
 Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
Prerequisites
capacity planning
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
 At least 1 year working experience in coverage planning
GPRS/EDGE wireless network planning and  Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
optimization frequency planning
Objectives  Describe the influence to the GSM network
Duration
 Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and Class Size
functions of entities in GPRS network
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of
Um interface
369
13.2.2 BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training
Training Path
channel
 Describe the typical application scenarios of
different logical channel
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Air Interface
 Describer the multiple timeslot ability of
OMA03 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 2d
GPRS/EDGE MS
exeWCDMA Radio
 Describe GPRS/EDGE channel setup flow
Network Performance
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0  Describe GPRS/EDGE channel release flow
Management Training
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Features  List the typical parameters for GPRS/EDGE
(RAN10/RAN11/RAN12
OMO07 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 1.5d radio network optimization
)
rcise exercise  Interpret the typical parameters for
GPRS/EDGE radio network optimization
GSM BSS9.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 GPRS/EDGE
 Describe GPRS/EDGE power control algorithm
Radio Network Performance Management
OMO09 Lecture 1d  Describe GPRS/EDGE cell reselection
conditions
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning management based on M2000
 Interpret the functions of typical counters
OMP00 Lecture 0.5d
 List the typical KPIs
 Interpret the definition and measurement points
Target Audience of typical KPIs
 Describe the work flow of GPRS/EDGE radio
network planning
 Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network traffic
Prerequisites
capacity planning
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
 At least 1 year working experience in coverage planning
GPRS/EDGE wireless network planning and  Implement GPRS/EDGE radio network
optimization frequency planning
Objectives  Describe the influence to the GSM network
Duration
 Outline the GPRS/EDGE network structure and Class Size
functions of entities in GPRS network
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the GPRS/EDGE frame structure of
Um interface
370
13.2.3 GPRS EDGE Signaling Training
Training Path
 Describe the layer3 of Um interface and
relative signaling flows
GPRS EDGE Signaling  Describe the layer2 of Um interface and
relative signaling flows
OMA05 Lecture 2d  Describe the layer1 of Um interface and
ecture relative signaling flows
Target Audience
 Describe the Gb interface and relative signaling
GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Planning and flows
Optimization Engineers  Describe the Gn/Gp interface and relative
Prerequisites signaling flows
Duration
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM 2 working days
wireless network optimization Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
371
13.2.4 Evolved EDGE Training
Training Path
Objectives
Evolved EDGE On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe the principle of evolved EDGE
OMA04 Lecture 1d
 List the feature set
ecture
Target Audience  Describe the EGPRS2 resource allocation and
operation
Optimization Engineers Duration
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications Class Size
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM Min 6, max 12

wireless network optimization
372
13.2.5 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Optimization
 Describe the general analysis method of TBF
OMO16 Lecture, Case-study 1d
setup success rate problem
ecture
Target Audience  Introduce the detailed solution of TBF setup
success rate problem
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers,
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Engineers  Describe the general analysis method of
download speed problem
Prerequisites
 Introduce the detailed solution of download
 Completion of the following program(s): speed problem
 GSM BSC6000 GPRS/EDGE Radio Network  Study the cases
Optimization Training, Duration
 OR GSM BSC6900 GPRS/EDGE Radio
Network Optimization Training 1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
373
13.3 GSM BSS Product Training
13.3.1 GSM BSS8.1 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Explain the BTS signal flow.
 Check the hardware structure of the BTS, such
as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Product Description
 Describe site maintenance objects.
OMB11 Lecture 1d
exercise exercise  Describe the concepts of BTS3900
management status.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Operation and  Describe the concepts of BTS3900 operation
Maintenance status.
OMB16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe BTS3900 routine operation and
maintenance procedure.
 Explain how to use BTS3900 remote
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Data maintenance console.
Configuration
OMB14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the steps to configure BTS3900
online.
 Describe the structure of BTS3900 data
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Commissioning configuration.

 Explain how to add and delete site/cell/board.
OMB12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Explain how to define the ARFCN of carriers.
 Explain how to modify the relevant parameters.
 Describe the procedure of checking the BTS
BTS&DBS3900 GSM V3R8
Troubleshooting transmission.
OMB17 Lecture 1d  Implement the connection of Transmission

Devices.
Target Audience  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and
check the current version to ensure the loading
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
step.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
 Identify the way to check the different alarm of
Prerequisites
BTS.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Understand BTS safety precautions of
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM maintenance.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
Objectives  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
common BTS faults.
be able to:  Locate the troubleshooting cases for common
BTS faults.
 Describe the features of Huawei BTS3900
products.  Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common
BTS faults.
 Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900.
 Describe the function of boards of BTS3900.
374
Duration Class Size
5 working days Min 6, max 12
375
13.3.2 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 State the system structure and functions of
modules of BSC6000.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Product Description  Describe the features of Huawei BTS3900
products.
OMC16 Lecture 1d
OMB11 Lecture 1d as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
 Describe the work flow of BSC6000
maintenance.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Operation and
 Describe important parameters in BSC6000
Maintenance
maintenance.
OMC17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Operate on the BSC6000 maintenance
exercise exercise console.
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Operation and  Perform the routine maintenance for BSC6000.
Maintenance  Describe site maintenance objects.
OMB16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the concepts of BTS3900
management status.
Target Audience  Describe the concepts of BTS3900 operation

status.
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and  Describe BTS3900 routine operation and
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers maintenance procedure.
Prerequisites  Explain how to use BTS3900 remote
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications maintenance console.
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM Duration
wireless network operation and maintenance 5 working days


be able to:
 State the structure and functions of important
boards of BSC6000.
376
13.3.3 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training
Training Path
 Describe the function of BSC6000 data
configuration system function.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Data Configuration  Configure BSC6000 by data configuration
console independently.
 Describe the configuration of important
parameters of BSS system.
 Check the data configuration correctness and
BTS3900 GSM V3R8 Data Configuration
validity.
OMB14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the steps to configure BTS3900
online.
BTS&DBS3900 GSM V3R8 Troubleshooting configuration.
OMB17 Lecture 1d
exercise exercise  Explain how to modify the relevant parameters.
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 TOP10 Alarm Processing  Understand BTS safety precautions of
maintenance.
OMC25 Lecture 1d  Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
 Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
common BTS faults.
Target Audience
 Locate the troubleshooting cases for common
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and BTS faults.
 Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common
Prerequisites BTS faults.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the BSC6000 TOP10 alarm

troubleshooting procedure.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
common BSC6000 faults.
 Successful completion of the following
program(s): Duration
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance 5 working days

Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
377
13.3.4 GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6000 GSM V9R8 Advanced On completion of this program, the participants will
OMC24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  Describe the BSC6000 and BTS

Target Audience  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
common BSC6000 and BTS faults.
 Locate, analyze and eliminate the
troubleshooting cases for common BSC6000
Prerequisites
and MBTS faults.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Analyze the signaling message for
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM troubleshooting.
wireless network operation and maintenance Duration
5 working days
program(s):
Class Size
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Operation and Maintenance
Training Min 6, max 12
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Configuration Training
378
Training Path
BTS3900 GSM V1R2 Product Description  Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web
LMT and MML).
OMB00 Lecture 1d
 Describe the concepts of BTS3900(GSM Only)
exercise exercise
management status.
BTS3900 GSM V1R2 Operation and  Describe the concepts of BTS3900(GSM Only)
Maintenance operation status.
OMB01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe BTS3900(GSM Only) routine
operation and maintenance procedure.
 Explain how to use BTS3900(GSM Only)
BTS3900 GSM V1R2 Data Configuration remote maintenance console.
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Outline the user interface of Web LMT

OMB02
configuration tool.
 Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
MBTS GO V1R2 Installation and
 Explain key parameters in each step during
Commissioning
data configuration procedure.
 Implement the data configuration with template
file.
 Perform initial data configuration and dynamic
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R2 Troubleshooting modification.
 Outline the user interface of Web LMT
OMB31 Lecture 0.5d
configuration tool.
Target Audience  Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
Prerequisites
file.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Perform initial data configuration and dynamic
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM modification.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Understand BTS safety precautions of
Objectives maintenance.
 Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
be able to:
common BTS faults.
 Describe the features of BTS3900(GSM Only)
products.
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS faults.
 Describe the function of boards of
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
379
Duration Class Size
380
Training Path
subrack of BSC6900(GSM Only).
 State the performance features of
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Product Description BSC6900(GSM Only).
OMC00 Lecture 1d
products.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
OMB00 Lecture 1d BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Operation and as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
Maintenance
exercise exercise maintenance.
BTS3900 GSM V1R2 Operation and maintenance（Web LMT and MML）.
Maintenance
OMB01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d console.
 Perform the routine maintenance for BSC6900.
Target Audience  Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web

LMT and MML).
management status.
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications operation status.
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Describe BTS3900(GSM Only) routine

wireless network operation and maintenance operation and maintenance procedure.
Objectives  Explain how to use BTS3900(GSM Only)

remote maintenance console.
Duration
be able to:
 State the structure and functions of important 5 working days
boards of BSC6900(GSM Only). Class Size
Min 6, max 12
modules of BSC6900(GSM Only).
381
Training Path
 Describe the loading procedure of data
configuration.
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Data Configuration  Configure BSC6900 by CME independently.
parameters of GSM BSS system.
validity.
OMB02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d configuration.
configuration tool.
BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Installation and  Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
Commissioning
exercise exercise data configuration procedure.
MBTS GO V1R2 Installation and file.
Commissioning
OMB03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d modification.
 Describe BSC6900 commissioning procedure
Target Audience  Outline OMU software functions

 Complete BSC6900 commissioning
 Complete BSC6900 application software
installation
Prerequisites
 Describe the alarm and server verification after
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications commissioning
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Outline the user interface of Web LMT
wireless network operation and maintenance configuration tool.
 Successful completion of the following  Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
program(s):  Explain key parameters in each step during
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Operation and Maintenance data configuration procedure.
Training  Implement the data configuration with template
Objectives file.
modification.
be able to:
Duration
 Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT
independently. 7 working days
 Describe the configuration of important Class Size
Min 6, max 12
validity.
382
Training Path
Objectives

BSC6900 GSM V9R11 Troubleshooting
be able to:
OMC04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  Understand BSC6900(GSM Only) safety
4 precautions of maintenance.
Target Audience
 Describe the BSC6900(GSM Only)
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and troubleshooting flow.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
Prerequisites common BSC6900(GSM Only) faults.
BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
wireless network operation and maintenance
 Perform the troubleshooting for common
program(s):
BSC6900(GSM Only) faults.
Duration
Training
GSM BSS9.0 BSS Configuration Training 5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
383
Training Path
BSC6900 GSM V9R12 Product Description BSC6900(GSM Only).
OMC05 Lecture 1d
maintenance.
maintenance（Web LMT and MML）.
OMB04 Lecture 1d console.
BSC6900 GSM V9R12 Operation and products.
Maintenance
exercise exercise BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Operation and BTS3900(GSM Only) .
Maintenance
OMB05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Check the hardware structure of the BTS, such

LMT and MML).
management status.
Prerequisites
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Describe BTS3900(GSM Only) routine

wireless network operation and maintenance operation and maintenance procedure.
Objectives  Explain how to use BTS3900(GSM Only)

remote maintenance console.
Duration
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
384
Training Path
configuration.
validity.
OMB06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d configuration.
configuration tool.
Commissioning
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R3 Installation and file.
Commissioning
OMB07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d modification.
 Describe the installation procedure
Target Audience  Describe the software commissioning

procedures in different scenarios
 Describe the different commissioning mode
according to different scenarios
Prerequisites
 Master the loading procedure of BTS, and
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications check the current version to ensure the loading
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM step.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Identify the way to check the different alarm of
 Successful completion of the following BTS.
program(s):  Describe BSC6900 commissioning procedure
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Operation and  Outline OMU software functions

Maintenance Training  Complete BSC6900 commissioning
Objectives  Complete BSC6900 application software
installation
Duration
be able to:
 Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT 7 working days
independently. Class Size
Min 6, max 12
validity.
385
Training Path
Objectives

BSC6900 GSM V9R12 Troubleshooting
be able to:
OMC09 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d  Understand BSC6900 (GSM Only) safety
4 precautions of maintenance.
 Describe the BSC6900 (GSM Only)
Target Audience troubleshooting flow.
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers common BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
Prerequisites  Locate the troubleshooting cases for common

 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Perform the troubleshooting for common
 Successful completion of the following BSC6900 (GSM Only) faults.
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Operation and
Maintenance Training 5 working days
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Configuration Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
386
13.3.12 GSM BSS8.1 - BSS9.0 Delta Training
Training Path
GSM BSS8.1 BSS Troubleshooting Training
BSC6900 GSM V9R8-V9R11 Delta Objectives
OMC15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
 Describe BSC6900 evolution overview
Target Audience
 Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900,
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and including cabinet, subrack and boards.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the software changing in BSC6900,
Prerequisites including OMU board software and OM
software
 Describe the typical configuration
Duration
 Successful completion of the following 2 working days
program(s): Class Size
Min 6, max 12
Training
387
Training Path
BSC6900 GSM V9R8-V9R12 Delta Objectives
be able to:
 Describe BSC6900 evolution overview
Target Audience
 Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900,
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and including cabinet, subrack and boards.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the software changing in BSC6900,
Prerequisites including OMU board software and OM
software
 Describe the typical configuration
Duration
 Successful completion of the following 2 working days
program(s): Class Size
Min 6, max 12
Training
388
13.3.14 PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
of PCU6000.
 Outline the PCU6000 board features.
PCU6000 (External PCU) Operation and
 Implement PCU6000 data configuration,
Maintenance
parameters setting, data modification,
restoration and back-up.
 Perform the PCU6000 routine operation and
Target Audience maintenance via MML and GUI console.

 Operate and maintain the alarms management
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and via MML and GUI console.
 Operate and maintain the performance
Prerequisites management via MML and GUI console.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Locate, analyze and eliminate the common
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM faults of PCU6000.

be able to:
Min 6, max 12
 Outline the GPRS principle.
 Outline the function, architecture and structure
389
Training Path
BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Product  Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web
Description LMT and MML).
OMB04 Lecture 1d
exercise exercise
management status.
BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Operation and  Describe the concepts of BTS3900(GSM Only)
OMB05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe BTS3900(GSM Only) routine
operation and maintenance procedure.
 Explain how to use BTS3900(GSM Only)
BTS3900 GSM V1R3 Data remote maintenance console.
Configuration
OMB06
configuration tool.
BTS GSM V1R3 Installation and  Explain key parameters in each step during
Commissioning
file.
BTS&DBS3900 GO V1R3 Troubleshooting modification.
OMB32 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the software commissioning
Target Audience procedures in different scenarios
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications step.
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Identify the way to check the different alarm of
wireless network operation and maintenance BTS.
Objectives  Understand BTS safety precautions of
maintenance.
be able to:
common BTS faults.
products.
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
BTS faults.
BTS3900(GSM Only) .
390
Duration Class Size
391
Training Path
 Check the hardware structure of the MBTS,
such as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Product Description  Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web
LMT and MML).
OMB33 Lecture 1d
 Describe the concepts of MBTS(GSM Only)
exercise exercise
management status.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Operation and  Describe the concepts of MBTS(GSM Only)
OMB34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation
and maintenance procedure.
 Explain how to use MBTS(GSM Only) remote
MBTS GSM V1R4 Data Configuration maintenance console.

OMB35
configuration tool.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Installation and  Explain key parameters in each step during
Commissioning
file.
 Perform initial data configuration via CME and
MBTS GO V1R4 Troubleshooting LMT.
OMB37 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the software commissioning
Target Audience procedures in different scenarios
 Perform local commissioning via SMT and
Prerequisites
USB.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Perform remote commissioning via M2000 and
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM Web LMT.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and
Objectives check the current version to ensure the loading
step.
be able to:
BTS.
 Describe the features of MBTS(GSM Only)
 Understand BTS safety precautions of
products.
maintenance.
 Describe the hardware structure of MBTS(GSM
Only) .
 Describe the function of boards of MBTS(GSM
common BTS faults.
Only) .
 Explain the MBTS signal flow.
392
Duration
BTS faults.
 Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common 5 working days
BTS faults. Class Size
Min 6, max 12
393
Training Path
BSC6900 GSM V9R13 Product BSC6900(GSM Only).
Description
OMC50 Lecture 1d
products.
Only) .
MBTS GSM V1R4 Product Description
OMB33 Lecture 1d Only) .
 Check the hardware structure of the MBTS,
BSC6900 GSM V9R13 Operation and such as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
Maintenance
exercise exercise maintenance.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Operation and maintenance（Web LMT and MML）.
Maintenance  Operate on the BSC6900 maintenance
OMB34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d console.

LMT and MML).
management status.
Prerequisites
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation
wireless network operation and maintenance and maintenance procedure.
Objectives  Explain how to use MBTS(GSM Only) remote

maintenance console.
Duration
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
394
Training Path
configuration.
BSC6900 GSM V9R13 Data  Configure BSC6900 by CME independently.
Configuration
validity.
MBTS GSM V1R4 Data Configuration
OMB35 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d configuration via CME.
configuration tool.
Commissioning
MBTS GO V1R4 Installation and file.
Commissioning  Perform initial data configuration via CME and
OMB36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d LMT.
Target Audience  Outline OMU software functions

installation
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the software commissioning
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM procedures in different scenarios
wireless network operation and maintenance  Describe the different commissioning mode
 Successful completion of the following according to different scenarios
program(s):  Perform local commissioning via SMT and
GSM BSS13.0 BSS Operation and USB.
Maintenance Training  Perform remote commissioning via M2000 and
Objectives Web LMT.
be able to:
step.
 Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT
independently.
BTS.
Duration
 Check the data configuration correctness and 7 working days
validity.
395
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
396
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM Fault Information
Collecting On completion of this program, the participants will
OMC85 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d be able to:
 Describe the OMU Maintenance and Operation
 Know how to collect the fault information for CS
BSC6900 CS Troubleshooting and PS fault
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Describe where is the different file in OMU.
OMC86
 Describe the functions of different files
 Describe the CS Fault Troubleshooting flow
BSC6900 PS Troubleshooting  Know how to do Single pass and no voice

Troubleshooting
 Know how to do Cross pass Troubleshooting
 Know how to do Noise Troubleshooting
BSC6900 IP Transmission  Know how to do Echo Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting  Describe the PS Fault Troubleshooting flow
OMC87 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Know how to do PS Data rate Troubleshooting
 Know how to do PS Access Troubleshooting
 Know how to Anylase PS KPI
BSC6900 Clock Troubleshooting
 Understand typical IP transmission
OMC89 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d troubleshooting cases
 Understand fault isolation in case of
Target Audience emergencies in IP transmission mode
 Understand how to analyze typical IP
transmission troubleshooting cases
 Describe Clock Fault Troubleshooting Flow
Prerequisites
 Know how to do Clock troubleshooting
wireless network operation and maintenance 5 working days
 Successful completion of the following Class Size
program(s): Min 6, max 12

397
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V9R12-V9R13 Delta On completion of this program, the participants will
OMC56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
 Describe BSC6900 GSM evolution overview
 Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900
Target Audience GSM and MBTS GSM, including cabinet,
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and subrack and boards.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the software changing in
Prerequisites BSC6900GSM, including OMU board software

and OM software
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the new features of BSC6900GSM
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM and MBTS GSM.
program(s): 1 working day
GSM BSS12.0 BSS Operation and Class Size
Min 6, max 12
398
13.3.21 GSM BSS9.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R011 Data On completion of this program, the participants will
Reconfiguration be able to:
OMC58 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC
 Describe the modification of OPC and DPC
 Perform the way to adding/removing subracks
MBTS GSM V100R002 Data
and boards
Reconfiguration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  expand the transmission resource in A, GB and
OMB39
Abis interface.
Target Audience  Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on A, Gb

and Abis interface.
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and  Adjust the cell processing in DPU board
 Describe the procedure of MBTS dynamic data
Prerequisites adjustment
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Adjust the Global/Device/Transmission Data
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data
wireless network operation and maintenance  Adjust the BTS Data
 Successful completion of the following  Reparent BTSs

5 working days
Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
399
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R012 Data On completion of this program, the participants will
Reconfiguration be able to:
OMC59 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC
MBTS GSM V100R003 Data
and boards
Reconfiguration
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  expand the transmission resource in A, GB and
OMB40
Abis interface.
Target Audience  Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on A, Gb

and Abis interface.
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and  Adjust the cell processing in DPU board
Prerequisites adjustment
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data
wireless network operation and maintenance  Adjust the BTS Data
 Successful completion of the following  Reparent BTSs

5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
400
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 Data On completion of this program, the participants will be
Reconfiguration able to:
OMC57 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC
 Perform the way to adding/removing subracks and
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 Migration boards
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  expand the transmission resource in A, GB and

OMB66
Abis interface.
 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on A, Gb
and Abis interface.
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 Expanding
 Adjust the cell processing in DPU board
OMB67 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the procedures of expanding the BTS
capacity
MBTS GSM V100R004 Data  Perform how to add BSC board

Reconfiguration  Perform how to add BSC Subrack
OMB46 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Detail the scenarios of BSC migration
 Detail the procedure of BSC migration
 Perform the BSC migration
MBTS GSM V100R004 Expanding  Describe the procedure of MBTS dynamic data
OMB47 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d adjustment
 Adjust the Global/Device/Transmission Data
 Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data
MBTS GSM V100R004 Migration  Adjust the BTS Data
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Reparent BTSs

OMB48 0.5d
Target Audience capacity
 Perform how to add BTS Cells
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
 Perform how to add BTS TRXs
 Detail the scenarios of BTS migration
Prerequisites
 Detail the procedure of BTS migration
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Perform the BTS migration
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless Duration
network operation and maintenance
5 working days
 Successful completion of the following program(s):
Class Size
 BSC6900 GSM V900R013 BSS Operation and
Maintenance Training Min 6, max 12
 BSC6900 GSM V900R013 BSS Configuration
Training
401
Training Path  Explain the MBTS signal flow.

 Check the hardware structure of the MBTS, such
 Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web LMT
OMB41 Lecture 1d and MML).
exercise exercise
management status.
MBTS GSM V1R7 Operation and
Maintenance  Describe the concepts of MBTS(GSM Only)
OMB42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise operation status.

0.5d
 Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation and
MBTS GSM V1R7 Data Configuration  Explain how to use MBTS(GSM Only) remote
configuration tool.
MBTS GSM V1R7 Installation and  Illustrate the data configuration procedure.
Commissioning  Explain key parameters in each step during data
OMB44 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d configuration procedure.
 Implement the data configuration with template file.
 Perform initial data configuration via CME and LMT.
MBTS GO V1R7 Troubleshooting  Describe the installation procedure

 Describe the software commissioning procedures
OMB45 Lecture 0.5d
in different scenarios
Target Audience  Describe the different commissioning mode
 Perform local commissioning via SMT and USB.
 Perform remote commissioning via M2000 and
Prerequisites
Web LMT.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and check
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless the current version to ensure the loading step.
network operation and maintenance  Identify the way to check the different alarm of BTS.
Objectives  Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
 Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for TOP
On completion of this program, the participants will be
BTS faults.
able to:
 Locate the troubleshooting cases for TOP BTS
faults.
products.
 Analyze the troubleshooting cases for TOP BTS
faults.
Only) .
Duration
Only) . 5 working days
402
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
403
Training Path
 State the system structure and functions of subrack
of BSC6900(GSM Only).
BSC6900 GSM V9R14 Product  State the performance features of BSC6900(GSM
Description Only).
OMC61 Lecture 1d
products.
Only) .
OMB41 Lecture 1d  Describe the function of boards of MBTS(GSM
Only) .
BSC6900 GSM V9R14 Operation and  Check the hardware structure of the MBTS, such
Maintenance
exercise exercise  Describe the work flow of BSC6900 maintenance.
MBTS GSM V1R7 Operation and maintenance（Web LMT and MML）.
Maintenance  Operate on the BSC6900 maintenance console.
OMB42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform the routine maintenance for BSC6900.
 Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web LMT
Target Audience and MML).
management status.
Prerequisites
operation status.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe MBTS(GSM Only) routine operation and
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless maintenance procedure.
network operation and maintenance  Explain how to use MBTS(GSM Only) remote
Objectives maintenance console.
Duration
able to: 5 working days
 State the structure and functions of important Class Size
boards of BSC6900(GSM Only).
Min 6, max 12
404
Training Path
configuration.
 Describe the configuration of important parameters
of GSM BSS system.
validity.
MBTS GSM V1R7 Data Configuration
OMB43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d configuration via CME.
 Outline OMU software functions
BSC6900 GSM V9R14 Installation and  Complete BSC6900 commissioning
Commissioning
exercise exercise installation
MBTS GO V1R7 Installation and configuration tool.
Commissioning
 Explain key parameters in each step during data
configuration procedure.
Target Audience  Implement the data configuration with template file.
 Perform initial data configuration via CME and LMT.
 Describe the software commissioning procedures
Prerequisites
in different scenarios
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the different commissioning mode
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless according to different scenarios
network operation and maintenance  Perform local commissioning via SMT and USB.
 Successful completion of the following program(s):  Perform remote commissioning via M2000 and
 BSC6900 GSM V900R014 BSS Operation and Web LMT.
Maintenance Training  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and check
Objectives the current version to ensure the loading step.
 Identify the way to check the different alarm of BTS.
Duration
able to:
 Configure BSC6900 by Web LMT independently. 7 working days
 Describe the configuration of important parameters Class Size
of GSM BSS system.
Min 6, max 12
validity.
405
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R014 Data On completion of this program, the participants will be
Reconfiguration able to:
OMC57 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC
 Perform the way to adding/removing subracks and
BSC6900 GSM V900R014 Migration boards
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  expand the transmission resource in A, GB and

OMB66
Abis interface.
BSC6900 GSM V900R014 Expanding and Abis interface.

capacity
 Perform how to add BSC board
MBTS GSM V100R007 Data Reconfiguration
 Perform how to add BSC Subrack
OMB46 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Detail the scenarios of BSC migration
 Detail the procedure of BSC migration
MBTS GSM V100R007 Expanding  Describe the procedure of MBTS dynamic data
OMB47 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d adjustment
 Adjust the Global/Device/Transmission Data
 Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data
MBTS GSM V100R007 Migration  Adjust the BTS Data
Lecture, Hands-on exercise  Reparent BTSs

OMB48 0.5d
Target Audience capacity
 Perform how to add BTS TRXs
 Detail the scenarios of BTS migration
Prerequisites
 Detail the procedure of BTS migration
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Perform the BTS migration
5 working days
Class Size
Maintenance Training Min 6, max 12
Training
406
Training Path
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM Fault Information Collecting
OMC85 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d able to:
 Describe the OMU Maintenance and Operation
 Know how to collect the fault information for CS
BSC6900 CS Troubleshooting and PS fault
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Describe where is the different file in OMU.
OMC86
 Describe the functions of different files
 Describe the CS Fault Troubleshooting flow
BSC6900 PS Troubleshooting  Know how to do Single pass and no voice

Troubleshooting
 Know how to do Cross pass Troubleshooting
 Know how to do Noise Troubleshooting
 Know how to do Echo Troubleshooting
BSC6900 IP Transmission Troubleshooting
 Describe the PS Fault Troubleshooting flow
 Know how to do PS Data rate Troubleshooting
 Know how to do PS Access Troubleshooting
 Know how to analyze PS KPI
BSC6900 Clock Troubleshooting
 Understand typical IP transmission troubleshooting
OMC89 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d cases
 Understand fault isolation in case of emergencies
Target Audience in IP transmission mode
 Understand how to analyze typical IP transmission
troubleshooting cases
 Describe Clock Fault Troubleshooting Flow
Prerequisites
 Know how to do Clock troubleshooting
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless
network operation and maintenance 5 working days
 Successful completion of the following program(s): Class Size

 BSC6900 GSM V900R014 BSS Operation and Min 6, max 12
407
13.3.29 GSM BSS13.0 - BSS14.0 Product Delta Training
Training Path
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GSM V900R013 - V900R014 Delta On completion of this program, the participants will be
OMC69 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d able to:
 Describe BSC6900 GSM evolution overview
 Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900 GSM
Target Audience and MBTS GSM, including cabinet, subrack and
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and boards.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the software changing in BSC6900GSM,
Prerequisites including OMU board software and OM software

 Describe the new features of BSC6900GSM and
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications MBTS GSM.
 Successful completion of the following program(s): 1 working day
 BSC6900 GSM V900R013 BSS Operation and Class Size
Min 6, max 12
408
13.3.30 GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training
Training Path
Training
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Objectives
OMC83 Lecture 0.5d On completion of this program, the participants will be

able to:
 Understand the Basic Symptoms About the
GSM BSS14.0 Precautions and Emergency
Accident
Maintenance for Large Traffic
 Know how to collect the related information
OMC84 Lecture 0.5d
 Execute the quick emergency handling methods.
Target Audience  Understand Precautions and Emergency

Maintenance for Large Traffic
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and  Know how to adjust BSC parameters before large
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers traffic
Prerequisites  Execute emergency maintenance for large traffic
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless 1 working day

Class Size
 BSC6900 GSM V900R014 BSS Operation and Min 6, max 12
409
13.3.31 GSM BSS14.0 Upgrade Training
Training Path
Training
BSC6900 GSM V900R013-V900R014 Objectives
Upgrade
OMC78 Lecture Hands-on exercise 1d On completion of this program, the participants will be
able to:
 Describe the software installation and upgrade flow
MBTS GSM V100R004 - V100R007
 Outline the backup and restore operations
Upgrade
Lecture Hands-on exercise 1d  Complete the installation and upgrade tasks
OMC79
 Grasp the OMU routine maintenance commands
Target Audience  Understand the modification of MBTS GSM

upgrade from R1 to R7comparing to earlier
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and upgrades, learn about the upgrade procedure, and
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers complete an upgrade by referring to the Upgrade
Prerequisites Guide.
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless 2 working days

network operation and maintenance Class Size
Min 6, max 12
410
13.3.32 GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

GSM BSS14.0 Antenna and Feeder
Maintenance able to:
OMB49 Lecture Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe Antenna and Feeder hardware structure.
 Describe Antenna and Feeder maintenance
Target Audience  Describe the Antenna and Feeder troubleshooting
flow.
 Analyze the Antenna and Feeder fault reasons.
 Master the Antenna and Feeder troubleshooting.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
411
13.3.33 GSM IPRAN Application Training
Training Path
able to:
 Learn about IP protocol specifications and common
RFC standards
GSM IPRAN Fundamental
 Learn about common IP RAN concepts such as the
OMC71 Lecture 0.5d MSTP and PTN
 Understand the TCP/IP protocol structure, and
learn common technologies such as the VLAN and
GSM IPRAN PTN/MSTP Networking
DSCP
OMC72 Lecture 1d  Learn the protocol stack composition on IP RAN
interfaces
 Learn the IP components, and understand the data
GSM IPRAN Networking Planning
exchange process
OMC73 Lecture Discussion 1d  Be familiar with common IP RAN devices and
Practice maintenance applications
 Learn about differences among the IP, ATM, and
GSM IPRAN Feature Application
TDM technologies, and problems caused by
OMC74 Lecture Hands-on exercise 1.5d IP-based networking
 Learn about the evolution of IP RANs
 Understand IP RAN concepts and advantages
GSM IPRAN Maintenance and Monitoring
 Understand changes in IP RAN networking
OMC75 Lecture Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Learn about feature requirements for IP RAN
networking
 Learn the implementation of key features for IP
GSM IPRAN Troubleshooting
RAN MSTP networking
OMC76 Lecture Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Understand differences between the layer 2
networking and layer 3 networking
Target Audience  Learn about the concepts and advantages of IP
RAN
 Understand IP RAN networking variations
 Learn data exchanges and encapsulation in the
Prerequisites
packet transport network (PTN)
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Understand implementation of the key features
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM wireless using PTN networking for the IP RAN
network operation and maintenance  Understand the differences between the Layer 2
 Successful completion of the following program(s): networking and Layer 3 networking
 BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS  Learn about the basic IP RAN resource planning
Operation and Maintenance Training  Learn principles of IP address allocation and
 BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS internal limitation of the RAN equipment
Configuration Training  Plan and configure the IP addresses for interface
Objectives boards
 Learn principles of planning VLAN and how to
412
process VLAN tags  Describe the procedures of implementing QoS in IP
 Understand data transmission between the RAN end to end (E2E) services
protocol layer and the RAN equipment  Learn different QoS configuration and applications
 Understand the IP RAN reliability-ensuring in different protocol and networking scenarios
implementation mechanism  Understand changes in maintenance modes due to
 Understand the principles and application of the introduction of the IP radio access network (RAN)
reliability detection mechanism  Learn the active monitoring scheme and
 Know how to configure IP RAN reliability-ensuring implementation process for the IP RAN
parameters transmission
 Learn about the differences in reliability guarantee  Learn detailed parameter configuration for IP RAN
in different networking scenarios check
 Master the application schemes of the  Monitor IP RAN transmission links, analyze and
reliability-ensuring mechanism in different locate the faults
scenarios  Learn the monitoring points for locating common
 Know how to handle faults that occur in faults
reliability-ensuring application in different scenarios  Understand theories for IP active detection
 Describe the requirements of the IP RAN for clock  Learn procedures for detecting IP faults
synchronization  Learn methods for locating IP faults
 Know the differences between clock  Learn about packet capturing tool for IP RANs
synchronization and phase synchronization  Learn methods for using packet capturing tool for
 Learn about the typical IP RAN clock solution IP networks
 Describe the architecture of an IP RAN clock  Learn about the process of analyzing packets and
network locating faults
 Learn about the differences between IP RAN clock  Understand the IP transmission troubleshooting
networking applications roadmap
 Understand the differences between the IEEE  Understand typical IP transmission troubleshooting
1588v2 technology and synchronous Ethernet cases
technology  Understand fault isolation in case of emergencies
 Learn the concept of IP Quality of Service (QoS) in IP transmission mode
 Learn about radio services' QoS requirements for  Understand how to analyze typical IP transmission
IP RANs troubleshooting cases
 Understand the QoS implementation at each layer Duration
from the perspective of transmission protocols
5 working days
 Learn the QoS configuration and application in IP
Class Size
RANs
 Learn the parameters and commands used to Min 6, max 12
ensure the QoS of IP RANs
413
13.3.34 GSM IPRAN Reconstruction Training
Training Path
 BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS
GSM IPRAN A over IP Reconstruction Configuration Training
Objectives
OMC80 Lecture Hands-on exercise 1d
be able to:
GSM IPRAN Gb over IP Reconstruction  Understand A over IP Networking, Hardware
and IP design
 Prepare A over IP reconstruction script
 verify the A over IP reconstruction
GSM IPRAN Abis over IP  Understand Gb over IP Networking, Hardware
Reconstruction
and IP design
 Prepare Gb over IP reconstruction script
 verify the Gb over IP reconstruction
Target Audience
 Understand Abis over IP Networking, Hardware
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and and IP design
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Prepare Abis over IP reconstruction script
Prerequisites  verify the Abis over IP reconstruction

Class Size
 BSC6900 GSM V900R011/12/13/14 BSS
414
13.4 GSMR BSS Product Training
13.4.1 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
Training Path
Target Audience

BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Product Description Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
OMB19 Lecture 0.5d Prerequisites
exercise exercise
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Product Description
OMB20 Lecture 0.5d Objectives
0
be able to:
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration
OMB22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d products.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration  Explain the BTS signal flow.
OMB23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Explain the configuration principle of BTS
hardware.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Operation and products.
Maintenance  Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900.
DB3900 GSMR V3R8 Operation and
Maintenance
OMB25 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Describe the steps to configure BTS3012
online.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Commissioning configuration.
 Describe the steps to configure BTS3900
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Troubleshooting online.
OMB26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the structure of BTS3900 data
configuration.
415
 Describe site maintenance objects. Devices.
 Describe the concepts of BTS3012  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and
management status. check the current version to ensure the loading
 Describe the concepts of BTS3012 operation step.
status.  Identify the way to check the different alarm of
 Describe BTS3012 routine operation and BTS.
maintenance procedure.  Understand BTS safety precautions of
 Explain how to use BTS3012 remote maintenance.
maintenance console.  Describe the BTS troubleshooting flow.
 Describe site maintenance objects.  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
 Describe the concepts of BTS3900 common BTS faults.
management status.  Locate the troubleshooting cases for common
 Describe the concepts of BTS3900 operation BTS faults.
status.  Analyze the troubleshooting cases for common
 Describe BTS3900 routine operation and BTS faults.
maintenance procedure. Duration
5 working days
Class Size
 Describe the procedure of checking the BTS
transmission. Min 6, max 12
 Implement the connection of Transmission
416
13.4.2 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
Training Path
boards of BSC6000.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Product Description modules of BSC6000.

OMC27 Lecture 1d
products.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Product Description
OMB19 Lecture 0.5d  Explain the configuration principle of BTS
exercise exercise
hardware.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Product Description products.
OMB20 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900.

0  Describe the function of boards of BTS3900.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Operation and
Maintenance
 Describe the concepts of BTS3012
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Operation and management status.
Maintenance  Describe the concepts of BTS3012 operation

OMB24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d status.
 Describe BTS3012 routine operation and
DB3900 GSMR V3R8 Operation and
Maintenance
 Describe the concepts of BTS3900
Target Audience management status.
 Describe the concepts of BTS3900 operation
status.
 Describe BTS3900 routine operation and
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Explain how to use BTS3900 remote
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM maintenance console.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Describe the work flow of BSC6000
Objectives maintenance.
maintenance.
be able to:
console.
417
Class Size
Duration Min 6, max 12
5 working days
418
13.4.3 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the function of BSC6000 data
configuration system function.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 Data Configuration
 Configure BSC6000 by data configuration
console independently.
exercise exercise
parameters of BSS system.
BTS3012 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration  Check the data configuration correctness and
OMB22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d validity.
online.
DBS3900 GSMR V3R8 Data Configuration  Describe the structure of BTS3900 data
configuration.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8 TOP10 Alarm
Processing
online.
OMC25 Lecture 1d
configuration.
Target Audience  Explain how to add and delete site/cell/board.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Explain how to modify the relevant parameters.
Prerequisites  Describe the BSC6000 TOP10 alarm

 At least 1 year working experience in GSM common BSC6000 faults.
Duration
program(s): 5 working days
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Class Size
Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
419
13.4.4 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
Training Path
GSMR BSS Configuration
Training(BSC6000V900R008C15)
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 BSS Signaling Objectives
Flow and Analysis
exercise exercise be able to:
 Describe the BSS signaling flow.
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 HSCSD  Analysis the BSS signaling message.
Introduction
 Describe the principle and application of
OMC32 Lecture 0.5d
HSCSD
 Describe the BSC6000 and BTS
BSC6000 GSMR V9R8C15 Troubleshooting
OMC33 Lecture 1.5d common BSC6000 and BTS faults.
 Locate, analyze and eliminate the
Target Audience troubleshooting cases for common BSC6000
and MBTS faults.
 Analyze the signaling message for
troubleshooting.
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
 Successful completion of the following Min 6, max 12
program(s):
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance
Training(BSC6000 V900R008C15)
420
13.4.5 GSMR BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
Training Path
 Check the hardware structure of the DBS, such
9 as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.

 Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Product LMT and MML).
Description
 Describe the concepts of DBS3900
OMB27 Lecture 1d
management status.
exercise exercise
 Describe the concepts of DBS3900 operation
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Operation status.
and Maintenance  Describe DBS3900 routine operation and

OMB28 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d maintenance procedure.
 Explain how to use DBS3900 remote
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Data
Configuration  Outline the user interface of Web LMT
configuration tool.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 installation
and commissioning
file.
modification.
Target Audience  Describe the procedure of checking the BTS
transmission.
 Implement the connection of Transmission
Devices.
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications check the current version to ensure the loading
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM step.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Identify the way to check the different alarm of
Objectives BTS.
Duration
 Describe the features of DBS3900 products. Class Size
 Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900.
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the function of boards of DBS3900.
 Explain the DBS signal flow.
421
13.4.6 GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
Training Path
modules of BSC6000 GSMR.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Product Description subrack of BSC6000 GSMR.
Lecture  State the performance features of BSC6000

OMC34 1d
GSMR.
maintenance.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Operation and
Maintenance
maintenance（Web LMT and MML）.
console.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Product
 Describe the features of DBS3900 products.
Description
OMB27 Lecture 1d  Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900.
exercise exercise  Describe the function of boards of DBS3900.
 Explain the DBS signal flow.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Operation and  Check the hardware structure of the DBS, such
Maintenance as the cabinet, subrack, broad, and cable.
 Describe GSM site maintenance objects(Web
LMT and MML).
Target Audience  Describe the concepts of DBS3900
management status.
Maintenance Technicians and Engineers  Describe the concepts of DBS3900 operation
status.
Prerequisites
 Describe DBS3900 routine operation and
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications maintenance procedure.
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM  Explain how to use DBS3900 remote
wireless network operation and maintenance maintenance console.
Objectives Duration

be able to:
Class Size
boards of BSC6000 GSMR. Min 6, max 12
422
13.4.7 GSMR BSS Configuration Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
Training Path
configuration.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Data
 Configure BSC6000 by CME independently.
Configuration
Lecture  Describe the configuration of important
OMC36 3d
validity.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Installation and
Commissioning
configuration.
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Data
Configuration
OMB29 Lecture 2d installation
exercise exercise  Describe the alarm and server verification after
commissioning
DBS3900 GSMR V301R008 Installation and  Outline the user interface of Web LMT
Commissioning configuration tool.
Target Audience data configuration procedure.
file.
Prerequisites
modification.
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the procedure of checking the BTS
 At least 1 year working experience in GSM transmission.
wireless network operation and maintenance  Implement the connection of Transmission
 Successful completion of the following Devices.
program(s):  Master the loading procedure of BTS, and
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance check the current version to ensure the loading
Training(BSC6000 V901R008) step.
Objectives  Identify the way to check the different alarm of
BTS.
Duration
be able to:
 Configure BSC6000 by Web LMT 7 working days
independently. Class Size
Min 6, max 12
validity.
423
13.4.8 GSMR BSS Troubleshooting Training(BSC6000 V901R008)
Training Path
GSMR BSS Configuration Training
(BSC6000V901R008)
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 BSS Signaling
Objectives
Flow and Analysis
OMC39 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
 Understand BSC6000 safety precautions of
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 HSCSD maintenance.
Introduction  Describe the BSC6000 troubleshooting flow.
OMC40 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the troubleshooting phenomenon for
common BSC6000 faults.
BSC6000 GSMR V901R008 Troubleshooting BSC6000 faults.
OMB38 Lecture 1d BSC6000 faults.
exercise exercise
 Perform the troubleshooting for common
Target Audience BSC6000 faults.
 Describe the BSS signaling flow.
 Analysis the BSS signaling message.
 Describe the principle and application of
Prerequisites
HSCSD
3 working days
Class Size
GSMR BSS Operation and Maintenance
Training (BSC6000 V901R008)
424
14 WCDMA Training Path
14.1 Principle Training Path
WCDMA RAN Overview Training WCDMA RAN Principle Training WCDMA HSPA+ Feature Training
1D 5D 2D
WCDMA RAN System Overview

QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS
Training
2D 3D
425
14.2 RNP&RNO Training Path
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-

Carrier Solution Training
1D
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio UMTS 900M Coverage Solution RNP

Network Design and Planning Training
3D 1D
WCDMA Indoor Coverage

Training
WCDMA RF Optimization 2D
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14
Training
HSPA/HSPA+ Radio Network
2D Optimization Training
3D
Optimization/
WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio Performance/
Network Features and Algorithms Network Optimization Advanced QoS
Training Training
5D 5D
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone

Features
1D
WCDMA RAN11-RAN12 Delta WCDMA RAN12-RAN13 Delta WCDMA RAN13-RAN14 Delta

Features Traing Features Training Features Training Delta Training
1D 2D 2D
426
14.3 Product Training Path
uBro Training Upgrading Training Delta Training
WCDMA uBro Network Operation WCDMA RAN Product Delta

Training WCDMA RAN Upgrade Training Training
uBro2.0/3.0/3.1 5D RAN14 2D RAN12/13 1D RAN14 1.5D
Special Training
WCDMA RAN Troubleshooting

Training
RAN11/11.1/12/13/14 5D
Basic Training
WCDMA RNC Operation Training WCDMA NodeB Training

WCDMA RAN Reconfiguration
RAN/11/11.1/12 3D Training
RAN13/14 4D RAN11/11.1/12/13/14 5D
RAN11.1/12/13/14 5D
WCDMA IPRAN Application

Training
WCDMA RNC Configuration
Training 5D
RAN11/11.1/12/13/14 7D
WCDMA RAN Emergency

Legend:
Red: New RAN14 1D
Blue : Modify
Black: No change
427
15 WCDMA Training Courses
WCDMA Product Technical Training Training Courses are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Principle Training Courses
WCDMA RAN System Overview Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN Overview Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN Principle Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
RNP&RNO Training Courses
WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RF Optimization Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
Training
WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
428
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
Product Training Courses
WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN12 Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN12.0-RAN13.0 Product Delta Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Product Delta Training Ⅲ 1.5 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
429
WCDMA IPRAN Application Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
430
15.1 Principle Training
15.1.1 WCDMA RAN System Overview
Training Path
services in WCDMA system
 Describe the scrambling code of WCDMA
WCDMA RAN System Overview  Describe the modulation methods used in
Lecture 2d WCDMA system

OWX00
 Explain the usage of transmit diversity and
Target Audience RAKE receiver in WCDMA system
All Technical and non-Technical People  List all the members of RAN product family.
Prerequisites  Describe the hardware, logical structure and

typical configurations of RAN product.
 Summarize different functions of RAN
Objectives products.
On completion of this program, the participants will  List key advantages of RAN products.
be able to:  List technical specifications of RAN products.
 Outline the development of 3G Duration
 Describe the architecture of WCDMA system

2 working days
 Describe the key features and technologies of
Class Size
WCDMA
 Describe the voice coding of WCDMA Min 6,max 12
 Outline the channel coding of WCDMA

 Describe the spreading code of different
431
15.1.2 WCDMA RAN Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe the voice coding of WCDMA
 Outline the channel coding of WCDMA
WCDMA RAN Overview  Describe the spreading code of different
services in WCDMA system
OWA00 Lecture 1d
 Describe the scrambling code of WCDMA
Target Audience  Describe the modulation methods used in
WCDMA system
All Technical People
 Explain the usage of transmit diversity and
Prerequisites
RAKE receiver in WCDMA system
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the key features and technologies of
Objectives HSPA
Duration
be able to: 1 working day
 Outline the development of 3G Class Size
 Describe the architecture of WCDMA system
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the key features and technologies of
WCDMA
432
15.1.3 WCDMA RAN Principle Training
Training Path
 Outline WCDMA RAN physical layer
procedures
WCDMA Air Interface  Describe the WCDMA terrestrial interface
protocol architecture
OWA01 Lecture 3d
 Describe the WCDMA RAN signaling
procedures: paging, call process, handover, etc
 Describe the UTRAN basic RRM methods
WCDMA HSPA Principles (power control, handover, load control, etc)
 Describe WCDMA and HSDPA evolution and
OWA20 Lecture 2d
standards
 Describe HSDPA key technologies
Target Audience
 Describe HSDPA physical channels
Network Deployment Engineers
 Describe HSDPA Network and UE protocol
Optimization Engineers stack architecture
System Technicians  Describe WCDMA and HSUPA evolution and
System Engineers standards
Prerequisites  Describe HSUPA key technologies
 Describe HSUPA physical channels
program(s):  Describe HSUPA Network and UE protocol
stack architecture
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
 Describe the WCDMA radio interface protocol Min 6, max 12

architecture
 Describe the WCDMA RAN channel structure
433
15.1.4 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training
Training Path
Objectives

WCDMA HSPA+ Principles
be able to:
OWA21 Lecture 2d  Describe HSPA+ evolution and standards
 Describe HSPA+ key technologies realized in
Target Audience
HSPA+ Phase1, such as DL MIMO, DL 64QAM,
Network Deployment Engineers etc.
Optimization Engineers  Describe HSPA+ key technologies realized in
System Technicians HSPA+ Phase2, such as DL MIMO+64QAM,
System Engineers DL DC-HSDPA, UL 16QAM, etc.
Prerequisites  Describe HSPA+ key technologies realized in

HPSA+ Phase 3, include DC-HSDPA+MIMO,
 Successful completion of the following E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSUPA, etc
program(s):
Duration
2 working days
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
434
15.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training
Training Path
HSPA network
 Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for LTE
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training network
 Describe QoS negotiation procedure
OWA22 Lecture 3d
 Describe Radio QoS
Target Audience  Outline general QoS handling on radio
interfaces
 Describe HSPA Radio Bearers and Radio links
 Describe LTE Radio Bearers
System Technicians
 Outline QoS in IP Backhaul
System Engineers
 Outline L1/L2 technologies
Prerequisites
 Outline topology and dimensioning
 Successful completion of the following  Outline DiffServ architecture with DSCP, SLA,
program(s): PHB, Assured Forwarding (AF), Expedited
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training Forwarding (EF), etc
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training  Outline MPLS architecture, header, LER, LSR,
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training LSP,FEC, Label distribution, etc
Objectives  Outline QoS in Core Networks
 Outline QoS handling and solutions in PS core
network
be able to:
 Outline SGSN and GGSN QoS related info and
 Describe GBR and non-GBR bearers
handling
 Outline Bearer Setup modes
 Outline Roaming Scenarios; QoS in GRX/IPX
 Describe QoS definition in HSPA:
 Describe QoS Mapping
Conversational, Streaming, Interactive and
 Outline QoS Mapping in SGSN
background
 Outline QoS Mapping in GGSN
 Describe QoS definition in GPRS/EPS: MBR,
 Outline QoS Mapping in PGW
GBR, ARP, THI and QCI
 Outline QoS Mapping for access network
 Outline TFT’s and its usage
 Describe QoS Mapping for Air interface
 Outline some real-life scenarios
Duration
 Outline subscriber data/profile in HLR/HSS
 Outline QoS related info in Subscriber profiles 3 working days
 Describe usage of QoS info in subscriber data Class Size
for ensuring QoS
Min 6, max 12
 Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for
435
15.2 RNP&RNO Training
15.2.1 WCDMA Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
planning
 Explain the difference between WCDMA and
WCDMA Radio Network Planning GSM radio network planning
OWP0  Explain the principle of WCDMA coverage

Lecture 2d
0 planning
 Describe the traffic model of WCDMA
 Analyze the WCDMA uplink and downlink radio
WCDMA HSPA&HSPA+ Planning and capacity
Deployment
 Analyze the WCDMA CE capacity
OWP13 Lecture 1d
 Describe HSDPA dimensioning principle,
Target Audience including link budget, capacity dimensioning,

channel element dimensioning
 Describe HSUPA dimensioning principle,
System Technicians including link budget, capacity dimensioning,
System Engineers channel element dimensioning
Prerequisites  Describe impacts of HSPA+ features on
dimensioning, including DL 64QAM , MIMO,
CPC,DC-HSDPA, 64QAM+MIMO, UL16QAM,
program(s):
DC-MIMO, DC-HSUPA, etc
 Describe HSPA+ Deployment
Duration
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training
Class Size
 Describe the principle of radio network
436
15.2.2 WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution Training
Training Path
Features and Algorithms Training
Objectives
WCDMA Multi-Band and Multi-Carrier Solution
OWP20 Lecture 1d be able to:
Target Audience
multi-band and multi-carrier solution
Optimization Engineers  Describe the main solutions in various
System Technicians scenarios
System Engineers  Describe the main parameters in various
Prerequisites scenarios
Duration
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
 WCDMA RAN11/12/13/14 Radio Network
437
15.2.3 UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Training
Training Path
UMTS 900M Coverage Solution Objectives
OWP21 Lecture 1d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
Target Audience
Optimization Engineers UMTS 900M coverage solution
System Technicians  Describe UMTS 900M Refarming Solution
System Engineers  Describe UMTS 900M Deployment
Prerequisites  Describe UMTS 900M Application Cases
Duration
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
438
15.2.4 WCDMA Indoor Coverage Training
Training Path
Objectives
Common Components for Indoor Coverage On completion of this program, the participants will
and Repeater Introduction be able to:
OWP2 Lecture 0.5 d  List the types of common components for
2
indoor coverage
 Describe the functions of common
components for indoor coverage
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Planning
and Optimization  Describe the functions of repeaters
OWP23 Lecture 1.25d  Describe the method of WCDMA indoor
coverage planning
 Describe the method of WCDMA indoor
WCDMA Indoor Coverage Solution coverage optimization
 Describe the method of indoor and outdoor
OWP24 Lecture 0.25 d inter-operation
 Describe the stadium coverage solution
Target Audience
 Describe the metro coverage solution
Optimization Engineers  Describe the airport coverage solution
System Technicians  Describe the resident location coverage
System Engineers solution
Prerequisites  Describe the commercial building coverage
solution
 Describe the campus coverage solution
program(s):
Duration
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training 2 working days
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
439
15.2.5 WCDMA RF Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe WCDMA Radio Network Optimization
Flow
WCDMA Radio Network Tuning  Describe the steps of single site verification
 Describe how to do single site verification
OWO00 Lecture 2d
 Describe how to solve the ordinary problems in
Target Audience single site verification
 Describe how to solve the neighbor list related
problems in RF optimization
System Technicians
 Describe how to analyze coverage problem
System Engineers
and solve it
Prerequisites
 Describe how to improve coverage capability
 Successful completion of the following  Locate the resource of abnormal interference
program(s):  Describe how to solve abnormal interference
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training problem
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training Duration
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
440
15.2.6 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 open loop power
control algorithm and list the main parameters
WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network
Features and Algorithms  Describe WCDMA RAN11 closed loop power
OWO20 Lecture 5d
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 intra-frequency
Target Audience handover algorithm and list the main
parameters
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 inter-frequency
System Technicians
handover algorithm and list the main
System Engineers
parameters
Prerequisites  Describe WCDMA RAN11 inter-RAT handover
 Successful completion of the following algorithm and list the main parameters
program(s):  Describe WCDMA RAN11 admission control
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training algorithms and list the main parameters
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training  Describe WCDMA RAN11 load control

algorithms and list the main parameters
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 Idle Mode Behaviors Min 6, max 12

(including cell selection and reselection, paging,
access etc) and list the main parameters
441
Training Path
OWO21 Lecture 5d
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters

Duration
Objectives
5 working days

442
Training Path
OWO22 Lecture 5d
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters

Duration
Objectives
5 working days

443
Training Path
OWO23 Lecture 5d
parameters
System Technicians
System Engineers
parameters

Duration
Objectives
5 working days

444
15.2.10 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Advanced Training
Training Path
relative counters
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 call drop KPI and
Performance Management relative counters
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 mobility KPI and
OWO30 Lecture 2d
relative counters
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 traffic KPI and
relative counters
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization  Describe WCDMA RAN11 cell algorithm KPI
and relative counters, such as load control,
OWO01 Lecture 3d
DCCC
Target Audience  List the main items of RNC trace and
monitoring
 Execute signaling trace and real-time
System Technicians
monitoring and collect data
System Engineers
 Describe the signaling of type procedures
Prerequisites
 Describe the drive test and performance
 Successful completion of the following statistic optimization flow
program(s):  Evaluate the network access performance
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training  Locate and solve common access problems
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training  Evaluate the network paging performance
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training  Locate and solve paging problem
 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features  Evaluate the network handover performance
and Algorithms Training  Locate and solve handover problem
Objectives  Evaluate the network retention performance
 Locate and solve call drop problem
Duration
be able to:
 Master the concept related to Performance 5 working days
Management Class Size
 Master how to collect counters and KPIs with
Min 6, max 12
M2000
 Describe WCDMA RAN11 access KPI and
445
Training Path
relative counters
OWO31 Lecture 2d
relative counters
relative counters
OWO01 Lecture 3d
DCCC
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites
Duration
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
M2000
446
Training Path
relative counters
OWO32 Lecture 2d
relative counters
relative counters
OWO01 Lecture 3d
DCCC
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites
Duration
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
M2000
447
Training Path
relative counters
OWO33 Lecture 2d
relative counters
relative counters
OWO01 Lecture 3d
DCCC
monitoring
System Technicians
System Engineers
Prerequisites
Duration
be able to:
Min 6, max 12
M2000
448
15.2.14 WCDMA HSPA/HSPA+ RAN11 Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
Objectives

WCDMA HSPA RAN11 Radio
Resource Management be able to:
OWO40 Lecture 2d  Describe HSDPA RAN11 Radio Resource

Algorithm (RRM) such as channel type
mapping, code resource allocation, power
allocation, HSDPA mobility management,
WCDMA HSPA&HSPA+ RAN11
Throughput Troubleshooting scheduling, etc.
OWO44 Lecture 1d  Describe HSUPA RAN11 Radio Resource

Target Audience mapping, DCCC, power allocation, HSUPA
mobility management, scheduling, etc.
 Describe the troubleshooting process for
Optimization Engineers HSDPA throughput problems
System Technicians  Describe the troubleshooting process for
System Engineers HSUPA throughput problems
Prerequisites  Describe the troubleshooting process for
HSPA+ throughput problems
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training 3 working days

 WCDMA RAN Principle Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
 WCDMA RAN11 Radio Network Features
and Algorithms Training
449
Training Path
Objectives




Min 6, max 12
450
Training Path
Objectives




Min 6, max 12
451
Training Path
Objectives




Min 6, max 12
452
15.2.18 WCDMA RAN11 - RAN12 Delta Features Training
Training Path
Implementation
 Describe DC-HSDPA Feature in RAN12
WCDMA RAN11 – RAN12 Delta Features
version
 Describe MIMO + DL64QAM Feature in RAN12
OWO50 Lecture 1d
version
Target Audience  Describe FDE Feature in RAN12 version
 Describe HSUPA Dynamic TTI Feature in
System Technicians
RAN12 version
System Engineers
 Describe Interference Cancellation Feature in
Prerequisites
RAN12 version
 Successful completion of the following  Describe UL 16QAM Feature in RAN12 version
program(s):  Describe UL Enhanced L2 Feature in RAN12
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training version
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training  Describe Periodic Directed Retry (HSDPA DRD)
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training in RAN12 version
 WCDMA RAN12 Radio Network Features Duration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
 Describe RAN12 HSPA+ Principle and
453
Training Path
 Describe P2P Downloading Rate Control
during Busy Hour Feature
 Describe Web Page Access Acceleration
Feature
OWO51 Lecture 2d
 Describe Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on
Target Audience QoS Feature
 Describe HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at
UE Power Limitation Feature
 Describe Adaptive Configuration of Data
System Technicians
Channel Power Offset for HSUPA Feature
System Engineers
 Describe Optimization of R99 and HSUPA
Prerequisites Users Fairness Feature
 Successful completion of the following  Describe Traffic-Based Activation and

program(s): Deactivation of Secondary Carrier in
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training Dual-Carrier HSDPA Feature
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training  Describe Anti-Interference Scheduling for

HSUPA Feature
 Describe Dual-Threshold Scheduling with
HSUPA Interference Cancellation Feature
 Describe Fast Dormancy Feature Description
Objectives
Feature
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe MBTS V1R4 GU 2.0MHZ Central
be able to: Frequency Spacing(U3.8MHZ) Feature
 Outline the important new features realized in Duration
RAN13 version
2 working days
 Describe DC-HSDPA+MIMO Feature
Class Size
 Describe Enhanced Uplink CELL FACH
Feature Min 6, max 12
 Describe E-DPCCH Boosting Feature
 Describe Deep Packet Inspection Feature
454
Training Path
 Describe Service-Based PS Handover from
UMTS to LTE Feature
 Describe Layered Paging in URA_PCH
Feature
OWO52 Lecture 2d
 Describe Control Channel Parallel Interference
Target Audience Cancellation Phase2 Feature
 Describe Dynamical HSDPA CQI Feedback
Period Feature
 Describe Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small
System Technicians
Target Retransmissions Feature
System Engineers
 Describe Intelligent Access Class Control
Prerequisites Feature
 Successful completion of the following  Describe Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment

program(s): Feature
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training  Describe Inter-Frequency Load Balance Based
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training on Configurable Load Threshold Feature
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training  Describe Inter-frequency Load Handover

based CE Congestion Feature
and Algorithms Training  Describe CE Overbooking Feature
Objectives  Describe Load-based Uplink Target BLER

Configuration Feature
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE
be able to: Location Feature
 Outline the important new features realized in Duration
RAN13 version
 Describe Multi Sector Solution Feature 2 working days
 Describe HSPA+ DC-HSUPA Feature Feature Class Size
 Describe Voice Service Experience Min 6, max 12

Improvement for Weak Reception UEs Feature
455
15.2.21 WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features Training
Training Path
 Describe Enhanced Fast Dormancy Feature
 Describe Deep Packet Inspection Feature
WCDMA RAN14 Smart Phone Features
 Describe P2P Rate Restriction During Busy
Hours Feature
OWO53 Lecture 1d
 Describe Web Page Access Acceleration
Target Audience Feature
 Describe Layered Paging in URA_PCH
Feature
 Describe Control Channel Parallel Interference
System Technicians
Cancellation Phase2 Feature
System Engineers
 Describe Dynamical HSDPA CQI Feedback
Prerequisites
Period Feature
 Successful completion of the following  Describe Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small
program(s): Target Retransmissions Feature
 WCDMA RAN Overview Training  Describe Intelligent Access Class Control
 WCDMA RAN Principle Training Feature
 WCDMA HSPA+ Principles Training Duration
 WCDMA RAN14 Radio Network Features 1 working day

Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
be able to:
456
15.2.22 WCDMA uBro Radio Network Planning and Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe the applications scenario of Huawei
AP products
WCDMA uBro RAN Planning  Describe the basic planning of Femto network
such as PLMN planning, LAC/RAC/SAC
OWP80 Lecture 1d
planning, frequency planning, scrambling code
planning and etc.
 Describe the camp and handover policy in
WCDMA uBro RAN Optimization Femto network
 Describe the deployment of the typical case
OWO80 Lecture 1d
 Describe interference test cases for typical
networking scenarios
Target Audience
 Describe interference mitigation methods for
uBro Optimization Engineers typical networking scenarios
uBro Technicians  Describe the basic signaling procedure in
System Technicians Femto network
System Engineers  Describe the handover procedure and related
Prerequisites parameters in Femto network
 Describe the admission control procedure and
related parameters in Femto network
Duration
course(s):
 OWA00 WCDMA RAN Overview 2 working days
 OWA01 WCDMA Air Interface Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12

be able to:
457
15.3 Product Training
15.3.1 WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training
Training Path
 Detail the functions of different subsystems and
boards of BTS3900
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Product
Description  Describe the cables connection of BTS3900
 Describe the expansion and networking of
OWB00 Lecture 1d
BTS3900
 Explain the architecture of hardware and
software components of NodeB operation and
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Operation maintenance system
and Maintenance
 Get to know how to use NodeB operation and
OWB01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
maintenance tool - LMT
 Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on NodeB
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Installation  Manage alarms and faults handling
and Commissioning
 Manage data, for example: backuping system
data, executing MML commands
 Manage equipment, for example: checking
board status and versions
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Data  Manage tracing message, for example:
Configuration
creating a tracing task, checking tracing result,
saving result
 Manage real-time monitoring, for example:
Target Audience creating a monitoring task, checking and
Field engineer saving monitoring result
System engineer  Outline the main operation and maintenance

tasks for one day, one week and one month
Site maintainer
 Install LMT software
Prerequisites
 Describe the procedure of NodeB
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications commissioning
 At least 1 year working experience in WCDMA  Check the compatibility of NodeB software
wireless network operation and maintenance version
Objectives  Load NodeB software and configuration file
 Verify local cell status
be able to:  Measure RTWP
 Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900  Monitor output power
 Detail the functions of different subsystems and  Outline the user interface of CME
boards of DBS3900  configuration tool
 Describe the typical hardware configurations of  Illustrate the data configuration procedure
DBS3900  Explain key parameters in each step during
 Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900 data configuration procedure
458
Duration
file 5 working days
 Perform initial data configuration and dynamic Class Size
modification
Min 6, max 12
459
15.3.2 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation Training
Training Path
configuration rules, and calculate the numbers
and types of boards in a typical network
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Product
Description  Explain the architecture of RAN Operation and
Maintenance system, hardware and software
OWC00 Lecture 1d
components of the system
maintenance on RNC
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Operation and  Manage BAM server, for example: checking its
Maintenance
running status and version
OWC01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Get to know how to use RNC operation and
maintenance tool - LMT
Target Audience
 Manage authorities of users
Field engineer  Manage alarms and faults handling
System engineer  Manage equipment, for example: checking
Site maintainer board status and version
Prerequisites  Manage data, for example: backuping system

 Manage Logs, for example: querying logs,
 At least 1 year working experience in WCDMA
saving logs
 Manage tracing message, for example:
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will saving result
be able to:  Manage real-time monitoring, for example:
 Describe the RNC system functions, structures creating a monitoring task, checking and
and key characteristics saving monitoring result
 Describe the functions, indicators, ports and  Outline the main operation and maintenance
working mode of each board tasks for one day, one week and one month
 Explain the types and application situations of Duration

different fibers and cables
3 working days
 Describe the signal processing flows of radio
Class Size
and terrestrial interfaces in RNC system
 Explain the typical RAN networking types and Min 6, max 12
each networking type’s characters
 Explain the RNC system hardware
460
15.3.3 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training
Training Path
 Install BAM software
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011
Installation and Commissioning  Describe the procedure of RNC
Commissioning.
 Load RNC host software and data file
 Verify RNC interfaces and services
 Integrate RNC to M2000
BSC6810 WCDMA V200R011 Data
Configuration  Describe the RNC data configuration method
OWC03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d and procedure

 Compile transport network data files, including
global data, equipment data and Iub, Iu , Iur
Target Audience
interfaces data
Field engineer  Compile the radio network data files for cells
System engineer  Explain the configuration procedure for HSDPA
Site maintainer services
Prerequisites  Generate the initial data configuration file with
LMT software or CME software
 Check the data configuration files integrity and
program(s):
validity
 BSC6900 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Operation
 Load the date configuration file to RNC
Training
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe the structure of RNC operation and Min 6, max 12
maintenance subsystem
461
15.3.4 WCDMA RAN11 RAN Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
 Describe system information broadcast
signaling procedure
Troubleshooting  Describe paging signaling procedure
 Describe call process signaling procedure
 Describe handover signaling procedure
 Describe RAN troubleshooting process
 Handling Transport Faults
NodeB WCDMA V200R011 Troubleshooting
 Handling O&M Faults
OWB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Handling Interface Faults

 Handling Service Faults
 Handling Abnormal RTWP
Target Audience
 Handling Abnormal Downlink Power
Field engineer  Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the
System engineer NodeB Through M2000
Site maintainer  Handling Failure to Install the LMT
Prerequisites  Handling Failure to Establish Cells
 Handling High Frequency Deviation (E1) of
 Successful completion of the following courses:
Clock
 WCDMA RAN11 RNC Configuration Training
 Handling Intermittent Interruption of CPRI Link
 WCDMA RAN11 NodeB Training
 Handling Sleeping Cell
Objectives
Duration
5 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Overview UTRAN Network
 Explain Basic Concepts about UTRAN Min 6, max 12
462
15.3.5 WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training
Training Path
 Describe the cables connection of BTS3900
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Product
Description BTS3900
 Explain the architecture of hardware and
OWB05 Lecture 1d
software components of NodeB operation and
maintenance system
 Get to know how to use NodeB operation and
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Operation maintenance tool - LMT
and Maintenance
maintenance on NodeB
 Manage alarms and faults handling
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Installation data, executing MML commands
and Commissioning
board status and versions
MBTS WCDMA V100R002 Data saving result
Configuration
creating a monitoring task, checking and
saving monitoring result
Target Audience  Outline the main operation and maintenance
Field engineer tasks for one day, one week and one month
System engineer  Install LMT software
Site maintainer  Describe the procedure of NodeB

commissioning
Prerequisites
 Check the compatibility of NodeB software
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications version
 At least 1 year working experience in WCDMA  Load NodeB software and configuration file
wireless network operation and maintenance  Verify local cell status
Objectives  Measure RTWP
On completion of this program, the participants will  Monitor output power
be able to:  Outline the user interface of CME
 Describe the hardware structure of DBS3900  configuration tool
 Detail the functions of different subsystems and  Illustrate the data configuration procedure
boards of DBS3900  Explain key parameters in each step during
 Describe the typical hardware configurations of data configuration procedure
DBS3900  Implement the data configuration with template
 Describe the hardware structure of BTS3900 file
 Detail the functions of different subsystems and  Perform initial data configuration and dynamic
boards of BTS3900 modification
463
Duration Class Size
464
15.3.6 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R011 Product On completion of this program, the participants will
Description be able to:
OWC05 Lecture 1d  Detail the system structure of BSC6900
 Detail the functions of the components of
BSC6900
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R011  Detail the signal flows in BSC6900

Operation and Maintenance  List the typical hardware configuration of
OWC06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d BSC6900
 Detail the structure of operation and
Target Audience maintenance subsystem
 Perform the RNC routine operation
Field engineer
 Perform the RNC routine maintenance
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
Class Size
 At least 1 year working experience in WCDMA Min 6, max 12
465
15.3.7 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration Training
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R011 On completion of this program, the participants will

Installation and Commissioning be able to:
OWC07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe BSC6900 commissioning procedure
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R011 Data  Complete BSC6900 application software
Configuration installation
OWC08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d  Detail the Procedure of BSC6900 Data
Configuration
 Perform Global Data Configuration
Target Audience  Perform Equipment Data Configuration
 Perform Interface Configuration
Field engineer
 Perform Cell Configuration
System engineer
 Outline RNC data configuration procedure
Site maintainer
based on CME and LMT
Prerequisites
 Complete RNC data configuration based on
 Successful completion of the following CME and LMT
 BSC6900 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Operation
7 working days
Training
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
466
15.3.8 WCDMA RAN11.1 Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

OWC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Describe RAN troubleshooting process
 Handling Transmission Faults
 Handling Equipments Faults
MBTS3900 WCDMA V100R002  Handling O&M Faults
Troubleshooting  Handling Basic Service Faults
OWB10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Handling NodeB Abnormal RTWP
Target Audience  Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the
NodeB Through M2000
Field engineer
 Handling Failure to Establish Cells
System engineer
 Handling Intermittent Interruption of CPRI Link
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration
Class Size
Training
 WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training Min 6, max 12
467
15.3.9 WCDMA RAN11.1 RAN Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
 Describe the procedure of expanding the
RNC capacity
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R11 RNC
Expanding  Perform how to add an RNC board
 Perform how to add an EPS

 Upon completion of this course, you will be
WCDMA RAN11.1 Dynamic Data able to:
Reconfiguration
 Perform how to Increase Frequencies on the
UMTS Network
 Perform how to Reconfigure the Parameters of
Physical NodeBs
BTS3900 WCDMA V100R002 NodeB
Migration Data Reconfiguration  Perform how to Reconfigure the Data of Cells
OWB09 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d and Neighboring Cells in Batches
 Perform how to Reconfigure Cell Algorithm
Parameters
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R011 RNC  Describe the procedure of the RNC migration
Migration Data Reconfiguration
data reconfiguration
OWC11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d
 Perform the RNC migration data
reconfiguration
Target Audience
Field engineer able to:
System engineer  Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration data
Site maintainer reconfiguration
Prerequisites  Detail the procedure of NodeB migration data
reconfiguration
 Perform the NodeB migration data
 WCDMA RAN11.1 RNC Configuration
reconfiguration
Training
Duration
 WCDMA RAN11.1 NodeB Training
Class Size
468
Training Path
3900 Series WCDMA NodeB
V200R012 Product Description Objectives
OWB11 Lecture 1d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe the hardware structure and
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R012 application scenario of NodeB

Operation and Maintenance  Detail the functions of different subsystems and
OWB12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d boards of NodeB
 Describe the cables connection of NodeB

Installation and Commissioning  Describe the structure of operation and
OWB13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d maintenance system
 Detail routine operation of NodeB
 Detail routine maintenance of NodeB
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R012 Data  Detail the scenarios of NodeB commissioning

Configuration  Perform NodeB Remote commissioning
OWB14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform NodeB Local commissioning
 Outline NodeB data configuration procedure
Target Audience based on CME
 Complete NodeB data configuration
Field engineer
Duration
System engineer
Site maintainer 5 working days
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications Min 6, max 12
469
Training Path
Objectives
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R012 Product On completion of this program, the participants will
Description be able to:
OWC13 Lecture 1d  Detail the system structure of BSC6900
BSC6900
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R012  Detail the signal flows in BSC6900

Operation and Maintenance  List the typical hardware configuration of
OWC14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d BSC6900
Target Audience maintenance subsystem
 Perform the RNC routine operation
Field engineer
 Perform the RNC routine maintenance
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
Class Size
470
Training Path
be able to:
Installation and Commissioning  Outline OMU software functions
OWC15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Complete BSC6900 commissioning

installation
 Detail the Procedure of BSC6900 Data
Configuration Configuration
OWC16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d  Perform Global Data Configuration

 Perform Equipment Data Configuration
Target Audience
Field engineer
System engineer based on CME and LMT
Site maintainer  Complete RNC data configuration based on
Prerequisites CME and LMT
Duration
 BSC6900 WCDMA RAN12 RNC Operation Class Size
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
471
15.3.13 WCDMA RAN12 Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

BTS3900 WCDMA V200R012  Handling O&M Faults
 Handling Hardware Faults
Target Audience  Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the
NodeB Through M2000
Field engineer
System engineer
Site maintainer
 Handling OMCH Fault
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
472
15.3.14 WCDMA RAN12 RAN Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
RNC capacity
able to:
WCDMA RAN12 Dynamic Data  Perform how to Increase Frequencies on the
Reconfiguration
UMTS Network
Physical NodeBs
 Perform how to Reconfigure the Data of Cells
Migration Data Reconfiguration and Neighboring Cells in Batches
OWB16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d  Perform how to Reconfigure Cell Algorithm
Parameters
 Describe the procedure of the RNC migration
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R012 RNC data reconfiguration
reconfiguration
Target Audience
able to:
Field engineer  Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration data
System engineer reconfiguration
Site maintainer  Detail the procedure of NodeB migration data
Prerequisites reconfiguration
reconfiguration
Duration
Class Size
473
15.3.15 WCDMA RAN11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives

WCDMA R11.0-RAN12.0 Product Delta be able to:
OWC21 Lecture 1d  Describe New hardware
 Describe some important new features
 Describe some new O&M functions
Target Audience
 Understand the values and benefit of the
Field engineer features
System engineer Duration
Site maintainer
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
474
15.3.16 WCDMA uBro2.0 Network Operation Training
Training Path
 Perform the IPCLK1000 routine operation and
maintenance, commissioning and data
WCDMA uBro2.0 RAN Operation configuration.
Maintenance
 Introduce the AHR basic functions and
OWF00 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 5d
interfaces.
Target Audience  Describe the AHR network architecture.
 Describe the AHR hardware structure and
Field engineer
typical configuration.
System engineer
 Describe the AHR software structure and
Site maintainer
functions.
Prerequisites
 Describe the AHR client routine operation and
 Basic knowledge of UMTS network principle maintenance functions.
Objectives  Introduce the APM basic functions and

interfaces.
 Describe the APM network architecture.
be able to:
 Describe the APM hardware structure and
 Describe interface and network architecture for
WCDMA system uBro solution.
 Describe the APM software structure and
 Describe the basic principles for WCDMA
functions.
system.
 Perform the APM routine operation and
 Introduce the network architecture and
maintenance on AP with client.
structure of uBro solution.
 Introduce M2000 basic functions.
 Describe the AP basic functions and interfaces.
 Describe the M2000 system architecture and
 Describe the types of AP and hardware
functions.
structure.
 Introduce the M2000 network for uBro solution.
 Describe the accessing way and procedure of
 Perform M2000 routine operation and
AP.
 Perform the AP commissioning and data
Duration
configuration.
 Introduce the IPCLK1000 working principle and 5 working days
features. Class Size
 Describe the IPCLK1000 network structure.
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the IPCLK1000 hardware structure.
475
Training Path
Objectives
3900 Series WCDMA NodeB On completion of this program, the participants will
V200R013 Product Description be able to:
OMB17 Lecture 1d  Describe the hardware structure of 3900 series
NodeB
 Detail the functions of different subsystems and
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R013
Operation and Maintenance boards of NodeB
OMB18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the cables connection of NodeB

NodeB
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R013  Describe the structure of operation and
maintenance system

Configuration  Perform NodeB Remote commissioning
OWB20 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Perform NodeB Local commissioning
 Outline MBTS data configuration procedure
Target Audience
based on CME
Field engineer  Complete MBTS data configuration
System engineer Duration

Site maintainer
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
476
Training Path
 Set the alarm collection template,and collect
the alarm by the template.
Description  Set the KPI collection template,and collect the
KPI by the template.
OWC22 Lecture 1d
 Collect the counters of board and link load by
m2000, check the RNC load according to the
specific threshold.
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R013  Collect the counters of SPU subsystem by
m2000
 check the SPU subsystem performance.
 master the transmission detection methods and
Target Audience
their operation
Field engineer  detect the transmission performance and
System engineer connectivity by the transimission methods.
Site maintainer  master the signaling tracing operation, collect
Prerequisites the interface and link signaling message.
 master the procedure of handling the TOPN
alarms
 handle the common alarms according to the
procedures.
Objectives
 master the procedure of Backing Up and
On completion of this program, the participants will Restoring Data
be able to:  perform the restoration of data correctly when
 Detail the system structure of BSC6900 OMU board is damaged, OMU database
 Detail the functions of the components of collapses, or the OMU upgrade fails.
BSC6900 Duration
 Detail the signal flows in BSC6900 4 working days

 List the typical hardware configuration of Class Size
BSC6900
 master board replacement procedure Min 6, max 12
 replace the faulty board correctly and ensure

RNC work normally.
477
Training Path
be able to:

installation

Target Audience
Field engineer
Duration
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
478
15.3.20 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
RNC capacity
able to:
WCDMA RAN13 Dynamic Data  Perform how to Increase Frequencies on the
Reconfiguration
UMTS Network
Physical NodeBs
Migration Data Reconfiguration and Neighboring Cells in Batches
OWB29 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d  Perform how to Reconfigure Cell Algorithm
Parameters
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R013 RNC data reconfiguration
reconfiguration
able to:
Target Audience
 Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration data
Field engineer reconfiguration
System engineer  Detail the procedure of NodeB migration data
Site maintainer reconfiguration
Prerequisites  Perform the NodeB migration data
reconfiguration
Duration
 WCDMA RAN13 NodeB Training 5 working days

be able to:
479
15.3.21 WCDMA RAN13 RAN Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

BTS3900 WCDMA V200R0013  Handling O&M Faults
Target Audience  Handling Hardware Faults
 Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the
Field engineer
NodeB Through M2000
System engineer
Site maintainer
Prerequisites
 Handling OMCH Fault
 Successful completion of the following courses: Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
480
Training Path
Objectives

WCDMA R12.0-RAN13.0 Product Delta be able to:
OWC30 Lecture 1d  Describe New hardware
Target Audience
Field engineer  Understand the values and benefit of the
System engineer features
Site maintainer Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 Successful completion of the following courses: Class Size
Min 6, max 12
481
15.3.23 WCDMA uBro3.0 Network Operation Training
Training Path
 Perform the IPCLK1000 routine operation and
maintenance, commissioning and data
WCDMA uBro3.0 RAN Operation configuration.
Maintenance
 Introduce the AHR basic functions and
OWF01 Lecture, Hand-on exercise 5d
interfaces.
Target Audience  Describe the AHR network architecture.
 Describe the AHR hardware structure and
Field engineer
System engineer
 Describe the AHR software structure and
Site maintainer
functions.
Prerequisites
 Describe the AHR client routine operation and
 Basic knowledge of UMTS network principle maintenance functions.
Objectives  Introduce the APM basic functions and

interfaces.
 Describe the APM network architecture.
be able to:
 Describe the APM hardware structure and
 Describe interface and network architecture for
WCDMA system uBro solution.
 Describe the APM software structure and
 Describe the basic principles for WCDMA
functions.
system.
 Perform the APM routine operation and
 Introduce the network architecture and
structure of uBro solution.
 Introduce M2000 basic functions.
 Describe the AP basic functions and interfaces.
 Describe the M2000 system architecture and
 Describe the types of AP and hardware
functions.
structure.
 Introduce the M2000 network for uBro solution.
 Describe the accessing way and procedure of
 Perform M2000 routine operation and
AP.
 Perform the AP commissioning and data
Duration
configuration.
 Introduce the IPCLK1000 working principle and 5 working days
features. Class Size
 Describe the IPCLK1000 network structure.
Min 6, max 12
 Describe the IPCLK1000 hardware structure.
482
15.3.24 WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training
Training Path
Objectives
3900 Series WCDMA NodeB
V200R014 Product Description On completion of this program, the participants will
OMB23 Lecture 1d be able to:
 Describe the hardware structure of 3900 series
NodeB
Operation and Maintenance  Detail the functions of different subsystems and
boards of NodeB
 Describe the cables connection of NodeB
Installation and Commissioning  Describe the structure of operation and
OWB25 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d maintenance system
Configuration
 Perform NodeB Remote commissioning
 Perform NodeB Local commissioning
Target Audience  Outline NodeB data configuration procedure
based on CME
Field engineer
 Complete NodeB data configuration
System engineer
Duration
Site maintainer
Class Size
483
15.3.25 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation Training
Training Path
 Set the alarm collection template,and collect
the alarm by the template.
Description  Set the KPI collection template,and collect the
KPI by the template.
OWC31 Lecture 1d
 Collect the counters of board and link load by
m2000, check the RNC load according to the
specific threshold.
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R014  Collect the counters of SPU subsystem by
m2000
 check the SPU subsystem performance.
 master the transmission detection methods and
Target Audience
their operation
Field engineer  detect the transmission performance and
System engineer connectivity by the transimission methods.
Site maintainer  master the signaling tracing operation, collect
Prerequisites the interface and link signaling message.
 master the procedure of handling the TOPN
alarms
 handle the common alarms according to the
procedures.
Objectives
 master the procedure of Backing Up and
On completion of this program, the participants will Restoring Data
be able to:  perform the restoration of data correctly when
 Detail the system structure of BSC6900 OMU board is damaged, OMU database
 Detail the functions of the components of collapses, or the OMU upgrade fails.
BSC6900 Duration
 Detail the signal flows in BSC6900 4 working days

 List the typical hardware configuration of Class Size
BSC6900
 master board replacement procedure Min 6, max 12
 replace the faulty board correctly and ensure

RNC work normally.
484
15.3.26 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Configuration Training
Training Path
be able to:

installation

Target Audience
Field engineer
Duration
Training
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
485
15.3.27 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
RNC capacity
able to:
BTS900 WCDMA V200R14 RNC  Perform how to Increase Frequencies on the

Expanding UMTS Network
OWC28 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.3 d  Perform how to Reconfigure the Parameters of
Physical NodeBs
WCDMA RAN14 Dynamic Data and Neighboring Cells in Batches
Reconfiguration
Parameters
BTS3900 WCDMA V200R014 NodeB data reconfiguration
Migration Data Reconfiguration  Perform the RNC migration data
OWB30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d reconfiguration
 Perform how to add WBBP Board
 Perform how to add RF Unit
Migration Data Reconfiguration  Upon completion of this course, you will be
OWC38 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d able to:

 Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration data
Target Audience reconfiguration
 Detail the procedure of NodeB migration data
Field engineer
reconfiguration
System engineer
Site maintainer
reconfiguration
Prerequisites
Duration
5 working days
Class Size

be able to:
486
15.3.28 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe RAN troubleshooting process
Troubleshooting  Handling Transmission Faults
OWC39 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Handling Equipments Faults

 Handling O&M Faults
 Handling Basic Service Faults
 Handling NodeB Abnormal RTWP
MBTS WCDMA V200R0014
Troubleshooting  Handling Abnormal Downlink Power
OWB29 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Handling Failure to Deliver the License of the
NodeB Through M2000
 Handling Failure to Install the NodeB LMT
Target Audience
 Handling High Frequency Deviation (E1) of
Field engineer Clock
System engineer  Handling Intermittent Interruption of CPRI Link
Site maintainer  Handling Sleeping Cell
 Successful completion of the following courses: 5 working days

 WCDMA RAN13 RNC Configuration Training Class Size
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
487
Training Path
Prerequisites
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Delta for  Successful completion of the following courses:

Hardware  WCDMA RAN13 RNC Configuration Training
OWC41 Lecture 0.3 d  WCDMA RAN13 NodeB Training
Objectives
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 for O&M On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
OWC42 Lecture 0.3 d
 Describe New hardware and the functions
WCDMA RAN13.0-RAN14.0 Delta for
New Feature  Understand the values and benefit of the
OWC43 Lecture 0.9 d features
Duration
Target Audience
1.5 working days
Field engineer Class Size
System engineer
Min 6, max 12
Site maintainer
488
15.3.30 WCDMA RAN14.0 RAN Upgrade Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
Upgrading  Describe the upgrade procedure
 Describe the preparations before upgrade
 Perform how to upgrade the RNC
BSC6900 WCDMA V900R014 RNC  Describe the verification operations after
Upgrading
upgrade.
 Describe how to roll the version back to the one
Target Audience before upgrade.
 Describe the upgrade procedure
Field engineer
 Describe the upgrade of NodeB
System engineer
 Describe the verification operations after
Site maintainer
upgrade.
Prerequisites
 Successful completion of the following before upgrade
 BSC6900 WCDMA RAN14.0 RNC Operation
2 working days
Training
Class Size
 WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training
Min 6, max 12
489
15.3.31 WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency On completion of this program, the participants will

Maintenance be able to:
OWC40 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe Brief Guide to Emergent Accidents
Target Audience  implement Emergency Measures in
Emergency Situations
Field engineer
 Describe Preparations and the Suggestions on
System engineer
the Parameter Value Change Before a Holiday
Site maintainer
 implement Emergency Measures in Heavy
Prerequisites
Traffic Situations
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
490
15.3.32 WCDMA IPRAN Application Training
Training Path
 Learn about common IP RAN concepts such as
the MSTP and PTN
 Understand the TCP/IP protocol structure, and
Wireless IP Basic Principle
learn common technologies such as the VLAN
YI00 Lecture 1d and DSCP
 Learn the protocol stack composition on IP
RAN interfaces
WCDMA IPRAN Networking
Introduction  Learn the IP components, and understand the
WI00 Lecture 0.5d data exchange process
 Be familiar with common IP RAN devices and
maintenance applications
WCDMA IPRAN Networking and  Learn about differences among the IP, ATM,
Planning
Lecture 1d and TDM technologies, and problems caused
WI01
by IP-based networking
 Learn about the evolution of IP RANs
WCDMA IPRAN Feature  Understand IP RAN concepts and advantages
Application
 Understand changes in IP RAN networking
WI02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Learn about feature requirements for IP RAN
networking
WCDMA IPRAN Monitoring and
 Learn the detail of IP RAN MSTP networking
Maintenance
Solution
WI03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Learn the detail of IP RAN PTN networking
Solution
WCDMA IPRAN Troubleshooting  Understand differences between the layer 2
networking and layer 3 networking
WI04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Learn about the basic IP RAN resource
planning.
Target Audience
 Learn principles of IP address allocation and
Field engineer internal limitation of the RAN equipment.
System engineer  Plan and configure the IP addresses for
Site maintainer interface boards.
Prerequisites  Learn principles of planning VLAN and how to
process VLAN tags.
 Understand data transmission between the
protocol layer and the RAN equipment.
 Understand the IP RAN reliability-ensuring
Objectives
implementation mechanism
On completion of this program, the participants will  Understand the principles and application of
be able to: the reliability detection mechanism
 Learn about IP protocol release specifications  Know how to configure IP RAN
and common RFC standards reliability-ensuring parameters
491
 Learn about the differences in reliability due to introduction of the IP radio access
guarantee in different networking scenarios network (RAN)
 Master the application schemes of the  Learn the active monitoring scheme and
reliability-ensuring mechanism in different implementation process for the IP RAN
scenarios transmission
 Learn the concept of IP Quality of Service  Learn detailed parameter configuration for IP
(QoS) RAN fault detect
 Learn about radio services' QoS requirements  Monitor IP RAN transmission links, analyze and
for IP RANs locate the faults
 Understand the QoS implementation at each  Understand theories for IP active detection
layer from the perspective of transmission  Learn procedures for detecting IP faults
protocols  Learn methods for locating IP faults
 Learn the QoS configuration and application in  Learn about packet capturing tool for IP RANs
IP RANs  Understand the IP transmission processing
 Describe the procedures of implementing QoS  Understand typical IP transmission
in IP RAN end to end (E2E) services troubleshooting cases
 Describe the requirements of the IP RAN for  Understand fault isolation in case of
clock synchronization emergencies in IP transmission mode
 Know the differences between clock  Understand how to analyze typical IP
synchronization and phase synchronization transmission troubleshooting cases
 Learn about the typical IP RAN clock solution Duration
 Describe the architecture of an IP RAN clock
network 5 working days
 Learn about the differences between IP RAN Class Size
clock networking applications Min 6, max 12

 Understand changes in maintenance modes
492
16 CDMA Training Path
16.1 CDMA Training Path
cdma2000 1X Radio Network cdma2000 1X Radio Network

Design and Planning Training Optimization Training
5D 7D
Network Deployment Engineer Optimization Engineer

&
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio

Network Design and Planning Network Optimization Training
Training 4D 4D
Network Deployment Engineer Optimization Engineer
cdma2000 1X Radio Network

5D
Optimization Engineer
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900

Installation and Testing Training Field O&M Training
5D 5D
For Field/1st line Engineer

For Field/1st line Engineer
CDMA BSS Data Configuration CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System

Training Commissioning
5D 2D
For NMC/2nd line Engineer
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900
Advanced Training
5D
For Target Audience
Training Upgrade Path

cdma2000 1X/1xEV-DO Radio Access Network Training
493
17 CDMA Training Courses
CDMA Product Technology Training Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
CDMA Training Courses
CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training Ⅲ 7 6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning

Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training Ⅳ 4 6 ~ 12
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
494
17.1 CDMA Training
17.1.1 CDMA BTS/DBS3900 Installation and Testing Training
Training Path
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking
 List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology
BTS/DBS3900 CDMA Installation and Testing  Describe Structure of the BTS3900
 Describe Modules Functions
ORB01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Describe Application Scenario
Target Audience  Describe Antenna

 Describe Key Technologies
BTS Field Technicians, First Line Operation and
 Complete Antenna Installation
 Complete Measuring VSWR
Prerequisites
 Complete Locating Antenna-Feeder Fault
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe Precautions and FAQ
Objectives  Complete Operation of Analog PowerMeter
 Complete Operation of Digital PowerMeter
 Complete BTS Data Configuration
be able to:
 Complete BTS Commissioning
 Describe various wireless communication
 Describe Operation & Maintenance System
protocol and evolution of cdma2000
 Complete Routine Operation & Maintenance
 Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh
code application
 Describe the reverse and forward Radio Duration
Configurations and their correspondence 5 working days

 Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and Class Size
softer handoffs
Min 6，max 12
 List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO
Rev.A
 List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
495
17.1.2 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 List Basic Concept of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A networking
cdma2000 1X & EV-DO Rev.A System
 List 1xEV-DO Rev.A new technology
Overview
 Outline BSC6680 features
ORA02 Lecture 1d
 Describe the structure of BSC6680
 Describe the functions of all boards
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Product  Know the signaling flow in BSC6680
Description  Describe BSC6680 typical configurations
ORC02 Lecture 2d  Describe types of 3900 series BTS
 Outline functions of modules
 Find typical application scenarios
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Operation
and Maintenance  Describe Antenna Functions
ORC05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe Antenna Technologies

 Describe Antenna Installation
Target Audience  Know about the basic knowledge about
ATM&IP
 Outline the structure of operation and
maintenance system
Prerequisites
 Describe IP address in CBSS
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Describe the networking of the O&M system
Objectives  Describe the software structure of BSS
 List the file structure of BSC6680 BAM
 Perform LMT main operation
be able to:
 Describe the routine maintenance tasks
 Describe various wireless communication
protocol and evolution of cdma2000  Fulfill BSC6680 routine maintenance tasks
 Describe Long code, Short code and Walsh  Outline the O&M system of BTS3900
code application  Manage the routine maintenance operation of
 Describe the reverse and forward Radio BTS3900
Configurations and their correspondence Duration
 Describe Rake receiver, power control, soft and 5 working days

softer handoffs
Class Size
 List feature and specifications of 1xEV-DO
Rev.A Min 6，max 12
496
17.1.3 CDMA BSS6.0 Data Configuration Training
Training Path
configuration
 Make the initial configuration script of BSC6680
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Data  Implement the data loading and checking of
Configuration BSC6680
ORC06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the principle and process of BTS data
configuration
 Complete BTS data configuration and
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Troubleshooting
commissioning
ORC08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  List the basic process of BSC6680

troubleshooting
Target Audience  Describe the treatment of typical emergency

fault
BSS Field Technicians, Second Line Operation
 Outline the procedure of the emergency
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
maintenance
Prerequisites
 Understand the processing of troubleshooting
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Handle the common faults and troubles of
 Successful completion of the following CDMA BSS
program(s):
 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Field Operation Duration
5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
be able to:
 Describe the procedure of BSC6680
497
Training Path
configuration
 Make the initial configuration script of BSC6680
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS7.0 Data  Implement the data loading and checking of
Configuration BSC6680
ORC07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the principle and process of BTS data
configuration
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA Troubleshooting
commissioning
ORC08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  List the basic process of BSC6680

troubleshooting
Target Audience  Describe the treatment of typical emergency

fault
maintenance
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Handle the common faults and troubles of
 Successful completion of the following CDMA BSS
 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Field Operation

5 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6，max 12
be able to:
498
Training Path
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS8.0 configuration
Troubleshooting  Make the initial configuration script of BSC6680

 Implement the data loading and checking of
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS8.0 Data BSC6680
Configuration  Describe the principle and process of BTS data
ORC13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d configuration
commissioning
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS8.0
Troubleshooting  List the basic process of BSC6680
ORC12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d troubleshooting

 Describe the treatment of typical emergency
Target Audience fault

maintenance
Prerequisites
 Handle the common faults and troubles of
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications CDMA BSS
 Successful completion of the following Duration

program(s):
5 working days
 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3901 Field Operation
Class Size
Objectives Min 6，max 12

be able to:
499
17.1.6 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training
Training Path
Objectives

CDMA-LTE System Overview
be able to:
 Describe LTE development and features
ORA04 Lecture 0.5d
 Outline LTE network architecture
 Explain LTE key technologies
CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Advanced Training  Describe LTE protocol and channel
 Describe LTE deployment
ORC09 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4.5d
 Describe CDMA-LTE solution
 Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 CDMA
Target Audience
Expansion
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,  Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 Interface
System Engineers Reconstruction
Prerequisites  Master BSC6680 and BTS3900 Software
Upgrade
 At least 2 years working experience in CDMA
 Understand CDMA EV-DO Troubleshooting
 Understand CDMA interface Troubleshooting
Duration
 CDMA BSC6680&BTS3900 Field Operation Class Size
Min 6，max 12
500
17.1.7 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
 Describe BSC6680 Hardware Function
 Describe BSC6680 Typical Configuration
cdma2000 1X System Principle  List the typical type of 3900 series BTS
 Describe the system structure of 3900 series
ORA01 Lecture 1d BTS
 State the function of each module
 Outline application scenarios
BSC6680&BTS3900 CDMA BSS6.0 Product
Overview  Master the basic knowledge of Radio
ORC01 Lecture 1d Propagation
 Describe some typical Propagation Models and
their applicability
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and
 Comprehend the key parameters and
Planning
calculation methods of Link Budget
ORP02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Know about the basic principle of Site, Antenna
& Feeder Selection
Target Audience  Understand interference analysis method
Network Deployment Engineers, System  Describe the relative factors for capacity
Technicians, System Engineers  Implement the capacity planning
Prerequisites  List Paging Channel Construction

 Describe LAC Planning
 Implement Paging Optimization
 At least 1 year working experience in CDMA
 Describe the basic method for PN offset
planning in the CDMA network
Objectives
 Outline the basic principle for Neighbor
On completion of this program, the participants will planning in the CDMA network
be able to:  Describe the precautions when planning the
 Describe the development of mobile system PN and the Neighbor cells
 List the structure of cdma2000 1X network Duration
 State the signal process flow of cdma2000 1X
5 working days
 State the key technology of cdma2000 1X
Class Size
 Describe the air interface of cdma2000 1X
 Describe the numbers in cdma2000 1X Min 6，max 12
 Describe BSC6680 System Architecture
501
17.1.8 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 State the significance of power control in
CDMA
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization  Analyze reverse power control algorithm
 Analyze forward power control algorithm
ORO01 Lecture 7d  Optimize power control parameter
 Describe function and classification
Target Audience
 Explain some conception related with handoff
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,  Apply different handoff algorithm
System Engineers  Optimize handoff parameters
Prerequisites  Describe Registration Process
 Describe Voice Call Flow
 Describe Handoff Flow
 Describe Data Call Flow
 Describe Huawei performance system
program(s):
structure
 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and
 Know the meaning of performance indexes
Planning Training
 Analyze abnormal performance indexes
Objectives
 Describe process of network optimization
On completion of this program, the participants will  Solve typical problems of network
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the function of the cdma2000 1X
configuration message 7 working days
 Explain the important elements of the Class Size

cdma2000 1X configuration message
Min 6，max 12
 Modify the parameters of configuration
message
502
17.1.9 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives

cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A System Principle
be able to:
 List basic conceptions of 1xEV-DO Rev.A
ORA03 Lecture 1d
 Outline 1xEV-DO Rev.A Air interface
 Describe 1xEV-DO Rev.A key technologies
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network  Coverage Planning Process
Design and Planning  Link Budget and Propagation Model
ORP03 Lectureworkshop 3d
 Balance between Forward and Reverse Link
 Describe capacity planning procedure
Target Audience
 Describe the principle of capacity planning
Network Deployment Engineers, System  Outline feature of 1X EV_DO capacity planning
Technicians, System Engineers  Describe Subnet Capacity
Prerequisites  Complete Subnet and Color Code Planning
 At least 1 year working experience in CDMA Duration

4 working days
Class Size
program(s):
 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and Min 6，max 12
Planning Training
503
17.1.10 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 Explain the important elements of 1xEV-DO
Rev.A configuration message
cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network  Modify the parameters of configuration
Optimization message
ORO03 Lectureworkshop 4d  Describe the significance of power control in
CDMA
Target Audience  List reverse power control algorithm
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,  List power control data configuration
System Engineers  List the handoff algorithm command
Prerequisites  Apply different handoff algorithms

 Optimize 1xEV-DO Rev.A handoff parameters
 Describe signaling procedure of EVDO
networking
 Outline key and messages and parameters
program(s):
 Describe rules and methods of EV-DO
 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Design and
Performance analysis
Planning Training
 Understand meaning, statistic and optimization
 cdma2000 1xEV-DO Rev.A Radio Network
of KPI
Duration
Objectives
4 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe the function of 1xEV-DO Rev.A Min 6，max 12
configuration message
504
17.1.11 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Optimization Training
Training Path
 Complete Main RRM Tasks
 Describe Main RRM Algorithms
cdma2000 1X Radio Network  Describe Traffic Balance
Optimization
 Describe Idle State Standby Policy
 Describe Access State Assignment Policy
 Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
cdma2000 1X Radio Network Topics Handoff Policy
Optimization  Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances
RO02 Lecturework 5d  Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy

 Describe Traffic Balance
Target Audience  Describe Idle State Standby Policy

 DescribeAccess State Assignment Policy
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,
 Describe Service State Inter-frequency Hard
System Engineers
Handoff Policy
Prerequisites
 Describe Multi-carrier Networking Instances
 At least 1 year working experience in CDMA  Describe Multi-carrier Optimization Policy
wireless network operation and maintenance  Describe Call Drop Mechanism and Statistic
 Successful completion of the following Analysis
program(s):  Describe Analysis and Solutions for Common
 cdma2000 1X Radio Network Optimization Types of Call Drop
Training  Describe Network Access Protocols
Objectives  Describe Cause Analysis of Network Access
Failures
 Describe Analysis of and Solutions to a
be able to:
Common Network Access Failure
 Describe Search Windows
Duration
 Complete Neighboring Cell Configuration and
Optimization 5 working days
 Complete Soft Handoff Optimization Class Size
 Complete Hard Handoff Optimization
Min 6，max 12
 Complete Coverage Optimization
 Describe Capacity Expansion
505
17.1.12 CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Commissioning
Training Path
 Difference between EV-DO Rev.B and EV-DO
Rev.A
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System Principle  New Feature of EV-DO Rev.B

 Key Technology of EV-DO Rev.B
ORA04 Lecture 1d  Describe the evolution of EV-DO version
 Describe the difference of EV-DO Rev.B and
Rev.A
CDMA EV-DO Rev.B System
Commissioning  Describe the feature of EV-DO Rev.B system
ORC10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the key technology of EV-DO Rev.B
system
Target Audience  Describe the structure and principle of EV-DO
Rev.B system
Optimization Engineers, System Technicians,
 Describe the data configuration procedure of
System Engineers
EV-DO Rev.B feature
Prerequisites
 Complete the data configuration of EV-DO
 At least 1 year working experience in CDMA Rev.B
 Successful completion of the following Duration
program(s):
2 working days
 CDMA BSS7.0 Product Training
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6，Max 12
be able to:
 EV-DO Evalution
506
18 LTE Training Path
LTE Essentials Training

Business Aspects
1D
LTE Network Design and
LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training

Dimensioning Training Network Design
2D
2D
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS

Training LTE eRAN3.0 Performance
Improving Features and
3D Algorithms Training
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and
Algorithms Training 2D
LTE Interoperability Training
1D
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and
3D
Algorithms Training
LTE Air Interface Training

LTE Protocols and Procedures LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and 0.5D
Training Algorithms Training
3D 2D 3.5D LTE Radio Network Optimize Optimization

Training
& Performance Management
2D
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific
LTE Performance Management
0.5D Training
1D
LTE Tuning Training
1D
TCP/IP in the Mobile World LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission

Training Features and Algorithms Training Operation,
2D 1D Configuration,
Troubleshooting
LTE eRAN3.0 Operation & LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting
LTE System Overview Training
Configuration Training Training Training & Tuning
1D 3D 1D 1D
LTE eRAN3.0 Field Maintenance

Training
Field Maintenance
2D
507
19 LTE Training Courses
LTE Product Technical Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Principle Training Courses
LTE System Overview Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE Air Interface Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
LTE Protocols and Procedures Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
LTE Interoperability Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
LTE Essentials Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Product Training Courses
LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training Ⅱ 3.5 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
RNP&RNO Training Courses
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 3.5 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 0.5 6 ~ 12
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training Ⅲ 0.5 6 ~ 12
LTE Tuning Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
508
LTE Performance Management Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
LTE Radio Network Optimize Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
509
19.1 Principle Training
19.1.1 LTE System Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe the S1, X2 and radio-interface and
their protocol stacks
 Describe the radio interface techniques used in
LTE System Overview
uplink and downlink
OEA03 Lecture 1d  Describe the channel structure of the radio
interface
Target Audience  Describe the time-domain structure in the radio
interface in UL and DL for both FDD and TDD
Field Technician
mode
Service Technician
 Describe the Frequency-domain structure in
System Technician
the radio interface in UL and DL for both FDD
Network Deployment Engineer and TDD mode
Service Engineer  Have a good understanding of the OFDM
Service Design Engineer principle, signal generation and processing
Service Planning Engineer  Detail the reference symbols in DL
System Engineer  Describe MIMO technology
Prerequisites  Outline MBMS for LTE
 A general knowledge in cellular systems and  Have a good understanding of the SC-FDMA
radio technology principle, signal generation and processing
Objectives  Describe Huawei eNodeB Family

 Describe Huawei LTE products and application
On completion of this program, the participants will scenarios
be able to:
 Describe Huawei LTE products Operation and
 Describe the evolution of cellular networks Maintenance System
 Summarize the evolution of 3GPP releases, Duration
from release 99 to release 10
 Explain the logical architecture of EPS 1 working day
(E-UTRAN and EPC) Class Size
 Give an overview of the interfaces in EPS Min 6，max 12

 Describe the Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
 Describe the role of the MME and the S-GW
510
19.1.2 LTE Air Interface Training
Training Path
 Detail the downlink transmission technique
 Have a good understanding of the OFDM
principle, signal generation and processing
LTE Air Interface
 Detail the reference symbols in DL
OEA04 Lecture 3d  Detail the DL control signaling and formats
 Detail the paging procedures
Target Audience  Explain HARQ
 Explain the cell search procedure
Service Engineer
 Detail the uplink transmission technique
Service Design Engineer
 Have a good understanding of the SC-FDMA
Network Design Engineer
principle, signal generation and processing
Prerequisites
 Explain the pros and cons with OFDM and
 Attendees should have a general knowledge in SC-FDMA
cellular systems and radio technology. An  Detail the UL control signaling and formats
in-depth knowledge in WCDMA, HSPA and/or  Detail the random access procedure
GSM radio interface is profitable
 Describe the Power Control in UL
Objectives
 Describe the concepts of layers, channel rank,
On completion of this program, the participants will spatial multiplexing, open and closed loop
be able to: spatial multiplexing, TX diversity, beamforming,
 Describe the evolution of cellular networks SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO
 Summarize the evolution of 3GPP releases,  Describe UL and DL Scheduling principles and
from release 99 to release 10 signaling
 Describe the radio interface techniques  Explain the scheduler interactions with other
functions
 Explain the difference between the FDD and
TDD mode  Explain the concepts of dynamic and
semi-persistent scheduling
 Describe the flexible spectrum usage
 Describe intra-RAT mobility in
 Outline the concepts of channel coding and
ECM-CONNECTED and ECM-IDLE mode
FEC (Forward Error Correction)
 Explain the concept of event triggered
 Describe the principle for OFDM
periodical reporting
 Detail the channel structure of the radio
 Describe the mobility measurements
interface
Duration
 Describe the physical signals in UL and DL
 Detail the radio interface protocols 3 working days
 Detail the time-domain structure in the radio Class Size
interface in UL and DL for both FDD and TDD
Min 6，max 12
mode
511
19.1.3 LTE Protocols and Procedures Training
Training Path
 List the different attributes of the eUTRA Radio
Bearer and explain how they are used
LTE Air Interface  Explain the interaction between RRC and the
lower layers in the control plane
OEA04 Lecture 3d
00 Prerequisites  Explain the RRC layer structure
 Explain the RRC Service States and the
difference between connected and idle mode
LTE Protocols and Procedures
 Explain the functions and services of RRC such
OEA05 Lecture 2d as System Information Broadcast, Paging, Cell
Selection and Mobility
Target Audience  Explain the PDCP functions and services such
as header compression and ciphering
Service Engineer
 Explain the RLC functions.
 List the different modes of RLC (transparent,
unacknowledged and acknowledged mode)
Prerequisites
and explain the structure of the PDU involved
 The participants should be familiar with radio in these cases.
interface solution for LTE or successful  Explain the MAC functions such scheduling,
completion of the following course: HARQ
 LTE Air Interface  Explain the MAC architecture, its entities and
Objectives their usage for the mapping of transport
channels.
 List the contents of the MAC Packet Data Unit
be able to:
(PDU).
 State the main functions of the network
 Explain the main functions and procedures of
elements
X2AP signaling protocol.
 List the interfaces in EPS
 Explain how signaling takes place between the
S1AP signaling protocol.
UE and the EPC
 State the main functions of Radio Resource
the user plane protocols GTP.
Control (RRC), Packet Data Convergence
 Describe X2 Handover
Protocol (PDCP) Radio Link Control (RLC),
 Describe S1 Handover
Medium Access Control (MAC), the physical
Duration
layer and their relations
 Explain the interaction of the eUTRAN 2 working days
protocols and the mapping of logical, transport Class Size
and physical channels
Min 6，max 12
 Explain the purpose of EPS Bearer Services
and eUTRA Radio Bearer
512
19.1.4 TCP/IP in the Mobile World Training
Training Path
 List description of some application level
protocols with relevant traffic cases: DHCP,
TCP/IP in the Mobile World DHCPv6, DNS, etc
 Outline services provided by Internet Service
OEA07 Lecture 2d
00 Providers with a focus on which of these the
Target Audience mobile operators need to support in their
networks
System Engineer
 Describe address translation, NAT (IPv4 and
Service Engineer
IPv6)
Service Planning Engineer
 Outline IP-based application providing user
Service Design Engineer services: email, web browsing, ftp, etc
Network Design Engineer  Outline Multimedia over IP (MoIP)
Prerequisites  Draw network architectures for SIP-domain
 A general knowledge in cellular systems and  Outline SIP, SDP, RTP and RTCP protocols –
radio technology functions and usage that enable end-to-end

multimedia sessions (e.g. VoIP)
Objectives
 Outline interworking between SIP-based
On completion of this program, the participants will networks and the PSTN/ISDN networks
be able to:
 Describe IP in GPRS/UMTS/EPS
 Draw general mobile networks architecture and
 Explain remote access and login procedures
usage of IP
for mobile users
 Compare PS and CS networks
 List user profile, APN, QoS, etc for the IP
 List Identities (e.164, e.212, FQDN, etc) connectivity of a UE
 List Codecs (AMR, PCM, G.711, etc) and  Outline local breakout vs Home Routed Traffic
transcoding for roaming users
 Outline redundancy and multi-homing  Outline the GTP-U/GPP-C protocols
 Describe Internet Protocol, IP  Describe Quality of Service
 Draw IP address structure for IPv4 and IPv6  Describe definition of QoS in UMTS and
 Describe Private addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 LTE/EPS and its implications on an IP network
 Describe IP routing principles and routing  Describe general functions for a router to
tables (IPv4 and IPv6) manage QoS, Packet Marking, Packet
 Compare IPv4 and IPv6 functionalities Dropping, etc
 Outline routing protocols, RIP, OSPF and BGP  Describe QoS provisioning: Diffserv and MPLS
 Describe Transport Protocols: TCP, SCTP and  Describe network security
UDP  Describe security requirements faced by
 Describe functions of transport protocols and modern telecom networks
usage of port numbers  Outline security algorithms and keys providing
 Explain client-server model encryption and electronic signatures
 Outline UDP, TCP and SCTP protocols –  Outline IPsec as a method to ensure security
comparison of functionalities for IP networks
 Describe Applications
513
Duration Class Size
2 working days Min 6，max 12
514
19.1.5 QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS Training
Training Path
Management models
 Describe story cases used during the course
LTE Air Interface  Describe IP QoS in general
OEA04  Describe QoS support in the IP header

Lecture 3d
00  Describe IP QoS concepts: Classification,
Queuing, Scheduling, Shaping, Filtering,
Dropping, Admission Control, etc
 Outline Leaky Bucket and Token Bucket
OEA05 Lecture 2d  Outline traffic engineering and planning
Prerequisites
 Describe Policy and Charging Control – PCC
 Draw 3GPP model for dynamic policy control
QoS in HSPA and LTE/EPS  Draw PCC architecture and nodes
 Outline PCC rules
OEA08 Lecture 3d
 Outline QoS authorization and enforcement
 Describe End-to-End QoS Concept and
Target Audience
Architecture in UMTS
System Engineer  Outline PDP context/PDN connection
Service Engineer  Outline Bearers: Primary/Secondary PDP
Service Planning Engineer Context vs Default/Dedicated Bearer
Service Design Engineer  Describe GBR and non-GBR bearers
Network Design Engineer  Outline Bearer Setup modes
Prerequisites  Describe QoS definition in HSPA:

Conversational, Streaming, Interactive and
 Successful completion of the following courses: background
 LTE Air Interface  Describe QoS definition in GPRS/EPS: MBR,
 LTE Protocols and Procedures GBR, ARP, THI and QCI
Objectives  Outline TFT’s and its usage
On completion of this program, the participants will  Outline some real-life scenarios
be able to:  Outline subscriber data/profile in HLR/HSS
 Draw mobile network architecture  Outline QoS related info in Subscriber profiles
 Draw UMTS/HSPA nodes and interfaces  Describe usage of QoS info in subscriber data
 Draw LTE/EPS nodes and interfaces for ensuring QoS
(E-UTRAN and EPC)  Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for
 Describe basic terminology and concepts: HSPA network
Sessions, PDN Connections, PDP Contexts,  Describe End-to-End QoS architecture for LTE
EPS Bearers, Service Data Flows, RAB, RB network
etc  Describe QoS negotiation procedure
 Describe QoS definition  Describe Radio QoS
 Describe Service Setup Scenarios  Outline general QoS handling on radio
 Describe QoS handling and Bearer interfaces
515
 Describe HSPA Radio Bearers and Radio links handling
 Describe LTE Radio Bearers  Outline Roaming Scenarios; QoS in GRX/IPX
 Outline QoS in IP Backhaul  Describe QoS Mapping
 Outline L1/L2 technologies  Outline QoS Mapping in SGSN
 Outline topology and dimensioning  Outline QoS Mapping in GGSN
 Outline DiffServ architecture with DSCP, SLA,  Outline QoS Mapping in PGW
PHB, Assured Forwarding (AF), Expedited  Outline QoS Mapping for access network
Forwarding (EF), etc  Describe QoS Mapping for Air interface
 Outline MPLS architecture, header, LER, LSR, Duration
LSP,FEC, Label distribution, etc
3 working days
 Outline QoS in Core Networks
Class Size
 Outline QoS handling and solutions in PS core
network Min 6，max 12
 Outline SGSN and GGSN QoS related info and
516
19.1.6 LTE Interoperability Training
Training Path
 Describe cell reselection.
 Describe priority based Inter-RAT cell
LTE Air Interface reselection.
 Describe SPID (Subscriber Profile ID) for
OEA04 Lecture 3d
00 RAT/frequency priority.
 Describe DCCH controlled cell reselection.
 Compare EMM and MM/GMM.
 Describe Inter-RAT mobility - RA and TA
OEA05 Lecture 2d updates.
Prerequisites
 Outline MME and SGSN interaction.
 Outline security interworking.
LTE Interoperability  Outline ISR (Idle mode Signalling Reduction).
 Describe Identity mapping.
OEA09 Lecture 3d
 Describe PS interworking
 Describe configuration of measurement
Target Audience reporting.
System Engineer  Describe Inter-RAT reporting options.
Service Engineer  Outline feature froup indicators.
Service Planning Engineer  Describe PS handover between LTE and
Service Design Engineer 2G/3G.
Network Design Engineer  Outline network assisted cell change operation.
Prerequisites  List data forwarding options.

 Draw QoS mapping
 Outline Non-3GPP interworking
 LTE Air Interface
 Outline GSM association - IR.88: LTE roaming
 LTE Protocols and Procedures guidelines
Objectives  Describe CS interworking
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe combined EPS/CS attach.
be able to:  Describe CSFB (Circuit Switched Fallback).
 Draw EPS Nodes and Interfaces.  Describe SMS using CSFB.
 Draw 2G/3G Nodes and Interfaces.  Outline the SGs interface and operation.
 Describe IMS and its role in Interworking  Outline SRVCC (Single Radio Voice Call
 Outline interworking interfaces for 2G/3G and Continuity )
LTE.  Outline the Sv interface and operation.
 Draw 2G/3G protocols.  Outline IMS procedures.
 Draw EPS protocol and EPS Bearers.  Outline VoLTE - GSM association – IR.92:
 Describe PLMN selection process. Voice and SMS over LTE.
 Describe initial cell selection process.  Outline GSM association - IR.58: IMS Profile
 Recap 2G initial attach procedure. for Voice over HSPA
 Describe LTE initial attach procedure.  Outline GSM association - IR.88: LTE Roaming
517
Duration
Guidelines
 Outline GSM association - IR.65: IMS Roaming 3 working days
& Interworking Guidelines Class Size
Min 6，max 12
518
19.1.7 LTE Essentials Training
Training Path
 Describe the evaluation from 3G to 4G
 Describe designed for Mobile Broadband
 Describe what will 4G networks look like
LTE Essentials
 Describe migrating from today’s 3G network to
OEA06 Lecture 1d a 4G network
 List 4G spectrum
Target Audience  List the 4G network numbers, Capex and Opex
 Describe LTE-A in a Nutshell
Business Developer
 Outline the LTE-A network structure
Prerequisites
 Outline the LTE-A Interworking
 A general knowledge in cellular systems and  Outline the WiMAX
radio technology
 Outline emerging markets
Objectives
 Describe how to selling 4G and all it has to
On completion of this program, the participants will Offer
be able to:  List 4G service
 Outline mobile broadband  Analysis LTE-A from the drawing board to the
 Describe traffic trends high street
 Describe network costs Duration
 Describe what does a real mobile network look 1 working day

like
Class Size
 State costs controlling
 Outline IMT Advanced Min 6，max 12
 Outline 3GPP LTE-A timelines, aims, rationale

and performance
519
19.2 Product Training
19.2.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Field Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB.
LTE System Overview  Describe the logical structure of eNodeB.
OEA03 1d  Describe the working principle and functions of

Lecture
00 Prerequisite eNodeB boards.
s  Describe the procedure of eNodeB
commissioning
eNodeB V100R003 Product Description
 Describe the related concept of eNodeB
OEB30 Lecture 0.5 d software and configuration file
 Querying the current version of eNodeB
 Use USB disk to commission the eNodeB
eNodeB V100R003 Software Installation and
 Commission the eNodeB through M2000
Commissioning
OEB31 LectureHand on Practice 1d  Commission the eNodeB through LMT
 Verify commissioning result
 Explain the Hedex structure of the eNodeB
eNodeB V100R003 Field Maintenance
 Find information in the Hedex with use of
regular expression
OEB32 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d
 Find operational instructions and maintain the
eNodeB according to the instructions
Target Audience
 Power up/down the eNodeB and connect up
System Technician LMT to the node
Service Technician  Find the alarm list of eNodeB
System Engineer  Perform corrective and preventive
Service Engineer maintenance on eNodeB
Prerequisites  Find faulty hardware units and replace them
Duration
 LTE System Overview 2 working days
On completion of this program, the participants will Min 6，max 12
520
19.2.2 LTE eRAN2.1 Network Operation Training
Training Path
eNodeB operation and maintenance system
LTE System Overview  Install M2000 client software
OEA0  Use LMT login eNodeB

Lecture 1d
3 Prerequisite  Use M2000 client Login M2000 server and
00
s eNodeB
eNodeB V100R003 Product Description  Execute MML in single mode

 Execute MML in batch mode
OEB30 Lecture 0.5 d  Manage alarms of eNodeB
 Manage device, such as querying board states,
blocking board and unblocking board
eNodeB V100R003 Operation
 Manage software, such as querying current
OEB33 LectureHand on Practice 1d software version and backup configuration file

 Manage transport data, such as querying IP
address of Ethernet port and querying IP route
eNodeB V100R003 Data Configuration  Manage radio data, such as querying cell
states and querying neighbor cell
OEB34 LectureHand on Practice 1d
eNodeB V100R003 Troubleshooting saving result

OEB35 LectureHand on Practice 1d creating a monitoring task, checking and
Target Audience  Outline the procedure of eNodeB data
configuration
System Technician
 Describe the main table of external template
Service Technician
 Describe the meaning of the external template
System Engineer
 Use LTE Configuration System to create
Service Engineer
project
Prerequisites
 Use LTE Configuration System to import
 Successful completion of the following courses: external template
 LTE System Overview  Use LTE Configuration System to query data
Objectives configuration and modify data
 Use LTE Configuration System to check up
data
be able to:
 Use LTE Configuration System to export data
 Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB.
 Outline the procedure of eNodeB
 Describe the logical structure of eNodeB.
troubleshooting flow
 Describe the working principle and functions of
 Perform the alarm management and analysis
eNodeB boards.
 Perform the log collection
 Explain the architecture and components of
 Handle with the main faults of device level
521
Class Size
 Handle with the main faults of transport level
 Handle with the main faults of radio level Min 6，max 12
Duration
3.5 working days
522
Training Path
Objectives

LTE System Overview
be able to:
OEA03 Lecture 1d  Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB
00 Prerequisite
 Describe the logical structure of eNodeB
s
eNodeB V100R004 Product Description eNodeB boards
OEB40 Lecture 0.5 d
LMT to the node
 Find the alarm list of eNodeB
eNodeB V100R004 Local Commissioning  Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB
OEB41 LectureHand on Practice 1d  Find faulty hardware units and replace them
 Describe the procedure of eNodeB
commissioning
eNodeB V100R004 Field Maintenance
OEB42 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d software and configuration file
Target Audience  Use USB disk to commission the eNodeB

 Commission the eNodeB through LMT
System Technician
Service Technician
Duration
System Engineer
Service Engineer 2 working days
 Successful completion of the following courses: Min 6，max 12
 LTE System Overview
523
19.2.4 LTE eRAN2.2 Network Operation Training
Training Path
LTE System Overview eNodeB boards
OEA03 Lecture 1d
00 Prerequisite commissioning
s  Describe the related concept of eNodeB
software and configuration file
OEB40 Lecture 0.5 d  Commission the eNodeB through M2000
 Explain the architecture and components of
OEB44 LectureHand on Practice 1d  Install LMT software

 Install M2000 client software
 Use LMT login eNodeB
eNodeB V100R004 Data Configuration  Use M2000 client Login M2000 server and
eNodeB
 Execute MML in single mode
eNodeB V100R004 Remote Commissioning  Manage alarms of eNodeB
OEB43 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d blocking board and unblocking board
software version and backup configuration file
eNodeB V100R004 Troubleshooting
OEB46 LectureHand on Practice 1d address of Ethernet port and querying IP route
 Manage radio data, such as querying cell
Target Audience states and querying neighbor cell

System Technician
Service Technician saving result
System Engineer  Manage real-time monitoring, for example:
Service Engineer creating a monitoring task, checking and
Prerequisites saving monitoring result
 Outline the procedure of eNodeB data
configuration
 Describe the main table of "eNodeB Summary
Objectives
Data"
On completion of this program, the participants will  Use LTE Configuration System to create
be able to: project
 Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB  Use LTE Configuration System to import
524
external template  Perform the log collection
 Use LTE Configuration System to query data  Handle with the main faults of device level
configuration and modify data  Handle with the main faults of transport level
 Use LTE Configuration System to check up  Handle with the main faults of radio level
data Duration
 Use LTE Configuration System to export data
4 working days
Class Size
troubleshooting flow
 Perform the alarm management and analysis Min 6，max 12
525
Training Path
Objectives

LTE System Overview
be able to:
OEA03 Lecture 1d  Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB
00 Prerequisite
s
eNodeB V100R005 Product Description eNodeB boards
OEB50 Lecture 0.5 d
commissioning
eNodeB V100R005 Local Commissioning software and configuration file
OEB51 LectureHand on Practice 1d  Use USB disk to commission the eNodeB
 Commission the eNodeB through LMT
eNodeB V100R005 Field Maintenance  Verify commissioning result

OEB52 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d LMT to the node
 Find the alarm list of eNodeB
Target Audience  Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB
Field Technician
 Find faulty hardware units and replace them
System Technician
Duration
Network Deployment Engineer
Class Size
 LTE System Overview Min 6，max 12
526
19.2.6 LTE eRAN3.0 Operation and Configuration Training
Training Path
LTE System Overview  Install M2000 client software
OEA03  Use LMT login eNodeB

Lecture 1d
00 Prerequisite  Use M2000 client Login M2000 server and
s eNodeB
eNodeB V100R005 Product Description  Execute MML in single mode

OEB50 Lecture 0.5 d  Manage alarms of eNodeB
blocking board and unblocking board
OEB54 LectureHand on Practice 1d software version and backup configuration file

address of Ethernet port and querying IP route
eNodeB V100R005 Initial Configuration  Manage radio data, such as querying cell
states and querying neighbor cell
saving result
eNodeB V100R005 Remote Commissioning
OEB53 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d creating a monitoring task, checking and
Target Audience
commissioning
System Engineer  Describe the related concept of eNodeB
Service Engineer software and configuration file
Service Planning Engineer  Querying the current version of eNodeB
Service Design Engineer  Commission the eNodeB through M2000
Prerequisites  Verify commissioning result
 Outline the procedure of eNodeB data
configuration
 Describe the main table of "eNodeB Summary
Objectives
Data"
On completion of this program, the participants will  Use LTE Configuration System to create
be able to: project
 Describe the hardware structure of eNodeB  Use LTE Configuration System to import
 Describe the logical structure of eNodeB external template
 Describe the working principle and functions of  Use LTE Configuration System to query data
eNodeB boards configuration and modify data
 Explain the architecture and components of  Use LTE Configuration System to check up
527
Class Size
data
 Use LTE Configuration System to export data Min 6，max 12
Duration
3 working days
528
19.2.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
 eNodeB LTE V100R005 Product Description
Objectives
LTE System Overview
OEA03 Lecture 1d be able to:
00
 Outline CME/MML operation
 Perform capacity expansion
 Perform adding an FDD cell
OEB50 Lecture 0.5 d  Perform changing the cell bandwidth

Prerequisite  Perform adding an MME Connection
s
 Perform adding an S-GW Connection
eNodeB V100R005 Reconfiguration  Perform network reconstruction

 Perform changing the cell EARFCNs
 Perform changing the Cell PCI
 Perform changing the Cell ID
Target Audience
 Perform relocating an MME
System Engineer  Perform relocating an S-GW
Service Engineer Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6，max 12
529
19.2.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
 eNodeB LTE V100R005 Product Description
LTE System Overview  eNodeB LTE V100R005 Reconfiguration
OEA03 1d Objectives
Lecture
00
be able to:
OEB50 Lecture 0.5 d troubleshooting flow

 Perform the alarm management and analysis
 Perform the log collection
eNodeB V100R005 Reconfiguration  Draw hardware fault handling procedure
 Handle with the main faults of device level
Prerequisite  Draw transport fault handling procedure
s  Handle with the main faults of transport level
 Draw radio fault diagnosis process
eNodeB V100R005 Troubleshooting
 Check the eNodeB radio configuration
OEB56 LectureHand on Practice 1d  Check quality on the air interface
 Check the EPC configuration
Target Audience
 Handle with the main faults of radio level
System Engineer Duration
Service Engineer
1 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites Min 6，max 12
530
19.2.9 LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe S1-Flex principle
 Deploy S1-Flex
eNodeB V100R005 Initial Configuration  Outline LTE synchronization
 Describe frequency and time synchronization
Prerequisites  List synchronization sources
 Describe working modes of clocks
LTE eRAN3.0 Transmission Features and  Perform synchronization configuration

Algorithms  Outline Co-Transmission
OEO58 Lecture 1d  Describe IP-based Co-Transmission on the
MBSC side
Target Audience
 Describe Co-Transmission on the MBTS side
System Engineer  Deploy Co-Transmission
Service Engineer  Outline IPv6
Service Planning Engineer  Describe IPv6 addresses
Service Design Engineer  Describe IPv6 header format
Network Design Engineer  Describe IPv6 networking
Prerequisites  Describe IPv4/IPv6 dual stack and networking
 Outline IPSec over IPv6
 Outline IEEE 1588v2 over IPv6
 eNodeB V100R005 Initial Configuration
 Deploy IPv6
Objectives
Duration
1 working day
be able to:
Class Size
 Outline S1-Flex
 Describe concepts related to S1-Flex Min 6，max 12
531
19.3 RNP&RNO Training
19.3.1 LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe data radio bearer management
 Outline power control
LTE Air Interface  Describe downlink power control
OEA04 3d  Describe uplink power control

Lecture
00  Describe downlink scheduling
 Describe uplink scheduling
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe scheduling deployment strategy

 Outline load control
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe load monitoring
Prerequisites
 Describe admission Control
 Describe load balance
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms
 Describe congestion control
OEO02 Lecture 4d  Outline mobility management

 Describe Intra-frequency handover
 Describe Inter-frequency handover
Target Audience
 Describe Inter-RAT handover
System Technician  Outline ICIC
Service Technician  Describe downlink ICIC
System Engineer  Describe uplink ICIC
Service Engineer  Describe ICIC deployment strategy
Prerequisites  Outline MIMO feature
 Describe Multiple-Antenna reception MIMO
 Describe Multiple-Antenna transmission MIMO
 Describe Adaptive mode selection and
 LTE Protocols and Procedures
switching
Objectives
 Outline ANR
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe Intra-RAT ANR management
be able to:  Describe Inter-RAT ANR management
 Outline idle mode  Outline MRO processing flow
 Describe PLMN selection  Describe classification of Intra-RAT MRO
 Describe cell selection & cell reselection  Describe Intra-RAT MRO Management
 Describe system information reception  Describe Inter-RAT MRO Management
 Describe tracking area registration Duration
 Describe paging monitoring procedure
4 working days
 Outline connection management
Class Size
 Describe random access
 Describe signaling connection management Min 6，max 12
532
19.3.2 LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe uplink power control
 Describe downlink scheduling
LTE Air Interface  Describe uplink scheduling
OEA04  Describe scheduling deployment strategy

Lecture 3d
00  Outline load control
 Describe load monitoring
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe admission Control

 Describe load balance
OEA05 Lecture 2d
Prerequisites
 Outline mobility management
 Describe Intra-frequency handover
LTE eRAN2.2 Features and Algorithms
 Describe Inter-frequency handover
OEO04 Lecture 5d  Describe Inter-RAT handover

 Outline ICIC
 Describe downlink ICIC
Target Audience
 Describe uplink ICIC
System Technician  Describe ICIC deployment strategy
Service Technician  Outline MIMO feature
System Engineer  Describe Multiple-Antenna reception MIMO
Service Engineer  Describe Multiple-Antenna transmission MIMO
Prerequisites  Describe Adaptive mode selection and
switching
 Outline ANR
 Describe Intra-RAT ANR management
 Describe Inter-RAT ANR management
Objectives
 Outline MRO processing flow
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe classification of Intra-RAT MRO
be able to:  Describe Intra-RAT MRO Management
 Outline idle mode  Describe Inter-RAT MRO Management
 Describe PLMN selection  Describe Beamforming-Related concepts
 Describe cell selection & cell reselection  Describe Beamforming principles and
 Describe system information reception techniques
 Describe tracking area registration  List Beamforming feature application scenarios
 Describe paging monitoring procedure  Describe beamforming deployment strategy
 Outline connection management  Describe concepts of Sector, Cell and TDD
 Describe random access subframe configuration
 Describe signaling connection management  Describe TDD frame structure
 Describe data radio bearer management  Describe Uplink-Downlink subframe
 Outline power control configurations
 Describe downlink power control  Describe configurations of special subframes
533
 Describe when to use subframe configuration  List when to use QoS management
 Outline End-to-End certificate management Duration
 Outline transmission security mechanisms
5 working days
 List when to use transmission security
Class Size
 Describe basic principles of QoS management
 Describe QoS management policies Min 6，max 12
 Describe QoS management methods
534
19.3.3 LTE eRAN3.0 Delta Training
Training Path
 LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms
Objectives
LTE Air Interface
00
 Describe LMT delta functions
 Describe M2000 client delta functions
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Outline LTE voice solutions
 Outline CS Fallback
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe CS Fallback procedure
 Draw network architecture for CS Fallback to
UTRAN/GERAN
eNodeB V100R003 Data Configuration
 Describe CS Fallback to UTRAN
OEB34 Lecture 1d  Describe CS Fallback to GERAN
 Select CS Fallback mechanisms
 Perform configuration on eNodeB for CS
LTE eRAN2.1 Features and Algorithms Fallback
 Outline ROHC
OEO02 Lecture 4d
Prerequisites  Describe Principles and Framework of ROHC
 Describe ROHC Procedure
 Outline LTE synchronization
LTE eRAN3.0 O&M Enhancement
 Describe frequency and time synchronization
OES50 LectureHand on Practice 0.5 d  List synchronization sources
 Describe working modes of clocks
 Perform synchronization configuration
LTE eRAN3.0 New Features  Outline PCI conflict detection&
self-optimization
OES51 Lecture 1.5 d
 Describe PCI conflict detection
 Describe PCI self-optimization in M2000
Target Audience
 Observe PCI conflict information
System Engineer  Set PCI conflict detection
Service Engineer  Outline RACH optimization
Service Planning Engineer  Describe prerequisites for RACH optimization
Service Design Engineer  Describe zero correlation zone configuration
Network Design Engineer  Describe contention-based vs. contention-free
Prerequisites random access
 Describe RACH resource adjustment
 Perform MML to deploy RACH optimization
 eNodeB V100R003 Data Configuration
 Describe impact of RACH optimization
 Outline cell outage detection
 Describe sleeping cell detection techniques
535
 Describe cell outage detection techniques  Deploy high speed mobility
 Deploy cell outage detection Duration
 Outline high speed mobility
2 working days
 Describe when to use high speed mobility
Class Size
 Perform network planning for high speed
mobility Min 6，max 12
536
19.3.4 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe tracking area registration
 Describe paging monitoring procedure
LTE Air Interface  Outline connection management
OEA04  Describe random access

Lecture 3d
00  Config random access preamble format
 Select root sequence
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe signaling connection management

 Describe data radio bearer management
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Outline power control
Prerequisites
 Describe downlink power control
 Describe uplink power control
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms  Set initial power
OEO51 Lecture 3.5 d  Outline scheduling

 Describe downlink scheduling
Target Audience  Describe uplink scheduling
 Describe scheduling deployment strategy
System Engineer
 Outline mobility management
Service Engineer
 Describe intra-frequency handover
 Describe inter-frequency handover
 Describe inter-rat handover
 Set measurement configuration
Prerequisites
 Set handover related parameters
 Successful completion of the following courses:  Outline MIMO feature
 LTE Air Interface  Describe multiple-antenna reception MIMO
 LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe multiple-antenna transmission MIMO
Objectives  Describe adaptive mode selection and
switching
be able to:  Set adaptive MIMO
 Outline idle mode Duration
 Describe PLMN selection 3.5 working days

 Describe cell selection & cell reselection Class Size
 Config cell selection
Min 6，max 12
 Config cell reselection measurement
 Describe system information reception
 Config SIB
537
19.3.5 LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Outline ANR overview
 Describe intra-RAT ANR management
LTE Air Interface  Describe inter-RAT ANR management
OEA04  Switch on ANR

Lecture 3d
00  Set ANR related parameters
 Outline MRO processing flow
LTE Protocols and Procedures  List classification of intra-RAT MRO

 Describe intra-RAT MRO management
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe inter-RAT MRO management
 Set MRO to optimize handover
 Outline PCI conflict detection&
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms self-optimization overview
Lecture 3.5 d  Describe PCI conflict detection

OEO51
Prerequisites  Describe PCI self-optimization in M2000
 Observe PCI conflict information
 Set PCI conflict detection
LTE eRAN3.0 SON Features and Algorithms
 Outline RACH optimization
OEO52 Lecture 1d
 Describe prerequisites for RACH optimization
 Describe zero correlation zone configuration
Target Audience
 Describe contention-based vs. contention-free
System Engineer random access
Service Engineer  Describe RACH resource adjustment
Service Planning Engineer  Perform MML to deploy RACH optimization
Service Design Engineer  Describe impact of RACH optimization
Network Design Engineer  Outline cell outage detection
Prerequisites  Describe sleeping cell detection techniques

 Describe cell outage detection techniques
 Deploy cell outage detection
Duration
 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms 1 working day
be able to:
538
19.3.6 LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
LTE Air Interface  LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms
OEA04 3d Objectives
Lecture
00
be able to:
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Outline beamforming
 Describe beamforming-related concepts
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe beamforming principles and
techniques
 Describe beamforming feature application
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms
scenarios
OEO51 Lecture 3.5 d  Deploy beamforming
Prerequisites
 Describe concept of sector, cell and TDD
subframe configuration
LTE eRAN3.0 TDD Specific Features and
 Draw TDD frame structure
Algorithms
 Describe uplink-downlink subframe
OEO53 Lecture 0.5 d
configurations
 Describe configurations of special subframes
Target Audience
 Describe when to use subframe configuration
System Engineer  Perform subframe configuration
Service Engineer Duration
0.5 working day
Class Size
539
19.3.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
 Describe related features of UL CoMP
 Deploy UL CoMP
LTE Air Interface  Outline ICIC
OEA04  Describe downlink ICIC

Lecture 3d
00  Describe uplink ICIC
 Describe ICIC deployment strategy
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Deploy ICIC

 Outline load monitoring
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe admission control
 Set admission control
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms  Outline load balance
OEO51 Lecture 3.5 d  Describe intra–frequency load balance

Prerequisites  Describe inter-frequency load balance
 Describe inter-RAT load balance
LTE eRAN3.0 Performance Improving  Outline high speed mobility
Features and Algorithms
 Describe when to use high speed mobility
OEO54 Lecture 2d
 Perform network planning for high speed
mobility
Target Audience
 Deploy high speed mobility
System Engineer  Outline compact bandwidth
Service Engineer  Describe key technologies of compact
Service Planning Engineer bandwidth
Service Design Engineer  Describe related physical resource

management
 Deploy compact bandwidth
Prerequisites
 Outline RAN Sharing
 Successful completion of the following courses:  Describe RAN Sharing with Common Carriers
 LTE Air Interface  Describe RAN Sharing with Dedicated Carriers
 LTE Protocols and Procedures  Deploy RAN Sharing
 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Outline UL CoMP Min 6，max 12
 Describe application scenarios of UL CoMP

 Describe key techniques for UL CoMP
540
19.3.8 LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms Training
Training Path
Prerequisites

LTE Air Interface
OEA04 Lecture 3d  LTE Protocols and Procedures
00
 LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms
Objectives
 Outline LTE voice solutions
 Outline CS Fallback
LTE eRAN3.0 Basic Features and Algorithms  Describe CS Fallback procedure
 Draw network architecture for CS Fallback to
OEO51 Lecture 3.5 d
Prerequisites UTRAN/GERAN
 Describe CS Fallback to UTRAN
 Describe CS Fallback to GERAN
LTE eRAN3.0 Voice Features and Algorithms
 Select CS Fallback mechanisms
OEO55 Lecture 0.5 d  Perform configuration on eNodeB for CS
Fallback
Target Audience  Outline ROHC
 Describe principles and framework of ROHC
System Engineer
 Describe ROHC procedure
Service Engineer
Duration
Service Design Engineer 0.5 working day
Network Design Engineer Class Size
Min 6，max 12
541
19.3.9 LTE Tuning Training
Training Path
LTE Air Interface Objectives
OEA04 Lecture 3d On completion of this program, the participants will

00
be able to:
 Describe basic process of RF optimization
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Make test preparations
 Collect data collection for tuning
OEA05 Lecture 2d
Prerequisites  List factors affecting coverage
 List solutions for weak coverage
 List solutions for cross coverage
LTE Network Tuning
 List solutions for lack of dominant cell
OEO01 Lecture 1d  Perform basic coverage problem analysis
 List main handover problems during network
Target Audience tuning
 Perform basic handover problem analysis
System Technician
 Perform basic RF adjustment
Service Technician
Duration
System Engineer
Service Engineer 1 working day
 Successful completion of the following courses: Min 6，max 12
542
19.3.10 LTE Network Design and Dimensioning Training
Training Path
 Outline LTE radio network planning
 Describe LTE radio network planning Process
LTE Air Interface  Describe differences between 2G/3G and LTE
Dimensioning
OEA04 Lecture 3d
00  Perform LTE radio network coverage
dimensioning
 Perform LTE link budget
 Describe propagation model
OEA05 Lecture 2d  Perform site number dimensioning
Prerequisites  Outline capacity dimensioning procedure
 Describe traffic model and parameters
LTE Radio Network Design  Perform radio network throughput calculation
 Analysis DL Throughput
OEP01 Lecture 1.5 d
 Analysis UL Throughput
 Perform throughput per cell(IP) dimensioning
 Perform capacity dimensioning
LTE Access Transport Network Dimensioning
 Outline frequency planning
OEP02 Lecture 0.5 d  Outline TA planning
 Outline PCI planning
Target Audience
 Outline PRACH planning
Service Planning Engineer  Describe the LTE transport networking
Service Design Engineer  Describe the S1 and X2 interface protocol
Network Design Engineer  Explain IP functionality, such as VLAN, IP sec
Prerequisites etc.
 Perform transport network dimensioning
 Perform eNodeB hardware dimensioning
Duration
Class Size
be able to: Min 6，max 12
543
19.3.11 LTE Performance Management Training
Training Path
Objectives

LTE Air Interface
be able to:
OEA04 Lecture 3d  Describe the structure of LTE performance
00
measurement system
 List classification of KPI
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe accessibility KPI and detail the
counters of it
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Describe retainability KPIs and detail the
counters of them
 Describe mobility KPIs and detail the counters
LTE eRAN2.1/2.2/3.0 Features and Algorithms of them
OEO02/04/51 Lecture 4/5/3.5 d  Describe service integrity

Prerequisites  Describe utilization KPIs and detail the
counters of them
LTE Performance Management  Describe availability KPIs and detail the
counters of them
OEO03 LectureHand on Practice 1d
 Describe traffic KPI and detail the counters of
them
Target Audience  Describe performance management basic
concepts
System Technician
 Describe measurement management
Service Technician
 Implement performance measurement
System Engineer
operations on M2000
Service Engineer
 Implement custom counter management
Prerequisites
 Query performance result
1 working day
Class Size
 LTE Features and Algorithms
Min 6，max 12
544
19.3.12 LTE Radio Network Optimize Training
Training Path
Objectives

LTE Air Interface
be able to:
OEA04 Lecture 3d  Outline handover procedure
00
 Perform handover fault analysis
 Describe typical case of handover fault
LTE Protocols and Procedures  Describe basic principle of access
 Describe fault diagnosis process
OEA05 Lecture 2d
 Perform operations of fault diagnosis
 Perform checking hardware connections
 Perform checking version mapping
LTE eRAN2.1/2.2/3.0 Features and Algorithms
 Perform checking the eNodeB configuration
OEO02/04/51 Lecture 4/5/3.5 d  Perform checking quality on the air interface
Prerequisites
 Perform checking the EPC configuration
 Describe time and frequency resources and
LTE Radio Network Optimize throughput calculation
Lecture 2d  Describe throughput fault diagnosis procedures

OEO06
and methods
 Describe processes of data transmission fault
Target Audience
diagnosis
System Engineer  Describe basic requirements for fault diagnosis
Service Engineer  Perform diagnosis for locating downlink data
Service Planning Engineer transmission faults
Service Design Engineer  Perform diagnosis for uplink problems
Network Design Engineer Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 Successful completion of the following courses: Class Size
Min 6，max 12
 LTE Features and Algorithms
545
20 SingleRAN Training Path
20.1 SingleRAN Training Path
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC

Operation and Maintenance Training Operation and Maintenance Training
7days 4days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0
BSC Configuration Training
8days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS

Troubleshooting Training
5days

7days 4days
8days

5days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 -
SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training
3days
546

7days 4days
8days

Reconfiguration Training
7days

5days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 –
SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training
2days
547

7days 4days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0

Reconfiguration Training BSC Configuration Training
7days 8days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS

Upgrade Training Troubleshooting Training
3days 5days
Emergency Maintenance Training
2days
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 -
SingleRAN7.0 Product Delta Training
2days
548
21 SingleRAN Training Courses
Wireless Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
SingleRAN Training Courses
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 7 6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training

Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training Ⅲ 7 6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 – SingleRAN7.0 Product Delta

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
549
550
21.1 SingleRAN Training
21.1.1 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Outline BTS3900 product functions
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Product Description  Detail the hardware structure of BTS3900
 Detail the functions of different modules
OMB99 Lecture 1d
 Perform hardware configuration and cables
connection
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Operation and  Perform GSM BTS remote operation by web
Maintenance LMT
OMB98 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Perform GSM BTS local operation by SMT
 Perform UMTS NodeB routine operation by
LMT
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Data Configuration  Outline MBTS data configuration procedure
based on CME
 Complete MBTS data configuration
 Outline MBTS Cascading data configuration
principle
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Installation and
Commissioning  Complete MBTS Cascading data configuration
OMB96 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Detail the scenarios of multi-mode base station
commissioning
 Perform multi-mode base station Remote
BTS3900 GU V1R2 Troubleshooting commissioning
 Perform multi-mode base station Local
OMB90 Lecture 1d
commissioning
 Know how to find the fault in BTS
Target Audience  Know the common fault types
 Grasp BTS fault disposal method
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and
Maintenance Technician and Engineer  Know how to prevent the fault
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications 7 working days
 At least 1 year working experience in Class Size
GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and Min 6，max 12

maintenance
Objectives
551
21.1.2 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

BSC6900 GU V9R11 Product Description
be able to:
OMC99 Lecture 1d  Detail the system structure of BSC6900

BSC6900
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Operation and
 Detail the signal flows in BSC6900
Maintenance
 List the typical hardware configuration of
BSC6900
Target Audience
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Perform the BSC6900 routine operation
Maintenance Technician and Engineer  Perform the BSC6900 routine maintenance

GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and
Min 6，max 12
maintenance
552
21.1.3 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration Training
Training Path
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Operation
Objectives
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC
Operation and Maintenance Training On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Prerequisites
Configuration
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Data Configuration  Perform Global Data Configuration
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Installation and  Outline MBSC data configuration procedure
Commissioning
based on CME
 Complete MBSC data configuration
Target Audience
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Complete BSC6900 commissioning
Maintenance Technician and Engineer
 At least 1 year working experience in 8 working days

Class Size
maintenance
 Successful completion of the following Min 6，max 12
Training(s):
553
21.1.4 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSS Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BSC Configuration
Training
Objectives
Configuration Training
Prerequisites On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Grasp BSC6900 common fault disposal
BSC6900 GU V9R11 Troubleshooting method

 Understand general procedure of fault
judgment and location
Target Audience  Master the way to prevent BSC6900 fault
 Analyze and handle some typical cases
 Know the common fault types
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Know how to prevent the fault
 At least 1 year working experience in Duration
maintenance 5 working days
 Successful completion of the following Class Size
Training(s): Min 6，max 12

 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN3.0 BTS Operation
554
Training Path
Objectives

BTS3900 GU V1R3 Product Description
be able to:
Lecture 1d  Outline BTS3900 product functions

OMB94
 Detail the hardware structure of BTS3900
BTS3900 GU V1R3 Operation and  Perform hardware configuration and cables
Maintenance
connection
 Perform GSM BTS remote operation by web
LMT
 Perform GSM BTS local operation by SMT
BTS3900 GU V1R3 Data Configuration
OMB92 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d LMT
 Outline the procedure of MBTS data
configuration
BTS3900 GU V1R3 Installation and  Complete the MBTS initial data configuration
Commissioning based on CME
 Describe the meaning of some important
parameters
 Understand the MBTS installation procedure.
BTS3900 GU V1R3 Troubleshooting  Describe the steps of MBTS commissioning.
OMB89 Lecture 1d  Master the commissioning of MBTS

Target Audience
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Know how to prevent the fault
Maintenance Technician and Engineer Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
 At least 1 year working experience in
Min 6，max 12
maintenance
555
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:

BSC6900
Maintenance
BSC6900
Target Audience

Min 6，max 12
maintenance
556
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
Prerequisites
Configuration
Commissioning
based on CME
 Export and activate the configuration data
Target Audience
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Outline OMU software functions
Prerequisites
Duration

8 working days
Class Size
maintenance Min 6，max 12

Training(s):
557
Training Path
Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
BSC6900 GU V9R12 Troubleshooting  Grasp BSC6900 common fault disposal

method
Target Audience
 Master the way to prevent BSC6900 fault
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Analyze and handle some typical cases
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications  Grasp BTS fault disposal method
 At least 1 year working experience in  Know how to prevent the fault

GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and Duration
maintenance
5 working days
Class Size
Training(s):
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 BTS Operation Min 6，max 12
558
21.1.9 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN2.1 - SingleRAN5.0 Delta Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe BSC6900 Evolution
BSC6900 GU BSC6000V9R8 &  Outline New Hardware of BSC6900
BSC6810V9R11 - V9R12 Delta for Equipment
 Master the different O&M methods of
OMC89 Lecture 1d
BSC6900
 Describe the features of Web LMT
BSC6900 GU BSC6000V9R8 &  Outline the different concepts between
BSC6810V9R11 - V9R12 Delta for LMT GSM/UMTS LMT and Web LMT
OMC85 Lecture 1d  Outline the different OM functions between
GSM/UMTS LMT and Web LMT
 Outline the changing of some MML commands
CEM V1R5-V2R10 Delta
 Describe Changes and advantage of CME
OMC86 Lecture 1d V2R10
 Outline Concept of the Current Area, Planned
Area of CME
Target Audience
 Outline CME GUI configuration interface
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and Enhancement
Maintenance Technician and Engineer  Know about new functions of the CME
Prerequisites V200R010
Duration
BSC6000 or UMTS 6810 wireless network Class Size
operation and maintenance
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
559
Training Path
Objectives

BTS3900 GU V1R4 Product Description
be able to:

OMB88
BTS3900 GU V1R4 Operation and  Perform hardware configuration and cables
Maintenance
connection
LMT
BTS3900 GU V1R4 Data Configuration
OMB86 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d LMT
configuration
BTS3900 GU V1R4 Installation and  Complete the MBTS initial data configuration
parameters
BTS3900 GU V1R4 Troubleshooting  Describe the steps of MBTS commissioning.
OMB84 Lecture 1d  Master the commissioning of MBTS.

Target Audience
Prerequisites
7 working days
Min 6，max 12
maintenance
560
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:

BSC6900
Maintenance
BSC6900
Target Audience

Min 6，max 12
maintenance
561
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
Prerequisites
Configuration
Commissioning
based on CME
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration

8 working days
Class Size

Training(s):
562
21.1.13 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
and boards
 expand the transmission resoure in A, GB and
Abis interface
Prerequisites  Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on A, Gb
and Abis interface
BSC6900 GU V9R13 Data Reconfiguration
OMC77 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d UMTS Network
Physical NodeBs
MBTS GU V1R4 Data Reconfiguration
OMB83 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d and Neighboring Cells in Batches
Target Audience Parameters
 Perform the RNC migration reconfiguration
Prerequisites
adjustment
 At least 1 year working experience in  Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data
GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and  Adjust the BTS Data
maintenance  Reparent BTSs
 Successful completion of the following  Detail the scenarios of NodeB migration
Training(s):
 Detail the procedure of NodeB migration
 Perform the NodeB migration
Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC Min 6，max 12
563
Training Path
Objectives
Configuration Training On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Prerequisites
method
GBSS13.0 BSS Troubleshooting  Understand general procedure of fault

 Master the way to prevent BSC6900 fault
 Analyze and handle some typical cases
RAN13.0 RAN Troubleshooting  Know the common fault types
OMC78 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Grasp BTS fault disposal method
 Know how to prevent the fault
SingleRAN6.0 Troubleshooting
Target Audience  Grasp BTS fault disposal method

 Know how to handle the GU fault
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
Class Size
GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and Min 6，max 12
maintenance
Training(s):
564
21.1.15 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 - SingleRAN6.0 Delta Training
Training Path
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 BSC Operation and
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 Training
Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
BSC6900 GU V900R012 - V900R013 Delta  Describe BSC6900 Evolution

 Outline New Hardware of BSC6900 and MBTS
 Master the different O&M methods of
BSC6900
Target Audience
 Outline CME New features
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Master BSC6900 New features
 Master BSC6900 New Maintainability and
Prerequisites Testability Features
 At least 1 year working experience in 2 working days

Class Size
maintenance
 Successful completion of the following Min 6，max 12
Training(s):
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN5.0 BTS Operation and
565
Training Path
Objectives

MBTS GU V1R7 Product Description
be able to:

OMT99
MBTS GU V1R7 Operation and  Perform hardware configuration and cables
Maintenance
connection
OMT98 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
LMT
MBTS GU V1R7 Data Configuration
OMT97 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d LMT
configuration
MBTS GU V1R7 Installation and  Complete the MBTS initial data configuration
OMT96 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
parameters
MBTS GU V1R7 Troubleshooting  Describe the steps of MBTS commissioning.
OMT95 Lecture 0.5d  Master the commissioning of MBTS.

Target Audience
Prerequisites
7 working days
Min 6，max 12
maintenance
566
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
OMS99 Lecture 1d  Detail the system structure of BSC6900

BSC6900
Maintenance
OMS98 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
BSC6900
Target Audience

Min 6，max 12
maintenance
567
Training Path
Objectives
be able to:
Prerequisites
Configuration
Commissioning
based on CME
Target Audience
Prerequisites
Duration

8 working days
Class Size

Training(s):
568
21.1.19 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BSS Reconfiguration Training
Training Path
maintenance
Training(s):
Prerequisites and Maintenance Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GU V9R14 Data Reconfiguration On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
 Describe the procedure of adjusting the BSC
BSC6900 GU V900R014 Migration  Perform the way to adding/removing subracks

and boards
 Expand the transmission resoure in A, GB and
Abis interface.
BSC6900 GU V900R014 Expanding
and Abis interface.
OMS89 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Adjust the cell processing in DPU board
UMTS Network
MBTS GU V1R7 Data Reconfiguration  Perform how to Reconfigure the Parameters of
Physical NodeBs
OMT94 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
and Neighboring Cells in Batches
MBTS GU V1R7 Migration Parameters
OMT93 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe what is BSC migration

 Describe the procedure of the BSC migration
MBTS GU V1R7 Expanding
BSC/RNC capacity
OMT92 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Perform how to add a BSC/RNC board
 Perform how to add an EPS/RNC of BSC
Target Audience  Describe the procedure of MBTS dynamic data
adjustment
Maintenance Technician and Engineer  Adjust the Global/Device/Transmission Data
Prerequisites  Adjust the Cells/TRXs/Channels Data

 Adjust the BTS Data
 Reparent BTSs
 Detail the scenarios of BTS/NodeB migration
569
 Detail the procedure of BTS/NodeB migration  Perform how to add RF Unit

 Perform the BTS/NodeB migration Duration
Describe the procedures of expanding the
7 working days
BTS capacity
Class Size
 Perform how to add BTS TRXs Min 6，max 12
 Perform how to add WBBP Board
570
Training Path
 Grasp BSC6900 GSM common fault disposal
method
 Master the way to prevent BSC6900 GSM fault
Prerequisites  Analyze and handle some typical cases
 Know how to find the fault in GSM BTS
GBSS14.0 BSS Troubleshooting
 Grasp GSM BTS fault disposal method
OMS95 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Know how to prevent the fault
 Describe UMTS RAN troubleshooting process
 Handling UMTS Transmission Faults
RAN14.0 RAN Troubleshooting  Handling UMTS Equipments Faults
OMS94 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Handling UMTS O&M Faults

 Handling UMTS Basic Service Faults
 Handling Failure to Install the NodeB LMT
 Handling NodeB High Frequency Deviation
SingleRAN7.0 Troubleshooting NodeB (E1) of Clock
OMS93 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Handling NodeB Intermittent Interruption of
CPRI Link
Target Audience
 Handling NodeB Sleeping Cell
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and  Grasp BSC6900 GU common fault disposal
Maintenance Technician and Engineer method
Prerequisites  Analyze and handle some BSC6900 GU typical
cases
 Know how to locate the fault in MBTS
 Know how to locate the causes of a fault
 Know how to solve a fault in MBTS
maintenance
 Collect and analyze cases to improve the
troubleshooting capability
Training(s):
Duration
and Maintenance Training 5 working days

be able to:
method
571
21.1.21 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN6.0 – SingleRAN7.0 Delta Training
Training Path
Training
Objectives
Prerequisites
be able to:
BSC6900 GU V900R013 - V900R014 Delta  Describe BSC6900 GU evolution overview

 Describe the hardware changing in BSC6900
GU and MBTS GU, including cabinet, subrack
and boards.
Target Audience
 Describe the software changing in BSC6900
BSS Field Technician, First Line Operation and GU, including OMU board software and OM
Maintenance Technician and Engineer software
Prerequisites  Describe the new features of BSC6900 GU and
MBTS GU.
Duration
GSM/UMTS wireless network operation and 2 working days
maintenance Class Size
Min 6，max 12
Training(s):
572
21.1.22 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Upgrade Training
Training Path
 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 BTS Operation
Prerequisites
Training
Objectives
BSC6900 GU V900R013-V900R014
Upgrade
OMS88 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
 Describe the software installation and upgrade
flow
 Outline the backup and restore operations
MBTS GU V100R004 - V100R007 Upgrade  Complete the installation and upgrade tasks
OMT91 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Grasp the OMU routine maintenance

commands
Target Audience  Describe the upgrade procedure

 Describe the upgrade of MBTS
 Describe the verification operations after
upgrade.
Prerequisites
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications before upgrade

UMTS wireless network operation and
3 working days
maintenance
Class Size
program(s): Min 6，max 12
573
21.1.23 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance TrainingTraining Path
GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Training Maintenance Training

Prerequisites
Training
GSM BSS14.0 Emergency Maintenance Objectives
be able to:
 Understand the Basic Symptoms About the
Accident
WCDMA RAN14.0 Emergency Maintenance  Know how to collect the related information
1d  Execute the quick emergency handling methods.
 Describe Brief Guide to Emergent Accidents
Target Audience  Implement Emergency Measures in Emergency
Situations
 Describe Preparations and the Suggestions on
the Parameter Value Change Before a Holiday
Prerequisites
 Implement Emergency Measures in Heavy
 Basic knowledge of mobile communications Traffic Situations
UMTS wireless network operation and
2 working days
maintenance
Class Size
program(s): Min 6，max 12
574
22 Wireless OSS Training Path
Probe M2000 PRS Nastar

iManager M2000 V2 iManager PRS/Nastar
System Administration System Administrator
Training (SUN) Training (HP)
4.5D 1D
iManager M2000 V2 iManager PRS/Nastar

System
System Administration
Training (ATAE Cluster)
System Administrator
Training (ATAE) Administration
3D 1D
iManager M2000
V200R011 to V200R012
Delta Training
1D
iManager M2000 Network Element

V200R012 Client
Operation & Maintenance
Training Maintenance
2.5D
iManager Nastar GSM

GENEX Probe GSM Performance Analysis
Operation Training System Application
Training
1D 2D
GENEX Probe WCDMA

iManager PRS Client
Application Training iManager Nastar
Optimization,
Operation Training
1D 1D
WCDMA Performance
Analysis System Performance
Application Training
2D Management
GENEX Probe LTE
Operation Training
1D
575
23 Wireless OSS Training Courses
Wireless OSS Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
M2000 Training Courses
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training（Sun） Ⅱ 4.5 6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Cluster)
iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 2.5 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration Training（Sun） Ⅱ 4.5 6 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Cluster)
iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 2.5 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
PRS Training Courses
iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Nastar Training Courses
iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Application
iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
System Application

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Application

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
System Application

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Application

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
System Application
PRS/Nastar Administrator Training Courses
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP) Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE) Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Probe Training Courses
576
GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
577
23.1 M2000 Training
23.1.1 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training（Sun）
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R012 OSS Solution - On completion of this program, the participants will
SUN
be able to:
ONW22 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the basic concept of M2000
 Describe the system reliability of the M2000
iManager M2000V200R012 Northbound system from the aspects of system security.
Interface Introduction
 Describe the performance specifications of the
ONW29 Lecture 0.3d
M2000 system, including system capacity,
bandwidth, storage capacity, processing
Operation System Management capability, and client number.
 Describe the structure of M2000 system
ONW11 Lecture 0.3d
 Describe the commands in UNIX system.
 Describe the UNIX hard disk management.
Database Management  Describe the UNIX network configuration
Lecture 0.3d management.

ONW12
 Describe the UNIX backup and restoration.
 Initialize and drop devices in database.
iManager M2000V200R012 System
 Define the database parameters.
Administration
 Perform database security administration.
ONW25 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Perform database backup and restore.
 Describe topology management function and
iManager M2000V200R012 Server Operation perform topology management.

and Maintenance - SUN  Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
ONW26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Collect and browse logs from M2000.
 Implement the routine maintenance items of
M2000V2 such as checking the disk space
iManager M2000V200R012 Troubleshooting
usage, querying the log information and
ONW27 Lecture 0.6d checking software version.
 Manage the M2000V2 and database
processes.
Target Audience
 Perform M2000V2 data backup and
All wireless engineer restoration.
M2000 system administration engineer  Install the M2000V2 system license.
M2000 server administration engineer  Install and upgrade the NE mediation software.
 Describe the strictly prohibited operations.
Prerequisites  Describe the method to eliminate faults in

M2000V2 system.
 Having basic knowledge in telecommunication
 Collect files and logs for M2000V2 problem
and mobile communication
578
Duration
locating.
 Perform basic troubleshooting to M2000V2 4.5 working days
application, database and operating system. Class Size
Min 6，max 12
579
23.1.2 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)
Training Path
be able to:
iManager M2000V200R012 System Overview  Describe ATAE platform

- ATAE Cluster  Describe the basic concept and structure of
ONW21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d ATAE Cluster
 Describe the networking and technology
solution of ATAE Cluster
iManager M2000V200R012 Northbound
 Describe the system structure and basic
Interface Introduction
function of OSMU
ONW29 Lecture 0.3d
 Describe the system management of OSMU
 Describe the equipment management, service
management, software management, general
iManager M2000V200R012 ATAE Cluster
maintenance OSMU
Server Operation and Maintenance
 Describe the method to backup and restore the
ONW28 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.2d different data types of ATAE Cluster
 The types of M2000 northbound interfaces and
iManager M2000V200R012 System their suitable scenarios

Administration  The functions of M2000 northbound interfaces
ONW25 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  How to configure M2000 northbound interfaces

 How to use and maintenance M2000
northbound interfaces
Target Audience
All wireless engineer perform topology management.
M2000 server administration engineer  Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
M2000 system administration engineer  Collect and browse logs from M2000.
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication and
mobile communication Class Size
580
23.1.3 iManager M2000V200R012 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
iManager M2000V200R012 System Overview -
SUN bandwidth, storage capacity, processing
ONW20 Lecture capability, and client number.

0.5d
 Describe the alarm categories and levels in
M2000V2 system.
iManager M2000V200R012 Client Monitor and  Describe the alarm processing ability
Maintenance
supported by the M2000V2 server.
ONW23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.2d  Browse and query the current alarms in
M2000V2 clients.
 Manage the alarm level and name in M2000V2
iManager M2000V200R012 Client
Performance and Maintenance and NE.
 Describe the performance counter and object
ONW24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.8d
categories in M2000V2 system.
 Query the performance result by the setting
Target Audience conditions.
All wireless engineer  Export the performance result files.
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance  Check the performance task status.
Technician and Engineer  Query the NE configuration data from
M2000V2 Performance Operation and M2000V2 client.
Maintenance Technician and Engineer  Configure data to NE from M2000V2 client.

 Describe the performance counter categories
and the difference between them.
Prerequisites
 Describe the performance object categories.
 Query the performance result by the setting
conditions.
Objectives
 Export the performance result file.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Define the performance query template.
be able to:  Check the performance task status.
 Describe the overall architecture, hardware
architecture, software architecture, typical Duration
configuration and interfaces of the M2000V2.
2.5 working days
 Describe the software structure of the
Class Size
M2000V2 equipment, the functions of different
parts. Min 6，max 12
system from the aspects of system security.
581
23.1.4 iManager M2000V200R012 New Features Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R012 New Features
Training
be able to:
Target Audience  List the new function of M2000V2R12

 List the changes of functions of M2000 GUI
M2000 system administration engineer
between M2000V2R11 and R12 version
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance
Duration
Technician and Engineer
M2000V2 Performance Operation and 1 working day
Maintenance Technician and Engineer Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6，max 12
582
23.1.5 iManager M2000V200R011 System Administration Training（Sun）
Training Path
 Describe the basic concept of M2000
iManager M2000V200R011 OSS Solution -
SUN system from the aspects of system security.
ONW32 Lecture  Describe the performance specifications of the

0.5d
iManager M2000V200R011 Northbound bandwidth, storage capacity, processing

Interface Introduction capability, and client number.
ONW39 Lecture 0.3d  Describe the structure of M2000 system

 Describe the commands in UNIX system.
 Describe the UNIX hard disk management.
Operation System Management
 Describe the UNIX network configuration
ONW11 Lecture 0.3d management.
 Describe the UNIX backup and restoration.
Database Management  Initialize and drop devices in database.

 Define the database parameters.
ONW12 Lecture 0.3d
 Perform database security administration.
 Perform database backup and restore.
iManager M2000V200R011 System  Describe topology management function and
Administration
perform topology management.
 Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
 Collect and browse logs from M2000.
iManager M2000V200R011 Server Operation and  Implement the routine maintenance items of
Maintenance - SUN
1.5d M2000V2 such as checking the disk space
ONW36 Lecture
usage, querying the log information and
checking software version.
iManager M2000V200R011 Trouble shooting  Manage the M2000V2 and database
Lecture processes.
ONW37 0.6d
 Perform M2000V2 data backup and
restoration.
Target Audience
 Install the M2000V2 system license.
All wireless engineer  Install and upgrade the NE mediation software.
M2000 system administration engineer  Describe the strictly prohibited operations.
M2000 server administration engineer  Describe the method to eliminate faults in
M2000V2 system.
Prerequisites  Collect files and logs for M2000V2 problem
locating.
 Perform basic troubleshooting to M2000V2
application, database and operating system.
Objectives
Duration
4.5 working days
be able to:
583
Class Size Min 6，max 12
584
23.1.6 iManager M2000V200R011System Administration Training (ATAE Cluster)
Training Path
 Describe ATAE platform
iManager M2000V200R011 System Overview  Describe the basic concept and structure of
- ATAE Cluster ATAE Cluster
ONW21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d  Describe the networking and technology
solution of ATAE Cluster
iManager M2000V200R011 Northbound  Describe the system structure and basic

Interface Introduction function of OSMU
 Describe the system management of OSMU
ONW29 Lecture 0.3d
 Describe the equipment management, service
management, software management, general
iManager M2000V200R011 ATAE Cluster
Server Operation and Maintenance maintenance OSMU
 Describe the method to backup and restore the
different data types of ATAE Cluster
 The types of M2000 northbound interfaces and
iManager M2000V200R011 System
Administration their suitable scenarios
 The functions of M2000 northbound interfaces
 How to configure M2000 northbound interfaces
 How to use and maintenance M2000
Target Audience northbound interfaces
All wireless engineer  Describe topology management function and

M2000 server administration engineer
 Perform M2000V2 system user administration.
M2000 system administration engineer
 Collect and browse logs from M2000.
Duration
Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication and 3 working days

mobile communication Class Size
Objectives
Min 6，max 12
be able to:
585
23.1.7 iManager M2000V200R011 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
iManager M2000V200R011 System Overview - M2000 system, including system capacity,
SUN bandwidth, storage capacity, processing
ONW20 Lecture 0.5d capability, and client number.
 Describe the alarm categories and levels in
iManager M2000V200R011 Client Monitor and M2000V2 system.
Maintenance  Describe the alarm processing ability
supported by the M2000V2 server.
 Browse and query the current alarms in
M2000V2 clients.
iManager M2000V200R011 Client  Manage the alarm level and name in M2000V2
Performance and Maintenance
and NE.
ONW24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.8d  Describe the performance counter and object
categories in M2000V2 system.
Target Audience  Query the performance result by the setting

conditions.
All wireless engineer
 Export the performance result files.
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance
 Check the performance task status.
 Query the NE configuration data from
M2000V2 Performance Operation and
M2000V2 client.
 Configure data to NE from M2000V2 client.
 Describe the performance counter categories
Prerequisites and the difference between them.
 Having basic knowledge in telecommunication  Describe the performance object categories.

and mobile communication  Query the performance result by the setting
Objectives conditions.
 Export the performance result file.
 Define the performance query template.
be able to:
 Check the performance task status.
architecture, software architecture, typical
Duration
configuration and interfaces of the M2000V2.
 Describe the software structure of the 2.5 working days
M2000V2 equipment, the functions of different Class Size
parts.
Min 6，max 12
system from the aspects of system security.
586
23.1.8 iManager M2000V200R011 New Features Training
Training Path
Objectives
iManager M2000V200R011 New Features
Training
ONW41 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
 List the new function of M2000V2R11
Target Audience
 List the changes of functions of M2000 GUI
M2000 system administration engineer between M2000V2R10 and R11 version
M2000V2 Alarm Operation and Maintenance Duration
1 working day
M2000V2 Performance Operation and
Maintenance Technician and Engineer Class Size
587
23.2 PRS Training
23.2.1 iManager PRS V100R006 Client Application
Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS V100R006 Client On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Application
 Describe the structure and data processing
ONR11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
procedure of PRS V100R006 system
 Describe the functions and features of PRS
V100R006 system
Target Audience
 Perform routine PRS client operations such as
Radio Network Optimization Engineers KPI management, performance report
management and etc
 Having basic knowledge in wireless network 1 working day

performance management Class Size
Min 6，max 12
588
Training Path
Objectives
Application be able to:

V100R007 system
Target Audience
management and etc

Min 6，max 12
589
Training Path
Objectives
Application be able to:

V100R008 system
Target Audience
management and etc

Min 6，max 12
590
23.3 Nastar Training
23.3.1 iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM Performance Analysis System Application
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the structure and the data collection
iManager Nastar V600R008 GSM procedure of iManager Nastar V600R008
Performance Analysis System Application
 Describe the network optimization procedure
ONO11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d with Nastar
 Perform routine operations with Nastar client
 Perform different GSM analysis tasks such as
Target Audience
GSM MR analysis, GSM neighboring cell
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers analysis, GSM frequency analysis and etc
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 Having basic knowledge in GSM radio network Class Size
optimization
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
591
23.3.2 iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA Performance Analysis System

Application
Training Path
 Describe the structure and and the data
collection procedure of iManager Nastar
iManager Nastar V600R008 WCDMA V600R008
Performance Analysis System Application  Describe the network optimization procedure
 Perform different UMTS analysis tasks such as
Target Audience Coverage Analysis, Uplink Interference
Analysis, Intra-frequency Neighboring Cell
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Engineers
Analysis, Pilot Pollution Analysis and etc
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 Having basic knowledge in WCDMA radio
Class Size
network optimization

be able to:
592
Training Path
Objectives
iManager Nastar V600R009 GSM On completion of this program, the participants will
Performance Analysis System Application be able to:

ONO21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
procedure of iManager Nastar V600R009
Target Audience with Nastar
GSM MR analysis, GSM
Prerequisites
Duration
 Having basic knowledge in GSM radio network
2 working days
optimization
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
593

Application
Training Path
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

be able to:
594
Training Path
Objectives
iManager Nastar V600R010 GSM On completion of this program, the participants will
Performance Analysis System Application be able to:

ONO31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
procedure of iManager Nastar V600R010
Target Audience with Nastar
GSM MR analysis, GSM
Prerequisites
Duration
 Having basic knowledge in GSM radio network
2 working days
optimization
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
595

Application
Training Path
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

be able to:
596
23.4 PRS/Nastar Administrator Training
23.4.1 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (HP)
Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Training (HP)
ONR32 Lecture 1d
 Describe the security management of
Target Audience PRS/Nastar system.
 Perform PRS/Nastar system user
PRS System Administrator
administration.
 Collect and browse logs from PRS/Nastar.
Prerequisites
Duration
 Be familiar with Linux operating system
1 working day
 Be familiar with Database database system
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
597
23.4.2 iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator Training (ATAE)
Training Path
Objectives
iManager PRS/Nastar System Administrator On completion of this program, the participants will
Training (ATAE) be able to:

ONR33 Lecture 1d
 Describe the security management of
Target Audience PRS/Nastar system.
 Perform PRS/Nastar system user
PRS System Administrator
administration.
 Collect and browse logs from PRS/Nastar.
Prerequisites
Duration
 Be familiar with Windows operating system
1 working day
 Be familiar with Database database system
Class Size
Min 6，max 12
598
23.5 Probe Training
23.5.1 GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the operation process of GENEX
GENEX Probe V200R003 GSM Operation Probe
 Perform GSM drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP11 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in GSM drive test
 Analysis simple Drive Test problem with
GENEX probe, such as over coverage, wrong
Target Audience
connection of antenna, missing neighboring
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
optimization
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
599
23.5.2 GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation
Training Path
be able to:
GENEX Probe V200R003 WCDMA Operation Probe
 Perform WCDMA drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP12 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in WCDMA drive test
Target Audience
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 Having basic knowledge in WCDMA radio Class Size
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
600
23.5.3 GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation
Training Path
be able to:
GENEX Probe V200R003 LTE Operation Probe
 Perform LTE drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP13 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in LTE drive test
Target Audience
LTE Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 Having basic knowledge in LTE radio network Class Size
optimization
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
601
23.5.4 GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation
Training Path
be able to:
GENEX Probe V300R005 GSM Operation Probe
 Perform GSM drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP21 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in GSM drive test
Target Audience
GSM Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
optimization
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
602
23.5.5 GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation
Training Path
be able to:
GENEX Probe V300R005 WCDMA Operation Probe
 Perform WCDMA drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP22 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in WCDMA drive test
Target Audience
WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 Having basic knowledge in WCDMA radio Class Size
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
603
23.5.6 GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation
Training Path
be able to:
GENEX Probe V300R005 LTE Operation Probe
 Perform LTE drive test with GENEX Probe
ONP23 Lecture, demo 1d  List basic test parameters in LTE drive test
Target Audience
LTE Radio Network Optimization Engineers cells and handover failure.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
 Having basic knowledge in LTE radio network Class Size
optimization
Min 6，max 12
Objectives
604
24 Access Network Training Path
Access Network Related IP Access Network Related

Technology Fundamental Transmission Technology
Training 5d Fundamental Training 1d
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
GPON Fundamental Training
0.5d
605
24.2 FTTx PON Products Training Path
FTTx Network Overview GPON Hardware Installation GPON Advanced Operation

Training Training and Maintenance Training
0.5d 2d 10d
ODN Overview Training GPON Commissioning

Training
0.5d 5d
NGPON Overview Training GPON Field Maintenance

Training
0.5d 3d
xDSL Access Network GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios)

Overview Training Operation and Maintenance
0.5d Training 10d
GPON (FTTH Scenarios)

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Operation and Maintenance
Training Training 7d
0.5d
GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios)

Planning&Design Operation and Maintenance
Training 7d
GPON Planning Training
3d iODN Network Operation and

5d
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and

7d

Principl Technology Fundamental Transmission Technology
e Training 5d Fundamental Training 1d
Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
606
24.3 DSLAM MA5600T Sereis Training Path
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series Planning Training Series Hardware Installation Series Advanced Operation
3d Training 2d and Maintenance Training 10d
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series Commissioning
Training 5d

Series Field Maintenance
Training 2d

Series Operation and

Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
607
24.4 DSLAM MA5100 Training Path
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100

Training 4d


Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
608

Training 4d


Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
609
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600

Series Commissioning Series Advanced Operation
Training 5d and Maintenance Training 10d


Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
610
24.7 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Series Training Path
MSAN SmartAX MSAN SmartAX

MA5600T(VoIP) Series MA5600T(VoIP) Series
Planning Training 2d Operation and Maintenance 3d
Training
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600T(VoIP) Series
Commissioning Training 2d

Training
611
24.8 MSAN UA5000 Training Path
MSAN UA5000 Planning MSAN UA5000 Hardware MSAN UA5000 Advanced

Training Installation Training Operation and Maintenance
3d 2d Training 10d
MSAN UA5000
6d
MSAN UA5000 Field

2d
MSAN UA5000 Operation

10d

Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
612
24.9 HONET Series Training Path
HONET V6 MD5500 and

UA5000 Operation and

Training
VDSL2 Fundamental
Training
0.5d
613
24.10 BITS Training Path
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and

3d
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and

2d
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation

3d
614
24.11 OSS U2000 Training Path
iManager U2000 Monitoring

Training (Access Network)
2d
iManager U2000 MSAN

UA5000 Operation and
iManager U2000 MSAN

MA5600T(VoIP) Operation
iManager U2000 DSALM

MA5600T Series Operation
iManager U2000 GPON

Training 5d
615
24.12 OSS N2000 Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS

Administration Training
3d
iManager N2000 BMS

Advanced Operation and
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (GPON)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (DSLAM)
3d
iManager N2000 BMS

Operation Training (MSAN)
3d
616
24.13 OSS N2510 Training Path
iManager N2510 Software

Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 Hardware

Test Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510 OLS

Operation Training
3d
iManager N2510
Administration Training
3d
617
25 Access Network Training Courses
Access Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs. List of Training
Program(s) for Access Network Project:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Principle
Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
Access Network Related Transmission Technology

Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
VDSL2 Fundamental Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
GPON Fundamental Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
Evolution and Trends
FTTx Network Overview Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
ODN Overview Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
NGPON Overview Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
xDSL Access Network Overview Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training Ⅲ 0.5 6 ~ 12
Planning
GPON Planning Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON Products
GPON Hardware Installation Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
GPON Commissioning Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GPON Field Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
Training
618
GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance
Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training
GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
Training
GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 7 6 ~ 12
DSLAM Products
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
MSAN Products
619
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and
Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and

Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training Ⅱ 6 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
Training
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and

Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Training
BITS
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
OSS
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network) Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
620
iManager N2510 Administration Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Level Description:Ⅰ:Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ:Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
621
25.1 Principle Training Programs Description
25.1.1 Access Network Related IP Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

IP Network Technologies Fundamental
be able to:
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe the functions of TCP/IP layers
 Describe routing process
 Describe the function and process of ARP
Broadband Service Protocols  Describe VLAN forwarding process
 Describe function and message of PPP and
OBA02 Lectures 1.5d
PPPoE Protocol
 Describe function and message of RADIUS
protocol
MPLS/PWE3 Fundamental
 Describe function and message of DHCP
OBA03 Lectures 1d  Describe MPLS service implementation process

 Describe PWE3 service implementation
process
IP Multicast Technologies  Describe Multicast definition and application

 Describe Multicast network structure
OBA04 Lectures 1d
 Describe Multicast service implementation
process
 Describe function and message of IGMP
Voice Service Protocols protocol
Lectures  Describe SIP function and position in network

OBA05 1d
 Describe SIP typical call flow
Target Audience  Describe H.248 function and position in network
Technical Support Engineers  Describe H.248 message structure and typical

call flow
Operation and Maintenance Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
 A basic understanding of telecommunication
network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
622
25.1.2 Access Network Related Transmission Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Calculation of the optical fiber optical power
attenuation
Access Network Related Transmission  Calculation of the sub-optical power attenuation
Technology Fundamental
 Describe a variety of fiber optic connectors and
OBA01 Lectures 1d
passive optical devices
Target Audience  Description of the fiber optic cable related
knowledge
Technical Support Engineers
 Description of SDH features and functions
 List SDH network protection
Prerequisites
 Describe WDM principle and OTN frame
 A basic understanding of telecommunication structure
network Duration
Objectives
1 working day
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the structure of optical fiber
623
25.1.3 VDSL2 Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

VDSL2 Fundamental
be able to:
OBA21 Lectures 0.5d  Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
 Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
Target Audience
 Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles
Technical Support Engineers  Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
 A basic understanding of telecommunication 0.5 working day

network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
624
25.1.4 GPON Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe the upstream and downstream
technology
GPON Fundamental  Describe the key performance parameters on
distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
OBA22 Lectures 0.5d
received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Target Audience  Describe important concepts about GEM port

and T-CONT
 Describe service encapsulation and
Operation and Maintenance Engineers multiplexing measures
Prerequisites  Describe the QoS and security solution in
 A basic understanding of telecommunication GPON
network  Describe ONT management measures
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the participants will 0.5 working day

 Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
625
25.2 Evolution and Trends Training Programs Description
25.2.1 FTTx Network Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe FTTx features and orientation
 Describe FTTx network solution for
FTTx Network Overview FTTH/B/C/O/M scenarios
 Describe FTTx service solution, such as high
OBA10 Lectures 0.5d
speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
Target Audience enterprise private line services, mobile back
haul services, etc.
Technical Manager
 Describe FTTx OAM solution
Prerequisites
Duration

0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
626
25.2.2 ODN Overview Training
Training Path
Objectives

ODN Overview
be able to:
OBA11 Lectures 0.5d  Describe ODN network solution
 Describe ODN typical equipment
Target Audience
 Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Technical Manager Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
 A basic understanding of telecommunication Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
627
25.2.3 NGPON Overview Training
Training Path
Objectives

NGPON Overview
be able to:
OBA12 Lectures 0.5d  Describe NGPON features
 Describe NGPON implementation principle
Target Audience
 Describe NGPON network solution
Technical Manager Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
628
25.2.4 xDSL Access Network Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe XDSL network solution
 Describe XDSL service solution
xDSL Network Overview  Describe function of components in XDSL
network
OBA13 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe XDSL modulation mode
Target Audience  Describe XDSL band plans and profiles
 Describe XDSL service encapsulation process
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
Class Size
network

be able to:
629
25.2.5 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training
Training Path
 Describe traditional cable network Introduction
 Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview network
 Describe PON+EOC solution overview
OBA14 Lectures 0.5d
 Outline the difference between CMTS and
Target Audience xPON
Training Content
Technical Manager
 A basic understanding of telecommunication 0.5 working day
network Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12

be able to:
630
25.3 Planning Training Programs Description
25.3.1 GPON Planning Training
Training Path
specification
 Outline OLT/ONU hardware architecture and
GPON Planning specification
 Design GPON network for multiple services
OBG10 Lectures 3d
 Design hardware system
Target Audience  Plan bandwidth for internet service
 Plan bandwidth for leased line service
Planning Engineers
 Plan bandwidth for VoIP service
Prerequisites
 Plan bandwidth for IPTV service
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about  Plan VLAN, IP and site name
telecommunications and data communications  Plan QoS
 Be familiar with GPON technology  Design security and protection solution
 At least 1 years experience in  Design OAM solution
telecommunication network planning Duration
Objectives
3 working days
be able to:
 Describe GPON network architecture Min 6, Max 12
 Describe GPON network design background

 Outline OLT/ONU product functions and
631
25.3.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives

SmartAX MA5600T(DSLAM) Planning
be able to:
OBL10 Lectures 3d  Design DSLAM MA5600T network to carry
multiple service
Target Audience
 Plan DSLAM MA5600T hardware system
Planning Engineers  Plan DSLAM MA5600T service bandwidth
Prerequisites  Plan VLAN, IP and site name
 Plan DSLAM MA5600T QoS and security
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about
 Plan OAM solution for DSLAM MA5600T
telecommunications and data communications
Duration
 Be familiar with DSLAM technology
 At least 1 years experience in 3 working days
telecommunication network planning Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
632
25.3.3 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Design MA5600T(VoIP) network to carry VoIP
SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP)Series Planning service
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) hardware system
OBM10 Lectures 2d
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) service bandwidth
Target Audience  Plan VLAN, IP and site name
 Plan VoIP interface parameters
Planning Engineers
 Plan MA5600T(VoIP) QoS and security
Prerequisites
 Plan OAM solution for MA5600T(VoIP)
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about Duration
2 working days
 Be familiar with VoIP technology
Class Size
 At least 1 years experience in
telecommunication network planning Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
633
25.3.4 MSAN UA5000 Planning Training
Training Path
Objectives

MSAN UA5000 Planning
be able to:
OBU10 Lectures 3d  Describe system structure
 Describe service implementation and solution
Target Audience
 Plan hardware system
Planning Engineers  Plan bandwidth for internet service, VoIP
Prerequisites service, and multicast service
 Plan VLAN, PVC,IP and site name
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about
 Plan V5 or MG Interface
Duration
 Be familiar with MSAN technology
 At least 1 years experience in 3 working days
telecommunication network planning Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
634
25.4 FTTx PON Products Training Programs Description
25.4.1 GPON Hardware Installation Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Introduce FTTx network
GPON FTTx System Overview  Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
frames, boards and cables
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe FTTH/B/C/O solutions
 Install FTTx cabinet, frame and board properly
 Perform FTTx cable routing and termination
GPON FTTx Hardware Installation
properly
OBG20 Lectures 1.5d  Identify the cautions and facts which may affect
FTTx system running due to improperly
Target Audience
installation
Installation technician Duration

equipment installation
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
635
25.4.2 GPON Commissioning Training
Training Path
GPON components
GPON Fundamental  Describe the upstream and downstream
technology
OBA22 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe the key performance parameters on
GPON FTTx System Overview
 Describe important concepts about GEM port
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d and T-CONT

multiplexing measures
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and  Describe the QoS and security solution in
Maintenance GPON
OBG30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Describe ONT management measures
 Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
GPON Service Commissioning frames, boards and cables
OBG33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3d
 Establish the connection and login to the
Target Audience system
 Perform the common basic operation, such as
System and service Commissioning Technicians
query status of hardware and software, backup
Prerequisites
and restore data, system name change and
 A basic understanding of telecommunication alarm query etc.
and data communication  Perform the hardware commissioning,
 At least 1 year operation and maintenance stand-alone commissioning, network
experience of the telecommunication equipment commissioning and service commissioning
Objectives  Perform the commissioning verification

5 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe GPON typical application scenarios Min 6, Max 12
636
25.4.3 GPON Field Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
GPON FTTx System Overview  Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d
system
GPON FTTx Field Maintenance
OBG31 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d query status of hardware and software, backup
alarm query etc.
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and  Describe the general methods of field
Maintenance maintenance
 Perform the alarm query and running status
query by indications of the LED
 Perform simple OLT/ONT diagnose according
ODN Overview to field situation and daily maintenance
0.5d  Perform component replacement

OBA11 Lectures
 Describe ODN network solution
 Describe ODN typical equipment
Target Audience
 Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Field Technicians Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
and data communication
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
637
25.4.4 GPON (FTTx Full Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
GPON Fundamental  Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBA22 Lectures 0.5d
GPON FTTx System Overview
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and technology
Maintenance  Describe the key performance parameters on
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation and T-CONT
and Maintenance
 Describe the QoS and security solution in
GPON
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service
Operation and Maintenance  Describe ONT management measures
OBG51 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3d  Establish the connection and login to the
system
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting query status of hardware and software, backup
OBG60 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
Target Audience process
 Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,
maintenance and verification.
 Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
Prerequisites
configuration, maintenance and verification
 Completion of Access Network Related IP  Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
Technology Fundamental Training or having configuration, maintenance and verification
equivalent knowledge
638
 Describe GPON FTTB/C networking  Troubleshooting internet access service
 Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service  Troubleshooting multicast service
configuration, maintenance and verification  Troubleshooting voice service
 Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service Duration
10 working days
 Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
Class Size
 Troubleshooting hardware and software system Min 6, Max 12
 Troubleshooting ONU
639
25.4.5 GPON (FTTH Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
IP Network Technologies Fundamental  Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
GPON Fundamental
OBA22 Lectures 0.5d  Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
GPON FTTx System Overview technology
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and
and T-CONT
Maintenance
OBG30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Describe service encapsulation and
GPON
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation
and Maintenance  Describe ONT management measures
system
OBG60 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
Target Audience process
Technical Support Engineers  Perform GPON FTTH HSI service configuration,

maintenance and verification.
 Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
Prerequisites
 Completion of Access Network Related IP  Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
Technology Fundamental Training or having configuration, maintenance and verification
equivalent knowledge  Troubleshooting hardware and software system
Objectives  Troubleshooting ONU
On completion of this program, the participants will  Troubleshooting internet access service
be able to:  Troubleshooting multicast service
 Describe the functions of TCP/IP layers  Troubleshooting voice service
640
Duration Class Size
7 working days Min 6, Max 12
641
25.4.6 GPON (FTTB/C Scenarios) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
GPON Fundamental
OBA22 Lectures 0.5d  Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
GPON FTTx System Overview technology
OBG00 Lectures 0.5d
and T-CONT
Maintenance
OBG30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Describe service encapsulation and
GPON
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service
Operation and Maintenance  Describe ONT management measures
system
alarm query etc.
 Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
Target Audience
 Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
Technical Support Engineers configuration, maintenance and verification
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service

Prerequisites
 Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
 Completion of Access Network Related IP configuration, maintenance and verification
Technology Fundamental Training or having  Troubleshooting hardware and software system
 Troubleshooting ONU
Objectives
 Troubleshooting internet access service
On completion of this program, the participants will  Troubleshooting multicast service
be able to:  Troubleshooting voice service
 Describe the functions of TCP/IP layers
642
Duration Class Size
7 working days Min 6, Max 12
643
25.4.7 GPON Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

GPON Theory In-depth
be able to:
OBG81 Lectures 0.5d  Describe VLAN and QoS solution for FTTH and
FTTB
 Describe OAM solution
GPON Advanced Operation and  Describe VPN solution for FTTO and FTTM
Maintenance
 Describe and provision Layer2 features
 Describe and provision QoS features
 Describe and provision multicast features
 Describe and provision network protection
GPON Advanced Troubleshooting
features
OBG90 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Describe and provision security features

 Troubleshooting hardware and software System
Target Audience  Troubleshooting ONU

 Troubleshooting multicast service
 Troubleshooting voice service
Prerequisites
Duration
 Completion of GPON Operation and
10 working days
Maintenance Training or having equivalent
Class Size
knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
644
25.4.8 iODN Network Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

iODN Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OBG35 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2d  Describe iODN networking and hardware
 Describe iODN solution
Target Audience  Outline the benefits of iODN solution

 Perform iODN operation
 Perform iODN management
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 Be familiar with basic knowledge about ODN
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
645
25.4.9 iManager U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 List the main functions of U2000
 Login to U2000 server via client
U2000 System Introduction  Add a map and device

 Deal with the alarm
ONU01 Lectures 0.5d
 Backup and auto save the configuration
 Add a management user
 Perform GPON service pre-deployment via
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance
(Access) U2000
OBH30 Lectures 0.5d  Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via
U2000
 Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
U2000 GPON Service Provisioning U2000
 Understand U2000 FTTx Network Operation
OBH50 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2.5d
and Maintenance Solution
 Describe U2000 FTTx Network Deployment
Solution
U2000 GPON Operation and Maintenance
 Perform Save, Backup, Upgrade FTTx Network
OBH60 1.5d Element

Lectures
 Describe FTTx Alarm types
Target Audience  Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Analysis
Technical Support Engineers  Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Management
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance

Monitoring
Prerequisites
 Perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
 General understanding of telecommunication Management
network and GPON Duration
Objectives
5 working days
be able to:
 Describe the architecture and main features of Min 6, Max 12
U2000
646
25.4.10 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience

OBA00 Lectures 0.5d Prerequisites
 Completion of GPON Operation and

Maintenance Training or having equivalent
PON+EOC Principle
knowledge
OBG56 Lectures 1d Objectives

be able to:
FTTx EOC System Overview
OBG57 0.5d  Describe routing process

Lectures
 Describe VLAN forwarding process
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview  Describe EOC concepts

 Describe EOC technologies
OBA14 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe FTTx basic concepts and applications
 Describe FTTx EOC product architecture
 Describe FTTx EOC MA563x features
Maintenance  Describe how to integrate EOC product in CATV
OBG30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d network

 Describe traditional cable network Introduction
 Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
FTTx EOC Operation and Maintenance network

 Describe PON+EOC solution overview
 Outline the difference between CMTS and
xPON
iManager U2000 Service Provision (EOC) system
OBG59 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Perform the common basic operation, such as
alarm query etc.
FTTx EOC Troubleshooting
 Finish the ONU adding and check the ONU
OBG60 Lectures 0.5d status
 Describe FTTx EOC HSI service configuration
procedure
 Finish FTTx EOC HSI service configuration
correctly based on data planning
647
Duration
 Finish the FTTx EOC service provisioning on
U2000 7 working days
 Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx EOC Class Size
common faults and deal with emergencies in
services and functions Min 6, Max 12
648
25.5 DSLAM Products Training Programs Description
25.5.1 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Hardware Installation Training
Training Path
networking
 Outline MA5600T product functions
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview  Describe MA5600T system features
 List device management method
OBL00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe MA5600T cabinet
 Outline MA5600T shelf
 Describe MA5600T functions of boards
MA5600T (DSLAM) Installation
 Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
OBL20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d  Install DSALM MA5600T cabinet, frames and
boards properly
 Perform DSALM MA5600T cables routing and
Target Audience
termination properly
Installation technician  Describe the cautions and facts which may
Prerequisites affect DSALM MA5600T system running due to
improperly installation
2 working days
equipment installation
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe MA5600T product positioning and
649
25.5.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Commissioning Training
Training Path
be able to:
IP Network Technologies Fundamental  Describe routing process
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe XDSL network solution
xDSL Technology Fundamental
 Describe XDSL service process
OBA20 Lectures 1d  Describe MA5600T product positioning and
networking
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview  Describe MA5600T system features
OBL00 Lectures 0.5d
MA5600T (DSLAM) Basic Operation and
Maintenance  Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
OBL30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Establish the connection and login to the
system
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service query status of hardware and software, backup
Commissioning
and restore data, system name change, alarm
OBL33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2d
query, etc.
 Perform the hardware commissioning,
Target Audience stand-alone commissioning, network
System Commissioning Technicians commissioning, service commissioning and the

commissioning verification
Service Commissioning Technicians
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
and data communication Class Size
650
25.5.3 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Field Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe MA5600T system features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview  Describe MA5600T cabinet
OBL00 Lectures 0.5d
Maintenance system
OBL30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Perform the common basic operation, such as
MA5600T (DSLAM) Field Maintenance query, etc.
 Describe the general methods of field
OBL31 Lectures 0.5d maintenance
Target Audience  Perform the alarm query and running status

Field Technicians  Perform simple diagnose according to field
Prerequisites situation and daily maintenance
 Perform component replacement
and data communication Duration
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
networking
651
25.5.4 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
IP Network Technologies Fundamental  Describe XDSL network solution
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe XDSL service process
networking
xDSL Technology Fundamental
OBA20 Lectures 1d  Describe MA5600T system features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview  Outline MA5600T shelf
OBL00 Lectures 0.5d
system
Maintenance  Perform the common basic operation, such as
OBL30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d query status of hardware and software, backup
query, etc.
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service Configuration  Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
implementation in MA5600T
 Describe multicast service implementation
MA5600T
 Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
MA5600T (DSLAM) Troubleshooting  Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service configuration
OBL60 1d  Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and

Lectures
maintenance
Target Audience  Complete multicast service configuration
 Perform multicast service operation and
maintenance
 Troubleshooting hardware and software system
Prerequisites
 A basic understanding of telecommunication  Troubleshooting multicast service
and data communication Duration
Objectives
7 working days
be able to:
 Describe the functions of TCP/IP layers Min 6, Max 12
652
25.5.5 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
PPPoE Protocol
Broadband Service Protocols  Describe function and message of RADIUS
protocol
OBA02 Lectures 1.5d
 Describe XDSL band plans and profiles
xDSL Technology In-depth
 Deal with noise of XDSL line
OBA80 Lectures 0.5d  Describe XDSL packet transfer mode
 Describe triple-play solution introduction
 Complete triple-play service configuration
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced Operation  Describe and provision xDSL features
and Maintenance
 Describe and provision layer2 features
 Describe and provision QoS features
 Describe and provision network protection
features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced
Troubleshooting  Describe and provision user security features
OBL90 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Describe and provision multicast features
 Troubleshoot complex faults in hardware and
Target Audience software system

 Troubleshoot complex faults in the Internet
access service
 Troubleshoot complex faults in the multicast
Prerequisites service
 Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Duration
Series Operation and Maintenance Training or

10 working days
having equivalent knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
653
25.5.6 iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the architecture and main features of
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series U2000
OBH51 Hands-on Exercise 2d
 Login to U2000 server via client
 Add a map and device
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance
(Access)  Backup and auto save the configuration
OBH30 Lectures 0.5d  Add a management user
 Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
Target Audience
U2000
Technical Support Engineers  Perform VDSL2 service configuration via U2000
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
 Good knowledge of U2000 and DSLAM is Class Size
required for these people
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
654
25.5.7 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning  Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBC22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d
stand-alone commissioning, network
commissioning, service commissioning and the
Target Audience commissioning verification
System Commissioning Technicians Duration
Service Commissioning Technicians 4 working days

 A basic understanding of telecommunication Min 6, Max 12

655
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
OBJ22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d


656
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
OBK22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 4.5d


657
25.5.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
 Describe System Overview
OBC22 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d
 Describe Hardware Architecture
 Describe Functional Features
 Describe Networking Applications
SmartAX MA5100 Series Troubleshooting
 Introduce CLI
OBC21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Perform System Maintenance
 Perform ATM-DSLAM Service Configuration
Target Audience  Perform IP-DSLAM Service Configuration
 Troubleshooting ADSL service
 Troubleshooting LAN service
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
and data communication Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
658
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
SmartAX MA5300 Series Operation and  Describe VLAN forwarding process
Maintenance
 Describe product positioning and networking
OBJ20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3.5d
 Describe hardware architecture
 Describe functional features
 Describe networking applications
 Perform service configuration and maintenance
OBJ21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Perform system maintenance
 Troubleshooting hardware and software system
Target Audience  Troubleshooting ADSL service
Duration
Class Size
and data communication Min 6, Max 12
659
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
SmartAX MA5600 Series Operation and  Describe VLAN forwarding process
Maintenance
 Describe system networking and positioning
OBK20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 5.5d
 Describe hardware architecture
 Describe functional features
 Describe networking applications
 Perform system daily maintenance
OBK21 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Perform service configuration and maintenance
 Troubleshooting hardware and software
Target Audience  Troubleshooting ADSL service
 Troubleshooting Multicast service
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
660
25.5.13 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
PPPoE Protocol
Broadband Service Protocols  Describe function and message of RADIUS
protocol
OBA02 Lectures 1.5d
OBA80 Lectures 0.5d  Describe XDSL packet transfer mode
 Describe and provision QinQ VLAN features
 Describe and provision VLAN Stacking features
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced  Describe and provision PITP features
 Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
OBK70 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 7d
 Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
 Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
features
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced
Troubleshooting  Describe and provision Triple-play service
OBK61 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Troubleshooting complex faults in MA5600
system
Target Audience  Troubleshooting complex faults in ADSL service

 Troubleshooting complex faults in internet
access service
 Troubleshooting complex faults in multicast
Prerequisites service
 Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Duration
Operation and Maintenance Training or having

10 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
661
25.6 MSAN Products Training Programs Description
25.6.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

H.248 or SIP Protocol
be able to:
OBA06 Lectures 0.5d  Describe SIP function and position in network
 Describe SIP message and message flow
 Describe H.248 function and position in network
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System  Describe H.248 message structure and call flow
Overview
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
OBM00 Lectures 0.5d
function and networking application
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series Basic
Operation and Maintenance cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
OBM30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d  Establish the connection and login to the
system
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series Service query status of hardware and software, backup
Configuration and restore data, system name change, alarm
OBM50 Lectures 0.5d query, etc.
 Describe VoIP service implementation process
 Complete VoIP service configuration
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Series  Perform VoIP service operation and
Troubleshooting
maintenance
OBM60 Lectures 0.5d
 Troubleshooting hardware
Target Audience  Troubleshooting software
 Troubleshooting VoIP service
Duration
Class Size
662
25.6.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training
Training Path
Objectives

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System
OBM00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
function and networking application
 Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP ) Service  Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
Commissioning cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
OBM33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
Target Audience commissioning, service commissioning and the
commissioning verification
Duration
Class Size
663
25.6.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

U2000 System Introduction be able to:
ONU01 Lectures 0.5d  Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance  Login to U2000 server via client
(Access)
OBH30 Lectures 0.5d
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP)  Add a management user
1d  Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
OBH53 Hands-on Exercise
via U2000
 Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
Target Audience
U2000
Technical Support Engineers  Perform MSAN multicast service configuration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers via U2000
 Good knowledge of U2000 and MSAN is 2 working days
required for these people Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
664
25.6.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training
Training Path
 Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning
 Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
MSAN UA5000 System Overview  Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
 Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
OBU00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and
ports
 Install UA5000 cabinet, frame and board
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation
properly
OBU20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d  Perform UA5000 cable routing and termination
properly
Target Audience  Identify the cautions and facts which may affect
UA5000 system running due to improperly
Installation technician installation
 A basic understanding of telecommunication 2 working days

Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
665
25.6.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training
Training Path
be able to:
IP Network Technologies Fundamental  Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
 Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
ports
MSAN UA5000 System Overview
OBU00 Lectures 0.5d system
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and and restore data, system name change, alarm
Maintenance query, etc.
OBU30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d
 Check the equipment running conditions, such
as power connections, fiber connections,
mounted boards, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service  Perform the broadband system commissioning,
Commissioning
network commissioning, XDSL service
commissioning
 Eliminate the fault during the commissioning
process
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service  Perform the narrowband system commissioning,
Commissioning
commissioning, voice service commissioning
Target Audience
process
Service Commissioning Technicians
6 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
 At least 1 years experience in
Min 6, Max 12
telecommunication network planning
Objectives
666
25.6.6 MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance Training
Training Path
MSAN UA5000 System Overview  Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
OBU00 Lectures 0.5d
ports
system
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and
OBU30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d query status of hardware and software, backup
query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance  Describe the general methods of field

maintenance
OBU33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d
 Perform the alarm query and running status
Target Audience  Perform simple diagnose according to field
situation and daily maintenance
Field Technicians
 Perform component replacement
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
667
25.6.7 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning
MSAN UA5000 System Overview  Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
OBU00 Lectures 0.5d
ports
system
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and
OBU30 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d query status of hardware and software, backup
query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service  Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service

Configuration implementation process
OBU50 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3d  Describe multicast service implementation
process
 Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service  Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service configuration
Configuration
 Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
maintenance
 Complete multicast service configuration
 Perform multicast service operation and
MSAN UA5000 Broadband
Troubleshooting maintenance
OBU60 Lectures, Case Study 1.5d  Describe Voice service implementation process
 Complete Voice service configuration
 Perform Voice service operation and
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband maintenance
Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting IPM System
OBU61 Lectures, Case Study 0.5d
Target Audience  Troubleshooting multicast service

 Troubleshooting Ethernet port
 Troubleshooting PVM System
 Troubleshooting Voice service
Prerequisites
 Troubleshooting E1 port
 A basic understanding of telecommunication Duration
10 working days
668
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
669
25.6.8 MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
PPPoE Protocol
 Describe function and message of RADIUS
Broadband Service Protocols protocol
OBA02 Lectures 1.5d
 Describe XDSL packet transfer mode
OBA80 Lectures 0.5d  Describe SIP function and position in network
Voice Service Protocols  Describe H.248 message structure and typical
call flow
OBA05 Lectures 1d
 Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
 Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
features
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation
 Describe and provision VLAN features
OBU70 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 5d  Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
 Describe and provision DHCP multicast
features
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Troubleshooting  Describe triple play service solution
 Complete Triple-play service configuration
 Describe and provision hairpin connection and
self-switching
 Describe line test networking and device
Target Audience
requirement
Technical Support Engineers  Troubleshooting system
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Troubleshooting Internet Access Service
Prerequisites  Troubleshooting Multicast Service
 Completion of MSAN UA5000 Operation and  Troubleshooting VoIP service
Maintenance Training or having equivalent Duration

knowledge
10 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
670
25.6.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe SIP function and position in network
OBA00 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe H.248 message structure and typical
Voice Service Protocols
call flow
OBA05 Lectures 1d  Describe provision xDSL service
 Describe provision IMA service
 Describe provision Ethernet service
HONET V6 Operation and Maintenance  Describe provision CES service
 Perform V5 interface configuration
OBU54 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 6.5d
 Perform PV8/RSP frame configuration
 Perform user configuration
Target Audience
 Perform POTS service configuration
Technical Support Engineers  Perform ISDN service configuration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Perform daily operation and maintenance
 A basic understanding of telecommunication 8 working days

network Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
671
25.6.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

U2000
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance  Login to U2000 server via client
(Access)
OBH30 Lectures 0.5d
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation  Add a management user
and Maintenance
2d  Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
OBH52 Hands-on Exercise
via U2000
Target Audience
U2000
Operation and Maintenance Engineers via U2000
 Good knowledge of U2000 and MSAN is 3 working days
required for these people Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
672
25.7 BITS Training Programs Description
25.7.1 SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
network
 Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance SYNLOCK V3
 Outline main functions of boards
OSU01 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3d
 Configure different levels of clock source
 Configure SYNLOCK V3 hardware
Target Audience
 Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V3 network
Technical Support Engineers management system
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Perform SYNLOCK V3 network management
Prerequisites system maintenance
 Perform the basic maintenance operations of
SYNLOCK V3
network
 Complete the maintenance records of
Objectives
SYNLOCK V3
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the common analysis methods of fault
be able to: locating
 Understand basic concepts of synchronization  Analyze the typical faults
network Duration
 Describe the composition of synchronization
3 working days
network
Class Size
 Describe the applications of synchronization
network Min 6, Max 12
673
25.7.2 SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
network
 Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance SYNLOCK V5
 Outline main functions of boards
 Configure different levels of clock source
 Configure SYNLOCK V5hardware
Target Audience
 Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V5 network
Technical Support Engineers management system
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Perform SYNLOCK V5 network management
Prerequisites system maintenance
SYNLOCK V5
network
 Complete the maintenance records of
Objectives
SYNLOCK V5
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the common analysis methods of fault
 Understand basic concepts of synchronization  Analyze the typical faults
network Duration
 Describe the composition of synchronization
2 working days
network
Class Size
network Min 6, Max 12
674
25.7.3 SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Query the device status and alarm via
SYNLOCK V3
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and  Describe the network structure and function of
Maintenance
SYNLOCK V3
 Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system
configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
Target Audience
 Query the device status and alarm via
Technical Support Engineers SYNLOCK V3
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Explain the meaning of network synchronization
Prerequisites  Differentiate between clock synchronization and

time synchronization
 List common technologies for network
network
synchronization
Objectives  Describe common synchronization modes for
On completion of this program, the participants will SDH networks
be able to:  Describe clock levels and quality requirements
 Outline product positioning of SYNLOCK T6020 of clock at different levels
 Describe hardware structure of SYNLOCK  Explain the functions of IEEE 1588v2 clock and
T6020 its advantages/disadvantages
 State the functions of boards and interfaces Duration
 List the typical system configuration of 3 working days

SYNLOCK T6020
Class Size
 Describe the network structure and function of
SYNLOCK V3 Min 6, Max 12
 Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system

configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
675
25.8 OSS Training Programs Description
25.8.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Access Network)
Training Path
Objectives

U2000
Access Network Device Introduction  Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
performance management of U2000
ONU08 Lectures 1d
alarm
 Perform the basic response operation for
U2000 Alarm and Performance
common alarm events
Management
ONU02 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d  Perform the browse and setting operation for
performance events
 Locate the alarm in the network
Target Audience  Explain the networking and application of
Huawei Access network equipment
 Describe the functions of Huawei network
products
Prerequisites
 Describe the capacity and features of Huawei
 Having the basic knowledge of network network products
management Duration
 Having the basic principle and equipment
2 working days
knowledge of Access network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
676
25.8.2 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training
Training Path
iManager N2000 BMS
 Perform server configuration, server startup and
iManager N2000 BMS Administration shutdown
 Perform system user management, N2000 user
OBN56 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 3d
management, NE user Management and so on
 Perform service and process management,
Target Audience
Database management and NTP configuration
Technical Support Engineers  Perform database backup and restoration,
Operation and Maintenance Engineers routine management, emergency management,

as well as know how to use management tool
Prerequisites
Duration
 Having the basic knowledge of NMS
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
 Describe system structure, orientation features,

network application and functions of the
677
25.8.3 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Northbound TL1 interface
 Background of TL1 interface
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Features  Describe hardware and software architecture of
iManager N2000 BMS
OBN80 Lectures 4d
 Describe the functions of each application
components
 Describe typical management solution which
iManager N2000 BMS Installation
may cooperate with OSS and third-party
OBN20 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1d application and cases
 Describe fault, provisioning, performance,
management and security solution
Target Audience
 Describe the solution and implementation of
Technical Support Engineers NBI (North Bound Interface)
Operation and Maintenance Engineers  Perform NBI operation and maintenance
Prerequisites  Describe the solution and implementation of
dual system
 Having the basic knowledge of NMS
Objectives
 Install iManager N2000 system properly
be able to:
 Describe HA solution 5 working days
 Describe Watchman principles Class Size
 Perform Watchman maintenance Min 6, Max 12

 Describe NMS northbound interface
 Northbound SNMP/CORBA interface
678
25.8.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)
Training Path
Objectives

iManager N2000 BMS Introduction
be able to:
OBN00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe network management architecture
 Describe the hardware and software
architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation  Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
and Maintenance
 Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
OBN30 Hands-on Exercise 1d
 Login to N2000 Server via Client
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and
Maintenance (GPON)  Backup and auto save the configuration
OBN50 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d  Add a management user
 Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
Target Audience iManager N2000 BMS

 Perform GPON FTTB/FTTC service
configuration via iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
 General understanding of telecommunication
Class Size
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
679
25.8.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)
Training Path
Objectives

iManager N2000 BMS Introduction
be able to:
OBN00 Lectures 0.5d  Describe network management architecture
architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation  Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
and Maintenance
OBN30 Hands-on Exercise 1d
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and
Maintenance (DSLAM)  Backup and auto save the configuration
OBN51 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d  Add a management user
 Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
Target Audience iManager N2000 BMS

 Perform VDSL2 service configuration via
iManager N2000 BMS
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
 General understanding of telecommunication
Class Size
network and DSLAM
Min 6, Max 12
680
25.8.6 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)
Training Path
 Describe network management architecture
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
 Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
OBN00 Lectures 0.5d
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation
and Maintenance  Deal with the alarm
OBN30 Hands-on Exercise 1d  Backup and auto save the configuration
 Add a management user
 Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and via N2000 BMS
Maintenance (MSAN)
OBN52 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 1.5d
N2000 BMS
 Perform MSAN V5 service configuration via
Target Audience
N2000 BMS
Operation and Maintenance Engineers via N2000 BMS
 General understanding of telecommunication 3 working days
network and MSAN Class Size

be able to:
681
25.8.7 iManager N2510 Software Test Operation Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the function of each functional unit of
iManager N2510 Software Test System iManager N2510 AOS test system
Overview
 Analyze test item such as SELT, DELT
OBS01 Lectures 0.5d
 Understand the limits of measurements
 Perform the N2510 system login
 Perform the System Configuration
iManager N2510 Software Test System
Operation and Maintenance  Carry out the line Testing operation
OBS32 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2.5d  Carry out the line analysis operation
 Carry out the line Optimization operation
Target Audience  Carry out the line Evaluation operation
Duration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers 3 working days
 General understanding of access network Min 6, Max 12

Objectives
682
25.8.8 iManager N2510 Hardware Test Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives

iManager N2510 Hardware Test System
OBS02 Lectures 1d  Describe LTS system typical networking
 Outline LTS system function features
 List part of testing measurement
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System  Describe LTS system typical networking
 Complete line resource configuration
OBS33 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2d
 Perform DMM, LB, FR and DMT via iManager
N2510
Target Audience
 Complete some of the testing demonstration
Technical Support Engineers Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
 General understanding of access network
Min 6, Max 12
683
25.8.9 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training
Training Path
Objectives

iManager N2510 OLS System Overview
be able to:
OBS03 Lectures 1d  Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking
 Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution functions
 List part of ODN common fault
iManager N2510 OLS System Operation  Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
and Maintenance
 Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and
OBS34 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise 2d
maintenance
Duration
Target Audience
3 working days
Class Size
 General understanding of access network
684
25.8.10 iManager N2510 Administration Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Outline the system architecture, the network
iManager N2510 Test System Overview position, the networking solution and the
functional structure of iManager N2510
OBS04 Lectures 0.5d
 Describe the workstation platform solution of
iManager N2510 software test system, such as
PC solution and ATAE solution
iManager N2510 Test System
Administration  Describe the interfaces and its function of
OBS40 Lectures, Hands-on Exercise iManager N2510 software test system

2.5d
 Describe iManager N2510 installation
procedure
Target Audience
 Describe iManager N2510 administration item
Technical Support Engineers  Perform iManager N2510 administration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
 General understanding of access network and Class Size
OS
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
685
26 Transmission Network Training Path
26.1 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Path
Expert
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission Building Carrier OTN Transmission

Professional Network Network
TH02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d TH03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
Transmission Technologies and Device

Associate
TH01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 15d
686
WDM Fundamental SDH Fundamental

Training Training
1d 2d
Ethernet Ethernet
Fundamental Training Fundamental Training
2d 2d
Hybrid MSTP
2d
ASON Fundamental
Note: The training program in the
Training
virtual box out of order 1d
Transmission Network Principle Training
687
26.3 Evolution and Trends Training Path
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training
2d
688
26.4 MSTP Training Path(TDM)
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic /7500/9500 Product Overview Operation and Maintenance
Training Training Training
2d 0.5d 4d
OptiX MSTP Network Design OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and
Training /7500/9500 Installation Training Maintenance Training
3d 2d 3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment
Network Planning and Design (TDM) Advanced Operation and
(TDM) Commissioning Training
4d 5d 13d

(TDM) Basic Operation and
2d

(TDM) NMC Operation Training
10d

(TDM) Operation and Maintenance
Training
10d
Evolution and Trends Principle
IP-oriented Transport Solution

Principl
Training
2d e 5d
Elective Guide
689
26.5 MSTP Training Path(Packet)
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II

Design Training /7500/9500 Installation Training
3d 2d
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet)

5d

Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d

NMC Operation Training
10d

Training
12d
IP-oriented Transport Solution Hybrid MSTP Fundamental

Training Training
2d 2d
Elective Guide
690
26.6 MSTP Training Path(Packet+TDM)
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II
Training /7500/9500 Installation Training
Training
2d 2d 4d
OptiX NG SDH Equipment

OptiX MSTP Network Design OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and
(Packet+TDM) Commissioning
Training
3d 8d 3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) OptiX NG SDH Equipment OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment
Network Planning and Design (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and (TDM) Advanced Operation and
Training Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
4d 3d 13d

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation
Design Training Training
3d 15d

(Packet+TDM) Operation and
18d

Principle
Training
2d 7d
Elective Guide
691
26.7 MSTP Training Path(OSN 500/550)

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation Operation and Maintenance
Training and Maintenance Training Training
2d 5d 4d

OptiX MSTP Network Design OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet)
(TDM) Advanced Operation and
Training Operation and Maintenance Training
3d 5d 13d
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM)

8d
Principle
Principle
6d
Elective Guide
692
26.8 MSTP Training Path(Metro 100/500/1000/OSN 2000)

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic
Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training
2d 1d 4d
OptiX MSTP Network Design OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment
Training Training (TDM) Advanced Operation and
3d 4d 13d
OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation

1d
OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and

4d
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and

8d
Principle
Principle
4d
Elective Guide
693
26.9 WDM Training Path(OSN380068008800)
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation
Design Basic Training Product Overview Training & Maintenance Training
2d 0.5d 3d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

OptiX NG WDM Network Design OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
(OTN) Advanced Operation and
Training Commissioning Training
3d 9d 13d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Network Planning and Design Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training Training
4d 2d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

NMC Operation Training
8d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Training
13d

Principle
Training
2d 4d
Elective Guide
694
26.10 WDM Training Path(OSN1800&OSN8800(packet))
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Operation and Maintenance (OTN) Advanced Operation and
Design Basic Training Training Maintenance Training
2d 7d 13d
OptiX NG WDM Network Design OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation

Training and Maintenance Training
3d 7d
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and

5d

Principle
Training
2d 3d
Elective Guide
695
26.11 WDM Training Path(OSN3800A6800A)
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network OptiX OSN 3800A6800A OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation
Design Basic Training Commissioning Training & Maintenance Training
2d 2d 3d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning
Operation and Maintenance (OTN) Advanced Operation and
and Design Training
4d 2d 13d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM)

OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation
Network Planning and Design
Training
4d 5d

Principle
Training
2d 4d
Elective Guide
696
26.12 WDM Training Path(BWS 1600G)
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network OptiX WDM Equipment Installation OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line
Design Basic Training Training Maintenance Training
2d 2d 10d
OptiX WDM Network Design OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning

Training Training
3d 7d
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line

Planning and Design Training Maintenance Training
3d 2d
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation

Training
5d
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line

10d
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered)

Sub-marine System Operation and
10d
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)

Sub-marine System Operation and
9d
Principle
WDM Fundamental Training

1d
Elective Guide
697
26.13 RTN Training Path(RTN 900)
OptiX RTN Network Planning OptiX RTN 900 Installation and OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation
Basic Training Commissioning Training (Hybrid) and Maintenance Training
2d 5d 7d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning OptiX RTN 900 Installation and
Training(Packet) Commissioning Training (Packet)
3d 5d
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and

OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning
Training(Hybrid)
(Hybrid+Packet)
3d 7d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation
Training(Packet+Hybrid) and Maintenance Training
4d 2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning OptiX RTN 900 Operation and
Advanced Training Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
2d 5d
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and

Maintenance Training (Packet)
5d

(Hybrid+Packet)
7d

Principle
Training
2d 4d
Elective Guide
698
26.14 RTN Training Path(RTN 900 V100R001& V100R002)
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced
OptiX RTN Network Planning Operation and Maintenance
Basic Training Operation and Maintenance Training
Training
2d 2d 5d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation

and Maintenance Training(Including
Training(Packet)
3d 10d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002

Training(Hybrid)
Training
3d 5d
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic

Advanced Training
Training
2d 2d

Training
5d

Principle
Training
2d 4d
Elective Guide
699
26.15 RTN Training Path(RTN 300&RTN 600)
OptiX RTN Network Planning OptiX RTN 300 Installation and

Basic Training Commissioning Training
2d 4d
OptiX RTN 300 Basic Operation

2d

3d
OptiX RTN 600 Installation &

5d
OptiX RTN 600 Basic Operation

2d

Maintenance Training(Including the
Basic O/M Training)
5d

Principle
Training
2d 4d
Elective Guide
700
26.16 Transmission Network OSS Training Path
U2000 System Introduction iManager U2000 LCT U2100 System Operation and
Operation Training Maintenance
ONU01 0.5d ONU12 1d OTD08 5d
iManager U2000 Access Network iManager U2100 Operation and

U2000 Alarm and
Performance Management Monitoring Training Maintenance Training
ONU02 0.5d
Transmission Network Device

Introduction
ONU07 1d
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training

(Transmission Network only)
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic OptiX iManager Security &

Operation Database Management
OTD01 1d OTD02 1d
Transmission Network Device OptiX iManager T2000 Routine

Introduction Maintenance & Troubleshooting
ONU07 1d OTD03 1d
OptiX iManager T2000 OptiX iManager T2000

Monitoring Training Administration Training
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta

System Operation & Maintenance
OTD06 4d OTD07 2d
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas OptiX iManager T2000V2R7

Standby Training Delta Training
701
26.17 Planning and Design Training Path
OptiX SDH Network Design

Basic Training
2d
OptiX MSTP Network Design OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network

Training Design Training
3d 3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON

(SDH) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX MSTP Planning & Design Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM

Network Design Basic
Training
2d
OptiX NG WDM Network OptiX WDM Network Design

Design Training Training
3d 3d
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON

(WDM) Network Planning and
Design Training
4d
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A OptiX BWS 1600S

Planning and Design Training (unrepeatered) Planning and
Design Training
4d 3d
OptiX WDM Planning & Design Training
702
OptiX RTN Network
Planning Basic Training
2d
OptiX RTN 900 Network OptiX RTN 900 Network

OptiX RTN 900 Network
Planning Training (Packet) Planning Training
Planning Training (Hybrid)
(Hybrid+Packet)
3d 3d 4d
OptiX RTN 900 Network

Planning Advanced Training
2d
OptiX RTN Planning & Design Training
703
26.18 Assessment and Optimization Training Path
OptiX SDH Network OptiX SDH Network OptiX SDH Network

Assessment Training Optimization Training Expansion and
Reconstruction Training
3d 3d 3d
OptiX MSTP Optimization and Reconstruction Training
OptiX WDM Network OptiX WDM Network

Assessment Training Optimization Training
2d 1d
OptiX WDM Network OptiX WDM Network

Expansion Training Reconstruction Training
2d 3d
OptiX WDM Optimization and Reconstruction Training
704
27 Transmission Network Training Courses
Transmission Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs.
List of Training Program(s) for Transmission Network Project：
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Transmission Engineer Certification
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission

Ⅱ 15 6 ~ 16
Technologies and Device Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 16
Transmission Network Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN

Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 16
Transmission Network Training
Principle
SDH Fundamental Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
WDM Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Ethernet Fundamental Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
ASON Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Evolution and Trends
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
MSTP
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product

Ⅰ 0.5 6 ~ 12
Overview Training
OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation

Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
705
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation

Ⅲ 13 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and

Ⅱ 12 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning

Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and

Ⅰ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation

Ⅱ 15 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and

Ⅱ 18 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and

Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
WDM
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training Ⅰ 0.5 6 ~ 12
706
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training Ⅱ 9 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 13 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 13 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation

Ⅳ 10 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System

Ⅳ 9 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
RTN
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
(Hybrid)

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
(Packet)

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
(Hybrid+Packet)
707
OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
(Hybrid+Packet)
OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance

Ⅳ 10 6 ~ 12
Training(Including the Basic O/M Training)
OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Transmission Network OSS
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network

Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 16
only)
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 16
iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 16
OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training Ⅲ 4 2~6
708
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Planning and Design
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design

Ⅳ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Design Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design

Ⅳ 4 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet) Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid) Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid) Ⅳ 4 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
Training
Assessment and Optimization
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training Ⅳ 3 4~8
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training Ⅳ 3 4~8
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training Ⅳ 3 4~8
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training Ⅳ 2 4~8
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training Ⅳ 1 4~8
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training Ⅳ 2 4~8
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training Ⅳ 3 4~8
Level Description:Ⅰ:Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ:Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert Course
709
27.1 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs
27.1.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device

Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic concept of MPLS
 Describe the basic concept of PWE3
Transmission Technologies and Device  Describe the common SDH network topologies
and their features
OTH01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 15d
 Explain the protection mechanism of
MSP/SNCP
Target Audience
 Explain the system structure and features of
Personnel who are going to take HCNA the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
HTTD(Huawei Certified Network  State the main functions of the boards in the
Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device) OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
exam  Accomplish the SDH network configuration and
Personnel who expect to learn about basic optical monitoring through NMS
transmission principles and Huawei SDH  Accomplish the PDH service configuration
equipment operation through NMS
Prerequisites  Accomplish the Ethernet service
(EPL/EVPL/EPLAN) configuration through
 Having a general knowledge of
NMS
telecommunications
 List the common analysis methods of fault
Objectives
locating
be able to:
15 working days
 Describe SDH working principle
Class Size
 Describe WDM working principle
 Describe OTN working principle Min 6, Max 16
 Describe Ethernet working principle
710
27.1.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
commissioning
 Describe the complex Networking of SDH
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission  Replacing the SDH Board
Network
 Analyze the discrete services on the NMS
 Tests for common Ethernet services indicators
 Describe the principle of the clock protection
Target Audience
 Describes the notes to do the SDH equipment
Personnel who are going to take HCNP interconnection
HTMN(MSTP)(Huawei Certified Network  Complete the ECC maintenance
Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission  Describes the methods for handling typical
Network) exam faults and alarms to troubleshoot networks in
Personnel who expect to learn SDH network practice
commissioning, maintenance and troubleshooting  Describes the mechanism of pointer
Prerequisites justification
 Describes the functions of ASON
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device) Duration
exam or having equivalent knowledge 10 working days


be able to:
 Describe the procedure of the SDH equipment
711
27.1.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
 Describe the network topologies and signal
flow
Building Carrier OTN Transmission  Implement the data configuration through
Network
iManager U2000
 Implement the single station and system
commissioning step by step through
Target Audience iManager U2000
Personnel who are going to take HCNP  List the common indices of WDM product and
HTON(OTN)(Huawei Certified Network perform the testing
Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission  Describe the WDM protection principle

Network) exam  Describe the notice of traffic interconnection
Personnel who expect to learn WDM network  Describe the principle of ALC/IPA/APE
configuration, commissioning, maintenance and  Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
Prerequisites testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
replacement, etc
Pass HCNA HTTD(Huawei Certified Network
 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
from troubleshooting practice
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Duration
Objectives
10 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Describe the function and features of WDM Min 6, Max 16
cabinet, sub-rack and boards
712
27.2 Principle Training Programs
27.2.1 SDH Fundamental Training
Training Path
signal to SDH signal
 Outline the function of section and path
SDH Principle overhead
 Explain the working mechanism of the pointer
OTA01 Lecture 1d
 Describe the common SDH network topologies
and their features
 Explain the protection mechanism of linear
SDH Networking and Protection
MSP
OTA02 Lecture 1d  Explain the protection mechanism of MS
shared protection ring
Target Audience
 Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
SDH series equipment operation and maintenance ring/mesh topology
engineer  Analyze the service signal flow before/after the
Prerequisites protection switch takes place

Duration
 NA
Class Size
 Describe the structure of the SDH frame

 Illustrate the multiplexing procedure of PDH
713
27.2.2 WDM Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

WDM Basics
be able to:
OTC01 Lecture 1d  Describe the function module and network
structure of WDM system
Target Audience
 Outline the characteristics of various fibers
WDM network operation and maintenance  Explain the functions and characteristics of
engineer various optical components
Prerequisites  Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
for example optical source, optical amplifiers,
Having working experience in the planning and
etc
design of WDM networks
 Describe the characteristics of optical interface
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM
in WDM system
Network Design Basic Training and OptiX NG
Duration
WDM Network Design Training or having
equivalent knowledge 1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
714
27.2.3 Ethernet Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Illustrate the Ethernet frame structure
 Describe the function of VLAN and L2
Ethernet Basics switching
 Outline the classification of Ethernet service
OTA03 Lecture 2d
 Explain the function and applications of
Target Audience different types Ethernet service
 Outline the basic concepts of data traffic
Personnel who requires a general knowledge of
 List basic concepts of network and internet
Ethernet over SDH technology
 Describe the applications of familiar protocol
Prerequisites
and standard
Having a general knowledge of data  Illustrate basic structure of IP network
telecommunications  Tell the basic knowledge of IP address
Objectives Duration

 Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Min 6, Max 12
 Explain the technical background of the
Ethernet and its basic concepts
715
27.2.4 ASON Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

ASON Basics
be able to:
OTA07 Lecture 1d  Outline the standards of ASON
 Illustrate the structure of ASON
Target Audience
 Describe the networking characters of ASON
Technical manager, ASON operation and  Explain the service characters of ASON
maintenance engineer Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having a general knowledge of SDH and data Class Size
telecommunications basics
Min 6, Max 12
716
27.2.5 Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe the classification of IP addresses
 Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction  Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
 Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Hybrid MSTP
 Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
 Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
Hybrid MSTP Network Application
for Ethernet
OTA46 Lecture 1d  Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for TDM E1
Target Audience
 Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer networking
Hybrid MSTP novice  Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance MSTP product
engineer  Classify the service types of Ethernet
Prerequisites  Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

Duration
Having a general knowledge of SDH and Ethernet
communications basics 2 working days

be able to:
717
27.3 Evolution and Trends Training Programs
27.3.1 IP-oriented Transport Solution Training
Training Path
Objectives

Hybrid MSTP Network Overview
be able to:
OTA08 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the background of OptiX Hybrid
MSTP
 Explain the service characters of OptiX Hybrid
All IP Transport Network Solution MSTP
 Describe the networking characters of OptiX
OTA19 Lecture 0.5d Hybrid MSTP
 Outline the difference of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
network from other network technology
Metro OTN Solution  List the trend of Metro transmission network
0.5d  Illustrate the features of OTN

OTC09 Lecture
 Describe the application of Huawei OTN
products
OptiX RTN Microwave Network Overview  List the equipment types of OptiX RTN
 Outline main functions of OptiX RTN equipment
OTF48 Lecture 0.5d  Describe typical networking and protection of
OptiX RTN equipment
Target Audience
 Know the typical solutions of OptiX RTN
Technical manager equipment
 Outline the technologies of the transmission
Personnel who requires a general understanding network for All-IP service
of Huawei OptiX RTN equipment and solution  Describe the solutions for All-IP network
Prerequisites  Compare the All-IP transport solutions and
figure out the difference
 Having the basic knowledge about
Duration
telecommunications network, especially
transmission network 2 working days
 Having the experience for telecommunications Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
718
27.4 MSTP Training Programs
27.4.1 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Product Overview Training
Training Path  List the function of transmission network

 Describe the network application of the OptiX
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Product Overview NG SDH & OCS system
 Describe the structure of the OptiX NG SDH &
OTA27 Lecture 0.5d
OCS equipment
 List the main cards of the OptiX NG SDH &
Target Audience
OCS equipment
Non-technical manager  Understand the features of the OptiX NG SDH
OptiX NG SDH & OCS products novice & OCS equipment
 NA 0.5 working day


be able to:
719
27.4.2 OptiX OSN 1500/2500/3500/3500II/7500/9500 Installation Training
Training Path OCS equipment

 Outline the main boards of the OptiX NG SDH &
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Installation OCS equipment
 List the equipment installation procedure
OTA26 Lecture, Multi-media 2d
 Describe the preparation for installation
Target Audience  State the required equipment room environment

and grounding condition checks
OptiX NG SDH & OCS installation engineer
 Verify the cabinet, cables and component
Prerequisites installations
 NA Duration
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the features of the OptiX NG SDH &
720
27.4.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path  Outline the system protection modes of the

OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware  State the main functions of the cards in the
Description (TDM) OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
and their features
 Explain the protection mechanism of linear MSP
 Explain the protection mechanism of MS shared
protection ring
OTA02 Lecture 1d
ring/mesh topology
 Analyze the service signal flow before/after the
U2000 System Introduction
protection switch takes place
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Commissioning  Describe the main functions of U2000
 Describe the preparation for the commissioning
OTA32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
 List the items for single station commissioning
Target Audience for OptiX NG SDH & OCS system

 Outline the procedures of network
OptiX NG SDH & OCS commissioning engineer
commissioning for OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Prerequisites system
 Having working experience in transport network  Summarize the equipment/network condition

after commissioning
 Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
 Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course
commissioning
or having equivalent knowledge
Duration
Objectives
5 working days
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX Min 6, Max 12

NG SDH & OCS equipment
 Explain the system structure and features of the
721
27.4.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment

 Outline the system protection schemes of the
OptiX NG SDH & OCS System Description OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
 Outline the operation environment of OptiX
OTA28 Lecture 1d SDH series equipment
 List the status description of OptiX SDH series
equipment indicators
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and  List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series
Maintenance
equipment
OTA30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
OptiX SDH series equipment
 Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance
SDH series equipment
OTA35 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX
iManager U2000 LCT
Target Audience
 Create topology including create NE/Link/NM
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment field maintenance  Perform the NE configuration, board
engineer configuration, service dispatching and
Prerequisites protection configuration for equipment via OptiX
iManager U2000 LCT
 Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
 Having a general knowledge of SDH basics LCT
Objectives Duration

be able to:
Class Size
 Illustrate the networking applications of the
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the system structure and features of
722
27.4.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware
Description (TDM)  Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d or having equivalent knowledge

Objectives

SDH Networking and Protection be able to:
Lecture 1d  Describe the network applications of the OptiX

OTA02
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation
 Outline the system protection modes of the
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
 State the main functions of the cards in the
U2000 Alarm and Performance  Describe the common SDH network topologies
Management and their features
ONU02 Lecture 0.5d
protection ring
U2000 Security & Database Management
ring/mesh topology
ONU04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products  Describe the architecture and main features of
Configuration U2000
OTA31 Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the directory structure of U2000
 Describe the main functions of U2000 Describe
the basic concepts in alarm and performance
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and management of U2000
Maintenance
alarm
 Perform the basic response operation for
common alarm events
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side
Maintenance  Perform the browse and setting operation for
OTA40 Lecture 0.5d performance events

 Explain the concept of security management
Target Audience  Complete the operation of NE and NMS security
OptiX NG SDH & OCS network operation center management
engineer  Explain the concept of data management
723
 Complete the operation of NE and NMS data  List the common indices of Ethernet service
management performance testing
 Accomplish the network protection and SDH  Explain the concepts of common testing indices
service configuration through NMS  Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
 Outline the classification of Ethernet service performance testing
 Explain the functions and applications of  Implement the Ethernet performance testing
different types Ethernet service and analyze the result
 List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH  Know the operation environment of NMS
& OCS equipment  List the maintenance tasks
 Describe the functions and applications of the  Perform the basic maintenance operations
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS  Complete the maintenance records
equipment Duration
 Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
10 working days
 Accomplish the Ethernet service
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS Class Size
 State the purpose of Ethernet performance Min 6, Max 12

testing
724
27.4.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware OTA14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
Description (TDM)
OTA29 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH & OCS operation and maintenance

engineer
OTA02 1d Prerequisites
Lecture
 Having working experience in the maintenance

of SDH products
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products  Be familiar with Windows operating system
Configuration
2d  Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course
OTA31 Hands-on exercise
Objectives
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and
Maintenance OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OTA30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Outline the system protection modes of the
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
Maintenance  Describe the common SDH network topologies
OTA10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d and their features
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance protection ring
ring/mesh topology
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side
Maintenance  Accomplish the network protection and SDH
OTA40 Lecture 0.5d service configuration through NMS
U2000
 Describe the main functions of U2000
725
 Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX  List the status description of OptiX SDH series
iManager T2000 LCT equipment indicators
 Create topology including create NE/Link/NM  List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series
 Perform the NE configuration, board equipment
configuration, service dispatching and  Perform the basic maintenance operations of
protection configuration for equipment via OptiX OptiX SDH series equipment
iManager T2000 LCT  Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
 Perform the routine maintenance via T2000 SDH series equipment
LCT  Know the operation environment of NMS
 Outline the classification of Ethernet service  List the maintenance tasks
 Explain the function and applications of different  Perform the basic maintenance operations
types Ethernet service  Complete the maintenance records
 List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH  List the common analysis methods of fault
& OCS equipment locating
 Describe the functions and application of the  Outline the fault handling flow
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS  Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
equipment error bit, etc
 Describe the features of the Ethernet boards  Illustrate the application of common
 Accomplish the Ethernet service troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
 State the purpose of Ethernet performance replacement, etc
testing  Analyze common faulty of the network consist
 List the common indices of Ethernet service of OptiX NG SDH & OCS series
performance testing  Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
 Explain the concepts of common testing indices troubleshooting practice
 Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service Duration
performance testing
10 working days
 Implement the Ethernet performance testing
Class Size
and analyze the result
 Outline the operation environment of OptiX Min 6, Max 12
726
27.4.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Advanced Operation and
Training Path  Explain the system structure and features of the

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware  Outline the system protection modes of the
Description (TDM) OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d  State the main functions of the cards in the
 Describe the principle and process of TPS on
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Features and OptiX NG SDH equipment
Application
 List the main characteristics of TPS on OptiX
NG SDH equipment
 Implement the configuration of TPS on OptiX
NG SDH equipment
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation
& Maintenance  Describe the feature of power source system in
OTA42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
 Grasp the protection principle and function of all
types of power sources in OptiX NG SDH &
OCS equipments
OptiX SDH Special Topics
 Grasp the principle of cross-connection & clock
OTA36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d active/standby switching in OptiX NG SDH &
OCS system
 Grasp the mechanism of cross-connection &
OptiX SDH System Advanced clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
Troubleshooting SDH & OCS system
 Describe the principle of SCC active/standby
switching in OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
 List the methods of SCC switching in OptiX NG
Target Audience SDH & OCS system
 Describe the traffic flow and service
OptiX NG SDH & OCS senior operation and
configuration about the complicated networks
maintenance engineer
 Analyze the protection capability about the
Prerequisites
complicated networks
 Completion of OptiX NG SDH & OCS  Accomplish the service configuration of the
Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance complicated network and verify the protection
Training or OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment  Describe the working mechanism of the L2
(TDM) NMC Operation Training switching
Objectives  Interpret the basic of QoS
 Outline the key technology in QoS
 Describe the typical QoS application
be able to:
 Describe the frame structure of MPLS
NG SDH & OCS equipment  Interpret the basic of QinQ
727
 List the application of MPLS and QinQ  Accomplish the clock protection configuration
 Describe the working mechanism of virtual and verify it while the network fails
concatenation  Grasp the working principle of ECC
 Describe the function of LCAS  Describe the network application of ECC and
 Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the how to separate huge ECC network into smaller
Ethernet signal networks
 Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods  Illustrate the extended applications of ECC
 Analyze the common faults locating  Accomplish the configuration of ECC, verify
 Outline the procedures of Ethernet extended ECC and DCC transparent
troubleshooting transmission
 Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service  Outline common ECC command lines
 Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service  Get further understand of the feature of OptiX
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and NG SDH & OCS system
service OAM  Analyze common cases in the real network and
 Outline the typical application scenario of figure out the problem
Ethernet service OAM  Locate the faulty of the failed network and
 Accomplish the OAM testing summarize the key point of troubleshooting
 Locate the fault position when error reports Duration
 Explain the meaning of clock protection related 13 working days

synchronization parameters
Class Size
 Explain the basic principles of implementing
clock protection networking Min 6, Max 12
728
27.4.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training
Training Path 1500/3500/7500/7500II

 Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA48 Lecture 1d OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
networking
 Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
MSTP product
OTA46 Lecture 1d
 Classify the service types of Ethernet
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning  Check the equipment condition such as power
connections, fiber connections, mounted boards,
OTA52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d etc
 Outline and perform the commissioning process
for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation  Perform the commissioning process of the
network
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
fault finding
Target Audience  Perform commissioning tests on the equipment

 Perform commissioning tests on the network
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
Prerequisites
U2000
 Having working experience in transport network  Describe the directory structure of U2000
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Describe the main functions of U2000
Objectives Duration

 Describe the networking applications of the
Min 6, Max 12
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
 Describe the system structure of the OptiX OSN
729
27.4.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA48 Lecture 1d
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and  List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series
Maintenance
0.5d equipment
OTA30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance
OTA53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Outline the function of basic menus of iManager
U2000 LCT
Target Audience
 Create topology including create NE/Link
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance engineer  Perform the NE configuration, board
Prerequisites configuration, and service dispatching and
protection configuration for equipment via
 Be familiar with Windows operating system iManager U2000 LCT
 Having a general knowledge of SDH basics  Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
Objectives LCT

 Describe the networking applications of the Class Size
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
 Describe the system structure of the OptiX OSN Min 6, Max 12
1500/3500/7500/7500II
730
27.4.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training
Training Path  Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics and

OTA45 Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction courses or having equivalent knowledge

Objectives
OTA45 Lecture 1d
be able to:
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description
OTA48 Lecture 1d  Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
 Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX
Hybrid MSTP
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation  Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
for Ethernet
for TDM E1
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products
Configuration  Describe the networking applications of the
OTA49 Hands-on exercise 3d OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application  Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side U2000
 Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Hybrid MSTP Network Application  Configure the protection of TDM plane & packet
transport plane for the network and equipment
OTA46 Lecture 1d
 Configure the common services for the TDM
plane
 Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service in
Target Audience the packet transport plane
 Outline the QoS model
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer
 Describe QoS basic concepts
Prerequisites
 Having working experience in transport network  Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
 Be familiar with Windows operating system MSTP network
731
 Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system equipment
according to the service demand  Perform the basic maintenance operations for
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and Hybrid MSTP equipment
service OAM  Complete the maintenance records
 Outline the typical application scenario of  Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Ethernet service OAM networking
 Describe the working mechanism and  Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
application scene of MPLS OAM MSTP product
 Describe the working mechanism and  Classify the service types of Ethernet
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM  Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
 Describe the working mechanism and Duration
application scene of PW OAM
10 working days
 Accomplish the OAM testing
Class Size
 Locate the fault position when error reports
 Describe the operation environment of NMS Min 6, Max 12
 List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP
732
27.4.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction OTA46 Lecture 1d
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description
Prerequisites
OTA48 Lecture 1d
 Having working experience in transport network
Objectives
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products  Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Configuration
Hands-on exercise  Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX
OTA49 3d
Hybrid MSTP
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application
for Ethernet
OTA50 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for TDM E1
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance
OTA53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

U2000
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System  Describe the directory structure of U2000

Troubleshooting  Describe the main functions of U2000
OTA54 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
 Configure the protection of TDM plane & packet
transport plane for the network and equipment
plane
733
 Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service in  Create topology including create NE/Link
the packet transport plane  Perform the NE configuration, board
 Outline the QoS model configuration, and service dispatching and
 Describe QoS basic concepts protection configuration for equipment via
 Outline the key technology in QoS iManager U2000 LCT
 Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid  Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
MSTP network LCT
 Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system  List the common analysis methods of packet
according to the service demand network fault locating
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and  Outline the fault handling flow
service OAM  Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
 Outline the typical application scenario of APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc
Ethernet service OAM  Illustrate the application of common
 Describe the working mechanism and troubleshooting methods for packet network
application scene of MPLS OAM  Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
 Describe the working mechanism and network
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM  Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
 Describe the working mechanism and networking
application scene of PW OAM  Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
 Accomplish the OAM testing MSTP product
 Locate the fault position when error reports  Classify the service types of Ethernet
 Describe the operation environment of NMS  Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
 List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP Duration

equipment
12 working days
 Perform the basic maintenance operations for
Class Size
Hybrid MSTP equipment
 Complete the maintenance records Min 6, Max 12
 Outline the function of basic menus of iManager

U2000 LCT
734
27.4.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path  Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

MSTP product
Hybrid MSTP Network Application  Classify the service types of Ethernet

OTA46 Lecture 1d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Description (TDM)
Lecture  Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
OTA29 1.5d
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Commissioning
 Check the equipment condition such as power
OTA32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d connections, fiber connections, mounted boards,
etc
 Outline and perform the commissioning process
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
 Perform the commissioning process of the
OTA48 Lecture 1d
network
 Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning fault finding
 Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
 Perform commissioning tests on the network
U2000 System Introduction NG SDH & OCS equipment

ONU01 Lecture 0.5d OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
Target Audience  State the main functions of the cards in the
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
 Describe the preparation for the commissioning
Prerequisites
 List the items for single station commissioning
 Having working experience in transport network for OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Outline the procedures of network
Objectives commissioning for OptiX NG SDH & OCS
system
 Summarize the equipment/network condition
be able to:
after commissioning
 Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH & OCS system
networking
735
Duration
commissioning
 Describe the architecture and main features of 8 working days
U2000 Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
736
27.4.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training

OptiX NG SDH & OCS System Description OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA28 Lecture 1d SDH series equipment
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description  List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series
equipment
OTA48 Lecture 1d
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and
Maintenance SDH series equipment
OTA30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  Outline the function of basic menus of iManager
U2000 LCT
 Create topology including create NE/Link
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance  Perform the NE configuration, board
configuration, and service dispatching and
protection configuration for equipment via
iManager U2000 LCT
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance engineer LCT
Prerequisites  Illustrate the networking applications of the
 Having a general knowledge of SDH basics
the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
3 working days
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Class Size
1500/3500/7500/7500II Min 6, Max 12
737
27.4.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction OTA10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP network operation center engineer

U2000 System Introduction
Prerequisites
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d  Having working experience in transport network

Objectives
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products
Configuration On completion of this program, the participants will
OTA49 Hands-on exercise 3d be able to:
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application  Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
2d  Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX

OTA50 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Hybrid MSTP
for Ethernet
OTA46 Lecture 1d  Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for TDM E1
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side U2000
 Configure the protection of TDM plane & packet
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware transport plane for the network and equipment
Description (TDM)
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
plane
the packet transport plane
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products
Configuration  Outline the QoS model
OTA31 Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe QoS basic concepts
 Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
MSTP network
738
 Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system MSTP product
according to the service demand  Classify the service types of Ethernet
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and  Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
service OAM  Accomplish the network protection and SDH
 Outline the typical application scenario of service configuration through NMS
Ethernet service OAM  Outline the classification of Ethernet service
 Describe the working mechanism and  Explain the function and applications of different
application scene of MPLS OAM types Ethernet service
 Describe the working mechanism and  List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM & OCS equipment
 Describe the working mechanism and  Describe the functions and application of the
application scene of PW OAM Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS
 Accomplish the OAM testing equipment
 Locate the fault position when error reports  Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
 Describe the operation environment of NMS  Accomplish the Ethernet service
 List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
equipment  State the purpose of Ethernet performance
 Perform the basic maintenance operations for testing
Hybrid MSTP equipment  List the common indices of Ethernet service
 Complete the maintenance records performance testing
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX  Explain the concepts of common testing indices
NG SDH & OCS equipment  Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
 Explain the system structure and features of the performance testing
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment  Implement the Ethernet performance testing
 Outline the system protection modes of the and analyze the result
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment Duration
15 working days
Class Size
networking Min 6, Max 12
 Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
739
27.4.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction OTA10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
OTA45 Lecture 1d
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products OTA14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d

Configuration
OTA49 Hands-on exercise 3d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application
Prerequisites
OTA50 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Having working experience in transport network

Objectives
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side
Operation and Maintenance On completion of this program, the participants will
OTA51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d be able to:
Hybrid MSTP Network Application  Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Lecture  Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX

OTA46 1d
Hybrid MSTP
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System
Troubleshooting for Ethernet
OTA54 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for TDM E1
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware  Configure the protection of TDM plane & packet
Description (TDM) transport plane for the network and equipment
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d  Configure the common services for the TDM
plane
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products the packet transport plane
Configuration
 Outline the QoS model
OTA31 Hands-on exercise 2d
 Describe QoS basic concepts
 Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
MSTP network
740
 Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
according to the service demand  Accomplish the network protection and SDH
 Compare the function of Ethernet port and service configuration through NMS
service OAM  Outline the classification of Ethernet service
 Outline the typical application scenario of  Explain the function and applications of different
Ethernet service OAM types Ethernet service
 Describe the working mechanism and  List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH
application scene of MPLS OAM & OCS equipment
 Describe the working mechanism and  Describe the functions and application of the
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS
 Describe the working mechanism and equipment
application scene of PW OAM  Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
 Accomplish the OAM testing  Accomplish the Ethernet service
 Locate the fault position when error reports EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
 Describe the operation environment of NMS  State the purpose of Ethernet performance
 List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP testing
equipment  List the common indices of Ethernet service
 Perform the basic maintenance operations for performance testing
Hybrid MSTP equipment  Explain the concepts of common testing indices
 Complete the maintenance records  Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
 Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product performance testing
networking  Implement the Ethernet performance testing
 Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid and analyze the result
MSTP product  List the common analysis methods of fault
 Classify the service types of Ethernet locating
 Outline the types and applications of Ethernet  Outline the fault handling flow
 List the common analysis methods of packet  Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
network fault locating error bit, etc
 Outline the fault handling flow  Illustrate the application of common
 Analyze the typical faults: service interruption, troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
 Illustrate the application of common replacement, etc
troubleshooting methods for packet network  Analyze common faulty of the network consist
 Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP of OptiX NG SDH & OCS series
network  Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX troubleshooting practice
NG SDH & OCS equipment Duration

18 working days
Class Size
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment Min 6, Max 12
741
27.4.16 OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
on the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) Operation & OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
Maintenance
OSN 500/550 series equipment
Target Audience  List the status description of OptiX OSN

500/550 equipment indicators
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance
 List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
engineer
500/550 equipment
Prerequisites
 Having experience in the operation and OptiX OSN 500/550 equipment
maintenance of optical network equipment  Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
 Be familiar with Windows operating system OSN 500/550 equipment
Objectives  Configure protection attributes in OSN 500/550

network, such as SNCP, LMP, RMP etc
 Configure services of OSN 500/550
be able to:
Duration
 Appreciate the networking applications of the
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM) 5 working days
 Describe the system structure and features of Class Size

the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM)
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the main functions of the boards used
742
27.4.17 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
on the OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet) Operation & OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet)
Maintenance
OSN 500/550 series Equipment
Target Audience  List the status description of OptiX OSN

500/550 Equipment indicators
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance
engineer
500/550 Equipment
Prerequisites
 Having experience in the operation and OptiX OSN 500/550 Equipment
maintenance of optical network equipment  Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
 Be familiar with Windows operating system OSN 500/550 Equipment
Objectives  Configure MPLS APS protection attributes in

OSN 500/550 network
 Configure packet services on OSN 500/550
be able to:
Duration
OptiX OSN 500/550(Packet) 5 working days
 Describe the system structure and features of Class Size

the OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet)
Min 6, Max 12
743
27.4.18 OptiX OSN 500/550 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Outline the system protection schemes of the

OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM+Packet)  Outline the operation environment of OptiX
Operation & Maintenance
OSN 500/550 series equipment
OTA56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 8d  List the status description of OptiX OSN
500/550 equipment indicators
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 500/550 operation and maintenance 500/550 equipment
engineer  Perform the basic maintenance operations of
Prerequisites OptiX OSN 500/550 equipment
 Having experience in the operation and
OSN 500/550 equipment
maintenance of optical network equipment
 Configure MPLS APS protection, SNCP, LMP,
RMP etc attributes in OSN 500/550 network
Objectives
 Configure services of OSN 500/550(TDM+
On completion of this program, the participants will Packet)
8 working days
OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
Class Size
the OptiX OSN 500/550 (TDM+ Packet) Min 6, Max 12
on the OptiX OSN 500/550(TDM+ Packet)
744
27.4.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the frame structure of MPLS

 Interpret the basic of QinQ
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation  List the application of MPLS and QinQ
& Maintenance
 Describe the working mechanism of virtual
concatenation
 Describe the function of LCAS
Target Audience
 Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
Ethernet over SDH equipment senior operation and Ethernet signal
 Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Prerequisites
 Analyze the common faults locating
 Be familiar with NMS  Outline the procedures of Ethernet
 Be familiar with OptiX SDH service troubleshooting
configuration and maintenance  Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
 Be familiar with the Ethernet service  Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
configuration and maintenance  Compare the function of Ethernet port and
 Upon completion of OTA03 Ethernet Basics service OAM
course or having equivalent knowledge  Outline the typical application scenario of
Objectives Ethernet service OAM
 Accomplish the OAM testing
 Locate the fault position when error reports
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the working mechanism of the L2
switching 4 working days
 Interpret the basic of QoS Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the typical QoS application
745
27.4.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training

 Implement the creation of ASON network
ASON Basics  Create SLA services and test the protection and
restoration of them
OTA07 Lecture 1d
 Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON
network
 Explain the operation precaution of ASON
ASON Operation and Maintenance
 Explain the fault reported by the ASON network
 Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
 Solve the typical ASON trouble
Target Audience  Outline the standards of ASON
ASON operation and maintenance engineer  Illustrate the structure of ASON
Prerequisites  Describe the networking characters of ASON

 Explain the service characters of ASON
Duration
 Be familiar with NMS
 Be familiar with SDH service configuration and 3 working days
maintenance Class Size
746
27.4.21 OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  List the main functions of T2000V2R7

OptiX OSN 2000 Operation & Maintenance SDH series equipment
OTA39 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 8d equipment indicators
 List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series
Target Audience
equipment
OptiX OSN 2000 operation and maintenance  Perform the basic maintenance operations of
engineer OptiX SDH series equipment
Prerequisites  Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will  Know the operation environment of NMS
be able to:  List the maintenance tasks
 Appreciate the networking applications of the  Perform the basic maintenance operations
OptiX OSN 2000  Complete the maintenance records
 Describe the system structure and features of  Perform the basic maintenance operations
the OptiX OSN 2000
 Complete the maintenance records
on the OptiX OSN 2000
locating
 Outline the fault handling flow
OptiX OSN 2000
 Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
 Describe the common SDH network topology
error bit, etc
and features
 Analyze case of service interruption
 Explain the protection mechanism
 Analyze case of bit error
 Configure the attributes of equipment via NMS
 Analyze case of protection fault
 Configure protection attributes in OptiX OSN
 Analyze case of wrong fiber type
2000 network, such as SNCP,LMP,RMP etc
Duration
 Configure services of OptiX OSN 2000
 Grasp T2000 V2R7 new function 8 working days
 Describe the architecture and main features of Class Size
T2000V2R7
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the directory structure of T2000V2R7
747
27.4.22 OptiX Metro 100/500 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the network application of OptiX Metro

500
OptiX Metro 100/500 Operation and  Outline the hardware structure and features of
Maintenance OptiX Metro 500
OTA15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  List the functions of OptiX Metro 500
 Describe operation environment of OptiX Metro
Target Audience
100/500 equipment
OptiX Metro 100/500 operation and maintenance  List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro
engineer 100/500 equipment
Prerequisites  Accomplish the basic maintenance operations
of OptiX Metro 100/500 equipment
 Describe the functions of basic menus of
Web-LCT
 Perform the NE configuration, board
Objectives
configuration, service dispatching and clock &
On completion of this program, the participants will orderwire configuration for equipment via
be able to: Web-LCT
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX  Perform the routine maintenance via Web-LCT
Metro 100 Duration
1 working day
OptiX Metro 100
Class Size
OptiX Metro 100 Min 6, Max 12
OptiX Metro 100
748
27.4.23 OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning Training
Training Path  State the main functions of the cards in the

OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OptiX Metro 1000 Commissioning  Outline the system protection modes of the
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
OTA17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  Complete hardware and software
commissioning of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
Target Audience
 Interconnect all the equipment and perform
OptiX Metro 1000 commissioning engineer system commissioning
Prerequisites  Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX
iManager T2000 LCT
 Having working experience in the optical
transport network
configuration, service dispatching and
 Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics course
protection configuration for equipment via OptiX
iManager T2000 LCT
Objectives
 Perform the routine maintenance via T2000
On completion of this program, the participants will LCT
4 working days
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Class Size
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300 Min 6, Max 12
749
27.4.24 OptiX Metro 1000 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300

OptiX Metro 1000 First Line Maintenance 1000 equipment
 List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000
OTA16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d equipment
 Accomplish the basic maintenance operations
Target Audience
of OptiX Metro 1000 equipment
OptiX Metro 1000 field maintenance engineer  Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX
Prerequisites iManager T2000 LCT
configuration, service dispatching and
Objectives
protection configuration for equipment via OptiX
On completion of this program, the participants will iManager T2000 LCT
be able to:  Perform the routine maintenance via T2000
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX LCT
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300 Duration
1 working day
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Class Size
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300 Min 6, Max 12
750
27.4.25 OptiX Metro 1000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path 1000 Equipment

 List the maintenance tasks of OptiX Metro 1000
OptiX Metro 1000 Second Line Equipment
Maintenance  Accomplish the basic maintenance operations
OTA18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d of OptiX Metro 1000 Equipment
 Grasp T2000 V2R7 new function
Target Audience
OptiX Metro 1000 operation and maintenance T2000V2R7
engineer  Describe the directory structure of T2000V2R7
Prerequisites  List the main functions of T2000V2R7
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Accomplish the network creation and SDH
service configuration of OptiX 155/622(H)(Metro
Objectives
1000) equipment
On completion of this program, the participants will  List the common analysis methods of fault
 Describe the network applications of the OptiX  Outline the fault handling flow
155/622H(Metro 1000) V300  Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
 Explain the system structure and features of the error bit, etc
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300
Duration
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300 4 working days
 Outline the system protection modes of the Class Size
OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) V300

Min 6, Max 12
751
27.5 WDM Training Programs
27.5.1 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Product Overview Training
Training Path 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical

transport network
OptiX NG WDM System Description  Describe the functions and features of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OTC24 Lecture 0.5d  Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which
Target Audience
include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC,
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance XCS etc
engineer  Describe the protection and features of OptiX
Prerequisites OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
Duration
 Having basic knowledge of telecommunications
Objectives 0.5 working day
Class Size
 Describe the position of OptiX OSN
752
27.5.2 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training
Training Path different units in OptiX WDM products

 Describe the hardware installation procedure
OptiX WDM Installation  Describe cable routing and related installation
specifications for the equipment
OTC04 Lecture, Multi-media 2d
 Outline the safety precautions to be taken
during the installation
Target Audience
 Perform the hardware installation inspection
WDM network installation engineer according to the checklist
 Having basic knowledge of telecommunications 2 working days


be able to:
 Outline the functions and features of the
753
27.5.3 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Commissioning Training
Training Path  Describe the directory structure of U2000

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)  Describe the advantages of OTN
Hardware Description & Application
 Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
OTC25 Lecture 2d
different components’ function
 Describe the main features of the optical layer
grooming and electrical layer grooming
 Describe OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
system signal flow and fiber connection, which
include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
 Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in
different network elements
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Products Configuration  Describe the functions, architecture and the
OTC26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d menus of iManager U2000
 Implement iManager U2000 basic operations,
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) data
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning configuration and system management
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
OTC28 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d
products through iManager U2000
 Configure the typical protection for the
Target Audience
equipment
OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer  Check the data configuration correctness and
Prerequisites validity
 Check the equipment running condition such as
power connections, fiber connections, mounted
transport network
boards, etc
 Outline and perform the commissioning
Objectives
procedure for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
On completion of this program, the participants will equipment
be able to:  Perform the single station commissioning of
 Describe the system structure and features of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems  Perform the commissioning of supervisory
 Describe the main functions of the boards channel
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX  Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
 List the common network topologies and  Perform indices testing during the
network elements of OptiX OSN commissioning process
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems  Eliminate the fault occurring during the
 Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN commissioning process
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems Duration
9 working days
U2000
754
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
755
27.5.4 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the protection and features of OptiX

OSN 3800/6800//8800(OTN) systems
OptiX NG WDM System Description  Describe the status of OptiX OSN

3800/6800/8800(OTN) products alarm
OTC24 Lecture 0.5d indicators
 Describe the running environment of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
OptiX NG WDM(OTN) Field Maintenance  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
Target Audience OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products,
such as board replacement, fiber connection,
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance optical power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager
 Having a general knowledge of WDM basics U2000/Web LCT

Objectives
configuration, and protection configuration of
On completion of this program, the participants will OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via
be able to: iManager U2000/Web LCT
 Describe the position of OptiX OSN  Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products via iManager
transport network U2000/Web LCT
 Describe the functions and features of OptiX Duration
2 working days
 Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX
OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems, which Class Size
include OTU, MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC/ESC, Min 6, Max 12

XCS etc
756
27.5.5 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) NMC Operation Training
Training Path  Describe the characteristics of optical interface

in WDM system
WDM Basics  Describe the system structure and features of

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OTC01 Lecture 1d  Describe the main functions of the boards
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX
OTN Basics
 List the common network topologies and
network elements of OptiX OSN
OTC05 Lecture 1d
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
 Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
Hardware Description & Application  Describe the architecture and main features of
OTC25 Lecture 2d U2000
U2000 System Introduction  Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
signals and function for different layers
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d
 Outline alarm and performance events
generation mechanism
 Analyze the alarm and performance events and
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
locate the failures in OTN
Products Configuration
OTC26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d  Describe the advantages of OTN
 Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
Target Audience different components’ function
 Describe the main features of the optical layer
OptiX NG WDM network operation center engineer
Prerequisites
 Be familiar with Windows operating system system signal flow and fiber connection, which
Objectives include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
 Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in
be able to:
 Describe the functions, architecture and the
 Describe the function module and network
menus of iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) data
 Explain the functions and characteristics of
configuration and system management
various optical components
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
 Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
products through iManager U2000
etc
equipment
757
Class Size
validity Min 6, Max 12
Duration
8 working days
758
27.5.6 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training

WDM Basics
be able to:
OTC01 Lecture 1d  Describe the function module and network

OTN Basics  Explain the functions and characteristics of

OTC05 Lecture 1d  Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
etc
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)  Describe the characteristics of optical interface
Hardware Description & Application
in WDM system
OTC25 Lecture 2d
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
 Describe the main functions of the boards
ONU10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
network elements of OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems

Products Configuration  Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN
OTC26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3.5d 3800/6800/8800(OTN) systems
U2000
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning  Describe the directory structure of U2000
 Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
signals and function for different layers
 Outline alarm and performance events
NG WDM (OTN) System Troubleshooting
generation mechanism
OTC30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Analyze the alarm and performance events and
locate the failures in OTN
Target Audience  Describe the advantages of OTN
OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance  Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
engineer different components’ function
Prerequisites  Describe the main features of the optical layer

of WDM products
system signal flow and fiber connection, which
 Be familiar with Windows operating system include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
759
 Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in channel
different network elements  Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
 Describe the functions, architecture and the OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment
menus of iManager U2000  Perform indices testing during the
 Implement iManager U2000 basic operations, commissioning process
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) data  Eliminate the fault occurring during the
configuration and system management commissioning process
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)  Explain the troubleshooting ideas and methods
products through iManager U2000 for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
 Configure the typical protection for the  Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN
equipment 3800/6800/8800(OTN) troubleshooting
 Check the data configuration correctness and  Describe the fault handling flow
validity  Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
 Check the equipment running condition such as OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) products
power connections, fiber connections, mounted  Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
boards, etc case analysis and practice
 Outline and perform the commissioning Duration
procedure for OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
equipment 13 working days
 Perform the single station commissioning of Class Size
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) equipment Min 6, Max 12

 Perform the commissioning of supervisory
760
27.5.7 OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path  Describe the characteristics of various

protection types and their application scenarios
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN)  Understand the operations related to the OSN
Protection 3800/6800/8800 product protection
OTC62 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Fulfilled the service configuration and verify the
characteristics of various protection types
 Perform the routine maintenance in various
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Operation & protection types
Maintenance
 Illustrate the protection mechanism of OptiX NG
OTC32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
WDM Ethernet protection: VLAN SNCP, BPS,
DBPS and DLAG
 Outline the difference between BPS and DBPS
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Protection
Configuration  Describe the scenario of VLAN SNCP, BPS,
OTC68 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d DBPS and DLAG
 Outline the application scenarios of OptiX NG
WDM Ethernet protection
OptiX NG WDM Features Special Topics
 Complete the OptiX NG WDM Ethernet
OTC67 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d protection configuration through T2000
 Preventive maintenance of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800 system
OTN 1588V2 Feature Introduction  Locate and eliminate the trouble based on
maintenance rules
OTC37 Lecture 0.5d  Illustrate troubleshooting common operation
 List the troubleshooting methods
 Briefly introduce the general workflow in OptiX
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 (OTN) OSN 3800/6800/8800 equipment
Advanced Troubleshooting
troubleshooting
 Enhance the troubleshooting analyze and
reaction ability through case discussion and
Target Audience
practice
OptiX NG WDM senior operation and maintenance  Describe the principles and implementation
engineer modes of the IPA
Prerequisites  Implement the configuration of the IPA

 Describe the principle and implementation
 Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
mode of the APE
(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation
 Perform the configuration method of the APE
Training
 Implement the locating and handling methods
Objectives
for typical APE troubles
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the working principle of ALC
be able to:  Outline the related boards of ALC function
761
 Grasp the configuration of ALC  Describe the principle and the application of
 Explain the IP over WDM principle 1588V2 in OTN network
 Describe the Ethernet service and protection of Duration
NG WDM equipment
13 working days
 Configure the Ethernet service and protection
Class Size
through iManager U2000
 Implement the routine maintenance and Min 6, Max 12
troubleshooting of NG WDM Ethernet service
762
27.5.8 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training

 Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Technology and QinQ
Introduction  Describe the classification of IP addresses
OTC85 Lecture 1d
 Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,
Networking & Application Introduction  Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
OTC86 Lecture 0.5d  List the OSN 8800 packet boards

 Describe the networking application of OSN
8800 (Packet)
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service  Illustrate the service and protection type of OSN
Configuration
8800 (Packet)
OTC87 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Implement the data configuration through
iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service
and protection
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Features  Describe the function and features of QoS in
OSN 8800 (Packet)
 Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000
 Describe the function and features of OAM in
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Routine
Maintenance OSN 8800 (Packet)
OTC89 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Implement the OAM configuration through
iManager U2000
 Implement the NMS side routine maintenance
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) System for OSN 8800 (Packet)
Troubleshooting
 List the common analysis methods of packet
OTC90 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d network fault locating
Target Audience
 Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
OptiX OSN 8800 (packet) network operation and APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc
maintenance engineer  Illustrate the application of common
Prerequisites troubleshooting methods for packet network
 Analyze common faulty of the OSN 8800
 Having working experience in WDM
(Packet) network
transmission network
Duration
 Upon completion of OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance 7 working days
Training or having equivalent knowledge Class Size
Objectives
763
Min 6, Max 12
764
27.5.9 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path and their features

OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Hardware  Explain the protection mechanism of MS shared
Description & Application protection ring
OTC48 Lecture 1d
ring/mesh topology
U2000 System Introduction protection switch takes place
Lecture  Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) product

ONU01 0.5d
 Configure the required
SDH/Synchronization/Overhead units
 Configure the typical protection for the network
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Product
Configuration and equipment
OTC49 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Configure the common services for the typical
SDH networks
 Analyze and maintain the configured
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Field Maintenance equipment/units/services
 Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OCS)
product indicators
 Describe the operation environment of OptiX
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
configuration, service provisioning and
protection configuration for equipment via NMS
Target Audience  Perform the routine maintenance via NMS
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) operation and maintenance
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment such as
engineer
board replacement, resetting etc
Prerequisites
 Complete the routine maintenance records of
 Be familiar with Windows operating system OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
Objectives  Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
be able to:
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) system
locating
OSN 8800(OCS) system
error bit, etc
 Illustrate the application of common
8800(OCS) system
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
765
Duration
testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
replacement, etc 7 working days
 Analyze common faulty of the network consist Class Size
of OptiX NG SDH & OCS series
 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from Min 6, Max 12
troubleshooting practice
766
27.5.10 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training

 Outline the standards of ASON
OptiX NG WDM ASON  Illustrate the structure of ASON
Operation&Maintenance
 Describe the networking characters of ASON
Target Audience  Fulfill the WDM ASON trail configuration

 Complete the ASON routine maintenance items
OptiX NG WDM ASON operation and maintenance
 Implement the troubleshooting for ASON
engineer
common faults
Prerequisites
Duration
 Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800

3 working days
(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation
Class Size
Training
767
27.5.11 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
1800
 Check the equipment running condition such as
OTN Basics power connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
OTC05 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe OptiX OSN 1800 system signal flow
and fiber connection
 Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation&Maintenance
1800 data configuration and system
OTC46 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4.5d management

equipment
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 1800 operation and maintenance validity
engineer
 Perform the single station commissioning of
Prerequisites OptiX OSN 1800
 Having working experience in the maintenance  Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
of WDM products OSN 1800
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Eliminate the fault occurring during the
commissioning process
Objectives
 Apply different troubleshooting methods
On completion of this program, the participants will according to actual faults
be able to:  Perform the common troubleshooting
 Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance operations of WDM network
signals and function for different layers  Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of
 Outline alarm and performance events OptiX WDM network faults
generation mechanism  Describe the fault handling flow
 Analyze the alarm and performance events and  Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
locate the failures in OTN WDM network
 Describe the system structure and features of  Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
OptiX OSN 1800 case analysis and practice
 Describe the main functions of the boards Duration
OSN 1800 5 working days
 List the common network topologies and Class Size
network elements of OptiX OSN 1800 Min 6, Max 12

768
27.5.12 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Commissioning Training
Training Path network elements of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A

systems
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Hardware  Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN
Description & Application 3800A/6800A systems
OTC54 Lecture 1d  Check the equipment running condition such as
power connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Equipment  Outline and perform the commissioning
Commissioning
procedure for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
equipment
Target Audience  Perform the single station commissioning of

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A equipment
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Commissioning engineer
Prerequisites channel
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
 Having a general knowledge of WDM basics OSN 3800A/6800A equipment

 Perform indices testing during the
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will  Eliminate the fault occurring during the
be able to: commissioning process
 Describe the system structure and features of Duration
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A systems
 Describe the main functions of the boards 2 working days
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX Class Size
OSN 3800A/6800A systems Min 6, Max 12

769
27.5.13 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path systems

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Hardware 3800A/6800A systems
Description & Application  Describe the status of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
OTC54 Lecture 1d products alarm indicators
 Describe the running environment of OptiX
OSN 3800A/6800A products
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Field  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
Maintenance
OSN 3800A/6800A products
Target Audience OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products, such as
board replacement, fiber connection, optical
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A field maintenance power adjusting, etc
engineer
Prerequisites OSN 3800A/6800A products
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Outline the common menus of iManager U2000
 Having a general knowledge of WDM basics  Perform the NE configuration, board
Objectives configuration, and protection configuration of

OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products via
On completion of this program, the participants will iManager U2000
be able to:  Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN
 Describe the system structure and features of 3800A/6800A products via iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A systems Duration
2 working days
OSN 3800A/6800A systems Class Size
 List the common network topologies and Min 6, Max 12

network elements of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
770
27.5.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
different components’ function
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Hardware  Describe the main features of the optical layer
Description & Application grooming and electrical layer grooming
OTC54 Lecture 1d  Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A system
signal flow and fiber connection, which include
OTM, OLA, OADM, etc
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Products  Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in
Configuration
menus of iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A System
Maintenance and Troubleshooting OptiX OSN3800A/6800A data configuration and
OTC58 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d system management
 Configure OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
Target Audience through iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A operation and
equipment
Prerequisites
validity
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Explain the troubleshooting ideas and methods
 Having a general knowledge of WDM basics for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
Objectives  Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN
3800A/6800A troubleshooting
 Describe the fault handling flow
be able to:
 Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A products
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A systems
 Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
case analysis and practice
Duration
OSN 3800A/6800A systems
 List the common network topologies and 5 working days
network elements of OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Class Size
systems
Min 6, Max 12
3800A/6800A systems
 Describe the advantages of OTN
771
27.5.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path etc

 Implement the equipment hardware
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and configuration
Maintenance  Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS
OTC59 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d 1600S system
 Implement data configuration, optical power
adjustment, protection configuration and
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500) network expansion through iManager U2000
 List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX SLM 1630/RPT 1660 Operation and
Maintenance troubleshooting methods, such as optical power
OTC61 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
replacement, etc
Target Audience  Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
troubleshooting practice
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance
 Describe the structure, functions and features of
engineer
OptiX NPE equipment
Prerequisites
 Explain the functions and specifications of
 Be familiar with Windows operating system different boards
Objectives  Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE
equipment
 Describe the network topologies, system
be able to:
applications and network protection
 Explain the functions, characteristics of optical
mechanisms
components and the key technologies of WDM
 Implement the service configuration, alarm and
sub-marine system
performance monitoring through iManager
 Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces
U2000
in WDM sub-marine system
 State the service application and protection
mechanism
OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
 Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
configurations and network expansion through
different boards
iManager U2000
 Execute the on-site operation, such as board
replacement, board or equipment resetting and
mechanisms
fiber connection
 Perform iManager U2000 operation and
 Perform iManager U2000 operation and
maintenance, such as alarms and performance
browsing, parameters setting, database
browsing, parameters setting, etc
restoration/back-up, security/user management,
772
 Illustrate the application of common browsing, parameters setting, etc
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,  Implement the equipment hardware
testing, alarm and performance events analysis, configuration
replacement, etc  Implement data configuration through iManager
 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from U2000
troubleshooting practice  Illustrate the application of common
 Describe the structure, functions and features of troubleshooting methods
OptiX SLM/RPT equipment  Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
 Describe the functions and specifications of troubleshooting practice
different boards Duration
10 working days
mechanisms Class Size
 Perform iManager U2000 operation and Min 6, Max 12

773
27.5.16 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path 1600S system

 Implement data configuration, optical power
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and adjustment, protection configuration and
Maintenance network expansion through iManager U2000
OTC59 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d  List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
equipment and perform the WDM products
testing
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)  Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting methods, such as optical power
testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
Target Audience replacement, etc

 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance troubleshooting practice
engineer
Prerequisites OptiX NPE equipment
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Explain the functions and specifications of
different boards
Objectives
 Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE
On completion of this program, the participants will equipment
be able to:
 Explain the functions, characteristics of optical applications and network protection
components and the key technologies of WDM mechanisms
sub-marine system
 Implement the service configuration, alarm and
 Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces performance monitoring through iManager
in WDM sub-marine system U2000
 Describe the structure, functions and features of  State the service application and protection
OptiX BWS 1600S equipment mechanism
 Describe the functions and specifications of  Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
different boards configurations and network expansion through
 Describe the network topologies, system iManager U2000
applications and network protection  Execute the on-site operation, such as board
mechanisms replacement, board or equipment resetting and
 Perform iManager U2000 operation and fiber connection
maintenance, such as alarms and performance  Perform iManager U2000 operation and
browsing, parameters setting, database maintenance, such as alarms and performance
restoration/back-up, security/user management, browsing, parameters setting, etc
etc
 Implement the equipment hardware troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
configuration testing, alarm and performance events analysis,
 Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS replacement, etc
774
Class Size
 Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
troubleshooting practice Min 6, Max 12
Duration
9 working days
775
27.5.17 OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning Training
Training Path menus of OptiX iManager T2000/T2000-LCT

 Implement OptiX iManager T2000 basic
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description operations, WDM data configuration and
& Application system management
OTC07 Lecture 1.5d  Configure OptiX WDM products through OptiX
iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic Operation equipment
OTD01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
validity
 Check the equipment running conditions, such
OptiX WDM Products Configuration as power connections, fiber connections,
mounted boards, etc
 Outline the commissioning process for OptiX
BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment
OTC10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Perform the commissioning of supervisory

channel
Target Audience
 Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
OptiX BWS 1600G commissioning engineer BWS 1600G equipment
Prerequisites  Perform indices testing during the
transport network
process
Objectives
T2000V2
On completion of this program, the participants will  Describe the directory structure of T2000V2
be able to:  List the main functions of T2000V2
 Describe the system structure and features of  Perform the basic operations of T2000, such as
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment start/stop T2000 server and client, backup
 Describe the main functions of the boards database, browsing alarms and performance,
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX browsing help, etc
BWS 1600G equipment Duration
7 working days
network elements of OptiX BWS 1600G system
Class Size
 Describe the network applications of OptiX
BWS 1600G system Min 6, Max 12
776
27.5.18 OptiX BWS 1600G 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the protection and features of OptiX

BWS 1600G system
OptiX BWS 1600G System Description  Describe the status of OptiX WDM products
alarm indicators
OTC06 Lecture 1d  Describe the running environment of OptiX
WDM products
 List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance WDM products
OptiX WDM products, such as board
Target Audience replacement, fiber connection, optical power
adjusting, etc
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment field maintenance
engineer
WDM products
Prerequisites
 Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager
 Be familiar with Windows operating system T2000-LCT
 Having a general knowledge of WDM basics  Perform the NE configuration, board

configuration, and protection configuration of
Objectives
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager
On completion of this program, the participants will T2000-LCT
be able to:  Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX WDM
 Describe the position of OptiX BWS 1600G products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT
system in an optical transport network Duration
 Describe the functions of OptiX BWS 1600G
system 2 working days
 Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX Class Size
BWS 1600G system, which includes OTU, Min 6, Max 12

MUX/DEMUX, OA, OSC, etc
777
27.5.19 OptiX BWS 1600G NMC Operation Training
Training Path  List the common network topologies and

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description  Describe the network applications of OptiX
& Application BWS 1600G system
OTC07 Lecture 1.5d  Describe the functions, architecture and the
menus of OptiX iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic Operation operations, WDM data configuration and
system management
 Configure OptiX WDM products through OptiX
OptiX WDM Products Configuration  Configure the typical protection for the
equipment
OTC08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Check the data configuration correctness and
Target Audience validity

OptiX BWS 1600G network operation center T2000V2
engineer
 Describe the directory structure of T2000V2
Prerequisites
 List the main functions of T2000V2
 Be familiar with Windows operating system  Perform the basic operations of T2000, such as
Objectives start/stop T2000 server and client, backup

database, browsing alarms and performance,
On completion of this program, the participants will browsing help, etc
be able to:
Duration
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment 5 working days
 Describe the main functions of the boards Class Size
 Outline the system protection modes of OptiX Min 6, Max 12

BWS 1600G equipment
778
27.5.20 OptiX BWS 1600G 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path structure of WDM system

WDM Basics  Explain the functions and characteristics of
OTC01 Lecture 1d
etc
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description  Describe the characteristics of optical interface
& Application
in WDM system
OTC07 Lecture 1.5d
OptiX WDM Products Configuration
OTC08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning  Describe the network applications of OptiX
BWS 1600G system
menus of OptiX iManager T2000/T2000-LCT
OptiX WDM Equipment Field Maintenance
operations, WDM data configuration and
system management
 Configure OptiX WDM products through OptiX
OptiX WDM System Troubleshooting  Configure the typical protection for the
equipment
Lecture, Hands-on
OTC12 2d  Check the data configuration correctness and
exercise
validity
Target Audience
 Describe the status of OptiX WDM products
OptiX BWS 1600G operation and maintenance alarm indicators
engineer  Describe the running environment of OptiX
Prerequisites WDM products
WDM products
of WDM products
OptiX WDM products, such as board
Objectives replacement, fiber connection, optical power
On completion of this program, the participants will adjusting, etc
be able to:  Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
 Describe the function module and network WDM products
779
 Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager  Perform indices testing during the
T2000-LCT commissioning process
 Perform the NE configuration, board  Eliminate the fault during the commissioning
configuration, and protection configuration of process
OptiX WDM products via OptiX iManager  Explain the troubleshooting ideas and methods
T2000-LCT for OptiX WDM products
 Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX WDM  Illustrate basic operation for OptiX WDM
products via OptiX iManager T2000-LCT troubleshooting
 Check the equipment running conditions, such  Describe the fault handling flow
as power connections, fiber connections,  Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
mounted boards, etc OptiX WDM products
 Outline the commissioning process for OptiX  Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
BWS 1600G equipment case analysis and practice
 Perform the single station commissioning of Duration
10 working days
channel Class Size
 Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX Min 6, Max 12

BWS 1600G equipment
780
27.5.21 OptiX BWS 1600G 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path  Describe the main functions of the boards

OTN Basics BWS 1600G equipment

OTC05 Lecture 1d network elements of OptiX BWS 1600G system
 Describe the network applications of OptiX
BWS 1600G system
OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware  Check the equipment running conditions, such
Description & Application
as power connections, fiber connections,
OTC07 Lecture 1.5d
mounted boards, etc
 Outline the commissioning process for OptiX
BWS 1600G equipment
OptiX BWS 1600G Commissioning
OTC10 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d OptiX BWS 1600G equipment
channel
OptiX WDM Testing  Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX
BWS 1600G equipment
 Perform indices testing during the
WDM Optical Power Management Topic process
 Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power
calculation
 Outline OptiX WDM system testing overview,
which includes complied standards, system
OptiX WDM System Advanced
Troubleshooting reference points and test instruments
OTC35 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d  Outline OptiX WDM system common testing
indices
Target Audience  Implement the main path indices testing, which
OptiX BWS 1600G senior operation and include OTU/MUX/DEMUX/OA units testing
maintenance engineer  Implement the supervisory channel indices
Prerequisites testing
 Perform orderwire telephone testing, bit error
 Completion of OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line testing etc
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training
 Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
Objectives signals and function for different layers
On completion of this program, the participants will  Outline alarm and performance events
be able to: generation mechanism
 Describe the system structure and features of  Analyze the alarm and performance events and
OptiX BWS 1600G equipment locate the failures in OTN
 Illustrate the function of IPA
781
 Describe ALC technology used in WDM system  Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
 Describe the functions and features of APE WDM network
technology  Improve the ability of eliminating faults through
 Apply different troubleshooting methods case analysis and practice
according to actual faults Duration
 Perform the common troubleshooting
10 working days
operations of WDM network
Class Size
 Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of
OptiX WDM network defaults Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the fault handling flow
782
27.6 RTN Training Programs
27.6.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid)
Training Path
Objectives

OptiX RTN 900 System Description
be able to:
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the relation among the different parts
of OptiX RTN 900
 Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
 Implement the outdoor and indoor components
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d installation of OptiX RTN 900
 Describe the installation criterions for each part
of OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Installation  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
900
OTF18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Describe the system structure, functions and
application of every unit
 Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning microwave
OTF38 Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the networking application under
PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
 List out the protection technologies in OptiX
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid RTN 900 network
Domain)
 Describe the features and applications of the
OTF46 Hands-on exercise 2d
protection technologies
 Finish proper preparations before the
Target Audience commissioning
 Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and
900
commissioning engineer
 Perform system commissioning of the OptiX
Prerequisites
RTN 900
Having basic experience of telecommunications  Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
equipment installation criterion  Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Having working experience in the optical transport  Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
network and microwave products 900
Be familiar with Windows operating system Duration
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave
communication basics 5 working days
783
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
784
27.6.2 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Packet)
Training Path
of OptiX RTN 900
 Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
OptiX RTN 900 System Description of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d
installation of OptiX RTN 900
of OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application
 Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d 900
OptiX RTN 900 Installation
microwave
OTF18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the networking application under
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning RTN 900 network

commissioning
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Packet
Domain)  Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN
OTF29 Hands-on exercise 2d 900
RTN 900
Target Audience
 Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and  Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
commissioning engineer configuration in packet plane
Prerequisites  Implement Ethernet service / CES service /
Having basic experience of telecommunications ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
equipment installation criterion plane via NMS
Having working experience in the optical transport  Describe the parameters' meaning in service
network and microwave products configuration of packet plane
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave 5 working days

communication basics Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the relation among the different parts
785
27.6.3 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training (Hybrid+Packet)
Training Path
communication basics
Objectives
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d be able to:
of OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application  Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 900 Installation of OptiX RTN 900
1d  Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS

OTF18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
 Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
configuration in packet plane
 Implement Ethernet service / CES service /
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning
ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
OTF38 Hands-on exercise 1d plane via NMS
 Describe the parameters' meaning in service
configuration of packet plane
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
Domain)
900
microwave
Domain)
OTF29 Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the networking application under
RTN 900 network
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and protection technologies
commissioning engineer  Finish proper preparations before the
Prerequisites commissioning
Having basic experience of telecommunications
900
equipment installation criterion
Having working experience in the optical transport
RTN 900
network and microwave products
 Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
Be familiar with Windows operating system
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
786
Class Size
 Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
900 Min 6, Max 12
Duration
7 working days
787
27.6.4 OptiX RTN 900 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
900
OptiX RTN 900 Field Operation & application of every unit
Maintenance  Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
microwave
 Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX
RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 NE Database Topic  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
0.5d RTN 900

OTF34 Hands-on exercise
 Implement the maintenance operations of
Target Audience OptiX RTN 900
 Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 series field maintenance engineer
 Describe the functions of CF card
Prerequisites
 Routing maintenance of NE database
Be familiar with Windows operating system  Backup NE database
Having the general knowledge of Microwave Duration
basics
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and
QinQ Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
788
27.6.5 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid)
Training Path
 Describe the concept and characters of digital
microwave communication
Digital Microwave Communication Basics  Describe the theory and function of every part
in the digital microwave system
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
 List the networking application for digital
microwave system
 List the fadings in microwave propagation
 List the common technologies of antifading
900
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application application of every unit
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d
microwave
 Describe the networking application under
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid
Domain)  List out the protection technologies in OptiX
OTF46 2d RTN 900 network

Hands-on exercise
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting  Describe the general troubleshooting flow of

OptiX RTN 900
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d  Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
Target Audience
 Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
OptiX RTN series operation and maintenance RTN 900
engineer  Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites  Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Having working experience in the maintenance of
900
Microwave products
Duration
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and 5 working days
QinQ Class Size
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

be able to:
789
27.6.6 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Packet)
Training Path
 Describe the theory and function of every part
Digital Microwave Communication Basics in the digital microwave system
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
microwave system
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d 900
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application  Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
microwave
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d
Domain) RTN 900 network
OTF29 Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the features and applications of the

 Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting OptiX RTN 900

 Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d locating
Target Audience
RTN 900
OptiX RTN series operation and maintenance  Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
engineer  Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
Prerequisites configuration in packet plane
ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
Microwave products
plane via NMS
QinQ
Duration
Class Size
790
27.6.7 OptiX RTN 900 Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid+Packet)
Training Path
Objectives

Digital Microwave Communication Basics
be able to:
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the concept and characters of digital
OptiX RTN 900 System Description in the digital microwave system
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d
microwave system
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application
 Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d  Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
configuration in packet plane
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
Domain) plane via NMS
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Packet 900
Domain)
2d  Describe the system structure, functions and
microwave
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
RTN 900 network
Target Audience
OptiX RTN series operation and maintenance protection technologies
engineer  Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
Prerequisites OptiX RTN 900
locating
Microwave products
RTN 900
QinQ
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
791
Class Size
900
Duration Min 6, Max 12
7 working days
792
27.6.8 OptiX RTN 900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 State the purpose of Ethernet performance
testing
Hybrid Services Testing  List the common indices of Ethernet service
performance testing
OTF23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
 Explain the concept of common testing indices
 Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 QoS&OAM Technology
 Outline the basic concept of QoS and
OTF36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d ETH-OAM
 Describe the working principles of QoS
 Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
OptiX RTN 900 Clock&DCN Topic service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
 List the planning principles of QoS
 Describe the configuration flow of QoS
 Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
 Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900 System Control Unit and IF
Feature Topic  Configure clock protection
OTF30 Lecture 1d  Configure SSM byte in RTN 900

 Check clock status in RTN 900 network
 Manage and configure ECC link
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting  Configure extended ECC
 Enable/disable ECC link
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d
 Configure IP over DCC, inband DCC
 Configure DCC transparent transmission
Target Audience  Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN series senior operation and
locating
Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line RTN 900
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training  Describe system architecture and functions of
Objectives the SCC unit
 Outline the new features supported by OptiX
RTN 900
be able to:
 Describe the function and application of the
new features
 Know the technical background of the Ethernet
Duration
and its basic concepts
 Draw the Ethernet frame structure 7 working days
 Describe the function of VLAN and L2 Class Size
switching
Min 6, Max 12
793
794
27.6.9 OptiX RTN 300 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 310 System Description Be familiar with windows operating system
Objectives
OTF80 Lecture 0.5d
be able to:
OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
310
OTF81 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 310 Installation of OptiX RTN 310
OTF82 0.5d  Describe the features and application of OptiX

Lecture
RTN 310
 Implement the installation of OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Commissioning  Describe the installation criterions for each part
of OptiX RTN 310
OTF83 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Finish proper preparations before the
commissioning
OptiX RTN 310 Data Configuration 310
OTF84 Hands-on exercise 1.5d
RTN 310
Target Audience  Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 310

 Configure services of the OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 installation and commissioning
Duration
engineer
Class Size
equipment installation criterion Min 6, Max 12
795
Training Path
310
OptiX RTN 310 System Description  Describe the system structure, functions and
OTF80 Lecture 0.5d
of OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Field Operations &
Maintenance RTN 310
OTF85 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d  Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
RTN 310
Target Audience
Duration
OptiX RTN 310 field maintenance engineer
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Having a general knowledge of microwave basics
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

be able to:
796
27.6.11 OptiX RTN 300 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

be able to:
310
OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description application of every unit
OTF81 Lecture 0.5d
of OptiX RTN 310
 Describe the features and application of OptiX
RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Data Configuration  Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 310
1.5d  Configure services of the OptiX RTN 310

 Implement the routine maintenance via NMS
OptiX RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting  Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
OTF86 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d locating
Target Audience RTN 310
Duration
OptiX RTN 310 operation and maintenance
engineer 3 working days
Having working experience in the maintenance of Min 6, Max 12

Microwave products
797
27.6.12 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
 List the types and features of the IDU
 List the functions of boards in the IDU
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Hardware &  List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and
Network Application
antenna
OTF17 Lecture 1d
 Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900
 Explain the functions of AM and Hybrid
Microwave
OptiX RTN 900 Installation
OTF18 Lecture 1d PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Commissioning  Describe the features and applications of the
OTF19 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900
Ethernet services
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Data of OptiX RTN 900
Configuration
2d  Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
OTF21 Lecture, Hands-on
of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
exercise
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 series installation and  Describe the installation criterions for each part
commissioning engineer of OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites  Finish proper preparations before the
commissioning
900
RTN 900
 Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
910950
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will 910950
5 working days
900
Class Size
 Describe the system structure, software and
hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900 Min 6, Max 12
798
27.6.13 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
application of every units
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Field  List all the protection modes which supported
Maintenance
by OptiX RTN 900
 Configure the OptiX RTN 900 equipment for all
types of the network application
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 System
Description Microwave
OTF45 Lecture 0.5d  Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX

RTN 900
Target Audience  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series field maintenance
engineer  Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
RTN 900
Prerequisites
Duration
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size

900
799
27.6.14 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
microwave system
Digital Microwave Communication Basics  List the fadings in microwave propagation
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
900
 Describe the system structure, software and
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Hardware &
Network Application hardware structure of OptiX RTN 900
OTF17 Lecture 1d  List the types and features of the IDU
 List the functions of boards in the IDU
 List the functions of ODU, Hybrid coupler and
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Data antenna
Configuration  Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900
Microwave
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Data  Describe the networking application under
Configuration (Scenarized for Second PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
Line)
OTF44 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d  List out the protection technologies in OptiX
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 protection technologies
Troubleshooting
 Explain the application of OptiX RTN 900
Ethernet services
Target Audience  Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
910950
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series operation and
910950
Prerequisites
Having working experience in the maintenance of OptiX RTN 900
Microwave products  Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet locating
Be familiar with Windows operating system  Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
Objectives RTN 900
 Configure TDM services in mixed networking
 Apply the tag attributes in different scenario
be able to:
 Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN
Services
Duration
in the digital microwave system 5 working days
800
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
801
27.6.15 OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 State the purpose of Ethernet performance
testing
Hybrid Services Testing  List the common indices of Ethernet service
performance testing
 Explain the concept of common testing indices
 Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 QOS&OAM
Technology  Outline the basic concepts of QoS and
OTF24 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d ETH-OAM
 Describe the working principles of QoS
 Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 Clock &DCN service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
Processing  List the planning principles of QoS
 Describe the configuration flow of QoS
 Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
 Manage and configure ECC link
Troubleshooting Case Study  Configure extended ECC
OTF26 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Enable/disable ECC link

 Configure IP over DCC
Target Audience  Configure DCC transparent transmission

 Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900V100R002 series senior operation
 Configure clock protection
and maintenance engineer
 Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
Prerequisites
 Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 V100R002 2nd Line  Read the actual faulty cases of OptiX RTN 900
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training  Analyze the causes of fault that occurs in
Objectives actual network
 Improve the competency of troubleshooting
 Practice the troubleshooting skills in the lab
be able to:
Duration
 Know the technical background of the Ethernet 5 working days
and its basic concepts Class Size
 Draw the Ethernet frame structure
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the function of VLAN and L2
switching
802
27.6.16 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
RTN 900 network
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Hardware & protection technologies
Network Application
OTF42 Lecture 1d
RTN 900
 Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Field Operation RTN 900

& Maintenance  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
OTF14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
RTN 900
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series field maintenance RTN 900
engineer  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
Be familiar with Windows operating system 900 include the AM function
Having the general knowledge of Microwave  Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN
basics 900
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and  List the functions and features of the boards in
QinQ IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna
Objectives  Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900

 Describe the classification of the services in the
On completion of this program, the participants will OptiX RTN 900 network
be able to:
 Describe the networking application of OptiX
 Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN RTN 900
900 include the AM function
 Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN RTN 900 network
900
 List the functions and features of the boards in protection technologies
IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna
Duration
 Describe the classification of the services in the 2 working days
OptiX RTN 900 network Class Size
 Describe the networking application of OptiX Min 6, Max 12

RTN 900
803
27.6.17 OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the
Basic O/M Training)
Training Path
Basics of Packet Switch Network (PSN) for TDM, Ethernet and ATM services
 Outline the PWE3 application scenarios of
OTF13 Lecture 1d
OptiX RTN 900
 Complete iManager T2000 ( Web LCT)
software installation
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Hardware &
Network Application  Apply all menus in iManager T2000 (Web LCT)
OTF42 Lecture 1d  Implement data configuration and maintenance
operations for OptiX RTN 900 series through
iManager T2000 (Web LCT)
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Field Operation  List out the contents, meaning and operation
& Maintenance methods of all the OptiX RTN 900 series
OTF14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d maintenance items
 Complete data configuration and daily
maintenance for OptiX RTN 900 series
OptiX RTN 900 V100R001 Operation &  Explain reasons of OptiX RTN 900 series
Maintenance
common faults and outline the common
methods for troubleshooting
 Analyze the common faults of OptiX RTN 900
Target Audience series and perform the troubleshooting
OptiX RTN 900V100R001 series operation and
 Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN
Prerequisites
900
Having working experience in the maintenance of  List the functions and features of the boards in
Microwave products IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna
Be familiar with Windows operating system  Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and  Describe the classification of the services in the
QinQ OptiX RTN 900 network
Objectives  Describe the networking application of OptiX
RTN 900
be able to:
RTN 900 network
 Describe the basic principle of IP routing
 Describe the MPLS tunnel (LSP) creation
procedure
 Describe the system structure of OptiX RTN
 Outline the MPLS OAM functions
900
804
 List the functions and features of the boards in  Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
IDU, ODU, Hybrid coupler and antenna RTN 900
 Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 900  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
 Describe the classification of the services in the  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
OptiX RTN 900 network RTN 900
 Describe the networking application of OptiX  Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
RTN 900 RTN 900
 List out the protection technologies in OptiX  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
RTN 900 network Duration
10 working days
Class Size
RTN 900 Min 6, Max 12
805
27.6.18 OptiX RTN 600 Installation & Commissioning Training
Training Path
of OptiX RTN 600
OptiX RTN 600 Hardware and Network  Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
Application
600
OTF02 Lecture 1d
 Describe the system structure and software
and hardware structure of OptiX RTN 600
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance
 List the functions of boards in the IDU, ODU,
OTF03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d Hybrid coupler and antenna
OptiX RTN 600 Installation Microwave
 List the common network types of OptiX RTN
OTF07 Lecture, Multi-media 0.5d
600
RTN 600
OptiX RTN 600 Commissioning  List the network and equipment protection
schemes supported by the OptiX RTN 600
 Describe the configuration requirements of all
types of protection mode in OptiX RTN 600
Target Audience
 Describe the functions of the T2000 and the
OptiX RTN 600 series installation and T2000 Web LCT
commissioning engineer  Install the T2000 Web LCT
Prerequisites  Configure services and protection by using the
T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
RTN 600
RTN 600
commissioning
Objectives
 Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX
On completion of this program, the participants will RTN 600
be able to:  Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX
 Describe the relation among the different parts RTN 600
of OptiX RTN 600  Finish proper preparations before the
 Illustrate the installation procedures and steps commissioning
of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU  Performing NE commissioning of the OptiX
 Implement the outdoor and indoor components RTN 600
installation of OptiX RTN 600  Performing hop commissioning of the OptiX
806
Class Size
RTN 600
Duration Min 6, Max 12
5 working days
807
Training Path
Hybrid coupler and antenna
OptiX RTN 600 Hardware and Network  Explain the protection mode of OptiX RTN 600
Application
OTF02 Lecture 1d
Microwave
600
OptiX RTN 600 Field Maintenance
OTF05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d RTN 600
 List the network and equipment protection
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 600 series field maintenance engineer types of protection mode in OptiX RTN 600
Prerequisites  List the routine maintenance items of OptiX
RTN 600
Having a general knowledge of Microwave basics
Objectives
RTN 600
On completion of this program, the participants will  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 600
600 2 working days
 Describe the system structure and software Class Size
and hardware structure of OptiX RTN 600 Min 6, Max 12

808
27.6.20 OptiX RTN 600 Operation and Maintenance Training(Including the Basic O/M
Training)
Training Path
600
 Describe the system structure and software
Digital Microwave Communication Basics and hardware structure of OptiX RTN 600
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
Hybrid coupler and antenna
OptiX RTN 600 Hardware and Network
Application  Explain the functions of AM and Hybrid
OTF02 Lecture 1d Microwave
600
OptiX RTN 600 Operation & Maintenance  Describe the network application of the OptiX
RTN 600
 List the network and equipment protection
OptiX RTN 600 Troubleshooting types of protection mode in OptiX RTN 600
1d  Describe the functions of the T2000 and the

OTF06 Lecture, Case-study
T2000 Web LCT
Target Audience  Install the T2000 Web LCT
 Configure services and protection by using the
OptiX RTN 600 series operation and maintenance
T2000 and the T2000 Web LCT
engineer
Prerequisites
RTN 600
Having working experience in the maintenance of  Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX
Microwave products RTN 600
Be familiar with Windows operating system  Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 600
Objectives  List the common analysis methods of fault
locating
 Outline the Fault Handling Flow
be able to:
error bit, etc
Duration
in the digital microwave system 5 working days
 List the networking application for digital Class Size
microwave system
Min 6, Max 12
809
27.7 Transmission Network OSS Training Programs
27.7.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)
Training Path
U2000
U2000 System Introduction  Describe the directory structure of U2000
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d
 Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
performance management of U2000
U2000 Alarm and Performance
Management alarm
ONU02 Lecture 0.5d  Perform the basic response operation for
common alarm events
Transmission Network Device Introduction performance events
 Explain the networking and application of
ONU07 Lecture 1d Huawei Transmission network equipment
Target Audience
products
U2000 operator and maintainer  Describe the capacity and features of Huawei
Prerequisites network products
 Locate the alarm in the network
Having the basic knowledge of network
management Duration
Having the basic principle and equipment 2 working days

knowledge of Transmission network Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
be able to:
810
27.7.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training
Training Path
be able to:
 List the main menus of iManager U2000 LCT
iManager U2000 LCT Operation  Perform the NE configuration, service
configuration for NG SDH equipment via
U2000 LCT
Target Audience
LCT
U2000 LCT user Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Having the basic knowledge of Windows OS Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
811
27.7.3 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic command of Operating
system and Sybase
U2100 System Operation and  Describe the system structure, management
Maintenance
capacity and menus of iManager U2100
 Browse the SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail
and their alarm through iManager U2100
Target Audience
 Create and delete SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid
U2100 administrator and operator MSTP trail through iManager U2100
Prerequisites  Check the running status of U2100 and perform

the routine maintenance
Be familiar with Windows operating system and
 Perform the U2100 troubleshooting, deal the
Database
NMS and network problems with U2000
Having the knowledge of Operating system and
Duration
Sybase basics
Class Size
 List the features and basics of Operating

system and Sybase
812
27.7.4 OptiX iManager T2000 Monitoring Training
Training Path
be able to:
Transmission Network Device Introduction T2000V2
ONU07 Lecture 1d
 Perform the basic operations of T2000, such as
start/stop T2000 server and client, backup
OptiX iManager T2000 Basic Operation
database, browsing alarms and performance,
OTD01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d browsing help, etc
 Explain the networking and application of
Huawei Transmission network equipment
Target Audience
T2000 operator and maintainer products
Transmission network routine monitor and  Describe the capacity and features of Huawei
maintainer network products
Prerequisites  Locate the alarm in the network
Having working experience in the maintenance of 2 working days

optical transport network Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 16
813
27.7.5 OptiX iManager T2000 Administration Training
Training Path
 Explain the concept of security management
 Complete the operation of NE and NMS
OptiX iManager Security & Database security management
Management
 Explain the concept of data management
 Complete the operation of NE and NMS data
management
 List T2000 routine maintenance items
OptiX iManager T2000 Routine
Maintenance & Troubleshooting  Perform operations of routine maintenance
OTD03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Complete routine maintenance for T2000 and
network
Target Audience  List the common analysis methods of fault

localization
T2000 operator and maintainer
 Locate T2000 NMS faults
Prerequisites
 Get the experience for T2000 troubleshooting
Be familiar with Windows operating system and  Analyze and handle the typical faults
Database Duration
Upon completion of OTD00 Operating system &
2 working days
Sybase Basics course or having equivalent
Class Size
knowledge

be able to:
814
27.7.6 OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby Training
Training Path
 Outline Veritas hot backup system basic
concepts
OptiX iManager T2000 Veritas Standby  Describe Veritas Volume Management and
System Operation & Maintenance
Replication principle
 Describe Veritas Cluster Management working
principle
Target Audience
 Perform Veritas hot backup system basic
T2000 Veritas system administrator operations
Prerequisites  Execute Veritas hot backup system routine

maintenance
Upon completion of Operating system & Sybase
 Perform Veritas hot backup system
Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
troubleshooting
Objectives  Outline Veritas hot backup system installation
On completion of this program, the participants will preparations
be able to:  Describe Veritas hot backup system installation
 Outline the main features of Operating system procedure
 Perform some basic operation of SUN  List Veritas hot backup system installation
workstation checking items
 Describe some basic commands of Operating Duration
system
4 working days
 Outline the main features of Sybase
Class Size
 Start, shutdown, backup and restore Sybase
database Min 2, Max 6
 Describe some basic SQL language
815
27.7.7 OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta Training
Training Path
T2000V2R7
OptiX iManager T2000V2R7 Delta  Describe the directory structure of T2000V2R7
 List the main functions of T2000V2R7
 List the new features of T2000V2R7
 Describe the realization method of the new
Target Audience
features
T2000 administrator and maintainer  Perform the operation of the new features
Prerequisites  Describe the concepts and architecture of
T2000V2R7 distributing management system
Be familiar with OptiX iManager T2000 before
 List the functions of T2000V2R7 distributing
V2R7 version
management system
Objectives
 Add instance in distributing management
On completion of this program, the participants will system
be able to:  Perform the routine maintenance
 Describe the architecture and main features of Duration
T2000V2
2 working days
Class Size
 Grasp T2000 V2R7 new function Min 6, Max 12
816
27.8 Planning and Design Training Programs
27.8.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH & OCS System Description the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
OTA28 Lecture 1d
 Describe the structure of SDH network
OptiX SDH Network Design Basics  Outline the service types of SDH network
 Illustrate the common protection mechanism of
OTA13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d SDH network
Target Audience  List the procedures of SDH network design

 Describe the basic factors that should be
SDH network junior planning & design engineer
involved in the SDH network design
Prerequisites
 Accomplish the SDH/PDH service design
 Having the basic knowledge of Duration
telecommunications and SDH network
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Illustrate the networking applications of the
817
27.8.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path
service requirement
 List the procedures of SDH network design
OptiX MSTP Network Design  Outline network protection types
 Describe the key point of complicated network
OTA44 Lecture, Case-study 3d
design
Target Audience  Figure out the details of network reliability
design
SDH network planning & design engineer
 Perform SDH network design including the
Prerequisites
network reliability and clock trace design
Having the basic knowledge of  List the factors of data service design
telecommunications and MSTP network  Describe the key point of the data service
Having working experience in the planning and planning according to the bandwidth
design of MSTP networks requirement
Objectives  Perform data service design in the SDH
network
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH & 3 working days
OCS system Class Size
 Outline the equipment capacity of OptiX NG
Min 6, Max 12
SDH & OCS system
 Choose the right equipment according to the
818
27.8.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path
system
 Outline the equipment capacity for packet
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design service access of OptiX NG SDH system
 Outline the common boards for packet service
of OptiX NG SDH equipment
Target Audience  Choose the right equipment according to the
service demand
Hybrid MSTP network planning & design engineer
 Consider all the required main points for
Prerequisites
planning a Hybrid MSTP network
Having the basic knowledge of  List the procedure for designing the Hybrid
telecommunications and Hybrid MSTP network MSTP network
Having working experience in the planning and  Perform the Hybrid MSTP network design
design of Hybrid MSTP networks Duration
Objectives
3 working days
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH
819
27.8.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
 List the configuration of iManager MDS 6600
 Describe the characters of iManager MDS
iManager MDS 6600 ASON (SDH) 6600
Network Design
 Perform SDH ASON network design through
iManager MDS 6600
Target Audience  Describe the considerations of ASON planning
 List the steps of ASON planning
OptiX SDH ASON senior network planning &
 Describe the function of ASON planning tool
design engineer
 Accomplish SDH ASON network design
Prerequisites
according to the service demand
Having the basic knowledge of  Perform data import/export operation between
telecommunications and SDH network iManager MDS 6600 and NMS
Having a general knowledge of ASON  Verify the import/export operation
Having working experience in the planning and Duration
design of SDH networks
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the structure of iManager MDS 6600
820
27.8.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design etc
Basics
 Describe the characteristics of optical interface
OTC47 Lecture 2d
in WDM system
Target Audience  Outline the functions and features of the

different units in OptiX WDM/NG WDM
WDM network junior planning & design engineer products
Prerequisites  Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
Having a general understanding of network planning, such as power budget,
telecommunications dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation

and nonlinearity
Objectives
 Outline the design process of WDM network
be able to:
 Describe the function module and network 2 working days
structure of WDM system Class Size
 Outline the characteristics of various fibers Min 6, Max 12

 Explain the functions and characteristics of
821
27.8.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training
Training Path
 Evaluate the WDM networks including the
network architecture, protection mechanism,
OptiX WDM Network Design signal flow and network capacity
 Analyze typical configuration of OptiX WDM
OTC03 Lecture, Case-study 3d
series products
Target Audience  Analyze the design process of WDM network

 Design a complete OptiX WDM network
WDM network planning & design engineer
according to requirements
Prerequisites
Duration
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Outline the functions and features of the
different units in OptiX WDM products
822
27.8.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training
Training Path
 Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
capacity and features
OptiX NG WDM Network Design  Describe WDM network topologies and system
applications
 Outline the designing procedure of WDM
Target Audience network
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX NG
OptiX NG WDM network planning & design
WDM
engineer
 Memorize the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800
Prerequisites
system capacity with different traffics
Having working experience in the planning and  Apply the OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 system
design of WDM products functions and configuration principles in
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM network planning
Network Design Basic Training or having  Describe the designing procedure of NG WDM
equivalent knowledge FOADM network
Objectives  Fulfill the hardware configuration of NG WDM

FOADM network
Duration
be able to:
 Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product 3 working days
networking Class Size
 Outline OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
Min 6, Max 12
functions
823
27.8.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
 Describe NG WDM ASON network features
 Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
OptiX NG WDM ASON Network Planning & steps
Design
 Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
 Understand the special topics of NG WDM
ASON network planning and design
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner
Operation  Understand NG WDM ASON network features
OTC74 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d  Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
steps
 Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer design
Operation  Describe features and functions of the
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner
 Plan WDM network
Target Audience  Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Planner operation
 Implement the WDM network plan by the MDS
OptiX NG WDM ASON senior network planning &
6600 WDM Planner
design engineer
 Outline system architecture of iManager MDS
Prerequisites
6600
Having working experience in the planning and  Describe features and functions of the
design of WDM products iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM  Complete WDM network design
Network Design Basic Training or having  Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Designer operation
 Implement the WDM network design by the
Objectives MDS 6600 WDM Designer

be able to:
4 working days
 Outline the standards of ASON
Class Size
 Illustrate the structure of ASON
 Describe the networking characters of ASON Min 6, Max 12
824
27.8.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training
Training Path
Objectives

Digital Microwave Communication Basics
be able to:
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d  Describe the concept and characters of digital
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic in the digital microwave system
OTF40 Lecture 1.5d
microwave system
Target Audience
Microwave network junior planning engineer
 Familiar with the microwave network design
Prerequisites contents
Having a general knowledge of Digital Microwave  Know the basic information about microwave
Communication planning
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and Duration
QinQ
2 working days
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet and
Class Size
QoS
Min 6, Max 12
825
27.8.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet)
Training Path
contents
OptiX RTN Network Planning  Describe the theory and function of every part
in the digital microwave system for details
OTF49 Lecture 1.5d
 Know the microwave planning principles
 Familiar the interference analysis methods
 Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service,
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning
(Packet) CES service, ATM/IMA service and MPLS
OTF60 Lecture 0.5d tunnel planning
 Know how to select the proper equipment type
and functions for different scenarios
 Implement network design according to the
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning
guideline to ensure the high and efficient
OTF51 Lecture 1d packet service delivery
 Familiar with the working mechanism of clock &
Target Audience
DCN
Microwave network planning engineer  Know how to select the proper clock & DCN
Prerequisites mode for different scenarios
 Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
Having a general knowledge of Digital Microwave
guidelines
Communication
 Implement clock & DCN design according to
the guideline to ensure the high and efficient
QinQ
planning delivery
Duration
QoS
Class Size
826
27.8.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Hybrid)
Training Path
contents
OptiX RTN Network Planning in the digital microwave system for details
OTF49 Lecture 1.5d
 Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service
and TDM service planning
(Hybrid)  Know how to select the proper equipment type
OTF59 Lecture 0.5d and functions for different scenarios
guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid
service delivery
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning
OTF51 Lecture 1d
DCN
 Know how to select the proper clock & DCN
Target Audience
mode for different scenarios
Microwave network planning engineer  Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
Prerequisites guidelines
Communication
planning delivery
Duration
TDM
Class Size
827
27.8.12 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training(Packet+Hybrid)
Training Path
OptiX RTN Network Planning  Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service
and TDM service planning
OTF49 Lecture 1.5d
(Hybrid) guideline to ensure the high and efficient hybrid
OTF59 Lecture 0.5d service delivery
CES service, ATM/IMA service and MPLS
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning tunnel planning

(Packet)  Know how to select the proper equipment type
OTF60 Lecture 0.5d and functions for different scenarios
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning packet service delivery
OTF51 Lecture 1d
DCN
mode for different scenarios
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case
Analysis  Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
OTF61 Lecture 0.5d guidelines
Target Audience the guideline to ensure the high and efficient
planning delivery
Microwave network planning engineer
Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of Digital Microwave tunnel planning
Communication  Know how to select the proper equipment type
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and and functions for different scenarios
QinQ  Implement network design according to the
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet and guideline to ensure the high and efficient
QoS packet service delivery
Objectives Duration

Min 6, Max 12
contents
in the digital microwave system for details
828
27.8.13 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training
Training Path
DCN
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning mode for different scenarios
 Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
OTF51 Lecture 1d
guidelines
OptiX RTN Network QoS Planning
planning delivery
OTF62 Lecture 0.5d  Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service,
tunnel planning
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case  Know how to select the proper equipment type
Analysis and functions for different scenarios
OTF61 Lecture 0.5d  Implement network design according to the
Target Audience
packet service delivery
Microwave senior network planning engineer  Familiar with the principles for Ethernet service,
Prerequisites CES service, ATM/IMA service and MPLS
tunnel planning
Communication
QinQ
packet service delivery
QoS
Duration
Be familiar with RTN product
Class Size
829
27.8.14 OptiX OSN 3800A6800A Planning and Design Training
Training Path
products
 Evaluate the network resilience, which include
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A Network network architecture, protection mechanisms,
Planning & Design
signal flow, and network capacity
 Outline the designing procedure of WDM
Target Audience network
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of optical and
OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A senior network planning
electrical layer grooming
& design engineer
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX OSN
Prerequisites
3800A/6800A
Having working experience in planning and design  Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
telecommunication networks network planning, such as power budget,
Having a general knowledge of WDM basics dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation
Objectives and nonlinearity

 Complete the exercises of WDM network
On completion of this program, the participants will design
be able to:
Duration
 Describe the functions and features of OptiX
OSN 3800A/6800A products 4 working days
 Describe OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A access Class Size

capacity
Min 6, Max 12
 Identify wavelength distribution and service
process ability for OptiX OSN 3800A/6800A
830
27.8.15 OptiX BWS 1600S(unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training
Training Path  Describe OptiX BWS 1600S system access

capacity
 Identify wavelength distribution and service
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)
Planning and Design process ability for OptiX BWS 1600S products
OTC71 Lecture, Case-study 3d  Evaluate the network resilience, which include
network architecture, protection mechanisms,
Target Audience signal flow and network capacity
 Outline the designing procedure of OptiX BWS
OptiX BWS 1600S senior network planning &
1600S network
design engineer
 Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX BWS
Prerequisites 1600S products
 Complete the exercises of OptiX BWS 1600S
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM
network design
Network Design Basic Training or having
Duration

Class Size
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the functions and features of OptiX
BWS 1600S products
831
27.9 Assessment and Optimization Training Programs
27.9.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Training Path
 Describe the main contents about SDH service
capacity and efficiency assessment
SDH Network Assessment  Describe the items and contents about SDH
network security assessment
 Describe the measures about SDH survivable
Target Audience network assessment
 List the methods about trail usability
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or
assessment
senior maintenance engineer
 Describe the items and contents about SDH
Prerequisites
network O&M assessment
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment  Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
Having working experience with at least 2 years in assessment
the maintenance of optical transport network  Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
Objectives assessment
 Describe the methods about spare part
assessment
be able to:
Duration
 List the main items of SDH network resource
 List the main items of SDH network 3 working days
assessment Class Size
 Describe the requirement of SDH network

Min 4, Max 8
resource assessment
832
27.9.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training
Training Path
SDH equipment
 Optimize the trails to improve the network
SDH Network Optimization usage efficiency
network security optimization
Target Audience  Describe the measures about SDH survivable
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or
 List the methods about trail usability
optimization
Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment network O&M optimization
Having working experience with at least 2 years in  Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork
the maintenance of optical transport network optimization
Upon completion of OptiX SDH Network  Describe the methods about clock subnetwork
Assessment Training optimization
Objectives  Describe the methods about spare part

optimization
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the causes and effects of discrete 3 working days
services Class Size
 Recognize the discrete services of the network
Min 4, Max 8
 Eliminate discrete services
 Optimize the lower level cross-connection of
833
27.9.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training
Training Path
 Outline the scenario of SDH network expansion
 List the key point of network expansion
SDH Network Expansion & Reconstruction  Interpret the operation of SDH network
expansion
 Perform SDH network expansion and verify the
service interconnection
Target Audience
 Outline the scenario of SDH network
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or reconstruction
senior maintenance engineer  List the key point of network reconstruction
Prerequisites  Interpret the operation of SDH network
reconstruction
 Perform SDH network reconstruction and verify
SDH products
the service interconnection
Having been attend SDH series 2nd Line
Duration
Class Size
834
27.9.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training
Training Path
 Describe methods of assessing WDM network
design performance
OptiX WDM Network Assessment  Analyze and assess WDM network design
performance
 Provide suggestions on optimizing WDM
Target Audience network design performance
 Describe methods of assessing running
OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or
performance of a WDM network
 Analyze and assess running performance of a
Prerequisites
WDM network
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)  Provide suggestions for optimizing running

Second Line Maintenance Training program or performance of a WDM network
OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Duration
Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second
2 working days
Line Maintenance Training program
Class Size
Objectives
Min 4, Max 8
be able to:
835
27.9.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training
Training Path
 Describe the method for optimizing design
OptiX WDM Network Optimization  Describe the procedure for designing a solution
to design performance optimization of a WDM
network
 Complete the solution to the design
Target Audience performance optimization of a WDM network
OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or  Describe how to optimize operating
senior maintenance engineer performance of a WDM network
Prerequisites  Describe the process of optimizing operating

Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN)
 Design solutions to optimizing operating
Second Line Maintenance Training program or performance of a WDM network
OptiX BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance
Duration
Line Maintenance Training program 1 working day

be able to:
836
27.9.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training
Training Path
Objectives

OptiX WDM Network Expansion
be able to:
OTC51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d  Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power
calculation
Target Audience  Outline the process of OptiX WDM network

expansion
 Implement the indices testing during network
expansion
Prerequisites
 Complete the OptiX WDM network service
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) expansion of OTM/OADM stations
Second Line Maintenance Training program or Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Line Maintenance Training program
Min 4, Max 8
837
27.9.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training
Training Path
 Describe OptiX WDM system upgrade &
reconstruction methods, which include 2 5G
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction upgrading to 10G, 10G upgrading to 40G and
400G upgrading to 800G
 Describe OptiX WDM equipment software
upgrade methods
Target Audience  Describe OptiX WDM network reconstruction
methods, which include the site type
senior maintenance engineer reconstruction, the protection type
reconstruction and wavelength reconstruction
Prerequisites
 Complete the OptiX WDM network
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) reconstruction
Second Line Maintenance Training program or Duration
Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second 3 working days
Line Maintenance Training program Class Size
Objectives
Min 4, Max 8

be able to:
838
28 PS Training Path
28.1 PS Training Path
GPRS/UMTS PS
2d
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel
CG9812 Operation and UPCC ATCA platform

The Difference between
Maintenance Training Operation and Maintenance
ATCA and CPCI SGSN
(Windows) GGSN9811 Routine Training (UPCC HSS)
Training
3d 2d Operation and Maintenance 2d
Training (V9)
2d
SGSN9810 Routine CG9812 Operation and
Operation and Maintenance UPCC Data Configuration
Training (ATCA) Training
(UNIX)
3d 2d 2d
GGSN9811 Data
Configuration Training (V9)
SGSN9810 Data CG9812 Operation and UPCC Service Policy
Maintenance 6d Configuration and Analysis
(ATCA) Training(ATCA) Training
7d 2d 2d
Field Maintenance Engineers,

Routine Maintenance Engineers
PS Performance Monitoring PS Alarm Monitoring and PS Emergency Recovery

Training Management Training
1d 1d 1d
Field Maintenance Engineers,

Routine Maintenance Engineers
UPCC Service Policy

GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL PS Interface Signaling
PS QOS Training Application and Design
Training Analysis
Training
4d 2d 3d 2d
SGSN APN and
PS Signaling Procedure UPCC Gx Interface
international roaming IP Convergence for Packet
Analysis and Signaling Analysis and
Training Core Training
Troubleshooting Training Troubleshooting Training
2d 4d 2d 1d
GPRS/UMTS PS Network
PS Data Transfer GGSN Service Awareness
Security Training
Troubleshooting Training Training
1d 2d 2d
GPRS/UMTS Senior Engineers and Experts
Figure1. GPRS/UMTS Product Training Path
839
GPRS/UMTS PS
2d
PS Interface Signaling
Analysis
3d
GPRS/UMTS PS Network GPRS/UMTS PS Network

Planning and Design
Optimize Training
Training
3d 3d
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design Engineers

Figure2. GPRS/UMTS Network Planning and Design Training Path
840
EPC Principle Fundamental From GPRS to EPC Delta EPC Equipment

Training Training Comissioning Training
1d 3d 2d
USN ATCA platform UGW Routine Operation

Operation and Maintenance and Maintenance Training
Training (2G/3G/4G ) (2G/3G/4G)
2d 2d
USN9810 (SGSN) USN9810 (MME) USN9810 UGW (GGSN) UGW UGW

Data Data (SGSN&MME) Data Data (SGW&PGW) Data (SGW&PGW&GGSN)
Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Data Configuration
Training (2G/3G) Training (4G) Training (2G/3G/4G) Training (2G/3G) Training (4G) Training (2G/3G/4G)
7d 3d 9d 4d 4d 5d
Field Maintenance
Engineers, Routine
Maintenance Engineers
USN9810 APN and SingleEPC Solution

MME POOL Training PS IPv6 Feature Training
Roaming Solution Training Introduction Training
2d 2d 1d 1d
EPC Protocol and EPC interface protocol EPC VOLTE Solution eMBMS Smart Content
Procedure Training analysis Training Training Delivery Feature Training
3d 2d 1d 1d
EPC Troubleshooting
Training
3d
EPC Senior Engineers and Experts
Figure3. EPC Product Training Path
841
EPC Principle Fundamental From GPRS to EPC Delta

Training Training
1d 3d
EPC Protocol and

Procedure Training
3d
EPC interface protocol

analysis Training
2d
EPC Network Planning and

Design Training
2d
EPC Network Planning Engineers, System Design Engineers

Figure4. EPC Planning and Design Training Path
EPC HSS Operation and

4d
Figure5. EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training Path
iManager M2000 PS
Training
2d
Figure6. iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training Path
DNS9816 Operation and

1d
Figure7. DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training Path
842
uBro UAG Operation and

4d
Figure8. uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training Path
WASN Operation and

5d
Figure9. WASN Operation and Maintenance Training Path
MAG9811 Engineer
Training( 3days)
3d
Figure10. MAG9811 Engineer Training Path
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation

CDMA WAG Operation and CDMA PDSN Operation and CDMA HA Operation and
and Maintenance Delta
Maintenance Training Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
Training
4d 7d 4d 2d
Figure11. CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training Path
PS SUR Operation and PS PRS Engineer Training

PS Netview Training PS Nastar Training
Maintenance Training (Nastar SUR)
2d 2d 1d 2d
Figure12. PS Report System Training Path
GPRS Signalling GTP Protocol

GPRS Fundamental(WBT)
Procedure(WBT) Analysis(WBT)
1.5h 3h 2h
EPC Data Management

EPC Principle(WBT) EPC Product Survey(WBT)
(WBT)
6h 3h 2h
EPC SIgnaling Analysis EPC Alarm and Monitoring

EPC Health Check (WBT)
(WBT) (WBT)
12h 1h 2h
Figure13. Packet Core Net(WBT) Training Path
843
28.2 MBB Training Path
QoS Guarantee for MBB QoE evaluation and

Smart phone signaling
MBB features seminars Valued Subscribers and optimization solution
optimization Training
Services Solution Training
2d 1.5d 1.5d 2d
Figure14. MBB Solution Training Path
844
29 PS Training Courses
PS, MBB Training Courses are designed as follows:

Program Duration Training
Class Type Class Size
Level (workdays) Location
PS Product Technology Training
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training Ⅰ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
SGSN Product Training (PS8.1 or before V9R11)
SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
(ATCA)
SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA) Ⅲ 7 N/A 6 ~ 12
SGSN APN and international roaming Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training Ⅲ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
GGSN Product Training
GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance
Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
Training(V9)
GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training (V9) Ⅲ 6 N/A 6 ~ 12
CG Product Training (2/3/4G Public Product)
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(Windows) Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(UNIX) Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA) Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS Solution Training
GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training Ⅲ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
SGSN Gb Reconstruction(From TDM to IP)Training Ⅲ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS QOS Training Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
GGSN Service Awareness Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training Ⅲ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training Ⅲ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting
Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
Training
PS Interface Signaling Analysis Ⅳ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS Emergency Recovery Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS Performance and Monitor Training (Special for NOC)
PS Performance Monitoring Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS Planning and Optimize Training
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training Ⅳ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Principle Training
EPC Principle Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
From GPRS to EPC Delta Training Ⅱ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Protocol and Procedure Training Ⅳ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC interface protocol analysis Training Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS/EPC Product Training (After PS9.1, 2/3/4G integration)
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
845
USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training

Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
(2G/3G/4G)
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G) Ⅲ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training
Ⅲ 9 N/A 6 ~ 12
(2G/3G/4G)
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) Ⅲ 7 N/A 6 ~ 12
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training
Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
(2G/3G/4G)
UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G) Ⅲ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training
Ⅲ 5 N/A 6 ~ 12
(2G/3G/4G)
UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G) Ⅲ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Solution Training
MME POOL Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC VOLTE Solution Training Ⅳ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training Ⅲ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
IPv6 Feature Training Ⅳ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Planning and Optimize Training
EPC Network Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
UPCC Product Training
UPCC ATCA Platform Operation and Maintenance
Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
Training (UPCC HSS)
UPCC Data Configuration Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and
Ⅳ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
HSS Product PS Training
EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
M2000 Product Training
iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
DNS Product Training
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
uBro Product PS Training
uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
WiMax Product PS Training
WASN Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 N/A 6 ~ 12
WLAN Product PS Training
MAG9811 Engineer Training Ⅱ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
CDMA Product PS Training
CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 7 N/A 6 ~ 12
CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 N/A 6 ~ 12
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta
Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
Training
PS Report System Training
846
PS Netview Training Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12

PS Nastar Training Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR) Ⅱ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
MBB Solution Training
Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet Ⅳ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
MBB Features Seminars Ⅳ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and
Ⅳ 1.5 N/A 6 ~ 12
Services Solution
Smart Phone Signaling Optimization Training Ⅳ 1.5 N/A 6 ~ 12
QoE Evaluation and Optimization Solution Training Ⅳ 1.5 N/A 6 ~ 12
Packet Core Net (WBT)
GPRS Fundamental (WBT) Ⅰ 0.25 N/A 6 ~ 12
GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT) Ⅲ 0.5 N/A 6 ~ 12
GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT) Ⅲ 0.3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Principle (WBT) Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT) Ⅲ 2 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Health Check (WBT) Ⅱ 1 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Data Management (WBT) Ⅱ 0.3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT) Ⅱ 0.3 N/A 6 ~ 12
EPC Product Survey (WBT) Ⅱ 3 N/A 6 ~ 12
847
29.1 PS Training Courses
29.1.1 GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training
be able to:
OWA01 Lecture 2d  Describe the UMTS PS Network Structure.
 Describe the PS Core Network interface and
Target Audience
Protocol.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Describe the PS Core Network Working
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance Principle.
Engineers Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
 A general mobile communication and data Class Size
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
848
29.1.2 PS Interface Signaling Analysis
Training Path
maintenance.
Successful completion of the program of
PS Interface Signaling Analysis and
Troubleshooting Training GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives
OWB77 exercise, Demonstration 3d
Target Audience be able to:

 Describe important procedures and parameters
Routine Maintenance Engineers, Optimization
of RANAP/MAP/GTP.
Engineers, Senior Maintenance Engineers.
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
A general understanding of mobile communication
Class Size
and data communication.
Get familiar with TCP/IP. Min 6, Max 12
1 years related experience in PS equipment
849
29.1.3 SGSN9810 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA)
Training Path
Objectives
SGSN9810 Routine Operation and On completion of this program, the participants will
Maintenance (ATCA) Training
Lecture, Hands-on be able to:
OWB92 exercise 3d  Describe the physical and logical structure of
SGSN9810 equipment.
Target Audience  Explain the functions of different boards in

SGSN.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line
 Describe the software upgrade procedure and
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance
patch/license loading.
Engineers
 Perform routine operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
Successful completion of the program
3 working days
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
850
29.1.4 SGSN9810 Data Configuration Training (ATCA)
Training Path
Objectives
SGSN9810 Data Configuration (ATCA) On completion of this program, the participants will
Training
OWB93 exercise 7d  Perform configuration of SGSN hardware, Gb,
Iu-PS, Gn/Ga, Gr and basic service
Target Audience configuration.

Duration
Second Line Maintenance Engineers, Routine
Maintenance Engineers. 7 working days
Successful completion of the program SGSN9810 Min 6, Max 12

Routine Operation and Maintenance Training.
851
29.1.5 SGSN APN and international roaming Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program SGSN
routine operation and maintenance training.
SGSN Advanced Data Configuration Successful completion of the program SGSN data
Training Lecture, Hands-on configuration Training.
OWB35 exercise 2d
Objectives
Target Audience On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
 Describe the principle of HSAP+, international
roaming, APN rectify and 2G/3G restrict and
Engineers
the configuration.
Prerequisites
Duration
A general mobile communication and data

2 working days
communication.
Class Size
GPRS/UMTS Principle Training. Min 6, Max 12
852
29.1.6 The difference of ATCA and CPCI SGSN Training
Training Path
training.
CPCI and ATCA SGSN Delta Training (CPCI) data configuration Training.
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives
OWB25 exercise 3d

 Describe Software Difference Between ATCA
and CPCI.
 Describe Hardware Difference Between ATCA
Engineers
and CPCI.
Prerequisites
 Describe the routine operation and
A general mobile communication and data maintenance of ATCA SGSN.
communication. Duration
3 working days
GPRS/UMTS Principle Training.
Class Size
SGSN(CPCI) routine operation and maintenance Min 6, Max 12
853
29.1.7 GGSN9811 Routine Operation and Maintenance Training（V9）
Training Path
Objectives
GGSN9811Routine Operation and On completion of this program, the participants will

Maintenance (V9) Training
OWD92 exercise 2d  Describe the physical and logical structure of
the GGSN9811.
Target Audience  Describe the board function of GGSN.

 Perform the software upgrade and
patch/license loading procedure.
 Perform the routine operation and
Engineers
maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
854
29.1.8 GGSN9811 Data Configuration Training （V9）
Training Path
Objectives

GGSN9811Data Configuration (V9)
Training Lecture, Hands-on be able to:
OWD93 exercise 6d  Perform configuration of Gn/Gp, Ga and Gi
interfaces and route.
Target Audience  Perform configuration of reliability networking,

VPN, APN and charging.
Second Line Maintenance Engineers, Routine
 Describe the SA (Service Awareness) principle.
Maintenance Engineer.
 Perform basic debugging of GGSN9811.
Prerequisites
Duration
6 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
855
29.1.9 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training（Windows）
Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (Windows) On completion of this program, the participants will

Training
OWI30 exercise 2d  Describe the charging principle of PS core
network.
Target Audience  Describe the CG9812 system structure.

 Configure key maintenance parameters in CG
server.
 Perform routine operation and maintenance of
Engineers
CG server.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training. Min 6, Max 12
856
29.1.10 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training（UNIX）
Training Path
Objectives
CG9812 Administration (UNIX) Training On completion of this program, the participants will
OWI31 exercise 2d  Describe the charging principle of PS core
network.
Target Audience  Describe the CG9812 system structure.

 Configure key maintenance parameters in CG
server.
 Perform the routine operation and maintenance
Engineers
of CG server.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training. Min 6, Max 12
857
29.1.11 CG9812 Operation and Maintenance Training (ATCA)
Training Path
Get familiar with TCP/IP.
Objectives
CG9812 Operation and Maintenance
Training (ATCA)
Lecture, Hands-on On completion of this program, the participants will
OWI50 exercise, Demonstration 2d be able to:
 Perform CG9812 routine maintenance.
Target Audience  Master CG9812 client software installation and

CDR browsing/query.
Duration
Engineers 2 working days
A general understanding of mobile communication Min 6, Max 12

858
29.1.12 GPRS/UMTS SGSN POOL Training
Training Path
SGSN POOL Training
Successful completion of the program SGSN data
Lecture, Hands-on exercise, configuration Training.
OWB76 Case-study, discussion 4d
Objectives

 Understand the principle of SGSN POOL.
 Perform data configuration of SGSN POOL.
 Perform Operation and Maintenance of SGSN
Engineers
POOL.
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
communication.
Class Size
859
29.1.13 SGSN Gb Reconstruction（From TDM to IP）Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program SGSN data
GB Interface Reconstruction （From TDM
to IP）Training configuration Training.
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives
OWB71 exercise 1d

 Perform Gb interface reconstruction network
design.
 Perform Gb interface reconstruction
Engineers
Configuration.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
communication.
Class Size
860
29.1.14 PS QOS Training
Training Path
Objectives

PS QOS Training
be able to:
OWA11 Lecture 2d  Describe PS QoS parameter.
 Know PS QoS negotiation process.
Target Audience
 Describe PS service QoS parameter default
Routine Maintenance Engineers, Optimization value.
Engineers, Senior Maintenance Engineers.  Describe SGSN QoS handling.
Prerequisites  Describe UE and Radio Part QoS handling.
Duration
and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP 2 working days
and GPRS principle. Class Size
2 years related experience in PS domain.
Min 6, Max 12
861
29.1.15 GGSN Service Awareness Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program GGSN
SA Application Configuration Training Successful completion of the program GGSN data
Lecture, Hands-on configuration Training.
OWD30 exercise 2d
Objectives

be able to:
 Describe GGSN SA Structure.
 Perform the SA application -content base
Engineers
charging and service control.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size
862
29.1.16 IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
Training Path
 Describe IP backbone and key Datacom
technology.
IP Convergence for Packet Core Training
 Describe interconnection solution between PS
Lecture, Hands-on
and CE.
OWA06 exercise, Demonstration 4d
 Describe IP Planning between PS and CE.
 Describe Data configuration between PS and
Target Audience
CE.
Routine Maintenance Engineers, Optimization  Describe Iu/Gb/Gr/Gn/Ga interface networking

Engineers, Senior Maintenance Engineers. and reliability solution.
Prerequisites  Describe O/M interface networking and

reliability solution.
 Describe PS networking troubleshooting
method.
Get familiar with TCP/IP and GPRS Principle.
 Common troubleshooting case study.
Objectives
Duration
4 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe TCP/IP fundamental related to
GPRS/UMTS PS network. Min 6, Max 12
863
29.1.17 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Security Training
Training Path
Objectives
PS Network Security Training On completion of this program, the participants will

OWB50 exercise 1d  Describe the Common Network Attack to
CN-PS.
Target Audience  Perform the configuration to avoid of typical

network attack.
Senior Engineers, Specialist, Expert
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Successful completion of the programs.
Class Size
SGSN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training.
GGSN9811 Operation and Maintenance Training. Min 6, Max 12
864
29.1.18 PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
PS Signaling Procedure Analysis and
Troubleshooting Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB76 exercise, Demonstration 2d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Describe important procedures and parameters

of MM/SM.
 Perform MM/SM/Service Troubleshooting.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

maintenance.
865
29.1.19 PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
PS Data Transfer Troubleshooting Training Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OWA78 exercise, Demonstration 2d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Perform locating method of Data Transfer fault.

 Perform Troubleshooting method of Data
Transfer fault.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size

maintenance.
866
29.1.20 PS Emergency Recovery Training
Training Path
maintenance.
PS Emergency Recovery Training
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives

 Master SGSN9810 Emergency O/M.
 Master GGSN9811 Emergency O/M.
 Master CG9812 Emergency O/M.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
867
29.1.21 PS Performance Monitoring Training
Training Path
maintenance.
PS Performance Monitoring Training
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives

 Master Key Performance Indicator of SGSN.
 Master Key Performance Indicator of GGSN.
 Perform KPI getting method.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
868
29.1.22 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
Training Path
maintenance.
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives

 Understand basic alarm.
 Understand basic method of alarm monitoring
and management.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
869
29.1.23 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimize Training
Training Path
SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Optimization Training
Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OWB67 exercise 3d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Outline the general procedure of PS core

network optimization.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Optimization Engineers,
 Analyze the PS core network KPI.
System Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and
 Describe Traffic Statistics Model Extraction.
Experts
 Master Evaluation and Optimization of the
Prerequisites
SGSN9810/GGSN9811/DNS/CG Resource
A general mobile communication and data Capacity.
communication. Duration
3 working days
Class Size
SGSN/GGSN routine operation and maintenance Min 6, Max 12
training.
870
29.1.24 GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
SGSN/GGSN data configuration Training.
PS Network Planning Training Objectives
OWB68 Lecture 3d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
Target Audience
 Describe PS Network Planning Principle.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Planning Engineers,  Perform the Networking Scheme for
System Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and Gb/Iu/SS7/Gn/Gp/OM/Ga/Li/Gy and
Experts GGSN-SUR, GGSN-SCCG networking
Prerequisites scheme.
Duration
communication. 3 working days
Successful completion of the program Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
SGSN/GGSN routine operation and maintenance
training.
871
29.1.25 EPC Principle Fundamental Training
Training Path
Objectives

EPC Principle Fundamental Training
be able to:
OEA10 Lecture,LVC 1d  Describe the EPC network structure.
 Describe the EPC Network interface and
Target Audience
protocol.
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel  Describe the EPC Network working
Prerequisites procedures.
Duration
and data communication. 1 working day
Be familiar with Windows operating system. Class Size
Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
Min 6, Max 12
872
29.1.26 From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives

From GPRS to EPC Delta Training
be able to:
OEA11 Lecture 2.5d  Describe difference between GPRS Protocol
and EPC Protocol.
Target Audience
 Describe different interface between GPRS
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line and EPC network.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Perform the difference routine operation and
Engineers maintenance between GPRS and EPC
Prerequisites equipment.
Duration
and data communication. 3 working days
Be familiar with Windows operating system. Class Size
Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
Min 6, Max 12
873
29.1.27 EPC Protocol and Procedure Training
Training Path
 Understand the EPC network structure.
 Understand the EPC Network interface and
EPC Protocol and Procedure Training protocol.
Lecture, Case-study,
 Understand the key concepts for EPC.
OEA01 discussion, LVC 3d
 Understand the EPC Network working
procedures.
Target Audience
 Perform EMM signaling flow and key
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design parameters analysis.
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts  Perform ESM signaling flow and key
Prerequisites parameters analysis.

A general understanding of GPRS network
Duration
principle, mobile communication and data
communication. 3 working days

be able to:
874
29.1.28 EPC Interface Protocol Analysis Training
Training Path
communication.
Objectives
EPC Signaling Analysis Training
Lecture, Hands-on On completion of this program, the participants will
OEA02 exercise, Demonstration 2d be able to:
 Perform USN9810 signaling tracing method.
Target Audience  Perform UGW9811 signaling tracing method.

Duration
EPC Engineers and Experts, PS Network Planning
Engineers, System Design Engineers 2 working days
A general understanding of GPRS network Min 6, Max 12

875
29.1.29 EPC Equipment Commissioning Training
Training Path
communication.
EPC Equipment Commissioning Training Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OEB90 exercise, Demonstration 2d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Perform USN9810 commissioning.

 Perform UGW9811 commissioning.
Duration
Engineers 2 working days
A general understanding of GPRS network Min 6, Max 12
876
29.1.30 USN ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe system structure and hardware
USN ATCA platform Operation and
Maintenance Training structure of USN9810.
Lecture, Hands-on
 Perform software related installation and
OEB9B exercise, Demonstration 2d
upgrade procedure.
 Perform hardware operation and maintenance.
Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line including security management, system
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance information management, alarm management,
Engineers trace management ,data management, license
Prerequisites management ,performance management.

Duration
and data communication. 2 working days
Successful completion of the program EPC Class Size

Principle Fundamental Training.
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
877
29.1.31 USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (MME) Data Configuration On completion of this program, the participants will
Training (4G)
OEB9B exercise, Demonstration 3d  Describe the functions of protocol stacks of
different interfaces.
Target Audience  Perform configuration of USN hardware,

System Information, interworking with eNodeB,
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line HSS, MME, S-GW, DNS and NTP.
 Perform configuration of mobility management
Engineers
and session management.
Prerequisites
Duration

3 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program EPC USN
Routine Operation and Maintenance Training. Min 6, Max 12
878
29.1.32 USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (SGSN/MME) Data On completion of this program, the participants will

Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
OEB9B exercise, Demonstration 9d  Describe the functions of protocol stacks of
different interfaces.
Target Audience  Perform configuration of USN hardware,

System Information, interworking with eNodeB,
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line HSS, MME, S-GW, DNS, NTP and GGSN.
 Perform configuration of mobility management
Engineers
and session management.
Prerequisites
Duration

9 working days
Class Size
Routine Operation and Maintenance Training. Min 6, Max 12
879
29.1.33 USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Training Path
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration
Training (2G/3G) Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OEB91 exercise, Demonstration 7d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Perform configuration of SGSN hardware, Gb,

Iu-PS, Gn/Ga, Gr and basic service
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line configuration.
Duration
Engineers
Class Size
and data communication. Min 6, Max 12
880
29.1.34 USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution Training
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 APN and Roaming Solution
Training Lecture, Hands-on On completion of this program, the participants will
OEB31 exercise, Demonstration 2d be able to:
 Understand principle of international roaming.
Target Audience  Master roaming data configuration of

SGSN/GGSN/DNS/FW.
 Understand principle of APN rectify.
 Master data configurations of APN rectify.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program EPC USN Min 6, Max 12
881
29.1.35 UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
be able to:
EPC UGW Routine Operation and
Maintenance Training structure of UGW9811.
Lecture, Hands-on
 Perform software related installation and
OEB21 exercise, Demonstration 2d
upgrade procedure.
 Perform hardware operation and maintenance.
Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line including authorization management, system
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance information management, alarm management,
Engineers trace management ,log management, license
Prerequisites management ,patch management ,data backup

and restore.
Duration
Successful completion of the program EPC 2 working days
Principle Training. Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
882
29.1.36 UGW (SGW/PGW) Data Configuration Training (4G)
Training Path
Objectives
EPC UGW Data Configuration Training On completion of this program, the participants will
OEB30 exercise, Demonstration 4d  Perform data configuration of S1-U/S11,S5/S8
and SGi interfaces Describe basic concept of
Target Audience VPN,APN and charging.

 Perform configuration of VPN, APN and
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line charging.
 Describe the SA principles, content based
Engineers
charging principles and PCC concepts.
Prerequisites
 Perform configuration of the SA function,
A general understanding of mobile communication service control function and PCC.
and data communication. Duration
Successful completion of the program of EPC

4 working days
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance
Class Size
Training.
Min 6, Max 12
883
29.1.37 UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G/4G)
Training Path
Objectives

UGW (SGW/PGW/GGSN) Data
Configuration Training be able to:
OED99 Lecture 5d  Perform data configuration of S1-U/S11,S5/S8
and SGi interfaces Describe basic concept of
Target Audience VPN,APN and charging.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Perform configuration of VPN, APN and
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance charging.
Engineers  Describe the SA principles ,content based
Prerequisites charging principles and PCC concepts.
 Perform configuration of the SA function,
service control function and PCC.
Duration
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance 5 working days
Training. Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
884
29.1.38 UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training (2G/3G)
Training Path
Objectives

UGW (GGSN) Data Configuration Training
be able to:
OED99 Lecture 4d  Perform data Describe basic concept of
VPN,APN and charging.
Target Audience
 Perform configuration of VPN, APN and
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line charging.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Describe the SA principles, content based
Engineers charging principles and PCC concepts.
Prerequisites  Perform configuration of the SA function,
service control function and PCC.
Duration
Successful completion of the program of EPC 4 working days
UGW Routine Operation and Maintenance Class Size
Training.
Min 6, Max 12
885
29.1.39 MME POOL Training
Training Path
MME POOL Training Training.
Lecture, Hands-on
Objectives
OEB32 exercise, Demonstration 2d

 Understand principle of MME pool.
 Master data configuration of MME pool.
Duration
Engineers
Class Size
and data communication. Min 6, Max 12
886
29.1.40 EPC VOLTE Solution Training
Training Path
Training.
EPC VOLTE Solution Training Objectives
OEB33 Lecture 1d On completion of this program, the participants will

be able to:
Target Audience
 Understand signaling analysis of SRVCC.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Understand signaling analysis of CSFB.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance Duration
Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
887
29.1.41 eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Training
Training Path
Training.
eMBMS Smart Content Delivery Feature Objectives
Training
OED99 Lecture 1d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience
 Understand of the Feature of eMBMS Smart
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line Content Delivery.
Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
888
29.1.42 EPC Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

EPC Troubleshooting Training
OEB04 exercise, Demonstration 3d  Describe USN9810/UGW9811 EMM / ESM
troubleshooting method.
Target Audience  Common USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM

related troubleshooting case study.
Senior maintenance Engineers, Specialist, Experts
 Perform USN9810/UGW9811 EMM/ESM
Prerequisites related fault located with signaling analysis.
A general understanding of mobile communication Duration

3 working days
Class Size
EPC USN Data Configuration Training.
EPC UGW Data Configuration Training. Min 6, Max 12
889
29.1.43 SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training
Training Path
 Know about Huawei Single EPC solution.
 Describe the Single EPC FUP solution and its
SingleEPC Solution Introduction Training successful cases.
 Describe the Single EPC SA solution and its
OEY00 Lecture, LVC 1d
successful cases.
Target Audience  Describe the Single EPC visualization solution
and its successful cases.
 Describe the Single EPC online charging
Prerequisites
solution and its successful cases.

1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Outline the development trend of the mobile
broadband.
890
29.1.44 EPC Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Product Survey Training
Objectives
EPC Network Planning and Design
Training
Lecture, Case-study, On completion of this program, the participants will
OEA07 discussion 2d be able to:
 Describe EPC planning and designing steps.
Target Audience  Determine IP address, QoS, APN needs for

different services.
PS Network Planning Engineers, System Design
 Determine capacity for different interfaces.
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
 Determine the internetworking for different
Prerequisites
interfaces.
2 working days
Class Size
Protocol and Procedure Training. Min 6, Max 12
891
29.1.45 UPCC ATCA platform Operation and Maintenance Training (UPCC HSS)
Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Operation and Maintenance On completion of this program, the participants will
Training
OWR20 exercise, Demonstration 2d  Describe the function, internetworking, and
features of UPCC.
Target Audience  Describe the software and hardware

architecture, boards and service flow of UPCC.
 Perform daily O/M for UPCC.
 Perform UPCC redundancy.
Engineers
 Perform UPCC system commissioning.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
892
29.1.46 UPCC Data Configuration Training
Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Data Configuration Training On completion of this program, the participants will
OWR21 exercise, Demonstration 2d  UPCC hardware data configuration.
 UPCC BE data configuration.
Target Audience  UPCC FE data configuration.

 UPCC redundancy principle.
Second line Maintenance Engineers, support
 UPCC redundancy interworking.
Engineers.
 UPCC redundancy data configuration.
Prerequisites
 UPCC system commissioning commands.
2 working days
Class Size
Successful completion of the program of UPCC
Operation and Maintenance Training. Min 6, Max 12
893
29.1.47 UPCC Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training
Training Path
 Configuration of Service, Quota, Account,
Policy, Rule, Notification, Condition Group,
UPCC Service Policy Configuration and
Analysis Training Action Group, Service Flow, Rating and
Lecture, Hands-on
Roaming etc.
OWR22 exercise, Demonstration 2d
 Introduction of PGW Web LMT.
 How UPCC subscriber information is
Target Audience configured on the PGW.
Second line Maintenance Engineers, support  Volume based FUP service analysis.
Engineers.  Volume based FUP service configuration.
PCC Service Planning Engineers, System Design  Volume based FUP service verification.
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts.  Time section based policy analysis.
Prerequisites  Time section based policy configuration.
 Time section based policy verification.
 Introduction of UPCC System Architecture.
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Introduction of UPCC Web UI. Min 6, Max 12
 Overview of Subscriber Policy Configuration.
894
29.1.48 UPCC Service Policy Application and Design Training
Training Path
concepts Such as Objects, Condition and
Action etc.
UPCC Service Policy Application and
Design Training  Typical service scenarios requirement analysis,
Lecture, Hands-on service disassemble and configuration.
OWR23 exercise, Demonstration 2d
 Perform UPCC-GGSN scenarios statistic rules
requirement analysis, service disassemble and
Target Audience configuration.
PCC Network Planning Engineers, System Design  Perform UPCC-GGSN scenarios dynamic rules
Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts. requirement analysis, service disassemble and
configuration.
Prerequisites
 Perform UPCC-SIG scenarios statistic rules
A general understanding of mobile communication requirement analysis, service disassemble and
and data communication. configuration.
Successful completion of the program of UPCC Duration
Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training.
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
 Describe service policy configuration Principle.

 Describe service policy configuration key
895
29.1.49 UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives
UPCC Gx Interface Signaling Analysis and On completion of this program, the participants will
OWR24 exercise, Demonstration 1d  Introduce Diameter Protocol flow and
messages.
Target Audience  Describe DCCA Protocol flow and messages.

 Describe PCC service signaling flow messages
analysis and key parameter.
 Describe Gx Troubleshooting Methods.
Prerequisites
 Perform Gx Interface troubleshooting based on
A general understanding of mobile communication signaling analysis.
1 working day
Successful completion of the program of UPCC
Class Size
Service Policy Configuration and Analysis Training.
Min 6, Max 12
896
29.1.50 EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 board function.
 Describe HSS9820 signaling flow.
EPC HSS Operation and Maintenance
Training  Describe HSS9820 software structure.
Lecture, Hands-on
 Perform installation of operation PGW client.
OHC10/OEC90 exercise, Demonstration 4d
 Perform the method of adding or deleting
subscriber.
Target Audience
 Modify subscription according to customer
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line requirement.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Perform configuration of subscription data.
Engineers  Describe the steps of HSS9820 data
Prerequisites configuration.
 Perform hardware and system data
configuration.
and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP
 Perform interface data configuration.
and GPRS Principle.
Objectives
validity.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Perform basic debugging of SAE-HSS9820.
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 product function
and application. 4 working days
 Describe HSS9820V900R006 interface Class Size
protocol function. Min 6, Max 12

 Describe HSS9820V900R006 physical and
logical structure.
897
29.1.51 iManager M2000 PS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
M2000 Routine Operation and
Maintenance Training architecture, software architecture, typical
Lecture, Hands-on configuration and interfaces of the M2000.
OWL21 exercise 2d
 Describe the software structure of the M2000
equipment, the functions of different parts.
Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line system from the aspects of system security.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
Engineers of M2000 client.
A general mobile communication and data 2 working days

communication. Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
898
29.1.52 DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the main functions and key features
of DNS9816 equipment.
DNS9816 Operation and Maintenance
Training  Describe the theory of system realizing and
Lecture, Hands-on
query procedure of DNS9816 equipment.
OEN11 exercise, Demonstration 1d
architecture of DNS9816 equipment.
Target Audience
 Perform the basic data configurations of
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line DNS9816 equipment.
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Perform the data configurations of optional

Engineers. features about equipment.
Prerequisites  Perform the routine operation and

maintenance.
Duration
Get familiar with TCP/IP and GPRS Principle. 1 working day

be able to:
899
29.1.53 uBro UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

UAG Operation and Maintenance Training
OWB34 exercise 4d  Describe the physical and logical structure of
UAG equipment.
Target Audience  Explain the functions of different boards in

UAG.
 Perform the hardware, eIU, Iu-PS, Iu-Cs and
AHR/NTP interface data configuration of UAG.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
900
29.1.54 WASN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
structure of WASN9770.
WASN9770 Operation and Maintenance  Describe signaling flow and message.
Training Lecture, Hands-on
 Perform operation and maintenance of
OXE30 exercise 5d
hardware and software.
 Perform data configuration of basic service,
Target Audience
route and VPN.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Describe typical application scenarios of IP-CS
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance authentication access, Mobile IP, hot-lining,
Engineers Eth-CS.
Prerequisites  Perform system commissioning and

performance management.
Duration
Class Size
901
29.1.55 MAG9811 Engineer Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Understand principle of AP and Subscriber
MAG9811 Engineer Training accessing like some concept of PPPOE and
Lecture, Hands-on
DHCP.
OXC11 exercise, Demonstration 3d
 Understand WLAN network structure solution.
 Understand MAG9811 software and hardware
Target Audience
structure.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Master MAG9811 Routine O/M.

Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Master MAG9811 data configuration.
Engineers  Master MAG9811 Subscriber management.
A general understanding of mobile communication 3 working days

and data communication. Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
902
29.1.56 CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

CDMA WAG Operation and Maintenance
OWX90 exercise 4d  Master principle of WAG.
 Describe WAG hardware structure.
Target Audience  Master WAG software structure.

 Master WAG routine operation and
maintenance.
 Master WAG interface data configuration.
Engineers
 Master WAG service provisioning and related
Prerequisites
skill.
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
903
29.1.57 CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

CDMA PDSN Operation and Maintenance
ORP03 exercise 7d  Perform the routine and emergency operation
of CDMA PDSN equipments.
Target Audience  Perform data configuration for equipment

interconnection and charging of PDSN.
 Implement data configuration for service of
CDMA PDSN.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
904
29.1.58 CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe HA system structure and function.
 Describe HA hardware structure.
CDMA HA Operation and Maintenance  Master HA software structure.
 Master HA routine operation and maintenance.
ORH21 exercise, Demonstration 4d
 Master HA interface data configuration and
system data configuration.
Target Audience
 Describe principle of content based charging
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line and Principle of VPN and related data
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance configuration.
Engineers  Describe principle of content based charging.
Prerequisites  Describe CSN/Mobile IP/Domain/Follow control
feature and related data configuration.
 Describe User Profile structure.
Duration
Class Size
905
29.1.59 CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and Maintenance Delta Training
Training Path
Objectives
CDMA PDSN-HA Operation and On completion of this program, the participants will
Maintenance Delta Training
ORH20 exercise, Demonstration 2d  Describe HA system structure and function.
 Master deference between HA and PDSN.
Target Audience  Describe HA hardware structure.

 Master HA software structure.
 Master HA routine operation and maintenance.
 Master HA interface data configuration and
Engineers
system data configuration.
Prerequisites
 Describe principle of content based charging.
A general understanding of mobile communication  Describe CSN/Mobile IP/Follow control feature.
2 working days
Successful completion of the program of CDMA
Class Size
PDSN Operation and Maintenance.
Min 6, Max 12
906
29.1.60 PS Netview Training
Training Path
Objectives

PS Netview Training
OWV21 exercise, Demonstration 2d  Describe PS Netview architecture, hardware
deployment and feature Function.
Target Audience  Grasp PS Netview Typical networking,

Software installation.
 Perform service report configuration and
Maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
907
29.1.61 PS Nastar Training
Training Path
Objectives

PS Nastar Training
OWT12 exercise, Demonstration 2d  Describe PS Nastar architecture, hardware
deployment and feature Function.
Target Audience  Grasp PS Nastar Typical networking, Software

installation.
 Perform Client Service Operation, configuration
and Maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration

2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
908
29.1.62 PS SUR Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Successful completion of the program GGSN data
SUR9815 Operation and Maintenance configuration Training.
Objectives
OWU20 exercise 1d

 Describe the hardware structure of SUR.
 Perform software installation of SUR.
Engineers
of SUR.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
communication.
Class Size
909
29.1.63 PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR)
Training Path
PS PRS Engineer Training (Nastar SUR) Successful completion of the program GGSN data
Lecture, Hands-on
configuration Training.
OWW01 exercise, Demonstration 2d
Objectives

be able to:
 Master function and system structure of PRS.
 Master hardware deployment.
Engineers
 Master PRS operation and maintenance.
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
communication.
Class Size
910
29.1.64 GPRS Fundamental (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

GPRS Fundamental (WBT)
be able to:
OWA31 WBT 0.25d  Describe the UMTS PS Network Structure.
 Describe the PS Core Network interface and
Target Audience
Protocol.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Describe the PS Core Network Working
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance Principle.
Engineers Duration
Prerequisites
0.25 working day
A general understanding of mobile communication Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
911
29.1.65 GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

GPRS signaling Procedure (WBT)
be able to:
OWB00 WBT 0.5d  Analysis RANAP/MAP/Gx/Gy Protocol.
Target Audience
of RANAP/MAP/Gx/Gy protocol.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Engineers, System Duration
Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
0.5 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
912
29.1.66 GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

GTP Protocol Analysis (WBT)
be able to:
OWB01 WBT 0.3d  Analysis GTP Protocol.
Target Audience
of GTP protocol.
GPRS/UMTS PS Network Engineers, System Duration
Design Engineers, Senior Engineers and Experts
0.3 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
913
29.1.67 EPC Principle (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

EPC Principle (WBT)
be able to:
OEB00 WBT 1d  A general understanding of mobile
communication and data communication.
Target Audience
 Be familiar with Windows operating system.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line  Having basic knowledge of mobile network.
Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
914
29.1.68 EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT)
Training Path
Product Survey Training.
Objectives
EPC Signaling Analysis (WBT)
 Perform signaling flow and key parameters
Target Audience
analysis for EPC, including attach, detach, TAU,
EPC Engineers and Experts, PS Network Planning S1-release, handover, service-request and
Engineers, System Design Engineers security procedures.
A general understanding of mobile communication 2 working days

and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP. Class Size
Successful completion of the program of EPC Data
Min 6, Max 12
Configuration Training.
915
29.1.69 EPC Health Check (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives
USN9810 (MME) Introduction to USN On completion of this program, the participants will
Information Collection and Health Check
Tools be able to:
OEB22 Lecture 1d  Versatile Tools Suite (VTS)-related operations.
 Information collection and health check
Target Audience
scenarios supported by the unified service
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line node (USN).
Maintenance Engineers, Routine Maintenance  Methods of using the VTS for information
Engineers collection and health check.
A general understanding of mobile communication 1 working day

and data communication. Get familiar with TCP/IP. Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
916
29.1.70 EPC Data Management (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

EPC Data Management (WBT)
be able to:
OEB01 WBT 0.3d  Understand EPC data management principle.
 Master EPC data management method.
Target Audience
 Master EPC data management basic
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line procedure.
Engineers
0.3 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
917
29.1.71 EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

EPC Alarm and Monitoring (WBT)
be able to:
OEB02 WBT 0.3d  Understand basic alarm.
 Understand basic method of alarm monitoring
Target Audience
and management.
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line Duration
0.3 working day
Engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
918
29.1.72 EPC Product Survey (WBT)
Training Path
be able to:
 Outline the main function, features and key
EPC Product Survey Training (WBT) specification of USN9810.
OEB10 WBT 0.5d
specification of UGW9811.
Target Audience  Outline the main function, features and key
specification of UPCC.
specification of SAE-HSS9820.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
3 working days
Class Size
919
29.1.73 IPv6 Feature Training
Training Path
IPv6 Solution for PS / EPC Objectives
Lecture, Hands-on
OEY00 exercise, Demonstration 1d On completion of this program, the participants will
be able to:
Target Audience  Describe the IPv6 implementation for PS and

EPC.
 Describe the data configuration for IPv6
solution in PS and EPC.
Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size

920
29.2 MBB Training Courses
29.2.1 Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile Internet
Training Path
 Understand the development trend of telecom
services and cutting-edge technologies of the
Telecom Service Challenges and Mobile mobile Internet.
Internet
 Understand challenges faced by carriers and
OEY10 Lecture 1d
business mode changes.
Target Audience  Understand the MBB operation solution.

 Improve the all-service operation capability.
Managers of carriers
 Improve the capabilities of developing and
Prerequisites
operating mobile Internet products.
 With basic knowledge of mobile Duration

communications.
1 working day
 With experience in telecom operation.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
921
29.2.2 Smart MBB Network Solution
Training Path
 Understand how to implement the key
technologies in the smart MBB solution.
Smart MBB Network Solution  Understand how to implement the signaling
optimization technologies for smart terminals.
OEY11 Lecture 2d
 Understand how to implement and apply the
Target Audience differentiated bandwidth control solution.
 Understand the E2E QoE terminal experience
Network planning personnel and technical
and visualization.
managers
 Understand the features of the WiFi Offload
Prerequisites
solution.
With experience in telecom operation Duration

management or Network Planning.
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the features of the Smart MBB
network.
922
29.2.3 QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued Subscribers and Services
Training Path
 Understand QoS mapping in the core network,
radio network, and data communication
QoS Guarantee for MBB Valued
Subscribers and Services domains.
Lecture, Hands-on  Understand the recommended QoS
OEY12 exercise, Demonstration 1.5d
configurations for user subscription.
 Understand the QoS deployment for PCC
Target Audience service policies.
Wireless mobile broadband technical engineers  Understand the impact of inter-system

handover on the QoS.
Prerequisites
 Understand the QoS processing on the
With experience in mobile network planning and wireless side.
maintenance.
 Understand the QoS processing on UEs.
With experience in technical management.
 Be familiar with the E2E QoS configurations.
Objectives  Be familiar with the QoS deployment in typical
On completion of this program, the participants will scenarios.
 Understand the architecture of the 3GPP E2E 1.5 working days

QoS.
Class Size
 Understand the definitions and applications of
QoS parameters. Min 6, Max 12
 Understand the process of QoS negotiation.
923
29.2.4 MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart Terminal
Training Path
be able to:
 Know the challenge of Smartphone signaling
MBB Signaling Optimization for Smart storm.
Terminal
 Know PS Smartphone signaling optimization
OEY13 Lecture 1.5d
feature.
Target Audience  Know RAN Smartphone fast dormancy feature.
Duration
Wireless mobile broadband technical engineers
Prerequisites 1.5 working days
Class Size
With basic knowledge about mobile
communications and data communication. Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
924
29.2.5 MBB QoE Improvement Solution
Training Path
manageable architecture of the MBB E2E
mobile data service quality.
MBB QoE Improvement Solution  Understand the MBB O/M for excellence,
Lecture, Hands-on including visualized/smart O/M, VIP valued
OEY14 exercise, Demonstration 1.5d
service, and QoE improvement.
 Demonstrate service scenarios of the SEQ
Target Audience Analyst, including KQI presentation and
Wireless mobile broadband technical engineers management and applications of the SEQ
Analyst.
Prerequisites
 Be familiar with typical service (WAP and Web)
With basic knowledge about mobile KQI modeling, the QoS KQI system, and
communications and PS communication. association between KQIs and KPIs.
With experience in mobile data service Duration
assessment and optimization.
1.5 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Understand the assessable, visual, and
925
30 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Path
CSOFTX3000 Training Path
CDMA NSS Softswitch

For all Technical and non-technical personnel
CSOFTX3000(CPCI) Routine CSOFTX3000(ATCA) Routine

Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
Training Training
For Field/1st line

For Field/1st line
Technicians
Technicians
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
For Field/1st line

Technicians
OR
CSOFTX3000 Advanced
Training
For NMC/ 2nd line

Engineers
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis CDMA NSS Planning and

Training Dimensioning Training
For Senior Engineers, Specialist and Expert
For Target Audience
Diagram 1 COSFTX3000 Training Path
926
UMG8900 Training Path
CDMA NSS Softswitch

For all Technical and non-technical personnel
UMG8900 Operation and

For Field Technicians,

Engineers
UMG8900 Advanced
Training
For NMC/ 2nd line

Engineers
For Target Audience
Diagram 2 UMG8900 Training Path
927
CDMA MSC61 Training Path
CDMA MSC61 Operation

For Field Technicians,

Engineers
For Target Audience
Diagram 3 CDMA MSC61 Training Path
928
31 Mobile Softswitch(CDMA) Training Courses
Mobile SoftSwitch (CDMA) Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
CSOFTX3000 Training Courses
CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Delta Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 6 6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training Ⅳ 3 6~8
UMG8900 Training Courses
CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
CDMA MSC61 Training Courses
CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
929
31.1 CSOFTX3000 Training
31.1.1 CDMA NSS SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe the Networking and Interfaces of
CDMA LMSD network.
 Describe the fundamental of CDMA Softswitch
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental
technology.
ORL01 Lecture 2d  Describe the number planning of CDMA.
 Describe the service area of CDMA system.
Target Audience  Describe CDMA location update flow in CDMA

LMSD network.
This course is designed for personnel who need to
 Describe CDMA calling/called flow in CDMA
know basic knowledge of CDMA softswitch
LMSD network.
network and Huawei CDMA NSS products.
 Describe various bear establishment flows in
Prerequisites
CDMA LMSD network.
 None. Duration
Objectives
2 working days
be able to:
Min 6，max 12
 Outline the development of CDMA Softswitch
structure.
 Describe the architecture of CDMA NSS part.
930
31.1.2 CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Systems.
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 cascade
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental structures.
 Describe the function, indicators, ports and
ORL01 Lecture 2d
working mode of each board.
Prerequisites
 Explain the types and application situations of
different fibers and cables.
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(CPCI)  Describe the internal control signaling
processing flows in CSOFTX3000.
ORL10 Lecture 1d
 Describe internal signaling processing flows in
CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(CPCI)  Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
for CSOFTX3000, and calculate parts number
ORL30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d and type for typical networking requirement.
 Explain the architecture of CSOFTX3000,
hardware and software components of
CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance
Maintenance(CPCI)
system.
ORL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
 Manage BAM server, for example: checking its
working status and version.
Target Audience
 Use CSOFTX3000 operation and maintenance
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance tool--LMT.
Engineers;  Manage authorities of users.
Technical Support Engineers.  Perform operations on the alarm console.
Prerequisites  Manage equipments, for example: checking
board status and version.
 At least one year experience of operation and
maintenance of GSM NSS/CDMA NSS or other
data, executing MML commands.
telecommunication equipments;
 Manage logs, for example: querying logs,
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation
saving logs.
System;
 Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
 A basic knowledge of telecommunications;
tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
 Successful completion of the programs CDMA
result.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
 Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
Objectives
tasks on performance console.
On completion of this program, the participants will  Query the CDRs on bill console.
be able to:  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
 Describe the system functions of tasks (daily, weekly and monthly).
CSOFTX3000.  Manage iGWB server
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 key characteristics.  Perform Checking billing system
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 Hardware  Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration
931
method and procedure.  Verify the system status after configuration and
 Configure data to new MGW. modification.
 Configure data to new BSC. Duration
 Configure data to new office direction.
8 working days
 Perform the dynamic data configuration and
Class Size
modification.
 Check the data configuration correctness and Min 6，max 12
validity.
932
31.1.3 CSOFTX3000 Delta Training
Training Path
 Describe the system functions of
CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training  Describe the CSOFTX3000 key characteristics.

 Describe the CSOFTX3000 Hardware
Systems.
Prerequisites  Describe the CSOFTX3000 cascade
structures.
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA)
Target Audience
 Describe the internal control signaling
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance processing flows in CSOFTX3000.
Engineers;  Describe internal signaling processing flows in
Technical Support Engineers. CSOFTX3000.
Prerequisites  Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
for CSOFTX3000, and calculate parts number
 Successful completion of the programs
and type for typical networking requirement.
CSOFTX3000（CPCI) Routine Operation and
Duration
Maintenance Training and UMG8900 and
HLR9820 Operation and Maintenance Training 2 working days

be able to:
933
31.1.4 CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 Hardware
Systems.
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental  Describe the CSOFTX3000 cascade

structures.
ORL01 Lecture 2d
Prerequisites
CSOFTX3000 Hardware System(ATCA) different fibers and cables.
 Describe the internal control signaling
ORL11 Lecture 2d
processing flows in CSOFTX3000.
 Describe internal signaling processing flows in
CSOFTX3000.
CSOFTX3000 Basic Data Configuration(ATCA)
 Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
ORL32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d for CSOFTX3000, and calculate parts number
and type for typical networking requirement.
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 system functions,
CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and structures and key characteristics.
Maintenance(ATCA)
 Perform the data configuration to MGW, BSC,
Target Audience
and PSTN.
CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;  Verify the system status after configuration and
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance modification.
Engineers;  Perform operation through LMT.
Technical Support Engineers.  Backup system data, execute MML commands,
Prerequisites etc.
 Manage tracing tasks.
 At least one year experience of operation and
 Monitor alarms of CSOFTX3000.
maintenance of GSM NSS/CDMA NSS or other
telecommunication equipments;
tasks (daily, weekly and monthly).
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 data configuration
System;
method and procedure.
 A basic knowledge of telecommunications;
 Configure data to new MGW.
 Successful completion of the programs CDMA
 Configure data to new BSC.
NSS Softswitch Fundamental Training.
 Configure data to new office direction.
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will modification.
be able to:  Check the data configuration correctness and
 Describe the system functions of validity.
CSOFTX3000.  Verify the system status after configuration and
 Describe the CSOFTX3000 key characteristics. modification.
934
Duration Class Size
8 working days Min 6，max 12
935
31.1.5 CSOFTX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Know dual-home fundamental.
CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) O&M Training or  Configure the data for dual-homing system
CSOFTX3000 (ATCA) O&M Training  Perform the operation on dual-homing network.
 Perform the operation on Multi-area network.
Prerequisites
 Perform number analysis for Mobility
Management KPI.
Softswitch Service Deployment  Perform analysis for Mobility Management KPI.
 Perform analysis for Service KPI.
 Perform analysis for System load KPI.
 Perform operation on billing system.
 Perform complex number analysis.
Special Topic
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for location
ORL33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d update.
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for call
processing.
CSOFTX3000 Troubleshooting  Perform integrative trouble shooting for SMS
service.
ORL40 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Case 2 d
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for call
Supplementary service.
Target Audience
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance performance
Engineers;  Perform integrative trouble shooting for
Technical Support Engineers. charging system.
 Successful completion of the programs 6 working days

“CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and Class Size
Maintenance Training” and “UMG8900
Min 6，max 12
Operation and Maintenance Training”.
Objectives
936
31.1.6 CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis Training
Training Path
Objectives

CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training be able to:
 Analyze H.248 signaling protocol.
 Analyze SIP signaling protocol.
Prerequisites
 Analyze MAP signaling protocol.
 Describe the detailed communication flow in
CDMA softswitch network.
CDMA NSS Signaling Analysis
 Analyze the bearer establishment flows of
ORL55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d various cases.
 Analyze the important parameters in the
Target Audience messages.
 Analyze and locate the signaling problem of
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance
core network.
Engineers;
Duration
Technical Support Engineers.
Class Size
 Successful completion of the programs
“CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and Min 6，max 12
Operation and Maintenance Training”.
937
31.1.7 CDMA NSS Planning and Dimensioning Training
Training Path
“CSOFTX3000 Routine Operation and
Operation and Maintenance Training”
CSOFTX3000 Advanced O&M Training
Objectives

Prerequisites
be able to:
 Describe the concept and parameter about
core network design and planning.
CDMA NSS Design and Planning
 Calculate the network signaling bandwidth.
ORL56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, 3d  Calculate the network voice channel
Case
bandwidth.
Target Audience  Design the signaling network.
 Design the traffic network.
Duration
Engineers;
Technical Support Engineers. 3 working days
 Successful completion of the programs Min 6，max 8
938
31.2 UMG8900 Training
31.2.1 CDMA UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
CDMA NSS Softswitch Fundamental
ORL01 Lecture 2d  Describe the internal control signaling
Prerequisites processing flows in UMG8900.
 Describe the various bearer (TDM/IP)
UMG8900 Hardware System(R8) or processing flows in UMG8900.
UMG8900 Hardware System(R9)  Explain the basic hardware configuration rules
ORM10/11 Lecture 1d
for UMG8900, and calculate parts number and
type for typical networking requirement.
 Explain the architecture of UMG8900,
UMG8900 Data Configuration
hardware and software components of
ORM30 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d UMG8900 O&M system.
 Use UMG8900 operation and maintenance
tool--LMT.
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance  Perform operations on the alarm console.
ORM21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
board status and version.
 Manage data, for example: backuping MML
Target Audience script, executing MML commands.
CDMA NSS Field Maintenance Technicians;
saving logs.
Operation and Maintenance Engineers;
Prerequisites
saving result.
 At least one year experience of operation and  Check status of the traffic tasks, start/stop the
maintenance of GSM NSS/CDMA NSS or other tasks on performance console.
telecommunication equipments;  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation tasks (daily, weekly and monthly).
System;  Describe the UMG8900 data configuration
 A basic knowledge of telecommunications; method and procedure.
Objectives  Edit hardware data scripts.
 Edit H.248 data scripts.
 Edit SG data scripts.
be able to:
 Edit bearer data, including TDM, IP.
 Describe the system functions of UMG8900.
 Complete the initial data configuration file.
 Describe the UMG8900 key characteristics.
 Describe the UMG8900 hardware structures.
modification.
 Describe the UMG8900 cascade structures.
939
Duration
validity. 5 working days
 Verify the system status after configuration and Class Size
modification.
Min 6，max 12
940
31.2.2 CDMA UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
maintenance of CDMA NSS.
Objectives
be able to:
Prerequisites  Perform trouble shooting for signaling

 Perform trouble shooting for voice
 Perform trouble shooting for IP bearer
UMG8900 Troubleshooting
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for most
ORM40 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d kind of service.
 Perform integrative trouble shooting for
performance.
UMG8900 Special Topic  Know the UMG8900 IP interface
 Perform the UMG8900 IP network planning
ORM41 Lecture 1d
 Describe the application of UMG8900 in MSC
pool solution.
Target Audience
 Perform operation and maintenance on
CDMA NSS Operation and Maintenance UMG8900 based on MSC pool network.
Engineers, Duration
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
 Successful completion of the program
Min 6，max 12
UMG8900 Routine Operation and Maintenance
Training;
 At least two year experience of operation and
941
31.3 CDMA MSC61 Training
31.3.1 CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the basic structure and features of the
CDMA system.
CDMA MSC61 Operation and Maintenance
 Describe the functions and features of the
ORC30 Lecture 10 d CDMA MSC61 system.
 Describe the hardware configuration of the
Target Audience CDMA MSC61 system.

 Implement the data configuration of the CDMA
MSC61 system.
Engineers;
 Implement the routine operation and
maintenance of the CDMA MSC61 system.
Prerequisites  Execute commands to resolve the basic faults.
 At least one year experience of operation and  Register performance tasks and query alarm
maintenance of telecommunication equipments； information through LMT.
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation Duration

System；
10 working days
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications。
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6，max 12
942
32 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Path
32.1 WCDMA-CS Training Path
GSM/UMTS Softswitch
Fundamental
MSOFTX3000 Hardware UMG8900 Hardware System

System Training Training
MSOFTX3000 Operation UMG8900 Operation and

MSOFTX3000 Data UMG8900 Data

Configuration Training Configuration Training
MSS Service Provision MSS Troubleshooting

Training Training
GSM/UMTS Typical MSS Signaling Analysis

Training MSC POOL Training
Signaling Flow Training
MSS IP AoIP
Number Translation MSS Common Emergency Operation
Training Technology Training
and Troubleshooting Practice
2G/3G Core Network

GSM/UMTS Softswitch GSM/UMTS Softswitch
Core Network Design Core Network Optimization Sharing Training
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ SmartCare NetView Core

Analyst Operation and Maintenance Training
Training
943
32.2 GSM-R Training Path
GTSOFTX3000 Product GSM-R UMG8900 Product

Training Training
GSM-R Feature Training
32.3 UGC Training Path
UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway

Office) Operation and Maintenance
Training
32.4 SmartCare Training Path
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ

Analyst Operation and Maintenance
Training
SmartCare NetView Core Training
944
33 Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses
Mobile Softswitch(UMTS) Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
WCDMA-CS
Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training Ⅱ 6 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training Ⅱ 6 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
MSS Service Provision Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training Ⅰ 1 6 ~ 12
GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Data Configuration Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
MSS Signaling Analysis Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Number Translation Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and

Ⅳ 3 6 ~ 12
MSC POOL Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI) Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
MSS IP Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
SmartCare Netview CoreTraining Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
MSS Troubleshooting Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
AoIP Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting

Ⅲ 5 2~6
Practice
MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT) Ⅱ 4H No limit
GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT) Ⅱ 1H No limit
MSC POOL Principle(WBT) Ⅱ 1H No limit
945
UMG8900 System Overview(WBT) Ⅱ 1H No limit
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT) Ⅱ 2H No limit
GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT) Ⅱ 0.5H No limit
GSM-R
GTSOFTX3000 Product Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
GSM-R Feature Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
UGC
UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and

Ⅱ 8 6 ~ 12
SmartCare
SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
946
33.1 WCDMA-CS Training Courses
33.1.1 Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental Training
Training Path
 Describe architecture of UMTS R4 system
 Describe interfaces in UMTS R4
Mobile SoftSwitch Fundamental  Describe protocols in Circuit Switch domain of
R4
OWA02 Lectures, LVC 1d
 Describe call procedure in Circuit Switch
domain of R4
 Describe Features of Core Network
GSM/UMTS Softswitch Products Overview
 Describe system structure of MSOFTX3000
OWG01 Lectures, LVC 1d and UMG8900
 Describe functions and services provided by
Target Audience
MSOFTX3000 and UMG8900
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel  Describe typical networking and application of
Prerequisites MSOFTX3000 and UMG8900

Duration
 None
Class Size
947
33.1.2 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System Training
Training Path
Objectives

MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Hardware System
be able to:
OWG10 Lectures, LVC 1d  Describe logical structures of MSOFTX3000
 Describe the board functions of MSOFTX3000
Target Audience
 Describe the internal connection and cables of
Core network monitor engineers MSOFTX3000
Installation engineers Duration
Commissioning engineers
1 working day
Operation and maintenance engineers
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
A basic knowledge of mobile communication
948
33.1.3 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Data Configuration Training
Training Path
MSOFTX3000 and HLR (MTP-based
networking mode, M2UA-based networking
MSOFTX3000(CPCI) data configuration mode, M3UA-based non-peer-to-peer
networking mode, M3UA-based peer-to-peer
OWG21 Lectures, Hands-on 6d
networking mode, STP-transferred networking
Exercise mode)
Target Audience  Perform interworking configuration between
MSOFTX3000 and BSC (MTP-based
Core network commissioning engineers
mode, M3UA-based non-peer-to-peer
Prerequisites
networking mode, Mini-A-Flex networking
A basic knowledge of mobile communication mode, IP-based A interface)
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(CPCI)  Perform interworking configuration
Hardware System Training" MSOFTX3000 and PSTN (networking mode

based on MTP, M2UA, M3UA)
Objectives
 Perform interworking configuration
On completion of this program, the participants will MSOFTX3000 and RNC (M3UA
be able to: Non-Peer-to-Peer, Iu-Flex, IP-Based Iu
 Describe configuration flow of local office Interface)
integration  Perform interworking configuration
 Perform hardware configuration of MSOFTX3000 and MSC (ISUP over MTP,
MSOFTX3000  ISUP over M3UA, BICC over M3UA, SIP-I)
 Perform physical port configuration of  Verify the configuration result
MSOFTX3000
Duration
 Perform the interconnection between
MSOFTX3000 and UMG8900 6 working days
 Perform the local office information (SPC, MCC, Class Size
MNC, MSRN) configuration

Min 6, Max 12
 Perform interworking configuration between
949
33.1.4 MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Perform alarm management (browsing alarms,
querying alarms, printing alarms, dumping
MSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and alarm logs)
Maintenance
 Perform performance management ( creating
performance measurement tasks, customizing
Exercise、
performance entity, dumping the result of
Target Audience measurement)
 Perform iGWB operation(checking status of
Core network monitor engineers
processes, browsing CDR, checking hard disk
space, iGWB switchover)
Prerequisites
 Query equipment status
A basic knowledge of mobile communication  Query resource information
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(CPCI)  Query the service status
Hardware System Training"  Replace board or cable
Objectives Duration

 Operate BAM process and manager
Min 6, Max 12
 Check BAM status
 Backup and restore system
950
33.1.5 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System Training
Training Path
functions
 Describe MSOFTX3000 peripherals and other
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Hardware System components
 Describe MSOFTX3000 internal connection
OWG11 Lectures, LVC 1d
and external connection
Target Audience  Describe logical system architecture of
MSOFTX3000
 Describe the signaling processing flow, service
Installation engineers
processing flow, maintenance processing flow,
Commissioning engineers alarm management flow of MSOFTX3000
Operation and maintenance engineers Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
A basic knowledge of mobile communication Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe MSOFTX3000 boards and its
951
33.1.6 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Data Configuration Training
Training Path
MSOFTX3000 and HLR (MTP-based
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) data configuration networking mode, M2UA-based networking
networking mode, M3UA-based peer-to-peer
Exercise networking mode, STP-transferred networking
Target Audience mode)
MSOFTX3000 and BSC (MTP-based
Prerequisites
A basic knowledge of mobile communication networking mode, Mini-A-Flex networking

mode, IP-based A interface)
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(ATCA)
Hardware System Training"  Perform interworking configuration
MSOFTX3000 and PSTN (networking mode
Objectives
based on MTP, M2UA, M3UA)
On completion of this program, the participants will  Perform interworking configuration
be able to: MSOFTX3000 and RNC (M3UA
 Install the host software and local maintenance Non-Peer-to-Peer, Iu-Flex, IP-Based Iu
software after MGC and MGW hardware Interface)
installation  Perform interworking configuration
 Describe configuration flow of local office MSOFTX3000 and MSC (ISUP over MTP,
integration  ISUP over M3UA, BICC over M3UA, SIP-I)
 Perform hardware configuration of  Verify the configuration result
MSOFTX3000
Duration
 Perform physical port configuration of
MSOFTX3000 6 working days
 Perform the interconnection between Class Size
MSOFTX3000 and UMG8900

Min 6, Max 12
 Perform the local office information (SPC, MCC,
MNC, MSRN) configuration
952
33.1.7 MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Operating the tracing task
 Perform the alarm operation
MSOFTX3000 (ATCA) Operation and  Querying Logs
Maintenance
 Perform security management
 Perform the OMU status checking
Exercise
 Perform the License management
Target Audience
 Perform the Database processes starting and
Core network monitor engineers stopping
Operation and maintenance engineers  Perform the system backup and recovery
Prerequisites  Perform the service checking

 Perform the replacing boards
 Perform the iGWB configuration and
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000(ATCA)
maintenance
Hardware System Training"
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Perform the device management Min 6, Max 12
953
33.1.8 MSS Service Provision Training
Training Path
 Configure call service, USSD service
 Changing the resource of VLR
MSS Service Provision  Setting authentication configuration and cipher
configuration
 Configure roaming data in MSC Server
Exercise
 Configure IN service in MSC Server
Target Audience
 Adjusting the load among SS7 trunk routes
Core network commissioning engineers  Adjusting the load among M3UA or MTP3
Operation and maintenance engineers signaling links
Prerequisites  Makeup tone file

 Setting announcement configuration
 Adding an MSISDN number segment
Successful completion of "MSOFTX3000 Data
 Modifying a route in an office direction
Configuration Training" and "UMG8900 Data
Duration
Configuration Training"
Class Size
 Configure roaming restriction
954
33.1.9 GU UMG8900 Hardware System Training
Training Path
Objectives

GU UMG8900 Hardware System
be able to:
OWH10 Lectures, LVC 1d  Describe UMG8900 hardware structure
 Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
Target Audience
 Describe UMG8900 software architecture
Core network monitor engineers  Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
Installation engineers  Describe main boards' functions of UMG8900
Commissioning engineers  Describe Internal message processing flow
Prerequisites
1 working day
Min 6, Max 12
955
33.1.10 GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

GU UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance
Training be able to:
OWH23 Lectures, Hands-on 2d  Query equipment status
Exercise  Query resource information
Target Audience  Operate performance task

 Perform system backup and recovery
 Query the service status
 Replace the hardware boards
Prerequisites
 Replace the cable
A basic knowledge of mobile communication Duration

Successful completion of "GU UMG8900
2 working days
Hardware System Training"
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
956
33.1.11 UMG8900 Data Configuration Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Perform hardware and hardware interface
GU UMG8900 Data Configuration Training configuration
 Perform bearer(IP, TDM, ATM) configuration on
OWH22 Lectures, Hands-on 2d
UMG8900
Exercise
 Perform UMG8900 interworking with BSC
Target Audience  Perform UMG8900 interworking with
Core network commissioning engineers MSC/PSTN
Operation and maintenance engineers  Perform UMG8900 interworking with RNC
At least one year experience of operation and 2 working days
maintenance of Huawei UMG8900 Class Size
957
33.1.12 GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Analysis key parameters of location update
GSM/UMTS Typical Signaling Flow flow
Training
 Perform configuration related location update
OWA03 Lectures, Hands-on 3d
 Perform authentication and encryption flow
Exercise
analysis
Target Audience  Perform configuration related authentication
Core network commissioning engineers and encryption
Operation and maintenance engineers  Perform basic call flow analysis
Optimization engineers  Perform configuration related basic call
Prerequisites  Perform SMS flow analysis

 Perform configuration related SMS
At least one year experience of operation and
Duration
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other
telecommunication equipments 3 working days
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
958
33.1.13 MSS Signaling Analysis Training
Training Path
function
 Describe classification of RANAP messages
MSS Signaling Analysis Training  Analysis Iu connection Management, RAB
assignment, SRNS Relocation
OWA04 Lectures, Hands-on 5d
 CS Domain MM, CC procedures in Iu
Exercise
Interfaces
Target Audience  Perform protocol stack and main functions of
Core network commissioning engineers SIGTRAN
Operation and maintenance engineers  Analysis SCTP association establishment and

close flows
Optimization engineers
 Describe UA concepts introduction (AS, SG,
Prerequisites
IPSP, Entity, Routing key)
At least two years experience of operation and  Perform messages analysis of SCTP, M2UA,
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other M3UA
telecommunication equipments  Describe H248 Protocol stack and functions
A basic knowledge of mobile communication and  Perform message analysis of H248 based on
soft switch principle scenario
Objectives  Describe BICC protocol stack and functions
On completion of this program, the participants will  Analysis key parameters of BICC
be able to:  Analysis BICC message
 Describe BSSAP protocol stack and function Duration
 Analysis main procedures of BSSAP(Paging,

5 working days
Initial MS Message, Cipher Mode Control,
Class Size
Assignment, Handover, Release, DTAP
Message) Min 6, Max 12
 Describe Iu interface protocol stack and
959
33.1.14 Number Translation Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe number translation flow
Number Translation Training  Perform number change
 Perform failure process
 Perform call barring
Exercise
 Perform typical number translation based on
Target Audience
scenarios
Core network commissioning engineers  Perform general routing configuration on
Operation and maintenance engineers request of priority, load-sharing and time
Optimization engineers schedule
Prerequisites  Perform routing configuration based on TDM

and IP bearer
At least two years experience of operation and Duration
telecommunication equipments 2 working days
960
33.1.15 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Design Training
Training Path
 Describe GSM/UMTS softswitch network
planning procedure and rules
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network  Calculate broadband signaling interfaces in
Design Training
core network
 Perform signaling network design
Exercise
 Perform traffic network design
Target Audience  Perform access network interconnection
Core network operation and maintenance design
engineers  Perform service network interconnection
Core network design engineers design
Prerequisites  Perform billing system interconnection design

 Perform EMS interconnection design
At least one year experience of core network
Duration
design
A basic knowledge of core network design 3 working days
be able to:
961
33.1.16 GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network Evaluation and Optimization Training
Training Path
 Perform evaluation and optimization of the
hardware resource, logical resource, signaling
GSM/UMTS SoftSwitch Core Network resource, TC/EC resource, trunk resource,
Evaluation and Optimization Training
traffic resource
 Perform paging success rate analysis and
Exercise
optimization
Target Audience  Perform SMS success rate analysis and
optimization
Core network operation and maintenance
 Perform assignment success rate analysis and
engineers
optimization
Optimization engineers
 Perform handover success rate analysis and
Prerequisites
optimization
At least two years experience of operation and  Perform MO/MT call completion rate analysis
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other and optimization
telecommunication equipments Duration
A basic knowledge of core network optimization
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe procedure for evaluating resources of
V/G office
962
33.1.17 MSC POOL Training
Training Path
 Describe MSC Pool configuration flow overview
 Perform MSC Pool feature configuration in
MSC POOL Training MSC Server and MGW
 Perform MSC Pool configuration based on
different scenarios(NNSF implemented by RNC,
Exercise
NNSF implemented by MGW, Restructure
Target Audience MSC Pool based on current network)
 Monitor MSC Pool Load in real time
 Operate performance report of the MSC Pool
 Perform migration of subscribers
Prerequisites
 Perform MSC Pool configuration
At least two years experience of operation and synchronization between NE and M2000
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other  Perform end-to-end tracing of calls on the MSC
telecommunication equipments Pool
A basic knowledge of mobile communication  Understand the measurement units,
Objectives measurement entities, and related calculation
formulas for the MSC Pool
be able to:  Understand how to analyze the operating
status of networks before and after an MSC
 Describe MSC Pool networking
Pool reconstruction
 Describe principles related to the MSC Pool
Duration
features (The load balancing of MSC Pool,
Handover in MSC Pool, Disaster tolerance in 5 working days
MSC Pool, Subscriber migration in MSC Pool, Class Size
A-Flex by the MGW, Managing A-Interface
Circuits on the MGW, Charging based on Min 6, Max 12
Virtual MSC IDs or Location Areas)
963
33.1.18 MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta Training
Training Path
ATCA platform
 Describe MSOFTX3000 system principle
MSOFTX3000 ATCA Platform Delta based on ATCA platform
Training
 Perform the hardware and module
configuration based on MSOFTX3000 ATCA
Exercise
Platform
Target Audience  Perform OMU maintenance and database
Core network installation engineers  Perform log operation, software loading, and
equipment health check based on ATCA
platform
 Describe the difference between ATCA and
Prerequisites
CPCI platform
At least two years experience of operation and  Describe the affect of the new difference
maintenance of Huawei MSOFTX3000V100 Duration
equipment.
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
 Describe MSOFTX3000 hardware structure of
964
33.1.19 MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI)
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe Structure of the ETSI lawful
MSS XPTU Configuration Training (ETSI) interception system
 Outline MSC Server Function in LI system
 Outline function of X1 , X2 interface in LI
Exercise
system
Target Audience  Outline function of X3 interface in LI system
Core network commissioning engineers  Describe the XPTU Configuration in the MSC
Operation and maintenance engineers Server
Prerequisites  Perform the XPTU interworking with LIG

Duration
At least two years experience of operation and
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other 1 working day
telecommunication equipments Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
965
33.1.20 2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training
Training Path
mechanism(authentication and encryption)
 Perform GSM security mode setting
2G/3G Core Network Sharing Training  Perform UMTS security mode setting
 Describe GSM to UMTS inter-system handover
operation
Exercise
 Describe UMTS to GSM inter-system handover
Target Audience operation
Core network commissioning engineers  Describe Iu interface protocol stack and
Operation and maintenance engineers function
Prerequisites  Describe key parameters of RANAP

messages(
At least two years experience of operation and  Iu connection Management, RAB assignment,
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other SRNS Relocation
telecommunication equipments
 CS Domain MM, CC procedures in Iu
A basic knowledge of mobile communication Interfaces)
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the participants will 1 working day

be able to:
Class Size
 Describe GSM security
mechanism(authentication and encryption) Min 6, Max 12
 Describe UMTS Security
966
33.1.21 MSS IP Technology Training
Training Path
IP fundamental Objectives
OWI71 Lectures, Hands-on 1d On completion of this program, the participants will

Exercise be able to:
 Outline the structure of IP Bear network and the
CN internal IP Netwoking main protocols used
 outline the IP fundamental knowledge and the
OWI72 Lectures, Hands-on 0.5d
application in CN
Exercise
 Describe the IP networking inside CN
 Describe the hardware of datacom equipments
Datacom Equipments in CN
used in CN
OWI73 Lectures, Hands-on 1d  perform the O and M of the datacom
Exercise equipments used in CN

 Describe the IP reliability solutions in CN
CN IP Reliability and QOS  Perform the data configuration of the IP

reliability solutions
OWI74 Lectures, Hands-on 1d
 outline the QOS requirements for IP bear
Exercise network
 apply the QOS methods in CN
CN IP Troubleshooting
 When there happens the IP related trouble,
1.5d basically analysis the trouble location and

OWI75 Lectures, Hands-on
recover the service
Exercise
Duration
Target Audience
5 working days
Class Size

967
33.1.22 SmartCare Netview CoreTraining
Training Path
 Describe the hardware and software structure
of NetView system
CS Netview Core Operation and  Describe the function and interface of NetView
Maintenance
elements
 Perform the system installation
Exercise
 Perform the system commissioning
Target Audience  Perform the security operation of NetView
Core network operation and maintenance  Perform the log management of NetView
engineers  Perform the alarm management of NetView
Prerequisites  Perform the client operation of NetView

 Perform the server operation of NetView
 Perform the real-time call trace
 Perform network and service quality monitoring
 Perform signaling monitor
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
be able to:
 Outline position of NetView system and typical Min 6, Max 12
networking
968
33.1.23 MSS Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Objectives

MSOFTX3000 Troubleshooting Training
be able to:
OWG38 Lectures, Hands-on 3d  Perform tracer, CSIS of MSOFTX3000 to fault
Exercise finding and locating
 MSOFTX3000 signaling troubleshooting
GU UMG8900 Troubleshooting Training  MSOFTX3000 service troubleshooting and
case analysis (Call fault, Data service fault,
OWH36 Lectures, Hands-on 2d
SMS fault, Location Update fault,
Exercise announcement playing)
Target Audience  Perform tracer, loopback, voice recorder for
fault finding and troubleshooting
 Perform signaling troubleshooting
 Perform the bearer troubleshooting
Prerequisites
 Perform the voce quality troubleshooting
At least two years experience of operation and Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
969
33.1.24 AoIP Training
Training Path
AoIP
 Describe the function of each network element
AoIP Training on AoIP
 Describe AoIP codec selecting policy
 Describe the signaling flow difference between
Exercise
AoIP and AoTDM
Target Audience  Describe the principle of QoS and IP domain on
Core network commissioning engineers AoIP
Operation and maintenance engineers  Configure AoIP data on MSC Server and MGW
Prerequisites  Analyze and handle faults related to core

network AoIP
At least two years experience of operation and  Complete analysis and handling of common
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other faults
Duration
Class Size
 Outline the Modifications from AoTDM to
970
33.1.25 MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Practice
Training Path
 Perform the emergency operation of the mobile
switching system
MSS Common Emergency Operation and  Collect information for troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Practice
 Tracing the intra signaling message
 Query call analysis data
Exercise
 Analysis abnormal call by MSS call LOG
Target Audience
 Troubleshoot by using CSIS
Core network commissioning engineers  Check post status
Operation and maintenance engineers  Perform MGW port loopback test
Prerequisites  Query billing

 Make EC/TC dialing test
 Perform record tone practice
 Check CPU loadshare and TC/EC resource
 Perform the emergency operation of the MSC
Pool networking
Objectives
 Segregate abnormal MSC Server in Pool
be able to:
5 working days
 Perform the health check of the mobile
Class Size
switching system
 Backup and restore system Min 2, Max 6
 Switch system and replace parts
971
33.1.26 MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT)
Training Path
difference between BICC CS1 and CS2
 Describe basic BICC call procedures
MSS Signaling Analysis(WBT)  Describe the functions of SIGTRAN
 Describe SIGTRAN protocol structure,
OWG79 Lectures 4H
message and signaling flow
Target Audience  Describe SCTP functions
 Describe the signaling message and
procedures of SCTP
 Describe the functions of SIGTRAN UA layers
Prerequisites
 Describe the procedures and implementation of
At least two years experience of operation and M2UA
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other  Describe the procedures and implementation of
telecommunication equipments M3UA
A basic knowledge of mobile communication and  Describe H248 protocol function
soft switch principle  Describe H248 message structure
Objectives  Describe the function of H248 commands
 Describe H248 signaling procedure
 Describe BICC protocol stack and functions 4 hours

 Describe the Bearer Independent Call Control Class Size
model
No limit
 Describe BICC message structure
 Describe the similarities and differences
between BICC and ISUP, and the main
972
33.1.27 GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network Principle(WBT)
Training Path
 Write down the Softswitch core network
structure
GSM and UMTS Softswitch Core Network  Describe the Softswitch core network technical
Principle(WBT)
features
OWG80 Lectures 1H
 Describe interfaces and protocol in softswitch
Target Audience  Write down the call flow in Softswitch core
network
Duration
Prerequisites 1 hour
Class Size
Objectives No limit

be able to:
973
33.1.28 MSC POOL Principle(WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

MSC POOL Principle(WBT)
be able to:
OWG81 Lectures 1H  Describe MSC Pool networking
 Describe principles related to the MSC Pool
Target Audience
features (The load balancing of MSC Pool,
Core network commissioning engineers Handover in MSC Pool, Disaster tolerance in
Operation and maintenance engineers MSC Pool, Subscriber migration in MSC Pool,
A-Flex by the MGW, Managing A-Interface
Prerequisites
Circuits on the MGW, Charging based on
At least two years experience of operation and Virtual MSC IDs or Location Areas)
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS or other Duration
1 hour
A basic knowledge of mobile
Class Size
No limit
974
33.1.29 UMG8900 System Overview(WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

UMG8900 System Overview(WBT)
be able to:
OWG82 Lectures 1H  Describe UMG8900 product orientation
 Describe product feature
Target Audience
 Describe system architecture
Core network commissioning engineers  Describe service and networking applications
Prerequisites
1 hour
No limit
975
33.1.30 MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and Principle(WBT)
Training Path
the network
 Describe MSOFTX3000 system structure
MSOFTX3000(ATCA) System and  Describe the networking and application of
Principle(WBT)
MSOFTX3000
OWG83 Lectures 2H
 Describe the interfaces and protocols
Target Audience  Describe MSOFTX3000 physical structure
 Describe MSOFTX3000 logical system
architecture
 Describe Signaling internal processing flows
Prerequisites
Duration
2 hours
Objectives
Class Size
No limit
be able to:
 Describe the orientation of MSOFTX3000 in
976
33.1.31 GU CS Core Network Design Overview(WBT)
Training Path
Objectives

GU CS Core Network Design
Overview(WBT) be able to:
OWG84 Lectures 0.5H  Describe the importance of network design
 Describe the main contents of network design
Target Audience
Duration
Core network operation and maintenance
0.5 hour
engineers
Class Size
Core network design engineers
Prerequisites No limit
At least one year experience of core network

design
977
33.2 GSM-R Training Courses
33.2.1 GTSOFTX3000 Product Training
Training Path
GTSOFTX3000 and MGW
 Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office information
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware System configuration
 Perform data configuration between
OMH20 Lectures, 0.5d
GTSOFTX3000 to HLR
GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based, M3UA
GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration
based)
OMH22 Lectures, Hands-on 6d  Perform the data configuration from
Exercise GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and ATM

GTSOFTX3000 Operation and GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in different

Maintenance mode
OMH21 Lectures, Hands-on 3.5d  Manage equipments, for example: checking
Exercise board status and version
Target Audience  Manage data, for example: backup system

GSM-R core network monitor engineers
Installation engineers
saving logs
 Manage tracing tasks, for example: creating a
Operation and maintenance engineers tracing task, checking tracing result, saving
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers, result
Prerequisites  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
 A basic knowledge of telecommunication  Operation of replace the hardware board

 Operation of change the cable
Objectives
 Operation of system backup
 Operation of system recovery
be able to:
 Manage alarms (browsing alarms, querying
 Describe the MSOFTX3000 hardware
alarms, printing alarms, dump alarm logs)
structures
 Create performance tasks
 Describe the MSOFTX3000 cascade structures
 Checking status of performance tasks
 Customized performance tasks
working mode of each board
 Dump the measurement result
 Explain the types and applications of different
 Start and stop the process of BAM
fibers and cables
 Point out key information and its directory of
 Describe the concept of Hardware
BAM
Configuration
Duration
 Perform hardware configuration
 Know how to verify hardware configuration 10 working days
 Perform the connection between
978
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
979
33.2.2 GSM-R UMG8900 Product Training
Training Path
 Describe main boards' functions of UMG8900
 Describe Internal message flow of UMG8900
GSM-R UMG8900 Hardware System  Describe function of SIWF
 Configure SIWF
OMH30 Lectures, 1d
 Perform operation and maintenance of SIWF
 Query equipment status
 Query resource information
GSM-R UMG8900 Operation and
Maintenance  Perform backup and recovery of UMG8900
OMH31 Lectures, Hands-on 2d  Query the service status
Exercise  Browse alarm information
 Browse the performance task
GSM-R UMG8900 Data Configuration  Configuring System Parameters
2d  Configuring System Time

OMH32 Lectures, Hands-on
 Configuring Frames and Boards
Exercise
 Configuring the Clock
Target Audience
 Configuring the NMS Interface
GSM-R core network monitor engineers  Configuring the MGW Control Interface and
installation engineers SIGTRAN Interface
commissioning engineers  Configure ATM bearer, IP bearer, TDM bearer
operation and maintenance engineers  Configure signaling transfer
GSM-R core network monitor engineers  Configure MGW data
operation and maintenance engineers  Configure the link
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers,  Perform interworking with MGW based on
operation and maintenance engineers different networking
Prerequisites  Perform interworking with BSC based on
different scenarios
A basic knowledge of telecommunication
 Perform interworking with MSC/PSTN based
Objectives
on different networking
be able to:
5 working days
 Describe UMG8900 hardware structure
Class Size
 Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
 Describe UMG8900 software architecture Min 6, Max 12
 Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
980
33.2.3 GSM-R Feature Training
Training Path
 Configure and verify eMLPP service
 Configure and verify USS1 service
GSM-R Overview  Configure and verify VBS service
 Configure and verify VGCS service
OMH01 Lectures 0.5d
 Configure and verify Multiple-Engine service
 Configure and verify functional addressing
 Configure and verify call area restriction
GSM-R Feature Training
Configure and verify location dependent
OMH40 Lectures, Hands-on 4.5d addressing service
Exercise  Configure and verify SMC integration service
Target Audience  Configure and verify access matrix service

 Configure and verify break-in and force release
GSM-R core network telecommunication service
engineers
 Configure and verify missed call SMS prompt
GSM-R core network commissioning engineers service
Operation and maintenance engineers  Configure and verify priority cell service
Prerequisites  Perform AC (Acknowledgement Center) server
A basic knowledge of railway telecommunication software installation and uninstallation
system  Configure AC in BAM
Objectives  Operate GMS(Group Management Server)

installation
Duration
be able to:
 Describe the fundamental of GSM-R 5 working days
 Describe the architecture of GSM-R system Class Size
 Describe the service and function of GSM-R Min 6, Max 12

system
981
33.3 UGC Training Courses
33.3.1 UGC3200 (Convergent Gateway Office) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Perform software O and M(checking process
status and so on)
OMS2600 (UGC) Operation and  Introduce the UGC3200 hardware structure
Maintenance
 Introduce the function, location and working
OZC10 Lectures, Hands-on 1d
flow of UGC3200
Exercise
 Perform number analysis configuration
 Perform the local office data and the data
UGC3200(CGO) Operation and
Maintenance configuration related to H248 and SIP
OZE08 Lectures, Hands-on 4d  Perform the interworking data with MGW,PSTN,
Exercise GSM, CDMA, etc
 Perform device and service status check
UMG8900(CGO) Operation and  Perform iGWB operation and maintenance

Maintenance  Introduce the system functions of UMG8900
OZE04 Lectures, Hands-on 2d  Introduce the UMG8900 hardware structure
Exercise
 Introduce the function, indicators, ports and
working mode of each board
iManager NMS (CGO) Operation and  Perform UMG8900 Mc(H248) interface
Maintenance
configuration
OZO05 Lectures, Hands-on 1d
 Perform UMG8900 interworking with
Exercise
MSC-PSTN-MGW data configuration
Target Audience
 Operate GUI
Convergency Gateway Office monitor engineers  Perform routine maintenance
Commissioning engineers  Describe the NMS structure
Operation and maintenance engineers  Perform system login
Prerequisites  Operate user right management
 Operate topology management
 A basic knowledge of telecommunication
 Operate fault management
Objectives
 Operate performance management
On completion of this program, the participants will  Perform system monitor
be able to:  Backup database
 Introduce the hardware structure, the power Duration
system and the board functions of ATCA
platform, as well as the monitor system 8 working days
 Describe function and features of OMS2600 Class Size
 Perform OMS2600 hardware Min 6, Max 12

operation(replacing boards, checking running
status)
982
33.4 SmartCare Training Courses
33.4.1 SmartCare NetProbe3010 and SEQ Analyst Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path
 Describe function of different hardware parts of
NetProbe3010
SmartCare SEQ Analyst Operation and  Describe function of different software
sub-systems of NetProbe3010
OWL01 Lectures, Hands-on 2d
 Configure probe
Exercise
 Maintain probe
 Describe position, feature, function, interface
SmartCare NetProbe 3010 Operation and
Maintenance Training protocol and structure of SEQ Analyst
OWM01 Lectures, Hands-on 1d  Describe hardware structure and function of
Exercise different parts of SEQ Analyst
 Describe software structure and function of
Target Audience
different software sub-system of SEQ Analyst
Core network monitoring engineers  Configure server, module group, local service
Prerequisites IP and service data of SEQ Analyst
 Monitor network
 At least two years experience of operation and
 Analysis KPIs
maintenance of GSM NSS/UMTS CS and PS
 Handle equipment fault
Objectives
Duration
 Describe typical networking, function, system Class Size
structure and interface protocol of Min 6, Max 12

NetProbe3010
 Describe typical configuration of NetProbe3010
983
34 NGN&STP Training Path

34.1 NGN Training Path
NGN System Overview

Training
2d
For telecom management

engineer
984
NGN Operation and

SoftX3000 Operation and

9d

NGN Core
Maintenance Training Network
4d Elements
iManager N2000 UMS

Operation and
2d
UA5000 (NGN) Operation SG7000 (NGN) Operation

and Maintenance Training and Maintenance Training
1d 3d
MRS6100 Operation and IAD Operation and

2d 1d
SE2000 Operation and U-Path Operation and

2d 1d
SHLR9200 Operation and

2d
For operation and maintenance

engineer, technical support
engineer
NGN Advanced Operation

985
NGN Advanced Operation

SoftX3000 Advanced
Operation and
8d
UMG8900 Advanced
Operation and NGN Core
Maintenance Training Network
Elements
3d
iManager N2000 UMS

Advanced Operation and
2d
SE2000 Advanced SG7000 (NGN) Advanced

Operation and Operation and Maintenance
Maintenance Training Training
2d 2d
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced SHLR9200 Advanced

Operation and Maintenance Operation and
1d 1d
MRS6100 Advanced
Operation and
1d
For technical support engineer
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
986
34.2 STP Training Path
STP Operation and DRA(SPS V3) Operation

Maintenance Training and Maintenance Training
7d 2d
For operation and maintenance For operation and maintenance

engineer, technical support engineer engineer, technical support engineer
987
35 NGN&STP Training Courses
NGN&STP Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
NGN
NGN System Overview Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 9 6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 4 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
IAD Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 8 6 ~ 12
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance

Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
Training
MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
STP
STP Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 7 6 ~ 12
DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT) Ⅱ 3.5H No limit
988
35.1 NGN Training Courses
35.1.1 NGN System Overview Training
Training Path
 Describe the basic concepts, system
architecture, services, networking and
NGN System Overview applications of NGN.
 Describe the network topology, services and
OA011 Lectures 0.5d
functions of NGN equipment.
 Outline the functions of NGN protocols.
 Outline the features, advantages, actuality and
NGN Product Overview
development trend of NGN.
OA012 Lectures 1d  Outline the components, services, networking

and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution.
 Describe the network topology, services and
NGN Service Description functions of NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS

solution.
OA013 Lectures 0.5d  Outline the system structure, networking,
applications and technical specifications of
Target Audience
NGN equipment in Huawei U-SYS solution.
Telecom management personnel  Describe the functions, characteristics,
Prerequisites applications and uses of all services (including
basic voice services, supplementary services
 A general understanding of
and IN services) supported by Huawei U-SYS
solution.
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
be able to:
Class Size
 Describe the structure of the
telecommunication network. Min 6, Max 12
989
35.1.2 SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
functions, system structure, board functions,
board indicators, networking, applications and
SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance technical specifications of SoftX3000.
 Outline the service data configuration steps of
OAX01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 9d
SoftX3000, and execute the common service
data configuration (local office data
Target Audience configuration, charging data configuration,
media gateway data configuration, MRS data
Operating and maintenance personnel, technical
configuration, protocol data configuration, SS7
support personnel
signaling data configuration, routing data
Prerequisites
configuration, trunk data configuration, number
Familiar with computer operation and Windows analysis data configuration, subscriber data
system configuration).
A general understanding of telecommunications  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
and data communications of SoftX3000 (operator authority management,
At least one year of experience in the operation database backup and restoration, data
and maintenance of telecommunications consistent checking between the host and BAM,
equipment log management, alarm management, device
Objectives management, media gateway management,
protocol and signaling management, trunk
On completion of this program, the participants will circuit management, subscriber management,
be able to: bill management, traffic statistics).
 Describe the basic concepts, system  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
architecture, services, networking and of iGWB.
applications of NGN.
 Perform the common troubleshooting of
 Outline the components, services, networking SoftX3000.
and applications of Huawei U-SYS solution.
Duration
 Explain the functions, features, applications,
terms, stack structure and messages of NGN 9 working days
protocols (MGCP, H.248, SIP, SIGTRAN and Class Size
H.323).
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the network topology, services,
990
35.1.3 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance technical specifications of UMG8900.
OAU01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 4d
UMG8900, and execute the common service
data configuration (MGW data configuration, IP
Target Audience bearer data configuration, TG data
configuration, AG data configuration, SG data
configuration).
support personnel
Prerequisites
of UMG8900 (database backup, log
Familiar with computer operation and Windows management, alarm management, device
system management, protocol tracing, service
A general understanding of telecommunications management, POTS subscriber testing).
and data communications  Perform the common troubleshooting of
At least one year of experience in the operation UMG8900.
and maintenance of telecommunications Duration
equipment
4 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
991
35.1.4 iManager N2000 UMS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Explain the functions and applications of
iManager N2000 UMS Operation and SNMP.
Maintenance
OAN01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
functions, system structure, networking,
applications and technical specifications of
Target Audience iManager N2000 UMS.
NMS operator, operating and maintenance  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
personnel, technical support personnel of iManager N2000 UMS (network topology

management, network element management,
Prerequisites
network alarm monitoring, network
Familiar with computer operation and Windows performance monitoring, environment and user
system right management).
A general understanding of telecommunications Duration
and data communications
2 working days
At least one year of experience in the operation
and maintenance of telecommunications Class Size
equipment Min 6, Max 12

Objectives
992
35.1.5 MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
MRS6100 Operation and Maintenance functions, system structure, board functions,
OAM01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
technical specifications of MRS6100.
Target Audience MRS6100, and execute the system data
configuration.
support personnel  Perform the voice file loading.
Prerequisites  Perform the routine operation and maintenance

of MRS6100 (log management, alarm
Familiar with computer operation and Windows management, device management, message
system tracing).
A general understanding of telecommunications Duration
2 working days
and maintenance of telecommunications Class Size
equipment
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
993
35.1.6 SG7000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
SG7000 (NGN) Operation and board indicators, networking, applications and
Maintenance
technical specifications of SG7000.
OAS01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3d
SG7000, and execute the common service
Target Audience data configuration (local office data
configuration, MTP data configuration, M3UA
data configuration).
support personnel
Prerequisites
of SG7000 (database backup, log management,
Familiar with computer operation and Windows alarm management, device management,
system signaling tracing).
A general understanding of telecommunications  Perform the common troubleshooting of
and data communications SG7000.
At least one year of experience in the operation Duration
and maintenance of telecommunications
3 working days
equipment
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
994
35.1.7 SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
procedure of NGN network intelligentizing.
SHLR9200 Operation and Maintenance functions, system structure, board functions,
board indicators, signaling procedure,
networking, applications and technical
specifications of SHLR9200.
Target Audience  Outline the service data configuration steps of
SHLR9200, and execute the common service
support personnel data configuration (local office data
configuration, MTP data configuration, SCCP
Prerequisites
data configuration, subscriber data
Familiar with computer operation and Windows configuration).
system  Perform the routine operation and maintenance
A general understanding of telecommunications of SHLR9200 (log management, alarm
and data communications management, device management, signaling
At least one year of experience in the operation tracing, service data management).
equipment
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Describe the concepts, principle, networking,
applications, services and service processing
995
35.1.8 SE2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
SE2000 Operation and Maintenance applications and technical specifications of
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300).
OAE01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300), and execute
Target Audience the common service data configuration (SNMP
data configuration, signaling PROXY and
media PROXY data configuration, IADMS
support personnel
PROXY data configuration).
Prerequisites
Familiar with computer operation and Windows of SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (log
system management, alarm management, device
A general understanding of telecommunications management, signaling proxy and media
and data communications PROXY debugging, IADMS PROXY
At least one year of experience in the operation debugging).
equipment
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
 Explain the working principle of PROXY.
996
35.1.9 UA5000 (NGN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
UA5000 (NGN) Operation and functions, system structure, board functions,
Maintenance
OAG01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d
technical specifications of UA5000.
Target Audience UA5000, and execute the common service
data configuration (hardware data configuration,
support personnel MG interface data configuration, POTS service
data configuration).
Prerequisites
Familiar with computer operation and Windows of UA5000 (database backup, log management,
system alarm management, device management,
A general understanding of telecommunications subscriber testing).
and data communications Duration
1 working day
equipment Class Size
997
35.1.10 IAD Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

IAD Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OAI01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the network topology, product
classification, services, functions, system
Target Audience structure, networking, applications and

technical specifications of IAD.
Operating and maintenance personnel, technical  Outline the service data configuration steps of
support personnel IAD, and execute the common service data
Prerequisites configuration (MG data configuration,
subscriber data configuration).
Familiar with computer operation and Windows
of IAD (log management, alarm management,
A general understanding of telecommunications
device management).
Duration
and maintenance of telecommunications 1 working day
equipment Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
998
35.1.11 U-Path Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

U-Path Operation and Maintenance
be able to:
OAP01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the network topology, services,
Target Audience applications and technical specifications of

U-Path.
Operating and maintenance personnel, technical  Perform the software installation of U-Path.
support personnel
 Perform the service configuration of U-Path.
Prerequisites
 Outline the related data configuration on
Familiar with computer operation and Windows SoftX3000 side.
A general understanding of telecommunications of U-Path (log management, system status
and data communications browsing, and bill management).
At least one year of experience in the operation Duration

1 working day
equipment
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
999
35.1.12 SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Execute the service data configuration of
SoftX3000 (number changing data
SoftX3000 Advanced Operation and configuration, call barring data configuration).
Maintenance
 Perform the operation and maintenance of
OAX02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 8d
SoftX3000 (using of database tool, traffic
statistics, system security and defense).
Target Audience  Perform the troubleshooting of SoftX3000.
Technical support personnel, technical specialist  Describe the principle, processing procedure,
operation and original bill format of NGN
Prerequisites
charging system, and describe the system
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and structure and configuration of iGWB.
Maintenance Training  Describe the principle, application, data
At least a half year of experience in the operation planning and data configuration of NGN dual
and maintenance of NGN home, and perform the routine maintenance of
Objectives NGN dual home.
 List the means of improving voice quality of
NGN.
be able to:
Duration
 Explain the command parameters and call
processing procedure of NGN protocols, and 8 working days
perform the common problem analysis and Class Size
processing of NGN protocols.
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the working principle and service
processing procedure of SoftX3000.
1000
35.1.13 UMG8900 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Describe the working principle and service
processing procedure of UMG8900.
UMG8900 Advanced Operation and  Execute the service data configuration of
Maintenance
UMG8900 (PRI data configuration, R2 data
OAU02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3d
configuration), and outline the related data
configuration on SoftX3000 side.
Target Audience  Perform the operation and maintenance of
Technical support personnel, technical specialist UMG89000 (testing management, performance

statistics, using of software tool).
Prerequisites
 Perform the troubleshooting of UMG8900.
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and Duration
3 working days
At least a half year of experience in the operation
and maintenance of NGN Class Size

be able to:
1001
35.1.14 iManager N2000 UMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
iManager N2000 UMS (test management,
authority and domain based management,
iManager N2000 UMS Advanced subscriber service provisioning, OSS
interconnection).
OAN02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Perform the system administration of iManager
N2000 UMS (user accounts management,
Target Audience UMS user management, log management,
service and process management, database
Technical support personnel, technical specialist
management, file and disk management,
Prerequisites
database backup and restoration).
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and  Perform the troubleshooting of iManager
Maintenance Training N2000 UMS.
At least a half year of experience in the operation Duration
and maintenance of NGN
2 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
1002
35.1.15 MRS6100 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

MRS6100 Advanced Operation and
OAM02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the working principle, announcement
principle and service processing procedure of
Target Audience MRS6100.

 Perform the language conversion of voice.
 Perform the voice conversion and voice
Prerequisites loading.
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and  Perform the troubleshooting of MRS6100.
Maintenance Training Duration

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1003
35.1.16 SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

SG7000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and
OAS02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d  Execute the service data configuration of
SG7000 (MTP load sharing data configuration,
Target Audience SCCP load sharing data configuration).

 Perform the troubleshooting of SG7000.
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and
Class Size
At least a half year of experience in the operation Min 6, Max 12
1004
35.1.17 SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

SHLR9200 Advanced Operation and
OAS04 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d  Explain the stack structure, functions,
messages and applications of MAP+.
Target Audience  Execute the custom-made service data

configuration of SHLR9200.
 Perform the troubleshooting of SHLR9200.
Prerequisites
Duration

1 working day
Class Size
and maintenance of NGN Min 6, Max 12
1005
35.1.18 SE2000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe the working principle, security, QoS
SE2000 Advanced Operation and and reliability of SE2000
Maintenance
Series(SE2200/SE2300).
OAE02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d
 Execute the service data configuration of
SE2000 Series(SE2200/SE2300) (security
Target Audience data configuration, QoS data configuration,
reliability data configuration).
 Perform the troubleshooting of SE2000
Prerequisites
Series(SE2200/SE2300).
Successful completion of the NGN Operation and Duration
2 working days
and maintenance of NGN Class Size
1006
35.1.19 UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Objectives

UA5000 (NGN) Advanced Operation and
OAG02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d  Describe the working principle of UA5000.
Target Audience UA5000 (system maintenance, DSP resources

maintenance).
 Perform the troubleshooting of UA5000.
Prerequisites
Duration

1 working day
Class Size
and maintenance of NGN Min 6, Max 12
1007
35.2 STP Training Courses
35.2.1 STP Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
performance features of SG7000.
 Describe SG7000 logical architecture and
SS7 Signaling System signaling flow.
 Describe the basic concepts of SS7 Signaling
OST01 Lectures 1.5d
System.
 Describe the architecture of SS7 Signaling
System.
SG7000 Hardware System
 State the format of TUP, ISUP and SCCP
OST02 Lectures 0.5d message and the meaning of the message
which are often used.
 State the signaling procedures of TUP, ISUP
SG7000 Operation and Maintenance and SCCP.

 Trace and analyze the signaling message.
OST03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 5d  Describe the terminal and alarm system of
SG7000.
Target Audience  Configure the hardware data and service data.
 Implement the common operation of
Personnel who maintain STP equipment
maintenance such as message tracing and link
Prerequisites
management.
At least one year of experience in the operation or  Describe the MNP service flows.
maintenance of STP or other switch equipment  Configure the MNP data.
Being familiar with computer operation Duration
Objectives
7 working days
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe SG7000 system structure and
hardware architecture.
 State the cabinet, frame, board and the
1008
35.2.2 DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
function and features.
 Describe the system architecture of SPS,
DRA(SPS V3) Operation and Maintenance including the hardware structure, software
structure.
 Explain the SPS protocols and interfaces.
 Describe the SPS configuration flows.
Target Audience
 Perform the SPS data configuration, including
Operating and maintenance engineer the hardware data configuration, basic data
Technical support engineer configuration, signaling interworking data

configuration, function and feature data
Prerequisites
configuration.
Being familiar with computer operation  Perform SPS routine operation and
At least one year of experience in operation and maintenance, including the routine
maintenance of telecom field maintenance tasks, routine maintenance
General understanding of telecommunications and commands, logs and alarm checking.
data communications Duration
Objectives
2 working days
be able to:
Min 6, Max 12
 Describe the SPS product location, typical
application, network structure, the basic
1009
35.2.3 iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT)
Training Path
client.
 Perform user right management on the N2000
iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT) client.
 Monitor the device information on the N2000.
OANE1 Multimedia 3.5H
 Monitor the N2000 server information on the
Target Audience N2000.
 Perform the database backing up and
Operating and maintenance engineers
restoration.
Prerequisites
 Perform the NE data backing up and
Being familiar with computer operation restoration.
General understanding of telecommunications and  Perform NGN service signaling tracing.

data communications  Check the signaling tracing result.
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the participants will 3.5 hours

 Perform topology management, configuration
No limit
management on the N2000 client.
 Check device alarm and log on the N2000
1010
36 C&C08 Training Path
36.1 C&C08 Training Path
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation

18 d
For NMS engineer, technical

support engineer
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced

15 d
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance

Training
10 d
For Target
Audience
Training Upgrade
Path
1011
37 C&C08 Training Courses
C&C08 Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
C&C08
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance

Ⅱ 18 6 ~ 12
Training
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and

Ⅲ 15 6 ~ 12
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
1012
37.1 C&C08 Training Courses
37.1.1 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
 Explain the basic principle and structure of the
C&C08 Switch system.
C&C08 Switch System Overview  Outline the performance of C&C08 Switch
system.
OSC01 Lectures 0.5d
 Perform the troubleshooting for minor faults.
 Explain the alarm subsystem and perform the
routine operation.
C&C08 Switch Hardware System
 Perform the various tests and analyze the test
OSC02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3.5d results.
 Use the common tools in the maintain
subsystem.
C&C08 Switch Data Configuration  Perform the routine operations in the bill
management subsystem.
OSC03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 8d  Perform the routine operations in the traffic
statistics subsystem.
 Perform the routine maintenance tasks.
C&C08 System Maintenance  Set and maintain the office data.
 Set and maintain the user data.
OSC04 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 5d
 Set and maintain the trunk data.
 Set and maintain the charging data.
C&C08 Switch Troubleshooting  Describe the system structure at module, frame

and board level and the performance features
OSC05 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d of C&C08.
 Identify the hierarchy and network architecture
Target Audience of AM/CM.
 Explain the system resource allocation, the
NMS operator, Technical support engineer
control architecture and the communication
Prerequisites
process of SM.
 Being familiar with Windows operating system  Identify the general hardware structure of
 Having the basic knowledge of C&C08.
telecommunication Duration
 At least one year of experience in the operation

18 working days
or maintenance of SPC switch
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
be able to:
1013
37.1.2 C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
Objectives

C&C08 Switch In-depth Introduction
be able to:
OSD01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3d  Describe the planning and configuration
principle of C&C08 switch.
 Describe the network management principle of
C&C08 Switch Advanced Maintenance C&C08 switch.
 Perform the basic design of C&C08 switch
OSD02 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 7d
according to requirements.
 Describe the detailed call process of C&C08
switch.
C&C08 Switch Advanced Troubleshooting
 Describe the principle of trunk line hunting.
OSD03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2d  Describe the MTP and ISUP principle.
 State the general procedures and methods of
troubleshooting.
C&C08 Switch Introduction to Special  Describe the alarm information and use the
Subject maintenance tool for troubleshooting.
OSD04 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 2.5d  Perform troubleshooting for various faults.
 Perform the whole system hardware
configuration.
C&C08 Switch Network Planning  Perform the whole system software installation.
 Perform the advanced data setting such as
OSD05 Lectures 0.5d
number change, call failure process and
Target Audience auxiliary signaling.
 Describe the principle of software parameter.
Specialist
 Describe the knowledge of Windows NT and
Prerequisites
Database.
Having completed the C&C08 Digital SPC  Describe the loading procedure of C&C08
Switching System Operation and Maintenance hardware system.
Training  Describe the principle of C&C08 clock system.
At least one year of experience in the operation or  Describe the principle of C&C08 charging
maintenance of SPC switch system.
Being familiar with Windows operating system Duration
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
15 working days
telecommunication
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
1014
37.1.3 C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
hardware.
 Describe the hierarchy and network
Basic Knowledge of Intelligent Network architecture of AM/CM.
 Describe the system resource allocation, the
OSP01 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 3d
process of SM.
 Identify the general hardware structure of
C&C08-SSP Hardware System
C&C08 SSP.
OSP02 Lectures 2d  Analyze the general malfunction of the

C&C08-SSP system.
 Perform the troubleshooting of the C&C08-SSP
C&C08-SSP Operation and Maintenance system.

 Describe troubleshooting flow of the
OSP03 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 4d C&C08-SSP.
 Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
hardware.
C&C08-SSP Troubleshooting  Describe the hierarchy and network
architecture of AM/CM.
OSP04 Lectures, Hands-on exercise 1d
 Describe the system resource allocation, the
Target Audience
process of SM.
C&C08 SSP technical support engineer  Identify the general hardware structure of
Prerequisites C&C08 SSP.

 Describe the basic knowledge of SS7 signaling
At least one year of experience in the operation or system.
maintenance of SPC switch
 Describe the basic knowledge of SCCP, TCAP
Being familiar with computer operation and and INAP protocol.
Windows operating system
 State the application of SS7 in the IN system.
Being familiar with the basic knowledge of
Duration
telecommunication
Class Size
 Describe the basic architecture of C&C08 SSP
1015
38 Core Network OSS Training Path
38.1 iManager M2000 Training Path
iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring

Engineer Training
2days
Target audience: CN product maintenance

engineer and network monitor
iManager M2000 PRS Operation and

2days
Target audience: PRS system operator and

administrator
iManager M2000 Service Feature

Training
1day

iManager M2000 Delta Training
1day

1016
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and iManager M2000 EMS Operation and
Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer) Maintenance Training (SUN HA)
3days 3days
Network management Network management
operator operator
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN)
5days
M2000 Administrator
Target audience: M2000 system (SUN Server) operator and administrator
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and iManager M2000 EMS Operation and
Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer) Maintenance Training (HP HA)
3days 3days
Network management Network management
operator operator
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP)
5days
M2000 Administrator
Target audience: M2000 system (HP Server) operator and administrator
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training

(ATAE Cluster)
3day
s
Target audience: M2000 system (ATAE) operator and administrator
1017
39 Core Network OSS Training Courses
CN OSS Training Courses are designed as follows:

Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
iManager M2000
iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training Ⅱ 2 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN) Ⅲ 5 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP) Ⅲ 5 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Service Feature Training Ⅲ 1 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN

Ⅱ 3 4 ~ 12
SingleServer)
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP

Ⅱ 3 4 ~ 12
SingleServer)
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN

Ⅱ 3 4 ~ 12
HA)
iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP

Ⅱ 3 4 ~ 12
HA)
iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only Ⅲ 4 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000 Delta Training Ⅱ 1 4 ~ 12
iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Cluster)
1018
39.1 iManager M2000 Training Courses
39.1.1 iManager M2000 EMS Monitoring Engineer Training
Training Path
 Perform query NEs status through topology
view, NEs monitoring list.
 Understand NEs status type and meaning.
iManager M2000 System Overview
 Master setting NEs reconnection.
ONW11 0.5 d  Describe alarms and events concept and
difference, alarm severity and type, alarm
status and changing status, alarm reporting
procedure.
iManager M2000 Network Monitoring
 Perform synchronizing NE alarms manually,
Operation
querying alarms and events, setting the
ONW21 1.5 d
alarm/event template, monitoring network
status, locating alarms and events, collecting
Target Audience statistics on alarms and events.
 Perform setting the alarm/event notification.
Network monitor
 Describe performance basic concept, principle
Prerequisites
and main procedure.
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation  Perform querying performance measurement
System status, performance measurement results,
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications viewing threshold alarms, exporting
Objectives performance measurement results.
 Perform setting result query conditions.
 Describe configuration basic concept : MIT ,
be able to:
MML commands, NEs resource status.
 Describe iManager M2000 system principle
 Perform checking NEs configuration
and main function.
information and NEs status.
 Describe M2000 modules function.
Duration
 Know M2000 hardware composing and
software structure. 2 working days
 List M2000 typical Networking and hardware Class Size
Configuration.
Min 4，max 12
 Describe topology basic concept, topology
monitoring daily job.
1019
39.1.2 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (SUN)
Training Path
and methods.
 Perform NEs mediation software installation
iManager M2000 Operation System and and updating.
Database Management（SUN）  Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore
ONW30 1 d base knowledge.
 Master how to backup and restore M2000 data.
 Know the base knowledge of M2000 system
emergency maintenance.
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation
 List M2000 system emergency scene.
ONW27 4d  Master the methods and steps of M2000
Target Audience system emergency maintenance.
 Know M2000 dangerous operations.
M2000 Server maintenance engineer
 Master normal Trouble Shooting methods.
Prerequisites
 Describe Northbound interface functions in
 Master Operating system basic operations M2000 system.
 Master Sybase database basic operations  Describe Operating system 10 system
Objectives management commands.
 Describe files system structure.
 Perform system management operation.
be able to:
 Describe Sybase15 database modules.
 Describe user type in M2000 system.
 Describe Sybase15 database operation
 Master how to create, modify, delete user
commands.
information.
 Implement start and stop data process.
 Manage user group in M2000 system.
 Master how to import and export database.
 Manage user network right and operation right.
Duration
 Complete monitor user state.
 Complete M2000 system log management. 5 working days
 Master NEs status checking methods. Class Size
 Describe M2000 system software structure
Min 4，max 12
 Describe system software updating procedure
1020
39.1.3 iManager M2000 Administrator Training (HP)
Training Path
and methods.
iManager M2000 Operation System and and updating.
Database Management（HP）  Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore
ONW31 1 d base knowledge.
emergency maintenance.
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation
 List M2000 system emergency scene.
ONW27 4d  Master the methods and steps of M2000
Target Audience system emergency maintenance.
Prerequisites
 Master Linux SUSE system basic operations M2000 system.
 Master Database database basic operations  Describe Linux SUSE10 system management
Objectives commands.
 Describe files system structure.
 Perform system management operation.
be able to:
 Describe Database10g database modules.
 Describe Database10g database operation
commands.
information.
 Implement start and stop data process.
 Master how to import and export database.
 Manage user network right and operation right
Duration
 Complete monitor user state.
 Complete M2000 system log management. 5 working days
 Master NEs status checking methods. Class Size
 Describe M2000 system software structure.
Min 4，max 12
1021
39.1.4 iManager M2000 Service Feature Training
Training Path
 Describe fault report flow.
 Describe server process fault capability.
iManager M2000 Service Feature  Master how to modify fault configuration files.
 Describe the performance interface between
ONW14 1d
network entities and M2000.
Target Audience  Describe performance files process flow.
 Describe server process performance
Network monitor
capability.
Prerequisites
 Master how to modify performance
 Complete M2000 Client O&M training configuration files.
 Know basic concept and oprations about Duration
M2000 PM & FM
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 4，max 12
be able to:
 Describe fault type and fault draw in M2000
system.
1022
39.1.5 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN SingleServer)
Training Path
 Perform M2000 routine maintenance tasks.
 Describe process of setting up a physical
iManager M2000 System Solution and topology view.
Networking  Perform creating topology subnet, NEs, links.

ONW13 0.5 d  Perform managing topology view, modifying
topology object, exporting an NE information,
setting SNMP parameter.
 Describe alarm processing procedure.
iManager M2000 Client Management
 Perform managing the NE object group,
ONW22 1. 5d managing the alarm/event name group.
 Perform clearing alarms manually, setting
alarm/event auto processing, recording
iManager M2000 Server O&M（SUN
alarm/event maintenance experience.
SingleServer
 Perform managing alarm/event correlation rule,
ONW23 1d
defining an NE Alarm.
 Describe performance management main
Target Audience procedure, performance measurement
principle, performance threshold alarm
Network management operator
principle.
Prerequisites
 Performance setting performance
 Being familiar with MS Windows Operation measurement tasks, setting performance
System counters threshold, setting exporting
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications performance measurement results,
Objectives activating/deactivating a counter threshold,
activating/deactivating a performance
measurement task.
be able to:
 Know M2000 hardware and software structure.
 Describe M2000 software modules structure
 Master how to configure NEs by MML
and modules functions.
commands.
 List M2000 server typical configuration.
 Performance processing NEs configuration
 Describe M2000 server networking.
data.
 Describe M2000 SUN Single Server network
Duration
system structure, logical, hardware, software
structure. 3 working days
 List M2000 server file system composing. Class Size
 List M2000 system user type.
Min 4，max 12
 Perform powering on/powering off the M2000,
monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore.
1023
39.1.6 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP SingleServer)
Training Path

ONW22 1 .5d managing the alarm/event name group.
iManager M2000 Server O&M（HP
alarm/event maintenance experience.
SingleServer
ONW24 1d
principle.
Prerequisites
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
 Describe M2000 HP Single Server network
Duration
system structure, logical, hardware, software
structure. 3 working days
 List M2000 server file system composing. Class Size
 List M2000 system user type.
Min 4，max 12
 Perform powering on/powering off the M2000,
monitoring system status, M2000 database
management, system backup and restore.
1024
39.1.7 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (SUN HA)
Training Path

ONW22 1. 5d managing the alarm/event name group.
iManager M2000 Server O&M（SUN HA） alarm/event maintenance experience.
ONW25 1d
principle.
Prerequisites
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
 Describe M2000 SUN HA network system
Duration
structure, logical, hardware, software structure.
 List M2000 server file system composing. 3 working days
 List M2000 system user type. Class Size
 Perform powering on/powering off the M2000, Min 4，max 12

managing cluster resources, monitoring system
status, M2000 database management, system
backup and restore.
1025
39.1.8 iManager M2000 EMS Operation and Maintenance Training (HP HA)
Training Path

ONW22 1 .5d managing the alarm/event name group.
iManager M2000 Server O&M（HP HA） alarm/event maintenance experience.
ONW26 1d
principle.
Prerequisites
measurement task.
be able to:
commands.
data.
 Describe M2000 HP HA network system
Duration
structure, logical, hardware, software structure.
 List M2000 server file system composing. 3 working days
 List M2000 system user type. Class Size
 Perform powering on/powering off the M2000, Min 4，max 12

managing cluster resources, monitoring system
status, M2000 database management, system
backup and restore.
1026
39.1.9 iManager M2000 PRS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe PRS base concept.
 Know PRS system structure and principle.
Performance Report System Overview
 Know PRS system position in the network.
ONW15 0.5 d  Describe PRS function and technology
counters.
 Master how to Power On and Power Off the
Performance Report System Operation PRS, Setting the Server Parameters for the
PRS System, Managing the Clients of the PRS
ONW35 1.5 d System, Managing PRS System Logs,
Monitoring the PRS System, Managing PRS
Target Audience
Processes and Services, Managing the PRS
Network Performance analyzing and maintenance System Database, Managing Files and Disks of
engineer the PRS System.
Prerequisites  Know routine maintenance of the PRS System.

Duration
System 2 working days
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications Class Size
Objectives
Min 4，max 12
1027
39.1.10 iManager M2000 Administrator Training - Europe Only
Training Path
 Describe M2000 system software structure.
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation and methods.
ONW27 4d
and updating.
Target Audience  Describe M2000 system Backup and Restore

base knowledge.
Prerequisites
 Having several year M2000 maintenance emergency maintenance.
experience  List M2000 system emergency scene.
Objectives  Master the methods and steps of M2000
system emergency maintenance.
be able to:
M2000 system.
information.
Duration
 Manage user network right and operation right. 4 working days
 Complete monitor user state. Class Size
 Complete M2000 system log management.
Min 4，max 12
 Master NEs status checking methods.
1028
39.1.11 iManager M2000 Delta Training
Training Path
be able to:
 Describe iManager M2000 product function
iManager M2000 Delta and capacity change.
 Describe iManager M2000 product GUI
ONW19 1d
change.
Target Audience  Describe iManager M2000 product new

features.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
System
 A basic knowledge of mobile communications Min 4，max 12
Objectives
1029
39.1.12 iManager M2000V200R012 System Administration Training (ATAE

Cluster)Training Path

topology view.
iManager M2000V200R012 System Overview
- ATAE Cluster  Perform creating topology subnet, NEs, links.
 Perform managing topology view, modifying
ONW17 Lectures 0.5 d
iManager M2000V200R012 ATAE Cluster  Describe alarm processing procedure.

Server Operation and Maintenance
1d managing the alarm/event name group.

ONW29 Lectures、Hands-on Exercise
iManager M2000 Client Management alarm/event maintenance experience.
ONW22 Lectures、Hands-on Exercise 1.5 d defining an NE Alarm.
principle.
Prerequisites  Performance setting performance
measurement tasks, setting performance
Having basic knowledge in telecommunication and
counters threshold, setting exporting
mobile communication
performance measurement results,
measurement task.
be able to:
 Describe ATAE platform
 Master the basic concept and structure of ATAE
Cluster
commands.
 Master the networking and technology solution
of ATAE Cluster
data.
 Describe the system structure and basic
function of OSMU Duration
 Master the system management of OSMU
3 working days
 Master the equipment management, service
management, software management, general Class Size
maintenance OSMU
Min 6, Max 12
 Master the method to backup and restore the
different data types of ATAE Cluster
1030

Dokumen - Tips Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manualv21

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dokumen - Tips Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manualv21

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Huawei Product and Knowledge

Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department

3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs .................................................................................................. 1

Basic O/M Training) .............................................................................................................................................. 1

4.4 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ...................................................................................... 1

5.7.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training.......................................................................... 1

7.6.1 N9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training ....................................................... 1

8.14 Huawei eSpace IVS system Training Path ................................................................................................. 1

11.3 UPS Training Programs.............................................................................................................................. 1

13.3.18 GSM BSS13.0 BSS Configuration Training ....................................................................................... 1

15.2.5 WCDMA RF Optimization Training ..................................................................................................... 1

15.3.24 WCDMA RAN14.0 NodeB Training .................................................................................................... 1

19.2.7 LTE eRAN3.0 Reconfiguration Training ............................................................................................. 1

21.1.23 GSM&UMTS SingleRAN7.0 Emergency Maintenance TrainingTraining Path ................................... 2

24.9 HONET Series Training Path ..................................................................................................................... 3

25.5.9 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Commissioning Training ............................................................... 3

26.11 WDM Training Path(OSN3800A6800A) ..................................................................................................... 3

27.4.21 OptiX OSN 2000 Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................................................... 3

29.1 PS Training Courses .................................................................................................................................. 3

29.1.42 EPC Troubleshooting Training ........................................................................................................... 3

31.1.2 CSOFTX3000 (CPCI) Operation and Maintenance Training .............................................................. 7

33.1.25 MSS Common Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Practice ................................................ 7

35.2.3 iManager N2000 UMS Operation(WBT) ............................................................................................ 7

1 Huawei Training&Certification Service

1.1 ICT Convergence Training&Certification Solution

1.2 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei

1.3 Learning Path

For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

XXX Product Basic Operation

XXX Product Operation and

Technology Technical Fundamental

1.4 Training Instructors

HCIE-RS Huawei Certified Internetwork

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP

Huawei Routing and

IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training

Huawei VRP System

Advanced Technology Training

Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN Enterprise MPLS VPN

Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Enterprise Network Design NE Routers Installation and Advanced Technology

Enterprise Campus Network NE Routers Basic Operation

Data Center Network Design NE Routers Operation and

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Fast-Track

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Enterprise Network Design AR G3 Routers Installation and Advanced Technology

Enterprise Campus Network AR G3 Routers Basic Operation

Data Center Network Design AR G3 Routers Operation and

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Enterprise Network Design AR Series Industrial Routers Advanced Technology

Enterprise Campus Network

Data Center Network Design

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Technology IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Huawei AR G3 Voice System Huawei AR G3 Voice System Audio Record Technology

Huawei AR G3 Voice System Basic Session Border Controller

Huawei AR G3 Voice System Operation

Fundamental of VoIP Technology